09_manual
TRANSCRIPT
Manual 04/2004 Edition
sinumerik
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components
04.2004 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Operator Components
Manual
Operator Panels
OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1
OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2
OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3
OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4
TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5
TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6
OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7
OP 015A Operator Panel Front 8
15”TFT OP (incl.VLR) 9
15”TFT OP (excl.VLR) 10
Direct Control Key Submodule 11
PCU 20 12
PCU 50 13
PCU 70 14
Distributed Installation (VL) 15
Distributed installation (TCU) 16
Handheld Units
Handheld Terminal HT 6 17
Handheld Unit/Distributor Box 18
Mini Handheld Unit 19
Machine Control Panels
Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20
Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21
Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22
Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23
Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24
MPI Interface for Customer OP 25
19” Machine Control Panel 26
Keyboards
Standard PC Keyboard MF–II 27
CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C 28
CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29
CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S 30
Storage Devices
Floppy Disk Drive 3.5” 31
Floppy Disk Drive 3.5” (USB) 32
Heat Dissipation 33
Connection Conditions 34
Appendix
SINUMERIK Documentation
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the “Remarks” column.
Status code in the “Remarks” column:
A New documentation.. . . . . B Unrevised reprint with new order no.. . . . . C Revised edition with new status. . . . . .
If factual changes have been made on the page in relation to the same softwareversion, this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page.
Edition Order No. Remarks06.94 6FC5 297-0AA50-0BP0 A02.95 6FC5 297-2AA50-0BP0 C04.95 6FC5 297-2AA50-0BP1 C09.95 6FC5 297-3AA01-0BP0 Description of differences03.96 6FC5 297-3AA50-0BP0 C08.97 6FC5 297-4AA50-0BP0 C12.97 6FC5 297-4AA50-0BP1 C12.98 6FC5 297-5AA50-0BP0 C08.99 6FC5 297-5AA50-0BP1 C04.00 6FC5 297-5AA50-0BP2 C10.00 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP0 C09.01 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP1 C11.02 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP2 C06.03 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP3 C11.03 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP3 C04.04 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0 C
This book is part of the documentation on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)Edition Order No. Remarks09.04 6FC5 298-7CA00-0BG1 C
TrademarksSIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET, SIROTEC, SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE are trademarks ofSiemens. Other product names used in this documentation may be trademarks which, if used by third par-ties, could infringe the rights of their owners.
Further information is available on the Internet under:http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
This publication was produced with Interleaf V7.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or itscontents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenderswill be liable for damages. All rights, including those created by patentgrant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
Siemens AG, 1994–2004. All rights reserved
Other functions not described in this documentation might beexecutable in the control. However, no claim can be made regardingthe availability of these functions when the equipment is first suppliedor for service cases.
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond tothe hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences mightexist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completelyidentical. The information contained in this document is, however,reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in thenext edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.
Subject to changes without prior notice
Siemens AktiengesellschaftOrder No. 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0Printed in Germany
3ls
v Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Preface
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized on three levels:
General documentation
User documentation
Manufacturer/service documentation.
For more detailed information on SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC publicationsand other publications covering all SINUMERIK controls, please contact yourlocal Siemens office.
If you have queries regarding the control system, please contact the followinghotline:
A&D Technical Support Phone: ++49-(0)180-5050-222Fax: ++49-(0)180-5050-223Email: [email protected]
If you have queries regarding documentation (suggestions, corrections), pleasesend a fax to the following fax address:
Fax: ++49-(0)9131-98-2176Email: [email protected]
Fax form: See the feedback page at the end of the document
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
The products listed in this manual are marketed and sold in accordance with amanagement system certified by DQS. DQS certifies according to:
DIN EN ISO 9001: Quality management
DIN EN ISO 14001: Environmental management
Improved-performance variants
SINUMERIK 840D powerline and
SINUMERIK 840DE powerline
will be available from 09.2001 onwards. For a list of available powerlinemodules, please refer to Section 1.1 of the Hardware Description /PHD/.
Improved-performance variants
SINUMERIK 810D powerline and
SINUMERIK 810DE powerline
will be available from 12.2001 onwards. For a list of available powerlinemodules, please refer to Section 1.1 of the Hardware Description /PHC/.
Notes for thereader
Hotline
Internet addressfor SINUMERIK
Quality assurance
SINUMERIK 840Dpowerline
SINUMERIK 810Dpowerline
04.04
vi Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Configuring engineers Electricians and fitters Servicing and operating personnel
The information contained in this manual explains how to install the operatorcomponents for the 840D numerical controls and describes how to maintain andservice them.
This manual contains information which you should observe in order to ensureyour own personal safety, as well to avoid material damage. Information shownwith a warning triangle indicates a risk of personal injury. Explanation of sym-bols used:
Danger
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result indeath or serious injury or in substantial property damage.
Warning
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result indeath or serious injury or in substantial property damage.
Caution
Used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situationwhich, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property dam-age.
Caution
Used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situationwhich, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
Notice
Used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if notavoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.
Note
Note refers to an important item of information about the product, handling ofthe product or part of the documentation which is particularly relevant in thecurrent context.
Target readership?
Content of thismanual
Safety notices
Preface
04.04
vii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Machine Manufacturer
This symbol appears in this documentation whenever the machine manufac-turer can influence or modify the described functional behavior. Please observethe information provided by the machine manufacturer.
To safeguard your own personal safety as well as protect the product describedand all connected equipment and machines against damage, please read andobserve the following warnings and safety information.
Warning
Operational electrical equipment has parts and components which are athazardous voltage levels.
Allowing unqualified persons access to the equipment/system or failure toheed the safety information could result in serious physical injury or substantialproperty damage. Only properly qualified personnel who have been trained toerect, install, start up or operate the product should be allowed to work on theequipment/system.
Should it be necessary to test or take measurements on live equipment, thenthe specifications and procedures defined in Accident Prevention RegulationVBG 4.0 must be adhered to, in particular § 8 “Permissible deviations whenworking on live components”. Suitable electric tools must be used.
Warning
Repairs to equipment supplied by Siemens must always be carried out bySIEMENS after-sales service personnel or by repair centers authorizedby SIEMENS. Parts or components must always be replaced by parts orcomponents specified in the spare parts list.
Always disconnect the power supply before you open the unit.
EMERGENCY STOP devices in compliance with EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE0113) must remain operative in all operating modes of the automation de-vice. Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP device must not result in any un-controlled or undefined system restart.
Wherever faults in the automation device have the potential to cause sub-stantial material damage or even human injury, i.e. they can present a dan-ger, additional external precautions must be taken or devices providedwhich will guarantee or enforce a safe operating state in the event of a fault(e.g. through independent limit value switches, mech. interlocks, etc.).
Caution
Connecting and signal leads must be installed such that inductive and ca-pacitive interference cannot impair automation functions.
Warnings andsafety information
Preface
04.04
viii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Components which can be destroyed by ElectroStatic Discharge
Important
Handling ESDS boards:
When handling components which can be destroyed by electrostatic di-scharge, it must be ensured that personnel, the workstation and packagingare well grounded.
As a general rule, electronic boards should only be touched when absolu-tely necessary. Never hold PCBs in such a way that you touch the modulepins or printed conductors.
You may only touch ESDS components if
– you are continuously grounded via an ESDS bracelet,
– you are wearing ESDS shoes or ESDS shoe grounding strips in con-junction with an ESDS floor surface.
Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces (desk with ESDS sur-face, conductive ESDS foam rubber, ESDS packing bag, ESDS transportcontainers).
Boards may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or televisionsets (a minimum of 10 cm should be kept between the board and thescreen).
Boards may not be brought into contact with materials which can be char-ged and are highly insulating, e.g. plastic foils, insulating desktops, articlesof clothing manufactured from man-made fibers.
Measurements may be taken on the boards only if
– the measuring equipment is grounded (e.g. via the protective conductor)or
– in the case of floating measuring instruments, the probe is briefly dis-charged before a measurement is taken (e.g. through contact with barecontrol housing).
The unit may be used only for the applications described in the catalog, andonly in combination with the equipment and components recommended andapproved by SIEMENS (e.g. SINUMERIK 840D/FM-NC).
ESDS instructions
Proper use
Preface
ix Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Contents
Preface v. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Overview 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Operating and display elements 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 View 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Keyboard 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Interfaces 1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Installation 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Preparation for mounting 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 Softkey labeling 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.3 Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.4 Mounting 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Technical data 1-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 Spare parts 1-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.1 Spare parts list 1-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Replacing spare parts 1-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Operator interface 2-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Interfaces 2-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Installation 2-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Mounting 2-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Mounting the PCU 2-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Technical data 2-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Spare parts 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Spare parts list 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.2 Replacing spare parts 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 View 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Description of the keyboard 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Interfaces 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Installation 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Preparation for mounting 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 Mounting 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Technical data 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Spare parts 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Changing key covers of short-stroke keys 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
04.04
x Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front 4-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Overview 4-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 View 4-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Description of the keyboard 4-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Interfaces 4-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Installation 4-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU 4-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Preparing for mounting 4-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Mounting 4-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 Softkey labeling 4-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 Technical data 4-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 Spare parts/accessories 4-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 Spare parts list 4-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 Replacing spare parts 4-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 View 5-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Interfaces 5-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Arrangement 5-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Installation 5-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Assembling the TP 012 and PCU 5-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Preparing for mounting 5-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Mounting 5-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 Touch screen calibration 5-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Technical data 5-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Spare parts/accessories 5-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Spare parts list 5-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2 Replacing spare parts 5-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 View 6-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Description of the keyboard 6-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Interfaces 6-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Installation 6-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Assembling TP 015A and PCU 6-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 Mounting 6-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 Touch screen calibration 6-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Softkey labeling 6-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 Technical data 6-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 Spare parts 6-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.1 Spare parts list 6-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.2 Replacing spare parts 6-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 Example when calculating the cooling 6-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
04.04
xi Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front 7-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Operator interface 7-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Interfaces 7-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 Arrangement 7-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.2 Assignments 7-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Installation 7-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 Assembling OP 015 and PCU 50 7-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2 Preparation for mounting 7-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.3 Mounting 7-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Technical data 7-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Spare parts/accessories 7-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.1 Spare parts list 7-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.2 Replacing spare parts 7-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 OP 015A Operator Panel Front 8-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 View 8-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Description of the keyboard 8-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Interfaces 8-105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 Installation 8-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 Assembling OP 015A and PCU 50 8-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2 Preparing for mounting 8-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.3 Mounting 8-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 Softkey labeling 8-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6 Technical data 8-110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7 Spare parts 8-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.1 Spare parts list 8-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.2 Spare part replacement 8-112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm Wide, incl. Videolink Receiver 9-113. . . . . . . . .
9.1 Overview 9-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 System features 9-115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Description of functions 9-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.1 Overview of function blocks 9-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.2 Operator panel front 9-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.3 Machine control panel for turning and milling 9-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.4 Videolink transmitter 9-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.5 Cable 9-119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 Interfaces 9-120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1 Hardware interfaces – overview 9-120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2 Interface assignment for operator panel front 9-121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.3 Interface assignment for QWERTY keyboard 9-123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.4 Interface assignment for MCP 9-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.5 Interface assignment for videolink transmitter 9-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.6 Internal status displays (LEDs) 9-131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.7 Software interfaces 9-132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 Mechanical design 9-134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
04.04
xii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.5.1 Operator panel front 9-134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.2 MCP 9-135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.3 Videolink transmitter 9-139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6 Installation 9-140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.1 Operator panel front 9-140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.2 Machine control panel 9-142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.3 Videolink transmitter 9-143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7 Technical data 9-147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8 Spare parts 9-148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.9 Heat dissipation 9-152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver 10-153. . . . .
10.1 Overview 10-154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 System features 10-155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 Description 10-156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 Operator panel front 10-156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.2 Machine control panel for turning and milling 10-156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.3 Cable 10-157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4 Interfaces 10-158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.1 Hardware interfaces – overview 10-158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.2 Interface assignment for operator panel front 10-158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.3 Interface assignments for machine control panel 10-158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.4 Key layout 10-161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5 Mechanical design 10-162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.1 Operator panel front 10-162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.2 Machine control panel 10-164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6 Installation 10-169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7 Technical data 10-172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel 10-174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.9 Heat dissipation 10-178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11-179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 Interfaces 11-180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 Mounting 11-182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 Combination with OP 012 11-182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.2 Combination with OP 015A 11-186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.3 Combination with TP 015A 11-188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 PCU 20 12-191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 View 12-192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Interfaces and connections 12-193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.1 Interfaces on right side of casing 12-193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.2 Interfaces on left side of casing 12-194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.3 Mounting bracket on underside of casing 12-195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.4 Pin assignments 12-196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 Mounting 12-197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
04.04
xiii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
12.3.1 Assembly with operator panel front and installation 12-197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3.2 Preparing for operation 12-198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 Technical data 12-199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 Accessories 12-199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 PCU 50 13-201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1 Overview 13-201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2 View 13-203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3 Interfaces and connections 13-204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.1 Interfaces on right side of casing 13-204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.2 Interfaces on left side of casing 13-205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.3 Ports on bottom side of casing 13-205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.4 Casing rear side 13-205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4 Mounting 13-206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.1 Mounting preparation 13-206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.2 Notes on installation 13-207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5 Startup 13-208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.1 Booting 13-208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.2 Touch screen calibration 13-212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.3 Working with PC cards 13-215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6 Technical data 13-216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7 Spare parts 13-217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.1 Replacing the hard disk 13-217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.2 Changing the power supply 13-218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.3 Changing the device fan 13-220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.4 Changing the battery 13-221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8 Accessories 13-223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.1 Mounting bracket 13-223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.2 Memory expansion 13-223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.3 Expansion boards 13-225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 PCU 70 14-229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1 View 14-230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2 Interfaces and connections 14-231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.1 Interfaces on right side of casing 14-231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.2 Interfaces on left side of casing 14-232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.3 Ports on bottom side of casing 14-232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.4 Casing rear side 14-233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.5 Pin assignments 14-233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3 Start-up 14-234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.1 Mounting and installation 14-234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.2 Notes on installation 14-234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.3 Preparing for operation 14-235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.4 Booting 14-236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.5 Working with PC cards 14-236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4 Technical data 14-237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.5 Spare parts 14-238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
04.04
xiv Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
14.6 Accessories 14-238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.1 External floppy disk drive 14-238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.2 Memory expansion 14-239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.3 Expansion boards 14-239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.7 System information 14-239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15-241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1 Overview 15-243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1 Configurations 15-243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.2 View 15-245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2 Description of components 15-246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.1 Videolink receiver 15-246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.2 Cable 15-247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.3 Videolink transmitter 15-248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3 Interfaces 15-249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1 Hardware interfaces – overview 15-249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2 Interface pin assignment for videolink transmitter 15-249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.3 Interface assignment for video link receiver 15-250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.4 Operating and monitoring devices 15-251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.1 Videolink transmitter 15-251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.2 Videolink receiver 15-252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.3 Operator panel interlock 15-252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU 15-253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.1 Flat mounting 15-253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.2 Upright mounting 15-257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.3 Central mounting on operator panel front 15-259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front 15-260. . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.7 Technical data 15-262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16-265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1 Overview 16-265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2 Configurations 16-268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3 Interfaces 16-269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.1 Overview 16-269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.2 Description of interfaces 16-269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front 16-270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5 Technical data 16-272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6 Accessories 16-273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17-275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.1 Overview and function blocks 17-275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2 User interface and interfaces 17-277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.1 User interface 17-277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.2 Interfaces 17-279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3 Distribution box 17-283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
04.04
xv Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
17.3.1 Distribution box for 3-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01) 17-283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3.2 Distribution box for 4-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2006-1BH01) 17-286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation 17-290. . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.5 Configuring the HT 6, setting interface parameters 17-294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.1 Interface signals of HT 6 17-294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.2 Standard configuration of the HT 6 (without MCP) 17-296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.6 Technical data 17-297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.7 Spare parts and accessories 17-298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7.1 Spare parts 17-298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7.2 Accessories 17-302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18-305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.1 Handheld unit B-MPI 18-305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box 18-307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation 18-308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.4 Operating more than one HHU 18-311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.5 HHU control elements and interface 18-312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.6 Technical data for HHU 18-314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.7 Settings in the HHU 18-315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters 18-317. . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8.1 Interface signals for handheld unit 18-318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8.2 Example signal chart 18-322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9 Distributor box for handheld unit 18-325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.10 Spare parts 18-329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 Mini Handheld Unit 19-331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.1 Dimensions and control elements 19-331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1.1 General 19-332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1.2 Description of control elements 19-332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2 Circuit diagram and sample connection 19-333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3 Coding of axis selection switch 19-334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4 Configuration 19-334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.5 Connections 19-335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.6 Technical data 19-336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.7 Spare parts 19-337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20-339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.1 Brief description 20-339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2 Control elements and interfaces 20-340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2.1 Control elements on front 20-340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2.2 Display and operating elements at rear 20-342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
04.04
xvi Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
20.2.3 Interfaces 20-342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.3 Mounting, connection and settings 20-344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.1 Mounting 20-345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.2 Connections 20-345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.3 Settings 20-346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.4 Technical data 20-348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.5 Spare parts and accessories 20-349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21-351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.1 Brief description 21-351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2 Control elements and interfaces 21-352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.1 Operating elements front face 21-352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.2 Operating and display elements to rear 21-353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.3 Interfaces 21-354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.3 Mounting and settings 21-357. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3.1 Mounting 21-358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3.2 Settings via DIP switch S3 21-359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.4 Technical data 21-361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.5 Spare parts and accessories 21-362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5.1 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels 21-363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 21-369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.1 Prerequisites 21-369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.2 Functions of the machine control panel 21-370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.3 Configuring the DP slave MCP 21-371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.4 Linking to the basic PLC and user program 21-374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.5 Input/output image 21-377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22-381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.1 Brief description 22-381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.2 Control elements and interfaces 22-382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2.1 Operating elements front face 22-382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2.2 Operating and display elements to rear 22-383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2.3 Interfaces 22-383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.3 Mounting and settings 22-384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3.1 Mounting 22-385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3.2 Settings via DIP switch S3 22-386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.4 Technical data 22-388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.5 Spare parts and accessories 22-389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5.1 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels 22-390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 22-394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6.1 Prerequisites 22-394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6.2 Functions of the machine control panel 22-395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6.3 Configuring the DP slave MCP 22-396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6.4 Linking to the basic PLC and user program 22-399. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6.5 Input/output image 22-402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
04.04
xvii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23-405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.1 Control elements 23-406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.2 Interfaces 23-407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.3 Dimension drawing and panel cutout 23-413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.4 Technical data 23-414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.5 Spare parts and accessories 23-415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1 System description 24-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.1 Introduction 24-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.2 Interfaces and monitoring 24-418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.3 Operator panel front interface 24-419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.2 Function blocks 24-420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3 Block diagrams 24-421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.4 Operating elements 24-423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.5 Interfaces 24-425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5.1 Overview 24-425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5.2 PP 012 individual wiring 24-427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5.3 Individual wiring PCB input/output 24-434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.6 Connection for handheld units 24-438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.1 Functional reliability of EMERGENCY STOP and enabling circuits 24-438. . 24.6.2 Two-channel enabling function 24-439. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.7 Dimension drawings and mounting instructions 24-442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.8 Installation and mounting 24-443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.9 Labeling control elements 24-444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.10 PP 012 expansion 24-446. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A 24-448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.11.1 Inputs/outputs 24-448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.11.2 Key assignment within matrix 24-449. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.12 Circuits and wiring 24-451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.13 Technical data 24-456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.13.1 PP 012 24-456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.13.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring 24-457. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.14 PLC interface 24-460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.15 Initialization 24-462. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.16 Example of parameter settings for communication SIMATIC S7 / PP 012 24-466. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.17 Service information 24-468. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.18 Configuration 24-470. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.18.1 Configurer 24-470. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.18.2 Project-specific components 24-472. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.18.3 Rating plates 24-473. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
04.04
xviii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel 25-475. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.1 Interfaces 25-475. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.2 Settings 25-480. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.3 Technical data 25-482. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26 19” Machine Control Panel 26-483. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.1 Function blocks 26-483. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.2 Block diagram 26-484. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.3 Control elements and interfaces 26-485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3.1 Control elements 26-485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3.2 Interfaces 26-487. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.4 Mounting, connection and settings of machine control panel 26-489. . . . . . . 26.4.1 Mounting 26-490. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4.2 Connections 26-491. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4.3 Machine control panel settings 26-492. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.5 Setting the interface parameters 26-494. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.6 Technical data 26-495. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.7 Spare parts 26-496. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.7.1 Slide-in label film 26-497. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27 Standard PC Keyboard MF-II 27-499. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C 28-501. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.1 Brief description 28-501. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.2 Dimension drawings 28-502. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.3 Control elements and interfaces 28-503. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.3.1 Control elements 28-503. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.3.2 Interfaces 28-505. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.4 Mounting 28-506. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.5 Spare parts and accessories 28-507. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.6 Technical data 28-508. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29-509. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.1 Brief description 29-509. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.2 Dimension drawings 29-510. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.3 Control elements and interfaces 29-511. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.3.1 Control elements 29-511. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.3.2 Interfaces 29-511. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.4 Mounting 29-512. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.5 Technical data 29-514. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.6 Spare parts and accessories 29-515. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30 CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S 30-517. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1 Interfaces 30-517. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
04.04
xix Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
30.2 Mounting instructions, dimension drawing and panel cutout 30-518. . . . . . . .
30.3 Technical data 30-519. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.4 Spare parts and accessories 30-520. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive 31-521. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32-525. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.1 Notes about operation 32-526. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.1 Floppy disk drive (order no. 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1) 32-526. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.2 Floppy disk drive (Order No. 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2) 32-526. . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.2 Description 32-528. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.1 Dimension drawings 32-528. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.2 Hardware interface 32-529. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.3 Software interface 32-529. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.4 Installation instructions 32-530. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.3 Technical data 32-532. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33 Heat Dissipation 33-535. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34 Connection Conditions 34-539. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.1 Secondary electrical conditions 34-539. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 34-540. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.2 Power supply 34-541. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.3 Protective separation acc. to EN 50178 34-542. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.4 Grounding concept 34-544. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.5 RI suppression measures 34-545. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.6 Pin assignment for interfaces 34-547. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.7 Handling membrane connectors 34-554. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions 34-555. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.1 Transport and storage conditions 34-555. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.2 Operating conditions 34-557. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.3 MPI/OPI network rules 34-558. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Abbreviations A-561. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B References B-565. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Index Index-581. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
04.04
xx Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Contents
Notes
1-21 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
OP 010 Operator Panel Front
1.1 Overview
The SINUMERIK OP 010 operator panel front with 10.4” TFT color display witha resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) features a 62-key membrane keypadwith 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys that has been optimized for pro-gramming subroutines.
Combined with a SINUMERIK PCU, the SINUMERIK OP 010 can be used tocreate a low-cost operator panel.
Mounting is from the rear using special clamps that are included in the scope ofdelivery.
The description below applies to the OP 010 operator panel front:order number 6FC 5203-0AF00-0AA1
19” mounting format, 7 HE (height units)
Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm
Compact mounting depth (e.g. OP 010 with PCU 50: 108 mm + 10 mm ven-tilation clearance, measured from surface of mounting panel:)
10.4” slimline screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels (TFT)
Membrane keyboard with alpha, numerical, cursor, control and hotkey key-groups
Softkeys: 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys
Shift key for switching to the second key level(not for switching case, uppercase characters only)
Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature
USB interface at the front
IP65 degree of protection
Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear
Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see “DistributedInstallation with Video Link Receiver”)
External floppy disk drive can be connected via PCU.
Validity
Features
1
04.041.2 Operating and display elements
1-22 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1.2 Operating and display elements
1.2.1 View
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *) Alpha key group Numerical key group
Cursor keygroup
Controlkeygroup
USBfrontinterface
Area switchoverEtc. keyMachine areaRecall
Sof
tkey
s
*) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed
Hotkeygroup
Softkeys
Fig. 1-1 Front view of OP 010 operator panel front
1.2.2 Keyboard
Fig. 1-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of differentkey groups:
The Alpha key group contains the letters A, ..., Z on two levels arranged inaccordance with programming requirements.
The numerical key group contains the digits 0 ... 9, the -, /,=, + charactersand the decimal point.
The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen.
The control key group includes special functions.
The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas.
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
04.041.2 Operating and display elements
1-23 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The key functions are summarized in the following list:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
Esc End
F11 Backspace
F12 Tab
Space–––(only intended for internalkeyboard switchover)
Home Ctrl key
Page up Alt key
Page down Delete
Cursor up Insert
Cursor left Enter
Cursor right F9
Cursor down F10
5 (in numerical key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z
<Shift> F9 <Shift> F10
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
04.041.3 Interfaces
1-24 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1.3 Interfaces
The OP 010 operator panel front provides the following interfaces:
USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. 1-1).
Note
When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use.
Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.
Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below):
I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable):All signals which are used, in addition to the display interface, for the con-nection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages).
Display cable K2.
PCU 50main board
I/O USBcable K1
Display cable K2
OP 010
Direct controlkeyinterfaceX11
PCU 50
Connection X14 for backlight
Keyboardcontroller
Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1
InterfaceX12(reserved)
Cable clampfor connectionto direct controlkey submodule
Fig. 1-2 OP 010 – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections
See “Connection Conditions”
Front side
Rear side
Pin assignment
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
04.041.4 Installation
1-25 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1.4 Installation
1.4.1 Preparation for mounting
Table 1-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below)
PCU typeused
Width(mm)
Height(mm)
Depth + clearance (mm)measured from the mounting panel surface
PCU 50450 290
100 + 10
PCU 70450 290
140 + 10
Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010, holes or screw holes are notneeded.
This retaining method also affords degree of protection IP65 (but only in con-junction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted).
450 +1
290
+1
1.5 min to 6 max
112.5 77.75* * 112.5*77.75*
112.
5*56
.25*
5
Sealing areaMounting panel
Setscrews
Tensionjacks
*) Dimensions for tension jack pressure points
Fig. 1-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010 operator panel front
1.4.2 Softkey labeling
The vertical and horizontal softkey bars can be assigned user-specific func-tions. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys.
Blank labels are already installed on delivery (see Subsection 1.4.3).
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
04.041.4 Installation
1-26 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
To make the labels, DIN-A4 filmis available (Order No., see Section 1.6). Pro-ceed as follows:
1. Letter the dull side of the film using a laser printer.
2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines.
3. Slide the labels from the rear of the operator panel front into the slots pro-vided (see Fig. 1-6).
1.4.3 Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU
When a combination of OP 010 and PCU (or video link receiver, see “VideoLink”) is to be used, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installation (Sub-section 1.4.4).
Proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Subsection “Assembling OP 012and PCU 50”.
4. Undo the shipping lock for the hard disk, otherwise the system will not boot.
1.4.4 Mounting
1. Insert the assembled components OP 010 and PCU from the front into thepanel cutout (see Fig. 1-3).
2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the sixtension jacks (see Fig. 1-3) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 –0.5 Nm).
Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so thatthe unit is ventilated sufficiently (see diagram “Mounting the PCU to the OP 012operator panel front” in Chapter “OP 012”).
For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU chapters andChapter “Heat Dissipation”.
Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.
Notice
This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, Videolinkreceiver, ...).
Screen saverCaution
If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.
To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide
/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced
Making the labels
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
04.041.5 Technical data
1-27 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1.5 Technical dataTable 1-2 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front side IP65 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Power supply (via I/OUSB cable and display cable)
Display Backlightinverter
Logic/USB (with/without load)
VoltageCurrent (typ./max. mA; appr.)
5 V +/– 5%280 / 380
12 V +/–10%750 / 1000
5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1000
Power consumption Typical, approx. 10 W Maximum approx. 16 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 483 mmHeight: 310 mmDepth: 30 mm
Mounting depth: 20 mmincl. PCU 50: 100 mm *)incl. PCU 70: 140 mm *)
Weight approx. 5 kg
Tightening torques, max.Tension jack
screws: 0.5 NmM3 screws:
0.8 NmM4 screws: 1.8
Nm
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
Display
Size / resolution 10.4” / 640 x 480 pixels
MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)
*) Plus 10 mm clearance
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
04.041.6 Spare parts
1-28 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1.6 Spare parts
1.6.1 Spare parts list
Spare parts for the OP 010 are as follows (see diagram below):
Component Order number Remarks
Operator panel frontwithout LCD unit
6FC5248-0AF00-0AA0
Sealing caps for USBconnection
6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10
Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6
Film DIN A4 6FC5248-0AF07-0AA0For slide-in softkey labelsSet of 3
Keyboard controller
LCD unit
Backlight withbacklightinverter
Cap for the USB port
Display holder
Front panel
Fig. 1-4 Spare parts for the OP 010 operator panel front
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
04.041.6 Spare parts
1-29 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
5
214.5
38.7
68
11
26
17
41.3
41.5
9.621.3
9.621.3
8.8
8.2
9.519
8.5
0.6
15P
art 1
Par
t 2
Par
t 3
Par
t 4
Par
t 5
Par
t 6
Center of the key
Slide-in labels
Fig. 1-5 Dimensions for DIN A4 blank film
1.6.2 Replacing spare parts
Caution
Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger thatsensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described inthe following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.
When the front plate is replaced, the existing LCD unit and keyboard controllercan be reused and are therefore removed and installed again after the frontpanel has been changed.
Note
We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the controlparameters that have been programmed-in are not lost.
Procedure:
1. Put the OP 010 face down on a flat, soft surface and loosen the 12 casingscrews (see figure below).
Operator panelfront
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
04.041.6 Spare parts
1-30 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Cover plate forconnectionsKeyboard controller
Displaycable K2 2)
IO/USBcable K1 2)
2) Cable shown folded together
Top
4) Slit for softkey labeling strips
Width = 483
Hei
ght =
310
1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs
1)1)
1) 1)
Displaysupport plate
3)
3) 3)3)
3)
3) 3) 3)
3)
3)
3)
3) Enclosure screws
4)
3)
4)4)
4)
Cableclamp
Fig. 1-6 OP 010 rear side
2. Remove the softkey labeling strips and the cover plate.
3. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see Fig.1-7): Backlight (base X14) and I/O USB cable K1.
4. Keep the display plate with the display.In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of the mouse and USBinterface become visible.
Membrane connectorfor connecting thekeyboard of theoperator panel front
Keyboard controller
Direct control keyconnection X11
USB interface
Connection X4for mouse
Connection X14 forbacklighting
Connection X1for I/O USB cable K1
Connection X12(reserved)
Fig. 1-7 Changing the operator panel front
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
04.041.6 Spare parts
1-31 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface.
6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front key-board from the sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure).
7. Loosen the retaining screws from the keyboard controller.
8. Lift USB interface and keyboard controller off the front plate. The intercon-nections may remain plugged.
9. Install these components in the new operator panel front in reverse order(see note for procedure).
Note
– Releasing and connecting the membrane connector are described in the“Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Handling membraneconnectors”.
– When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Subsection“Technical data”).
The procedure for replacement is described in Section 3.7.
Film labels
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
04.041.6 Spare parts
1-32 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front
Notes
2-33 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
OP 010S Operator Panel Front
The description below applies to the OP 010S operator panel front(order number 6FC5203-0AF04-0AA0)
The operator panel front OP 010S (successor to OP 032S) described in thefollowing is characterized by:
Mounting dimensions 310 x 330 mm
Panel cutout (W x H): 285 x 304 mm
Compact mounting depth (example: OP 010S with PCU 50; calculated fromsurface of mounting panel: 120 mm + 10 mm ventilation clearance)
10.4” TFT slimline screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels
Mechanical keys:
– 8 horizontal soft keys
– 8 vertical softkeys
– Four control keys
Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature
USB interface at the front
Degree of protection: IP54
Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear
Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter “Distrib-uted Installation”) and the KB 310C keyboard or
External floppy disk drive can be connected via PCU.
Validity
Features
2
04.042.1 Operator interface
2-34 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
2.1 Operator interface
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *)
USB frontinterface
Area switchoverEtc. key
Softkeys
Machine area
Recall
Sof
tkey
s*) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed
Fig. 2-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 010S
Fig. 2-1 shows the user interface of the OP 010S:
The 10.4-inch display
The USB front interface
Eight vertical and eight horizontal softkeys
Four control keys with the following functions:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
<Shift> F10 F9
<Shift> F9 F10
2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front
04.042.2 Interfaces
2-35 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
2.2 Interfaces
The OP 010S operator panel front provides the following interfaces:
USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. 2-1).
Note
When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use.
Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.
Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (Fig. 2-2):
I/O USB cable K1: All signals which are used, in addition to the display inter-face, for the connection of operator panel fronts.
Display cable K2.
PCU 50main board
I/O USBcable K1
Displaycable K2
PCU 50
OP 010S
Fig. 2-2 OP 010S – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections
See “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secondary Electrical Condi-tions”
Front side
Rear side
Pin assignment
2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front
04.042.3 Installation
2-36 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
2.3 Installation
When you are using a combination of OP 010S and PCU, it is advisable toinstall the OP 010S in the assembly panel first and then mount the PCU on theOP 010S.
2.3.1 Mounting
Table 2-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below)
PCU typeused
Width(mm)
Height(mm)
Depth + clearance (mm)measured from the mounting panel surface
PCU 50285 304
120 + 10
PCU 70285 304
160 + 10
Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010S, holes or screw holes are notneeded.
In addition, this type of fastening affords degree of protection IP 54 (but only inconjunction with a circular seal and plugged protective cap on the USB inter-face).
Proceed as follows:
1. Insert the OP 010S in the panel cutout from the front.
112 ± 0.5
± 156
±1
1511
2±
0.5
285+1
304
+1
13± 1
13±
1
1.5
min
– 6
max
Pressure points
Sealing area
Tension jacks with setscrews
In the sealing area: Rz120
for tension jacks
Fig. 2-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010S operator panel front
2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front
04.042.3 Installation
2-37 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
2. Fix it in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks (seeFig. 2-3) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 – 0.5 Nm).
2.3.2 Mounting the PCU
Note
The PCU must be mounted as illustrated in the Fig. 13-1 in Chapter “PCU 50”,i.e. any mounting brackets used must be removed.
Cover plate forconnectionsKeyboard controller
Displaycable K2
I/O USBcable K1
Top
330
1) Casing screws M32) Casing screws M4 for PCU mounting (on the side)
Casingcover plate
1)2) 2)
2)
310
2)
1)
1)
1)
1)1)
1)
1)
1)
1) 1) 1)
Fig. 2-4 Rear side of operator panel front with arrangement of interfaces and mounting screws
1. Position the PCU at approximate right angles to the OP 010S (see Fig. 2-2).
2. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP 010S into the correspond-ing mating pieces behind the opening in the PCU casing (see Fig. 2-2). Make sure that the connectors lock in and the locks are closed.
3. Swing the PCU onto the OP 010S.
4. Using the four M3 and four M4 screws supplied with the OP 010S, attachthe PCU to the side of the OP 010S. Torques M3: 0.8 Nm, M4: 1.8 Nm.
Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so thatthe unit is sufficiently ventilated (refer to Fig. 2-5).
For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU chapters andChapter “Heat Dissipation”.
2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front
04.042.3 Installation
2-38 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
310
10
Clearance for cables and ventilation
PCU 50
10±0
.5
±0.5
35
+3
120
267 ±0.5 ±122
±0.3
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Additional clearance forconnection cable (for 840Di)
297
100
100
160
±0.5
330
±0.3
OP 010S
PC
U 5
0
OP
010
S
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 2-5 Mounting the PCU 50 to the OP 010S operator panel front with clearances
Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.
Notice
This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, Videolinkreceiver, ...).
Screen saverCaution
If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.
To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide
/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced
2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front
04.042.4 Technical data
2-39 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
2.4 Technical data
Table 2-2 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front panel IP54 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE; cULus
Electrical data (without PCU)
Power supply (via I/OUSB cable and display cable)
Display Backlightinverter
Logic/USB (with/without load)
VoltageCurrent (typ./max. mA; app.)
5 V +/–5 %420 / 600
12 V +/–10 %900 / 1050
5.2 V +/–2 %350 /1000
Power consumption Typical, approx. 10 W Maximum approx. 16 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 310 mmHeight: 330 mmDepth: 45 mm
Mounting depth: 35 mmincl. PCU 50: 120 mmincl. PCU 70: 165 mm
Weight approx. 5.5 kg
Tightening torques, max.Tension jack
screws: 0.5 NmM3 screws:
0.8 NmM4 screws: 1.8
Nm
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–25 ... 55 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % in 1 min
Display
Size 10.4” TFT
Resolution 640 x 480 pixels
MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)
2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front
04.042.5 Spare parts
2-40 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
2.5 Spare parts
2.5.1 Spare parts list
Spare parts for the OP 010S are (see diagram below):
Component Order number Remarks
Front panel 6FC5248-0AF04-0AA0Without LCD unit, withoutUSB interface and with-out keyboard controller
Sealing caps for USBconnection
6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10
Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6
LCD unit
Backlight withbacklightinverter
Front panel
Cap for the USB portDisplay holder withkeyboard controller(rear)
Fig. 2-6 Spare parts for the OP 010S operator panel front
2.5.2 Replacing spare parts
Caution
Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger thatsensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described inthe following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.
2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front
04.042.5 Spare parts
2-41 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
When changing the front plate, the existing USB interface and the displayholder (with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused.
Procedure:
1. Put the OP 010S and the replacement front plate face down on a flat, softsurface.
2. Undo the casing screws (see Fig. 2-4) and remove the casing cover plate.The display holder with the keyboard controller (Fig. 2-7) will be visible un-derneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USBinterface (Fig. 2-8).
Direct control keyinterface X11
ConnectionX4 (reserved)
Connection X14for display andbacklighting
I/O USB cable K1
Connection X12(reserved)
USB membrane line
Display cable K2
Connections for theoperator panel frontkeyboardX7X10X8
Membrane line fromthe operator panelfront keyboard
Membrane line fromthe operator panelfront keyboard
Fig. 2-7 Keyboard controller
3. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboardfrom the sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure).
4. Disconnect the membrane connection of the USB connection cable (Fig.2-8) (see note below for procedure).
USB interface
USB membraneline (see Fig. 2-7).
Display support
Fig. 2-8 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side
Front panel
2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front
04.042.5 Spare parts
2-42 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
5. Undo the screws of the display holder and lift it off.
6. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement frontplate.
7. Place the display holder on the replacement front plate.
8. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order (see note for procedure).
Note
– Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the“Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Handling membraneconnectors”.
– When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section“Technical data”).
2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front
3-43 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
OP 010C Operator Panel Front
The description below applies to the OP 010C operator panel front(order number 6FC5203-0AF01-0AA0)
The OP 010C operator panel front described in the following is characterizedby:
19” mounting format, 7 HU (height units)
Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm
Compact mounting depth (example: OP 010C with PCU 50; calculated fromsurface of mounting panel: 100 mm + 10 mm ventilation clearance)
10.4” TFT slimline screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels
Mechanical short-stroke keys with alpha, numerical, cursor, control andhotkey key groups
Softkeys:
– 1 horizontal row of 8 keys with softkey functions
– 1 vertical row of 8 keys with softkey functions
Shift key for switching to the second key level(not for switching case, uppercase characters only)
Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature
USB interface at the front
Degree of protection IP 54
Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear
Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter “Distrib-uted Installation”)
External floppy disk drive can be connected.
Validity
Features
3
04.043.1 View
3-44 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3.1 View
The diagram below shows the front view of the OP 010C operator panel front.The individual operator keygroups are described in Section 3.2.
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *)
Alpha key group
Numerical key group
Cursor keygroup
Controlkeygroup
USB frontinterface
HotkeysArea switchoverEtc. keySoftkeys
Machine areaRecall
Sof
tkey
s
*) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed
Fig. 3-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 010C
3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front
04.043.2 Description of the keyboard
3-45 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3.2 Description of the keyboardFig. 3-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of differentkey groups:
The Alpha key group contains the letters A, ..., Z and the blank.
The numerical key group includes the digits 0 – 9, the – character and thedecimal point.
The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen.
The control key group includes special functions.
The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas.
The key functions are summarized in the following list:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
Esc End
F11 Backspace
F12 Tab
Space–––(only intended for internalkeyboard switchover)
Home Ctrl key
Page up Alt key
Page down Delete
Cursor up Insert
Cursor to the left Enter
Cursor to the right F9
Cursor down F10
5 (in numerical key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z
<Shift> F9 <Shift> F10
3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front
04.043.2 Description of the keyboard
3-46 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
KeyFunction corresponds toPC key function:
Reserved Reserved
Reserved Reserved
Reserved Reserved
3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front
04.043.3 Interfaces
3-47 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3.3 Interfaces
The OP 010C operator panel front provides the following interfaces:
USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. 3-1).
Note
When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use.
Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.
See Figs. 3-2 and 3-3:
Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU:
– I/O USB cable K1:All signals, which in addition to the display interface, are used to connectthe operator front
– Display cable K2
Interface X11, reserved
PCU 50 main board
I/O USBcable K1
Displaycable K2
PCU 50
OP 010C
Fig. 3-2 OP 010C – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections
See “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secondary Electrical Condi-tions”
Direct control key interface X11
Connection forbacklighting
Keyboard controllerConnection X1for I/O USB cable K1
Interface X12 (reserved)
Fig. 3-3 OP 010C – connections on the rear of the enclosure: Customer interface
Front side
Rear side
Pin assignment
3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front
04.043.4 Installation
3-48 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3.4 Installation
When combining an OP 010C and PCU, it is advisable to assemble them priorto installation in an assembly panel.
3.4.1 Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU
Cover plate forconnectionsKeyboard controller
Displaycable K2 2)
I/O USBcable K1 2)
2) Cable shown folded together
TopWidth = 483
Hei
ght =
310
1) Mounting slots for PCU lugsCasing screws
Displaysupport plate
1) 1)
1)1)
Fig. 3-4 Operator panel rear with position of – the interfaces,– the mounting slots
Procedure Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.
3.4.2 Preparation for mounting
Table 3-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below)
PCU typeused
Width(mm)
Height(mm)
Depth + clearance (mm)measured from the mounting panel surface
PCU 50483 310
100 + 10
PCU 70483 310
140 + 10
Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010C, holes or screw holes are notneeded.
3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front
04.043.4 Installation
3-49 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
450 +1
290
+1
1.5 min to 6 max
112.5 77.75* * 112.5*77.75*
112.
5*56
.25*
5
Sealing area (front)Mounting panel
Setscrews
Tensionjacks
*) Dimensions for tension jack pressure points
Front side
Fig. 3-5 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010C operator panel front
3.4.3 Mounting
1. Insert the assembled components OP 010C and PCU from the front into thepanel cutout.
2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the sixtension jacks (see diagram above) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 –0.5 Nm).
Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so thatthe unit is sufficiently ventilated (see diagram below).
For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU chapters andChapter “Heat Dissipation”.
3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front
04.043.4 Installation
3-50 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10
297
313.4 69.1
46.3
38.7
35.8
17.3
333
20100+
3
o
Mou
ntin
g br
acke
t
PC
U r
otat
ed th
roug
h 90
deg
rees
10
100.1
OP 010C
Clearance requiredfor ventilation
PCU 50 in the end position
Mounting bracket
Mou
ntin
g lu
gsw
ith w
ithou
thi
nged
cat
ches
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 3-6 Attaching the PCU 50 to the OP 010C operator panel front (viewed from above)
Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.
Notice
This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, Videolinkreceiver, ...).
Screen saverCaution
If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.
To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide
/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced
3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front
04.043.5 Technical data
3-51 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3.5 Technical data
Table 3-2 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front panel IP54 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Power supply (via I/OUSB cable and display cable)
Display Backlightinverter
Logic/USB(with/without load)
VoltageCurrent (typ./max. mA; appr.)
5 V +/– 5%280 / 380
12 V +/–10%750 / 1000
5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1000
Power consumption Typical, approx. 10 W Maximum approx. 16 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 483 mmHeight: 310 mmDepth: 30 mm
Mounting depth: 20 mmincl. PCU 50: 100 mmincl. PCU 70: 145 mm
Weight approx. 5 kg
Tightening torques, max.Tension jack
screws: 0.5 NmM3 screws:
0.8 NmM4 screws: 1.8
Nm
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–25 ... 55 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
Display
Size 10.4” TFT
Resolution 640 x 480 pixels
MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)
3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front
04.043.7 Changing key covers of short-stroke keys
3-52 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3.6 Spare parts
Spare parts for the OP 010C are (see diagram below):
Component Order number Remarks
Key coversfor labeling
6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0
Set of90 ergo-gray20 red20 yellow20 green20 medium gray
Sealing caps for USBconnection
6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10
Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6
Cap for the USB port
Fig. 3-7 Spare parts for the OP 010C operator panel front
3.7 Changing key covers of short-stroke keys
The key covers for the vertical softkeys (short-stroke keys) can be replaced forthe product SINUMERIK 840D/810D ManualTurn.They are included in the scope of supply.
Procedure:
1. Lever off the key cover of the short-stroke key
2. Press new key cover onto the frame of the short-stroke key
3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front
4-53 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
OP 012 Operator Panel Front
4.1 Overview
The SINUMERIK OP 012 operator panel front with 12.1” TFT color display witha resolution of 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) features a 59-key membrane keypadas well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys. The 2 x 8 verticalsoftkeys can be used as direct control keys.
Combined with SINUMERIK PCUs, the SINUMERIK OP 012 can be used tocreate fully featured operator panels with integral mouse.
Mounting is from the rear using special clamps that are included in the scope ofdelivery.
Validity The description below applies to the OP 012 operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF02-0AA0)
19” mounting format, 7 HE (height units)
Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm
Compact mounting depth (example of OP 012 with PCU 50; calculated fromsurface of mounting panel: 100 mm + 10 mm ventilation clearance)
12.1” TFT slimline screen (color) with SVGA resolution 800 x 600 pixels
Membrane keyboard with alpha, numerical, cursor and control key groups
Softkeys/direct control keys:
– 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function
– 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions
– Direct control keys via direct control key submodule (optional), PP031MC or directly connectable to the I/Os
Shift key for switching to the second key level(not for switching case, uppercase characters only)
Integrated mouse
Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature
USB interface at the front
IP65 degree of protection
Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear
Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter “Distrib-uted Installation”)
External floppy disk drive can be connected.
Features
4
04.044.2 View
4-54 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
4.2 View
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *)
Alpha key group
Numerical key group
Cursor keygroup
Controlkeygroup
USBfrontinterface
MouseArea switchoverEtc. key
Softkeys
Machine areaRecall
Sof
tkey
s an
d di
rect
con
trol
key
s
Sof
tkey
s an
d di
rect
con
trol
key
s
*) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed
Fig. 4-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 012
Fig. 4-1 shows the front view of the OP 012 operator panel front.The individual operator keygroups are described in Section 4.3.
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.3 Description of the keyboard
4-55 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
4.3 Description of the keyboardFig. 4-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of differentkey groups:
The ALPHA key group includes the letters A, ..., Z and the space character.
The numerical key group includes the digits 0 – 9, the – character and thedecimal point.
The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen.
The control key group includes special functions.
The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of atracker ball) and two mouse keys.
The key functions are summarized in the following list:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
Esc End
F11 Backspace
F12 Tab
Space–––(only intended for internalkeyboard switchover)
Home Ctrl key
Page up Alt key
Page down Delete
Cursor up Insert
Cursor to the left Enter
Cursor to the right F9
Cursor down F10
5 (in numerical key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z
<Shift> F9 <Shift> F10
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.4 Interfaces
4-56 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
4.4 Interfaces
The OP 012 operator panel front provides the following interfaces:
Low-current (100 mA) USB interface (version 1.1) to connect an external key-board or mouse (Fig. 4-1).
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
Note
When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use.
Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.
See photo below:
Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU:
– I/O USB cable K1:All signals, which in addition to the display interface, are used to connectthe operator front
– Display cable K2
Interface X11, normally hidden under the cover plate (Fig. 4-3):Signals from the 16 “vertical softkey” direct control keys
For pin assignment and key assignment see “Direct control key submodule”.
PCU 50main board
I/O USBcable K1
Display cable K2
OP 012
Direct controlkey interfaceX11
PCU 50
Connection X14 for backlight
Keyboardcontroller
Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1
Interface X12(reserved)
Cable clampfor connectionto direct controlkey submodule
Fig. 4-2 OP 012 – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections
Front side
Rear side
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.5 Installation
4-57 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
4.5 Installation
For a combination of an OP 012 and PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter“Distributed Installation”) and possibly a direct control key submodule (refer tothe Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule”), we recommend that these areassembled prior to installation in a mounting panel.
4.5.1 Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU
The PCU must now be bolted to the mounting brackets prior to assembly (if thishas not already been done) (see Chapter “PCU 50”, Section “Commissioning /Mounting”)
Cover plate forconnectionsKeyboard controller
Displaycable K2 2)
IO/USBcable K1 2)
2) Cable shown folded together
Top
4) Slit for softkey labeling strips
Width = 483
Hei
ght =
310
1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs
1)1)
1) 1)
Displaysupport plate
3)
3) 3)3)
3)
3) 3) 3)
3)
3)
3)
3) Enclosure screws
4)
3)
4)4)
4)
Cableclamp
Fig. 4-3 OP 012 rear side
Procedure1. Place the OP 012 face down on a flat, soft (to avoid scratches) surface.
– See Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule” for instructions on mount-ing the direct control key submodule.
– To install or replace the softkey labeling strips, see Section 4.6.
2. Place the PCU with the lugs of the bolted-on mounting brackets intothemounting slots on the OP 012 as shown by the white arrows in the pic-ture below. To make it easier to insert the lugs, it can be helpful to reducethe 90 angle between the PCU and OP 012 by tilting the PCU as shown bythe black arrow in the picture.
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.5 Installation
4-58 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
PCU 50
OP 012
Displaycable K2IO/USB
cable K1
Fig. 4-4 Assembling the PCU 50 and OP 012
3. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP 012 into the plug connec-tors behind the opening in the PCU 50 casing (see gray arrows in pictureabove). Make sure that the connectors lock in audibly and that the locks(see arrows in next picture) are closed.
OP 012
PCU 50
Displaycable K2
IO/USBcable K1
Fig. 4-5 Correct connection of IO/USB and display cables to the PCU 50
4. Swing the PCU 50 to the limit position and fix it using the knurled screws(see next photo; torque 1.8 Nm).
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.5 Installation
4-59 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10
297
313.4 69.1
46.3
38.7
35.8
17.3
333
20100+
3
o
Mou
ntin
g br
acke
t
PC
U r
otat
ed th
roug
h 90
deg
rees
10
100.1
OP 012
Clearance requiredfor ventilation
PCU 50 in the end position
Mounting bracket
Mou
ntin
g lu
gsw
ith w
ithou
thi
nged
cat
ches
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 4-6 Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front (viewed from above)
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.5 Installation
4-60 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The photo below shows the PCU 50 – OP 012 unit in its final assembled state.
Knurled screw
Knurled screw
Knurledscrews
OP 012
PCU 50
Fig. 4-7 PCU 50 – OP 012 unit in its final assembled state
4.5.2 Preparing for mounting
Table 4-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see Fig. 4-8)
PCU typeused
Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance(mm)
PCU 50450 290
100 + 10
PCU 70450 290
145 + 10
Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 012, holes or screw holes are notneeded.
This retaining type also permits degree of protection IP65 to be achieved (how-ever, only when a seal is used around the complete circumference and whenthe protective cap is installed on the USB interface).
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.5 Installation
4-61 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
450 +1
290
+1
1.5 min to 6 max
112.5 77.75* * 112.5*77.75*
112.
5*56
.25*
5
Sealing areaMounting panel
Setscrews
Tensionjacks
*) Dimensions for tension jack pressure points
Fig. 4-8 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 012 operator panel front
4.5.3 Mounting
1. Insert the preassembled OP 012 components (complete with any direct con-trol key submodule; see Subsection 11.2.1) and the PCU into the panel cut-out from the front.
2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the sixtension jacks (see Fig. 4-8) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 –0.5 Nm).
Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so thatthe unit is sufficiently ventilated (refer to Fig. 4-6).
For more detailed information, please refer to Chapters “PCU 50” and “HeatDissipation”.
Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.
Notice
This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, Videolinkreceiver, ...).
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.6 Softkey labeling
4-62 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Screen saverCaution
If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.
To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide
/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced
4.6 Softkey labeling
The two vertical and two horizontal softkey bars can be assigned user-specificfunctions. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys.
Blank labels are already installed on delivery (see Subsection 1.4.3).
To make the labels, DIN-A4 filmis available (Order No., see Section 4.8).
Procedure:
1. Letter the dull side of the film using a laser printer.
2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines.
3. Undo the four PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from theoperator panel front.
4. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operatorpanel front (refer to Fig. 4-3).
5. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel front and secure by tightening thescrews.
If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled, omit steps 3. and 5.
Making the labels
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.7 Technical data
4-63 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
4.7 Technical data
Table 4-2 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front side IP65 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Power supply (via I/OUSB cable and display cable)
Display Backlightinverter
Logic/USB (with/without load)
VoltageCurrent (typ./max. mA; appr.)
5 V +/– 5%280 / 380
12 V +/–10%750 / 1000
5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1200
Power consumption Typical, approx. 10 W Maximum approx. 16 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 483 mmHeight: 310 mmDepth: 30 mm
Mounting depth: 20 mmincl. PCU 50: 100 mmincl. PCU 70: 145 mm
Weight approx. 5 kg
Tightening torques, max.Tension jack
screws: 0.5 NmM3 screws:
0.8 NmM4 screws: 1.8
Nm
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
Display
Size 12.1” TFT
Resolution 800 x 600 pixels
MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.8 Spare parts/accessories
4-64 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
4.8 Spare parts/accessories
4.8.1 Spare parts list
Spare parts for the OP 012 are (see diagram below):
Component Order number Remarks
Front panel 6FC5248-0AF02-0AA0
Without LCD unit, withoutmouse, without keyboardcontroller, without direct con-trol key submodule
USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0
Direct control keysubmodule
6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0
Sealing caps forUSB connection
6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10
DIN A4 film 6FC5248-0AF08-0AA0 For slide-in softkey labels
Tension jackset 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6
Keyboard controller
LCD unit
Backlight withbacklight inverter
Front panel Mouse Cap for the USB port
Display support
Direct control keysubmodule
Fig. 4-9 Spare parts for the OP 012 operator panel front
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.8 Spare parts/accessories
4-65 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
175
229.8
292
63.5
2
24.859.39
8.212.4
8.5
20.6
15
10
Par
t 1P
art 2
Par
t 3P
art 4
Center of the key
Slide–in labels
Fig. 4-10 Dimensions for DIN A4 blank film
4.8.2 Replacing spare parts
Caution
Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive componentsmay be damaged due to static electricity)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described inthe following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.
When changing the front plate, the existing mouse, LCD unit and keyboard con-troller can be reused and are therefore removed and installed again after thefront panel has been changed. The following description therefore applies bothto the operator panel front and for the mouse.
Note
We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the controlparameters that have been programmed-in are not lost.
Operator panelfront/mouse
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.044.8 Spare parts/accessories
4-66 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Procedure:
1. Put the OP 012 face down on a flat, soft surface and undo the 12 casingscrews (see Fig. 4-3).
2. Remove the softkey slide-in labels and the cover plate (see Fig.4-3).
3. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see Fig.4-11): Backlight (base X14) and IO USB cable K1.
4. Keep the display plate with the display.In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of mouse and USB in-terface become visible.
Membrane connectorfor connecting thekeyboard of theoperator panel front
Keyboard controller
Direct control keyconnection X11
Mouse
USB interface
Connection X4for mouse
Connection X14 forbacklighting
Connection X1for IO USB cable K1
Connection X12(reserved)
Fig. 4-11 Changing the operator panel front
5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface.
6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front key-board from the sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure).
7. Undo the fastening screws from mouse and keyboard controller.
8. Lift USB interface, mouse and keyboard controller off the front plate. Theinterconnections may remain plugged.
9. Install these components in the new operator panel front in reverse order(see note for procedure).
Note
– Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the“Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Handling membraneconnectors”.
– When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section“Technical data”).
The front plate is replaced as described in Section 4.6.
Film labels
4 OP 012 Operator Panel Front
5-67 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
TP 012 Operator Panel Front
The description below applies to the TP 012 operator panel front(order number 6FC5203-0AF07-0AA0)
The TP 012 operator panel front described below is characterized by:
Mounting format 400 x 310mm, 7 HU (height units)
Panel cutout (W x H): 368 x 290 mm
Mounting depth (measured from the surface of the mounting panel) in con-junction with PCU 50: 125 mm + 10 mm clearance
Color display (touch screen) incl. backlighting in12.1” TFT technology with resolution of 800 x 600 pixels
Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature
Front USB interface (Version 1.2)
IP65 degree of protection
Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear
Can be combined with the components PCU 50/70 under Windows XP.:– in a centralized configuration (as described in this chapter)– in a distributed configuration (see “Distributed Installation”)
The panel is operated by touching the application-specific functions shown onthe touch-sensitive display, e.g. by touching a displayed button.
Note
The touch panel TP 012 can be used in conjunction with customer-specific HMIsoftware.
Validity
Features
Operation
5
04.045.1 View
5-68 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
5.1 View
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear)
Front USB interface forconnecting an external keyboardor mouse
Fig. 5-1 Front view of TP 012 operator panel
5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.045.2 Interfaces
5-69 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
5.2 Interfaces
5.2.1 Arrangement
The TP 012 operator panel front provides the following interfaces:
Low-current (100 mA) USB interface (version 1.1) to connect an external key-board or mouse (Fig. 5-1).
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
Note
When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use. Components with a higher certification arerecommended for industrial use.
See photo below:
Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU:
– I/O USB cable K1: All signals, which in addition to the display interface,are used to connect the operator front
– Display cable K2
I/O USBcable K1 Display
cable K2
TP 012
PCU 50
Fig. 5-2 TP 012 – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections
Front side
Rear side
5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.045.3 Installation
5-70 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
5.3 Installation
With a centralized configuration, the operator unit (TP 012) and the processingunit (PCU) are connected to each other using the piggyback method. It is advis-able to connect the units in an assembly panel prior to installation.
5.3.1 Assembling the TP 012 and PCU
Displaycable K2
IO/USBcable K1
Top
Width = 400
Hei
ght =
310
1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs
1)
1)
1)
1)
Rating plate
Test label
2)
2)
2)
2)2) Casing screws
Fig. 5-3 TP 012 rear side
Procedure Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.
5.3.2 Preparing for mounting
Table 5-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see Fig. 5-4)
PCU typeused
Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance(mm)
PCU 50368 290
125 + 10
PCU 70368 290
165 + 10
Thanks to the tension jacks on the TP 012, holes or screw holes are notneeded.
This retaining type also permits degree of protection IP65 to be achieved (how-ever, only when a seal is used around the complete circumference and whenthe protective cap is installed on the USB interface).
5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.045.3 Installation
5-71 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
L1
L2
112 ± 0.5
112
±0.5
±156
1.5mm to mm6
S1± 1
A1±1
A2
± 1
L1 L2 S1 S2 A1
368 290 35 19 16
Tens
ion
jack
s w
ith s
etsc
rew
s
+1
+1
Rz 120
In the sealing area
Sealing area
Pressure pointsfor tension jacks
S2± 1 112 ± 0.5
S1± 1 S1± 1
A2
10 Dimensions in mm
Fig. 5-4 Dimension sheet for installing the TP 012 operator unit
5.3.3 Mounting
1. Insert the assembled components TP 012 and PCU 50 from the front intothe panel cutout.
2. Locate the touch panel in the panel cutout from the rear using the six ten-sion jacks (see Fig. 5-4) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 ... 0.5 Nm).
Clearance The clearance at the PCU rear side must be at least 10 mm to ensure that suffi-cient ventilation is provided (see figure below).
For more detailed information, please refer to Chapters “PCU 50” and “HeatDissipation”.
Mounting position Permissible mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.
Notice
This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, Videolinkreceiver, ...).
5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.045.3 Installation
5-72 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
o
Mou
ntin
g br
acke
t
PC
U r
otat
ed th
roug
h 90
deg
rees
TP 012
Clearance requiredfor ventilation
PCU 50 in the end position
Mounting bracket
28.6313.6 57.8
33
297
1012
5+3
3650.1
55.9
353
17.4
10
*) Bottom: Mounting bracket with hinged catches
Lugs *)
Fig. 5-5 Mounting the PCU 50 to the TP 012 operator panel front (as seen from above)
Screen saverCaution
If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.
To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide
/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced
5.3.4 Touch screen calibration
Whenever a new TP 012 operator panel front is connected, a screen calibra-tion must be performed.
For procedure see Chapter “PCU 50”, Subsection “Touch screen calibration”.
5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.045.4 Technical data
5-73 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
5.4 Technical data
Table 5-2 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front side IP65 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Power supply (via I/OUSB cable and display cable)
Display Backlightinverter
Logic/USB (with/without load)
VoltageCurrent (typ./max. mA; appr.)
5 V +/– 5%280 / 380
12 V +/–10%750 / 1000
5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1000
Power consumption Typical, approx. 15 W Maximum approx. 20 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 400 mmHeight: 310 mmDepth: 51 mm
Mounting depth: 36 mmincl. PCU 50: 125 mmincl. PCU 70: 170 mm
Weight approx. 5.5 kg
Tightening torques, max.Tension jack
screws: 0.5 NmM3 screws:
0.8 NmM4 screws:
1.8 Nm
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
Display
Size 12.1” TFT
Resolution 800 x 600 pixels
MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)
5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.045.5 Spare parts/accessories
5-74 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
5.5 Spare parts/accessories
5.5.1 Spare parts list
Spare parts for the TP 012 are (see Fig. 5-6):
SINUMERIK operator panel front without LCD unit for SINUMERIK TP 012(Front panel + touchscreen) Order No. 6FC5248-0AF16-0AA0
Sealing caps Order No. 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0for USB port (10)
Tension jacksset (6) Order No. 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0
Note
A sealing cap for the USB connection is factory-fitted on all initial orders.
Keyboardcontroller
Touchscreen *)
Backlightinverter forbacklighting
Front panel *)
Sealing cap for USBconnection *)
Display support
Housing
Display
*) Spare parts
Fig. 5-6 Components of TP 012 touch panel
5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.045.5 Spare parts/accessories
5-75 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
5.5.2 Replacing spare parts
Caution
Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger thatsensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described inthe following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.
If only the front panel is to be replaced, the display, touch controller, USB mod-ule and keypad controller can re-used. They are therefore disassembled andre-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced.
Note
We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the controlparameters that have been programmed-in are not lost.
Procedure:
1. Put the TP 012 face down on a flat, soft surface and undo the 12 casingscrews (see Fig. 5-3).
2. Unplug the following connectors (see Fig. 5-7):
– from the keypad controller:Backlighting (base X14), IO USB cable K1, membrane connector (seenote below)
– the plug-in cable from the touch controller to the touch screen
3. Remove the screws from the display holder.
4. Keep the display plate with the display.
5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface.
6. Install the components into the new front panel in the inverse sequence.
Note
– Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the“Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Handling membraneconnectors”.
– When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section“Technical data”).
Front panel
5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front
04.045.5 Spare parts/accessories
5-76 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
USB module
Base X14backlighting
Keyboard controller
Touch controller
IO USB cable K1
Membraneconnector
Display support
Fig. 5-7 Changing the operator panel front
5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front
6-77 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
TP 015A Operator Panel Front
The description below applies to the TP 015A operator panel front(order number 6FC5203-0AF08-0AA0)
The main features of the TP 015A operator panel front described below are asfollows:
Color display (touch screen) incl. backlighting in15” TFT technology with XGA resolution 1024 x 768 pixels
Membrane keyboard with alpha, numerical, cursor and control key groups
Softkeys/direct control keys:
– 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function
– 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions
– The direct control keys can be connected through the direct control keysubmodule (optional) or directly to the I/O peripherals
Shift key for switching to the second key level(not for switching case, uppercase characters only)
Integrated mouse
Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature
USB interface at the front
Degree of protection IP65 (front side)
Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear
Can be combined with the components PCU 50/70 under Windows XP.:– in a centralized configuration (as described in this chapter)– in a distributed configuration (see “Distributed Installation”)
Note
The combination with PCU 50 is described in this documentation as anexample. You can proceed in the same way if you wish to operate the TP 015Ain conjunction with a PCU 70.
Validity
Features
6
04.04
6-78 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The TP 015A is operated by means of
The touch screen can be used to select the application-specific functions,e.g. by touching one of the displayed buttons,
Softkeys (refer to Section 6.1)
Keys (refer to Section 6.2)
Caution
The lifetime of the screen could be significantly reduced if sharp or hard objectscome into contact with it.
The following is included in the scope of supply with the initial order:
Operator panel front
12 tension jacks
Operation
Scope of delivery
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.2 Description of the keyboard
6-79 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
6.1 View
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *)
Alpha key group
Numerical keygroup
Cursor keygroup
Control keygroup
USBfrontinterface
MouseArea switchover Etc. key
Softkeys
Machine areaRecall
Sof
tkey
s an
d di
rect
con
trol
key
s
Sof
tkey
s an
d di
rect
con
trol
key
s
*) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed
Fig. 6-1 Front view, TP 015A operator panel
6.2 Description of the keyboard
Fig. 6-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of differentkey groups:
The ALPHA key group includes the letters A, ..., Z and the space character.
The numerical key group includes the digits 0 – 9, the – character and thedecimal point.
The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen.
The control key group includes special functions.
The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of atracker ball) and two mouse keys.
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.2 Description of the keyboard
6-80 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The key functions are summarized in the following list:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
Esc End
F11 Backspace
F12 Tab
Space–––(only intended for internalkeyboard switchover)
Home Ctrl key
Page up Alt key
Page down Delete
Cursor up Insert
Cursor to the left Enter
Cursor to the right F9
Cursor down F10
5 (in numerical key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z
<Shift> F9 <Shift> F10
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.3 Interfaces
6-81 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
6.3 Interfaces
The TP 015A operator panel front has the following interfaces:
Low-current (100 mA) USB interface (version 1.1) to connect an external key-board or mouse (Fig. 6-1).
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
Note
When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use. Components with a higher certification arerecommended for industrial use.
See photo below:
Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU:
– I/O USB cable K1: All signals, which in addition to the display interface,are used to connect the operator front
– Display cable K2
Interface X11: Signals from the 16 “vertical softkey” direct control keys
For pin assignment and key assignment see “Direct control key submodule”.
I/O USBcable K1
Display cable K2
TP 015A
Direct control keyinterface X11
PCU 50/70
Keyboardcontroller
Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1 Interface X12 (reserved)
Fig. 6-2 TP 015A – connections at the rear of the enclosure: Connections to the PCU
Front side
Rear side
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.4 Installation
6-82 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
6.4 Installation
For a combination of TP 015A and PCU and possibly a direct control key sub-module (refer to Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule”), we recommend thatthese are assembled prior to installation in a mounting panel.
6.4.1 Assembling TP 015A and PCU
Cover plate forconnectionsKeyboard controller
Displaycable K2 2)
IO/USBcable K1 2)
2) Cable shown folded together
Top
3) Slit for softkey labeling strips
Width = 483
Hei
ght =
355
1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs
1) 1)
1)
1)
Displaymounting plate(rear coverplate)
3)
4)
3)
4) Ground terminal
3)
3)
Fig. 6-3 TP 015A rear side
Procedure Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.
6.4.2 Mounting
Table 6-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (refer to the next diagram)
PCU typeused
Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance(mm)
PCU 50450 335
132 + 10
PCU 70450 335
172 + 10
Thanks to the tension jacks, holes or screw holes are not needed.
In addition, this type of fastening affords degree of protection IP 65 (but only inconjunction with a circular seal and plugged protective cap on the USB inter-face).
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.4 Installation
6-83 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1.5min – max.6
Dimens. L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 A1 A2 S6450 335 47 456 160 16 10 4
Tens
ion
jack
s w
ith s
etsc
rew
s
Rz 120
In the sealing area
Sealing
in mm
area
Mounting panel
L1+1
L4+1
Pressure point for tension jacks
A1 ± 1
A2
±1
±1
80
±1
160
L1 ± 1
L4 ± 1
M6/diameter7
L2±
1
L5±
0:2
S6
±0:
5± 0:5140 L3 ± 1 L3 ± 1 ± 0:5120
Fig. 6-4 Dimension drawing for mounting the TP 015A operator panel front
1. Insert the assembled components TP 015A (possibly with direct control keysubmodule; refer to Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule”) and PCU fromthe front into the appropriate cut-out.
2. Use 12 clips to retain the operator panel front in the appropriate cut-out (re-fer to Fig. 1-3) and tighten the threaded studs (torque 0.4 – 0.5 Nm).
Clearance The clearance to the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure that it isproperly ventilated (see diagram below).
For more detailed information, refer to the Chapter “PCU 50/70 component” andChapter “Cooling”.
Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.
Notice
This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, Videolinkreceiver, ...).
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.4 Installation
6-84 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.8
74.5
131
48.7
29.5
220
10
17.3
359.
6
297
62.4
87.8 320.4
Required clearance for cooling
Mounting rail
Mou
ntin
g ra
il
Lugs
± 1± 2
± 0.3
PCU 50 in the endposition
PC
U 5
0 sw
ung
out b
y 90
°Additional clearancefor connecting cable
+3
± 0.5
Fig. 6-5 Mounting the PCU 50 to the TP 015A operator panel front (as seen from above)
Screen saverCaution
If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.
To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide
/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced
6.4.3 Touch screen calibration
Whenever a new TP 015A operator panel front is connected, a screen cal-ibration must be performed.
For procedure see Chapter “PCU 50”, Subsection “Touch screen calibration“.
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.5 Softkey labeling
6-85 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
6.5 Softkey labeling
User-specific functions can be assigned to the two vertical softkey bars. Printedlabeling strips can be used to label the softkeys.
When the equipment is supplied, blank labeling strips are already inserted (referto Fig. 6-3).
If new labeling strips are required, you can produces these yourselves. To dothis, you will require a film (dimensions, refer to the next diagram, type HP ColorLaserJet film C2936A). Please observe the following:
– The film is printed from the rear (in the area around the strip)
– Background color: Medium Basic 701
– Film structure at the front
– Printing the slide-in labels from the front, withHP Color LaserJet printer (+ types 5/5M, 4500/N/DN, 8500/N/DN)
Procedure:
1. Undo the four PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from theoperator panel front.
2. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operatorpanel front (refer to Fig. 6-3).
3. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel front and secure by tightening thescrews.
If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled, omit steps 1 and 3.
When producingyour own labelingstrips
Inserting the strips
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.6 Technical data
6-86 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
6.6 Technical dataTable 6-2 Technical data for TP 015A
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Deg. of prot. acc. to EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Power supply (via I/OUSB cable and display cable)
Display Backlight in-verter
Logic / USB
VoltageCurrent (typ./max. mA; appr.)
5 V +/– 5%500 / 650
12 V +/–10%900 / 1100
5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1500 2)
Power consumption Typical, approx. 15 W Maximum approx. 24 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 483 mmHeight: 355 mmDepth: 60 mm
Mounting depth: 3) 49 mmincl. PCU 50: 132 mmincl. PCU 70: 172 mm
Weight approx. 10 kg
Tightening torques Screws, max.
Tension jacks:0.5 Nm
M2: 1)
M3: 0.8 Nm
M4: 1.8 Nm
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 4.9 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 4.9 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN60721-3-3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation through self-convection; without a fan
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Per. change in the rel. air hu. max. 0.1 % /min
Display
Size / resolution 15 ” TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels
MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)
1) hand-tight + locking agent2) incl. 500 mA load on USB front connector and direct control key submodule3) measured from the mounting panel surface; plus 10 mm clearance for cable and ventilation
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.7 Spare parts
6-87 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
6.7 Spare parts
6.7.1 Spare parts list
Spare parts for the TP 015A include (refer to Fig. 6-6):
Designation Order number Comment
Front panel 6FC5248-0AF17-0AA0Without LCD unit, mouse, USB in-
terface and keyboard controller
USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 –
Direct con-trol key sub-module
6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0 –
Caps 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 For USB port (10)
Tension jackset
6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 2 x 9
Mountingbracket
6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0For PCU or Videolink
receiver behind operator panelfront
Mountingbracket flat
6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0For PCU with videolink transmitter
in control cabinet
3 films 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0 With printable slide-in labels
Cap for the USB port Mouse
Front panel
LCD unit Display support
Keyboardcontroller
Protectivecover
Direct controlkeysubmodule *)
Backlightinverter forbacklighting
Tensionjacks
*) optional
Fig. 6-6 Components of the TP 015A operator panel front
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.7 Spare parts
6-88 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
16.67
25.3
8
210
297
8
12
( )50 5
Center of the key
Part1
Part2
Fig. 6-7 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.7 Spare parts
6-89 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
305
371402
8
1625
.38
38.5
11.5 12
15+
0.4
–0.8
8+0.
4–0
.8
Slide–in labels
Center ofthe key
Part2
Part3
Part4
Part1
Fig. 6-8 Dimensions for slide-in labels
6.7.2 Replacing spare parts
Caution
Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive componentsmay be damaged due to static electricity)!
Display, keyboard controller *), touch controller, USB module, mouse and USBinterface can be re-used. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembledafter the appropriate component has been replaced.
*) Re-use is also recommended to avoid loss of the control parameters whichhave already been programmed in.
Front panel
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.7 Spare parts
6-90 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Procedure:
1. Place the TP 015A face downwards on a flat, soft surface and undo the 4screws in the cover plate for the keyboard controller connections (see Fig.6-3).
2. Undo the 13 housing screws and lift the housing off.
3. Disconnect the plug-in connection between the touch controller and thetouch screen.
4. Disconnect the following terminals on the keyboard controller:
The 3 membrane connectors (for procedure see note below),
The USB interface cable:
– Detact the membrane connector by pushing the dark locking leverhorizontally towards the USB cable,
– Detach the 3 cable support clamps,
The mouse cable (in a similar way to the USB interface cable).
5. Undo the 13 screws in the display support and lift it off.
The replacement front panel is supplied without mouse and USB interfacewhich means that these must be removed from the old panel and installed in thenew one:
6. Dismantling and assembling the mouse and USB interface:
Mouse:
– Detach the cable clamps,
– Pull both cables out of the cable converter,
– Undo the 4 internal mouse fixing screws.
USB interface:
– After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface.
Install the mouse and USB interface into the new front panel.
7. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securingcables) and the inner screen protective sheeting.
8. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order.
Note
– Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the“Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Handling membraneconnectors”.
– When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section“Technical data”).
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks is self-explanatory andis therefore not described.
USB sealing capand tension jacks
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.8 Example when calculating the cooling
6-91 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
6.8 Example when calculating the cooling
The power loss (thermal) dissipated by the components in an operator unit is tobe dissipated using open-circuit ventilation. The required volumetric flow V mustbe calculated for a temperature difference of:
T2 – T1 = ∆T 10K.
External temperature = T1 = 45 degreesInternal temperature = T2 = 55 degrees ––> ∆T = 10 K
TP 015A 15 WPCU 50 V2 65 W
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––PVtotal = 80 W
(max. 109 W)
Example for heat dissipation with open-circuit ventilation:PCU 50 with TP 015A
Calculating the thermal power loss(including internal power supply unit):
3.5 * PVtotal [W] V = = 28 [m3/h]
T [K]Operatorpanel front
T1 T2
PCU
Fig. 6-9 Calculating the cooling for PCU 50 with TP 015A
Calculating thethermal power lossPCU 50
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
04.046.8 Example when calculating the cooling
6-92 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front
Notes
7-93 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
OP 015 Operator Panel Front
The description below applies to the OP 015 operator panel front(order number 6FC5203–0AF03–0AA0)
The OP 015 operator panel front described in the following is characterized by:
19” mounting format, 7 HU (height units)
Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm
Mounting depth (measured from the surface of the mounting panel) in con-junction with PCU 50: 130 mm + 10 mm clearance
15” TFT slimline screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels
Membrane keyboard:
– 8 horizontal softkeys
– 8 vertical softkeys
Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature
USB interface at the front
Degree of protection: IP65
Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear
Can be combined with the component PCU 50
External floppy disk drive can be connected via PCU.
Validity
Features
7
04.047.1 Operator interface
7-94 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
7.1 Operator interface
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *)
USBfrontinterface
Areaswitchover
Etc. key
Softkeys
Machine area Recall
Sof
tkey
s
*) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed
Fig. 7-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 015
Fig. 7-1 shows the user interface of the OP 015:
the 15 inch display
the USB front interface
eight vertical and eight horizontal softkeys
four control keys with the following functions:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
Key Function corresponds toPC key function:
<Shift> F10 F9
<Shift> F9 F10
7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front
04.047.2 Interfaces
7-95 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
7.2 Interfaces
7.2.1 Arrangement
The OP 015 operator panel front provides the following interfaces:
USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. 7-1).
Note
When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use.
Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.
Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (Fig. 7-2):
I/O USB cable K1: All signals, which in addition to the display interface, areused to connect the operator front
Display cable K2
PCU 50main board
I/O USBcable K1
Displaycable K2
PCU 50
Cover plate for keyboardcontroller (see Fig. 7-7)
OP 015
Fig. 7-2 OP 015 – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections
7.2.2 Assignments
Table 7-1 Assignment of the USB front interface (low current USB: 100 mA)
Pin Name Type Remarks
1 USB_P5V_fused V + 5V (fused) for ext. USB interface
2 USB_D0M B Data–, USB channel 0
3 USB_D0P B Data+, USB channel 0
4 USB_GND V Ground for external USB interface
Signal type B: Bidirectional V: Voltage
Front side
Rear side
USB front interface
7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front
04.047.3 Installation
7-96 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
7.3 Installation
When combining OP 015 and PCU 50, it is advisable to assemble them prior toinstallation in an assembly panel.
7.3.1 Assembling OP 015 and PCU 50
Cover plate forconnectionsKeyboard controller
Displaycable K2
IO/USBcable K1
Top
483
310
1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs2) Casing screws M33) Casing screws M4
Casingcover plate
1)
1) 1)
1)
2) 2) 2)
2) 2) 2)
3) 3)
3) 3)
Fig. 7-3 Rear side of operator panel front with position of interfaces and mounting slots
Procedure Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.
7.3.2 Preparation for mounting
Table 7-2 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see Fig. 7-4)
PCU typeused
Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance(mm)
PCU 50450 290
130 + 10
PCU 70450 290
170 + 10
Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015, holes or screw holes are notneeded.
This retaining type also permits degree of protection IP65 to be achieved (how-ever, only when a seal is used around the complete circumference and whenthe protective cap is installed on the USB interface).
7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front
04.047.3 Installation
7-97 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
L1
L2
112 ± 0.5
112
±0.5
±156
1.5min – max.6
L3 ± 1
A1±1
A2
± 1
L1 L2 L3 A1 A2
450 290 81 16 10
Tens
ion
jack
s w
ith s
etsc
rew
s
+1
+1
Rz 120
In the sealing area
Sealing area
Pressure pointsfor tension jacks
L3 ± 1 112 ± 0.5
Fig. 7-4 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015 operator panel front
7.3.3 Mounting
1. Insert the assembled components OP 015 and PCU from the front into thepanel cutout.
2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the sixtension jacks (see Fig. 7-4) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 –0.5 Nm).
Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so thatthe unit is sufficiently ventilated (refer to Fig. 7-5).
For more detailed information, please refer to Chapters “PCU 50” and “HeatDissipation”.
7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front
04.047.3 Installation
7-98 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
T±
0.5
10
A± 2± 0.5297
10
L ±0.3
Ü
B±
126
7±
0.5
H±
0.5
K
T2
±0.
5
L H T T2 A B Ü K 483 310 130 42 87 23 22 220
PCU in end position
Clearance for cables and ventilation
+3
All dimensions without the screws protruding
Additional clearance for connection cables
Operator panel front
(for 840Di only)
PC
U 9
0 t
ilted
off
o
Fig. 7-5 Attaching the PCU to the OP 015 operator panel front
Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.
Notice
This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, Videolinkreceiver, ...).
Screen saverCaution
If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.
To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide
/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced
7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front
04.047.4 Technical data
7-99 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
7.4 Technical data
Table 7-3 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front side IP65 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Power supply (via I/OUSB cable and display cable)
Display Backlightinverter
Logic / USB(with / without
load)
VoltageCurrent (typ. / max. mA;approx.)
5 V +/– 5%420 / 600
12 V +/–10%900 / 1050
5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1000
Power consumption Typical, approx. 15 W Maximum approx. 24 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 483 mmHeight: 310 mmDepth: 52 mm
Mounting depth: 42 mmincl. PCU 50: 130 mm
Weight approx. 7 kg
Tightening torques, max.Tension jack
screws: 0.5 NmM3 screws:
0.8 NmM4 screws:
1.8 Nm
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
Display
Size 15 ” TFT
Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels
MTBF backlight typ. 40 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)
7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front
04.047.5 Spare parts/accessories
7-100 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
7.5 Spare parts/accessories
7.5.1 Spare parts list
Spare parts for the OP 015 are (see Fig. 7-6):
Front panel Order No. 6FC5248–0AF03–0AA0(without LCD unit, without USB interface and without keyboard controller)
Sealing caps Order No. 6FC5248–0AF05–0AA0for USB port (10)
Tension jacksset (6) Order No. 6FC5248–0AF06–0AA0
LCD unit
Backlight withbacklightinverter
Front panel
Cap for the USB port
Display holder withkeyboard controller(rear)
Fig. 7-6 Spare parts for the OP 015 operator panel front
7.5.2 Replacing spare parts
Caution
Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger thatsensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described inthe following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.
7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front
04.047.5 Spare parts/accessories
7-101 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
When changing the front plate, the existing USB interface and the displayholder (with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused.
Procedure:
1. Put the OP 015 and the replacement front plate face downwards on a flat,soft surface.
2. Undo the casing screws (see Fig. 7-3) and remove the casing cover plate.The display holder with the keyboard controller (Fig. 7-7) will be visible un-derneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USBinterface (Fig. 7-8).
Connection X11(reserved)
Connection X4(reserved)
Connection X14for display andbacklighting
IO USB cable K1
Connection X12(reserved)
USB membrane line
Display cable K2X10 X8 X7
Connections for Operatorpanel front keyboard
Membrane lines from theoperator panel front
keyboard
Fig. 7-7 Keyboard controller
3. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboardfrom the sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure).
4. Disconnect the membrane connection of the USB connection cable(Fig. 7-8; see note below for procedure).
USB interface
USB membraneline (see Fig. 7-7)
Display support
Fastening screw M4
Fig. 7-8 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side
5. Undo the screws of the display holder and lift it off.
6. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement frontplate.
Front panel
7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front
04.047.5 Spare parts/accessories
7-102 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
7. Place the display holder on the replacement front plate.
8. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order.
Note
– Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the“Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Handling membraneconnectors”.
– When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section“Technical data”).
7 OP 015 Operator Panel Front
8-103 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
OP 015A Operator Panel Front
The description below applies to the OP 015A operator panel front(order number 6FC5203–0AF05–0AA0)
The main features of the OP 015A operator panel front described below are asfollows:
19” mounting format, 8 HU (height units)
Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 321 mm
Mounting depth (measured from the surface of the mounting panel) in con-junction with PCU 50: 130 mm ( + 10 mm clearance for ventilation)
15” TFT slimline screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels
Membrane keyboard with alpha, numerical, cursor and control key groups
Softkeys/direct control keys:
– 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function
– 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions
– Direct control keys via direct control key submodule (optional), PP031MC or directly connectable to the I/Os
Shift key for switching to the second key level(not for switching case, uppercase characters only)
Integrated mouse
Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature
USB interface at the front
IP65 degree of protection
Mounting: tension jacks at the rear
Can be combined with the component PCU 50
Validity
Features
8
04.048.2 Description of the keyboard
8-104 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
8.1 View
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *)
Alpha key group
Numerical keygroup
Cursorkeygroup
Controlkeygroup
USBfrontinterface
MouseArea switchover etc. key
Softkeys
Machine areaRecall
Sof
tkey
s an
d di
rect
con
trol
key
s
Sof
tkey
s an
d di
rect
con
trol
key
s
*) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed.
Fig. 8-1 Front view of the OP 015A operator panel front
8.2 Description of the keyboard
Fig. 8-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of differentkey groups:
The ALPHA key group includes the letters A, ..., Z and the space character.
The numerical key group includes the digits 0 – 9, the – character and thedecimal point.
The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen.
The control key group includes special functions.
The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of atracker ball) and two mouse keys.
The functions of the keys are described in detail in Section “Description of key-board” of Chapter “Operator Panel Front OP 012”.
8 OP 015A Operator Panel
04.048.3 Interfaces
8-105 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
8.3 Interfaces
The OP 015A operator panel front has the following interfaces:
Low-current (100 mA) USB interface (version 1.1) to connect an external key-board or mouse (Fig. 8-1)
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
Note
When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use.
Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.
See photo below:
Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU:
– I/O USB cable K1:All signals, which in addition to the display interface, are used to connectthe operator front
– Display cable K2
Interface X11, normally hidden under the cover plate (Fig. 8-3):Signals from the 16 “vertical softkey” direct control keys
For pin assignment and key assignment see “Direct control key submodule”.
PCU 50main board
I/O USBcable K1
Display cable K2
OP 015A
Direct control keyinterface X11
PCU 50
Connection of backlighting
Keyboardcontroller
Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1
interface X12(reserved)
Cable clampfor connectionto direct controlkey submodule
Fig. 8-2 OP 015A – connections at the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections
Front side
Rear side
8 OP 015A Operator Panel
04.048.4 Installation
8-106 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
8.4 Installation
For a combination of OP 015A and PCU and possibly a direct control key sub-module (refer to the Chapter “Direct control key submodule”), it is advisable toassemble them prior to installation in an assembly panel.
8.4.1 Assembling OP 015A and PCU 50
Cover plate forconnectionsKeyboard controller
Displaycable K2 2)
IO/USBcable K1 2)
2) Cable shown folded together
top
4) Slit for softkey labeling strips
Width = 483
Hei
ght =
355
1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs
1) 1)
1)
1)
Displaysupport plate
3)
3)3)3)
3)
3) 3) 3)
3)
3)
3)
3) Enclosure screws
3)
4) 4)
4)
Cableclamp
3) 3)
Fig. 8-3 OP 015A rear side
Procedure Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.
8.4.2 Preparing for mounting
Table 8-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see Fig. 8-4)
PCU typeused
Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance(mm)
PCU 50450 321
127 + 10
PCU 70450 321
167 + 10
Thanks to the tension jacks, holes or screw holes are not needed.
This retaining type also permits degree of protection IP65 to be achieved (how-ever, only when a seal is used around the complete circumference and whenthe protective cap is installed on the USB interface).
8 OP 015A Operator Panel
04.048.4 Installation
8-107 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
L1
L2
112± 0.5
112
± 0.5
±1
56
1.5 min – max.6
L3± 1 L3± 1112±0.5
A1 ± 1
A2
±1
S5± 0.5
S4± 0.5
S3± 0.5
S3± 0.5 S
6±
0.5
Dimensions L1 L2 L3 A1 A2 S3 S4 S5 S6450 321 51 16 17 24 186 135 5
Tens
ion
jack
s w
ith s
etsc
rew
s
Pressure points
+1
Rz 120
In the sealing area
Sealing
in mm
area
+1
for tension jacks
Mounting panel
Fig. 8-4 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015A operator panel front
8 OP 015A Operator Panel
04.048.4 Installation
8-108 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
8.4.3 Mounting
1. Insert the assembled components OP 015A (possibly with direct control keysubmodule; see Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule” and PCU into thepanel cut-out from the front.
2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the sixtension jacks (see Fig. 8-4) by tightening the setscrews (torque0.4 – 0.5 Nm).
Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so thatthe unit is sufficiently ventilated (refer to Fig. 8-5).
For more detailed information, please refer to Chapters “PCU 50” and “HeatDissipation”.
10
297
313.6 80.3
27.5
61.5
17.4
358.
7
42
130
10
88.8
OP 015A
Cle
aran
ce r
equi
red
for
vent
ilatio
n
PCU 50 in the endposition
Lugs *)
Mounting bracket
57.5
Mou
ntin
g br
acke
t
PC
U 5
0 sw
ung
out b
y 90
°
*) bottom: mounting bracket with hinged catches
Fig. 8-5 Mounting the PCU 50 to the OP 015A operator panel front (as seen from above)
Mounting position Permissible mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.
Notice
This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, Videolinkreceiver, ...).
8 OP 015A Operator Panel
04.048.5 Softkey labeling
8-109 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Screen saverCaution
If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.
To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide
/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced
8.5 Softkey labeling
The two vertical and two horizontal softkey bars can be assigned user-specificfunctions. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys.
Blank labels are already installed on delivery (see Subsection 8.4.1).
If required, you can have new labels prepared and printed by Rafi or a screen-printing shop. See Fig. 8-7 for dimensions.
Procedure:
1. Undo the four PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from theoperator panel front.
2. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operatorpanel front (refer to Fig. 8-3).
3. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel front and secure by tightening thescrews.
If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled, omit steps 1. and 3.
Making the labels
Inserting the strips
8 OP 015A Operator Panel
04.048.6 Technical data
8-110 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
8.6 Technical data
Table 8-2 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front side IP65 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Power supply (via I/OUSB cable and display cable)
Display Backlightinverter
Logic / USB(with / without
load)
VoltageCurrent (typ. / max. mA;approx.)
5 V +/– 5%420 / 600
12 V +/–10%900 / 1050
5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1200
Power consumption Typical, approx. 15 W Maximum approx. 24 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 483 mmHeight: 355 mmDepth: 52 mm
Mounting depth: 42 mmincl. PCU 50: 130 mm
Weight approx. 9 kg
Tightening torques, max.Tension jack
screws:0.5 Nm
M3 screws: 0.8 Nm
M4 screws: 1.8Nm
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3
300 m/s2, 6 ms,18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
Display
Size 15 ” TFT
Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels
MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)
8 OP 015A Operator Panel
04.048.7 Spare parts
8-111 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
8.7 Spare parts
8.7.1 Spare parts list
Spare parts for the OP 015A include (refer to Fig. 8-6):
Designation Order number Comment
Front panel 6FC5248–0AF15–0AA0
without LCD unit, without mouse,without keyboard controller,
without direct control key submo-dule
USB mouse 6FC5247–0AF01–0AA0 –
Direct controlkey submo-dule
6FC5247–0AF11–0AA0 –
Caps 6FC5248–0AF05–0AA0 for USB port (10)
Tensionjackset
6FC5248–0AF06–0AA0 6 jacks
Mountingbracket (x 2)
6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0for PCU or Videolink
receiver behind operator panelfront
(x 2) 6FC5248–0AF20–3AA0
for PCU and videolink transmitterbehind operator panel front
Keyboard controller
LCD unit
Backlight withbacklightinverter
Front panel
MouseCap for the USBport
Display support
Direct control keysubmodule
Fig. 8-6 Spare parts for the OP 015A operator panel front
8 OP 015A Operator Panel
04.048.7 Spare parts
8-112 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
16.67
25.3
8
210
297
8
12
( )50 5
Center of the key
Part2
Part1
Fig. 8-7 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels
8.7.2 Spare part replacement
Caution
Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger thatsensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks is self-explanatory andis therefore not described.
The replacement of the front panel and the mouse is described in Chapter “Op-erator Panel Front OP 012” in Section “Spare part replacement”.
8 OP 015A Operator Panel
9-113 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide,incl. Videolink Receiver
The following description applies to the components:
Designation Properties Order number
SINUMERIK 15” TFT operator panelFor integrated installation 6FC5203-0AF50-0AA0
SINUMERIK 15 TFT operator panelfront 416 mm wide, with mech. keysi l Vid li k R i
For distributed installation up to 10 m 6FC5203-0AF50-1AA0yincl. Videolink Receiver For distributed installation up to 20 m 6FC5203-0AF50-2AA0
SINUMERIK 810D/840D machine
Variant Milling, mech. keys, rapid tra-verse and feed override, mouse,standard / US layout
6FC5203-0AF50-3AA0
SINUMERIK 810D/840D machinecontrol panel, 416 mm wide Variant Turning, mech. keys, hand-
wheel and feed override, mouse,standard / US layout
6FC5203-0AF50-4AA0
SINUMERIK operator panel front, vi-deolink transmitter for distributed
1–10 m 6FC5247-0AF20-0AA0deolink transmitter for distributedinstallation 1–20 m 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0
SINUMERIK 810D/840D mountingbracketfor mounting PCU and video link
Flat mounting 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0
for mounting PCU and video linktransmitter with distributed configura-tion
Upright mounting 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0
SINUMERIK 810D/840D mountingbracket
Mounting of PCU behind operatorpanel front
6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0
Video link cable 5 m 6FX2002-1VL01-1AF01)
Video link cablefor connection between 10 m 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA01)for connection betweendisplay unit and video link transmitter,with detachable rack
15 m 6FX2002-1VL01-1BF01)with detachable rack
20 m 6FX2002-1VL01-1CA01)
1) ...–1XX0: XX is the length code: A = 0, B = 1, etc.
Validity
9
04.049.1 Overview
9-114 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.1 Overview
The 15” TFT operator panel (416 mm wide) comprises
an operator panel front with preassembled videolink receiver,
a machine control panel (MCP) with CNC keyboard (QWERTY) with integratedmouse.
The PCU belonging to the overall system (see Fig. 9-1) is installed separately from theoperator panel (distributed installation).
Caution
The PCU should not be mounted in the “air flow downwards” position (i.e. the interfacesat the top) to prevent heat accumulation.
Information is transferred between the NC controller and PCU, operator panel front andMCP using MPI, USB and videolink transmission technology (see Fig. 9-1).
Note
Where the Windows NT operating system is used, the USB interface only supportskeyboards and mouse units.
If other USB devices are used, the noise immunity of the entire system may be reduced.The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices.
The operator panel front consists of a 15” display with horizontal and vertical softkeys (inthe form of short-stroke keys) with preinstalled videolink receiver.
In the case of turning and milling technologies, the MCP keys are labeled differently, thedisplays on the operator panel front are different and a handwheel instead of the secondoverride switch is provided for the turning variant.
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.2 System features
9-115 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.2 System features
The operator panel (see Fig. 9-1) consists of
an operator panel front with integrated operator control functions in the form of verticaland horizontal softkeys and a preinstalled videolink receiver, and
a machine control panel with integrated CNC keyboard
Since the PCU is installed physically separated from the operator panel front (distributedinstallation), a data transmission line has been created:
The operator panel front (operator panel front + MCP) communicates with the PCU bymeans of a cable and a videolink transmitter. The PCU transmits the image data us-ing videolink technology and the keyboard data using USB technology.
As a result, the PCU and operator panel can be installed up to 20 m apart (XGA reso-lution).
The NC and MCP functions on the operator panel communicate via MPI.
NC and PCU also communicate by means of MPI.
Only TFT displays (12” and 15”) are supported
Hardware support for USB only for version 1.1 and earlier
There is an EMERGENCY STOP button on the operator panel. This also has to be wiredup (see Fig. 9-8).
The operator panel and PCU must be supplied with 24V.
Note
To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel front should beswitched on at the same time as the PCU using the 24V supply.
Operator panel
Communi-cation
EMERGENCYSTOP
Power supply
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.3 Description of functions
9-116 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.3 Description of functions
9.3.1 Overview of function blocks
The entire system is shown in the schematic diagram in Fig. 9-1.
1. Operator panel front with videolink receiver (behind the operator panel front, not vis-ible in the diagram)
2. MCP with QWERTY keyboard and machine control panel (MCP)
3. Videolink transmitter
4. PCU
5. NC unit
The subject of this hardware description are the function blocks 1 to 3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PCU
QW
ER
TY
MC
P
Videolinktransmitter
Operator panel front with videolink receiver
15” TFT
Machine control panel
NC
X103 X104
X101
X102
MP
I
MPI
US
B
Videolinkwith USB
X201
X202
X203/204
X206
X205
X301
X302(USB-B)
X303/304(2 x USB-A)
X401
X404(24 V)
EMERGENCY STOP
Override
Override/handwheel
(24 V)
(2x USB-A)
(USB-A)
1. + 2. = operator panel
Fig. 9-1 Function blocks of SINUMERIK operator panel 15” TFT (width 416 mm)
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.3 Description of functions
9-117 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.3.2 Operator panel front
Resolution: XGA (1024x768 pixels), 15” TFT
Control elements: Horizontal and vertical softkeys
Interfaces: Inputs:– 1 x Videolink MDR 36– 1 x USB-B– 1 x 24V power supply, 3-pin terminal
Outputs:– 1 x plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock– 2 x USB-A
Dimensions: W x H x D (in mm): 416 x 382 x 65
Bearing edge: Top/bottom: 18 mmRight/left: 16 mm
Fastening: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5
Seal: To be provided by customer
Degree of protection: Max. IP54 at front / IP00 at rear
9.3.3 Machine control panel for turning and milling
1. QWERTY keyboard area
The QWERTY keyboard features:
MF2 keyboard (without function keys)
Operating area keys: MACHINE, PROGRAM, OFFSET, PROGRAM MANAGER,ALARM and CUSTOM
Other keys: ALARM CANCEL, HELP, GROUP CHANNEL, INSERT, SELECT andNEXT WINDOW
Integrated mouse
2. MCP area
The MCP features:
54 keys (technology-specific and manufacturer-specific)
Turning: – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %, 23 latched positions)– 1 x handwheel (100 pulses/revolution), wheel diameter approx. 60 mm
Milling: – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %, 23 latched positions)– 1 x rapid traverse override (0 – 100 %, 23 latched positions)
3. Other operator panel components
1 x EMERGENCY STOP button, 2-channel (small)
1 x illuminated key, machine ON (22 mm system).
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.3 Description of functions
9-118 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
4. Interfaces
Inputs: – 1 x plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock– 1 x USB-B 2 – 1 x MPI interface, Sub-D, 9-pin– 1 x 24V power supply: terminal (3-pin)
Outputs: – 2 x USB-A– 2 x 4-pin (reserved for optional interfaces, not fitted in standard production)
5. Dimensions
– W x H x D (mm): 416 x 370 x 107 (turning) / 84 (milling)
6. Fastening: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5
7. Seal: To be provided by customer
8. Degree of protection: Max. IP54 at front, IP00 at rear
9.3.4 Videolink transmitter
1. Videolink transmitter 1 ... 10 m
Function: Transmitter module for video transmission
Interfaces:
– Inputs:1 x plug connector (20-pin) with lock1 x plug connector (26-pin) with lock
– Outputs:1 x videolink MDR 36 for 1, ..., 10 m (max. 20m) (video data plus USB signals)1 x USB-A
2. Videolink transmitter 1 ... 20 m
Function: As above, plus ExtremeUSB for 20m and branch for second operatorpanel front with videolink output for 1 ... 20 m
Interfaces: Outputs– 2 x videolink MDR 36 for 1, ..., 15 m (max. 20 m)– 2 x USB-A
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.3 Description of functions
9-119 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.3.5 Cable
1. Videolink cable
5 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1AF0
10 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA0
15 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1BF0
20 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1CA0
Fig. 9-2 Videolink cable
2. MPI cable: MPI/PROFIBUS cable (cut-to-length) and connector from Siemens
3. USB connection cable between X205 (operator panel front ) and X301 (MCP):10-pin ribbon cable with fitted socket connectors (supplied with operator panel front)
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-120 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.4 Interfaces
9.4.1 Hardware interfaces – overview
Table 9-1 Overview of hardware interfaces
Interface
Type Function Designation Type
Operatorpanel front
– Videolink interface (incl. USB)– USB input (reserved)– 2 x USB output– USB output
– 24V power supply
X201
x202X203/204
X205
X206
MDR 36
USB-B2 x USB-A
Plug connector, 2 x 5-pinwith lock
terminal (3-pin)
– USB input X301 Plug connector, 2 x 5-pinith l kMCP
(QWERTY
p
– USB input X302
g pwith lockUSB-B(QWERTY
keyboard)– USB input (reserved – option for X301)
X302 USB-Bkeyboard) (reserved option for X301)
– USB output X303/304 2 x USB-A
– MPI interfaceOptional interface
X401X402
SUB-D, 9-pinPlug connector 1 x 4 pin
MCP
– Optional interface (Input, reserved)
X402 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pin
MCP (Input, reserved)– Optional interface
(Input reserved)X403 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pin
(Input, reserved)– 24V power supply X404 Terminal (3-pin)
Videolinktransmitter1 ... 10 m
– Videolink (incl. USB)– USB interface– LVDS input– I/O interface for operator panel front for PC– LVDS output– I/O interface for local operator panel front
X101X102X103X104
X107X108
MDR 36USB-A
Plug connector, 2 x 10-pinPlug connector, 2 x 13-pin
Plug connector, 2 x 10-pinPlug connector, 2 x 13-pin
Videolinktransmitter1 ... 20 m
As for videolink transmitter 1 ...10 m; plus:– second videolink (incl. USB)– USB interface
X105X106
MDR 36USB-A
Cable
– Video link transmitter <=> Display unit
– Videolink transmitter <=> PCU
Videolink
LVDS
5 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1AF010 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA015 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1BF020 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1CA0
Flat ribbon 20-pinCable – Videolink transmitter <=> PCU– Videolink transmitter <=> PCU– Display unit <=> Operatorpanel front– NC <=> Operator panel front
LVDSI/O
USB
MPI
Flat ribbon, 20-pinFlat ribbon, 26-pinFlat ribbon, 10-pin
Standard Profibus
The abbreviations in the “Signal type” column in the tables below have the fol-lowing meanings:
I Input O OutputB Bidirectional V Power supplyOC Open collector
Signal types
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-121 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.4.2 Interface assignment for operator panel front
Connector designation: X201; Mini D Ribbon (MDR), multiple contact strip (36-pin)
Table 9-2 X201 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 A0M I
2 A0P
II
3 A1M IData OPENLDI
4 A1PII
Data OPENLDI
5 A2M I6 A2P
II
7 CLK1M II Clock OPENLDI
8 CLK1PI Clock OPENLDI
9 ENVCC_12VI
Enabling of LCD power supply(12V level)
10 M_12V
IVI Reference ground
for signals with 12V level
11 ShieldShield for twisted pair
cables; connected to ground
12, ..., 21 ––– Reserved
22 M (GND) Reserved (ground)
23 ––– Reserved
24 M (GND) Reserved (ground)
25 M (GND) V Ground
26 ShieldShield
for twisted pair cables
27 RX_A / USB_MI/B
Received data A(Extreme USB) / USB data–
28 RX_B / USB_P
I/BI/B Received data B
(Extreme USB)/USB data+
29 TX_AO
Transmitted data A (ExtremeUSB)
30 TX_B
OO Transmitted data B (Extreme
USB)
31 BL_ON_12VI
Backlight On (12V signal)
32 M_12VI
VI Ground
33 XRESET_HUB IRESET to hub
(low active, 12V signal)
34 M_12V Ground
35 XPAN–PRESO
Operator panel front is present
36 XPAN–PRES
OI Ground of videolink transmitter,
transmitted to Pin 35
Twisted Pair (shielded)
X201 (Videolink incl. USB)
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-122 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X202; USB socket connector (4-pin), type B
Table 9-3 X202 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 –––Reserved
(capacitive connection to ground)
2 USB_DMB
Data–; USB channel 0
3 USB_DPB
Data+; USB channel 0
4 USB_GND VGround
for external USB interface
Connector designation: X203 / 204; USB socket connector (2x4-pin),type A
Table 9-4 X203 / 204 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
A1 P5V_3_fused VO+5 V (protected)
for external USB interface
A2 USB_D3MB
Data–; USB channel 3
A3 USB_D3PB
Data+; USB channel 3
A4 USB_GND VGround
for external USB interface
B1 ––– VO+5 V (protected)
for external USB interface
B2 USB_D4MB
Data–; USB channel 4
B3 USB_D4PB
Data+; USB channel 4
B4 USB_GND VGround
for external USB interface
Connector designation: X205; plug connector (2x5-pin), grid 2.54 mmInterface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA)
Table 9-5 X205 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 P5V_fused VO+5 V (protected)
for external USB interface
2 USB_DMB
Data–; USB channel 0
3 USB_DPB
Data+; USB channel 0
4 / 5 M (GND) V Ground
6, ..., 10 NC ––– Not connected
X202 (USB interfaceinput)
X203 / 204 (USBinterface output)
X205 (QWERTYinterface)
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-123 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X206; terminal block (3-pin)
Table 9-6 X206 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 P24 24V potential
2 M24 V Ground 24V
3 Shield Shield connection
Accessible internally only
with “Extreme USB”: both switches set to 1 (factory setting)
without “Extreme USB”: both switches set to 2
9.4.3 Interface assignment for QWERTY keyboard
The QWERTY keyboard has a total of five USB interfaces, four of which can beused by the user (see Fig. 9-1). The integrated mouse is connected to the fifthUSB interface (X305).
Interface X301 connects the keyboard to the videolink receiver. The maxi-mum cable length is 10 m.
The keyboard can be connected to the PCU using interface X302 and acable of max. 5 m in length.
The two interfaces X303 and X304 are accessible by means of a two-tierUSB-A connector.
The two interfaces X301 and X302 (see Fig. 9-1) are connected in parallel andconfigured as “high powered interfaces” with max. 500 mA, 5 V.
X301 is used to form the connection to the videolink receiver; max. permissi-ble ribbon cable length: 1 m.
X302 supports a standard USB cable with length of max. 5 m. This cablecan be used to form a direct connection to, for example, the PCU (e.g. forloading customer-specific keyboard tables).
Caution
The two interfaces X301 and X302 should not be used simultaneouslybecause they are connected in parallel.
X206 (24 V powersupply)
Coding switch S1
X301 / X302
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-124 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X301; plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock
Table 9-7 X301 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 P5 V Supply voltage 5 V
2 USB_PB
Data +
3 USB_MB
Data–
4/5 M (GND) V Ground
6/7/8 NC – Not assigned
9 SDA B Serial data for EEPROM
10 SCL I Clock for EEPROM
Connector designation: X302; USB-B connector (4-pin)
Table 9-8 X302 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 P5 V Power supply +5 V
2 USB_DM0B
Data–; channel 0
3 USB_DP0B
Data+; channel 0
4 M (GND) V Ground
X303 / 304 is a double standard USB-A connector (see Fig. 9-1). X303 andX304 are configured as “low powered interfaces” with max. of 100 mA, 5 V.
Connector designation: X303; USB-A connector (4-pin)
Table 9-9 X303 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
A1 1P5 VPower supply +5 V
for external USB device
A2 USB_DM2B
Data–; channel 2
A3 USB_DP2B
Data+; channel 2
A4 M (GND) V Ground
Connector designation: X304; USB-A connector (4-pin)
Table 9-10 X304 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
B1 2P5 VPower supply +5 V
for external USB device
B2 USB_DM3B
Data–; channel 0
B3 USB_DP3B
Data+; channel 0
B4 M (GND) V Ground
X303 / X304
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-125 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.4.4 Interface assignment for MCP
The MCP is connected to the MPI of the NC by means of interface X401.
Connector designation: X401; 9–pin Sub–D socket
Table 9-11 X401 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1/2 NC – Not assigned
3 RS_OPI B RS-485 data
4 ORTSAS_OPIO
Output Request to Send, user in-terface
5 M5EXTV
5V external ground
6 P5EXTV
5V external potential
7 NC – Not assigned
8 XRS_OPI B RS-485 data
9 IRTSPG_OPI I In Request to Send PG
Baud rate (max. of 1.5 Mbaud) and station address of the MCP at the MPI busare set at DIP switch S3 of the keyboard controller.
Not available
See X206 (Subsection 9.4.2)
Depending on the panel variant, the operator panel front has one or two axisoverride switches. These switches are connected to the MCP by means of rib-bon cables.
Connector X11 is used to connect the rotary selector switch for feedrate over-ride (32 graduations), irrespective of its installation position.
With the “milling” version, the rotary selector switch for rapid traverse (32graduations) is connected to X12.
With the “turning” version, a handwheel is fitted in place of the rotary selectorswitch. The handwheel is directly connected to the NC controller.
X401 (MPI)
X402 / 403
X404 (powersupply)
X11 / 12 (axisoverride interface)
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-126 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X11; plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock
Table 9-12 X11 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1/2 NC – Not assigned
3/4 M (GND) V Ground
5 NC – Not assigned
Setting of override rotary selectorswitch
6 IN3_4 Significance 16
7 IN3_3 Significance 8
8 IN3_2 I Significance 4
9 IN3_1 Significance 2
10 IN3_0 Significance 1
Connector designation: X12; (optional interface for milling variant) Plug connector, 2 x 5-pin, with lock
Table 9-13 X12 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1/2 NC – Not assigned
3/4 M (GND) V Ground
5 NC – Not assigned
Setting of override rotary selectorswitch
6 IN7_4 Significance 16
7 IN7_3 Significance 8
8 IN7_2 I Significance 4
9 IN7_1 Significance 2
10 IN7_0 Significance 1
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-127 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.4.5 Interface assignment for videolink transmitter
Connector designation: X101/105; Mini D Ribbon (MDR), multiple contact strip, 36-pin
Table 9-14 X101/105 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 A0M O
2 A0P
OO
3 A1M OData OPENLDI
4 A1POO
Data OPENLDI
5 A2M O6 A2P
OO
7 CLK1M OO Clock OPENLDI
8 CLK1PO Clock OPENLDI
9 ENVCC_XEnabling of LCD power supply
(12V level)
10 M (GND) Ground
11 ShieldShield for twisted pair cables;
connected to ground
12, ..., 22 –––
23 ––– Reserved
24 –––
25 M (GND) V Ground
26 ShieldShield for twisted pair
cables
27 TX_A / USB_MO/B
Transmitted data A (ExtremeUSB) / USB data–
28 TX_B / USB_P
O/BO/B Transmitted data B (Extreme
USB) / USB data+
29 RX_A I Received data A (Extreme USB)
30 RI_BII Received data B (Extreme USB)
31 BL_ON_xO
Backlight On (12V signal)
32 M (GND)OO Ground
33 XRESET_HUB ORESET to downstream hub (low
active, 12V signal)
34 M (GND) Ground
35 XPAN–PRES_x Operator panel front is present
36 M (GND) V Ground
Twisted pair (shielded)
X101 / X105(Videolink incl.USB)
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-128 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA)
Connector designation: X102 / X106; USB socket connector (4-pin),type A
Table 9-15 X102 / X106 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 USB_P5V_fused VO+ 5 V (fused) for external USB in-
terface
2 USB_D0MO
Data–, USB channel 0
3 USB_D0PO
Data+, USB channel 0
4 USB_GND V Ground for external USB interface
Note
X106 is not available at present.
Connector designation: X103; plug connector (2x10-pin), grid 2.54 mm
Table 9-16 X103 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1/2 P5V VI + 5 V
3 RXIN0–I
LVDS input signal Bit 0 (–)
4 RXIN0+I
LVDS input signal Bit 0 (+)
5/6 P3V3 VI +3.3 V
7 RXIN1–I
LVDS input signal Bit 1 (–)
8 RXIN1+I
LVDS input signal Bit 1 (+)
9/10 GND V Ground
11 RXIN2–I
LVDS input signal Bit 2 (–)
12 RXIN2+I
LVDS input signal Bit 2 (+)
13/14 GND V Ground
15 RXCLKIN–I
LVDS cycle clock signal (–)
16 RXCLKIN+I
LVDS cycle clock signal (+)
17/18 GND V Ground
19/20 ––– ––– Reserved
X102 / X106 (USBdownstream)
X103 (LVDSinput from PCU)
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-129 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X104; plug connector (2-row), grid 2.54 mm
Table 9-17 X104 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 GND V Ground
2 P12V VIPower supply for inverter (max.
1.1A)
3 BL_ON I Backlight On (5 V ... 12 V = On)
4 P5V_fused VI + 5 V VCC (fused)
5 GND V Ground
6 P3V3_fused VI + 3.3 V VCC (fused)
7, ..., 10 ––– ––– Reserved
11 P5V_fused VI + 5 V VCC (fused)
12 USB_D1MB
USB data– Channel 1
13 USB_D1PB
USB data+ Channel 1
14 GND V Ground
15 LCDSEL0 Display type–Select signal 0
16 LCDSEL1 Display type–Select signal 1
17 LCDSEL2O
Display type–Select signal 2
18 LCDSEL3O
Display type–Select signal 3
19 RESET_NReset signal (low active, withpull-up resistor set to high)
20 ––– –––(Connection for
system loudspeaker)
21 ––– ––– (HD LED) *)
22 ––– ––– (MPI/DP LED) *)
23 ––– ––– (Ethernet LED) *)
24 TEMP_ERR O (Temperature error LED) *)
25 ––– ––– (Watchdog error LED) *)
26 ––– ––– (Watchdog OK LED) *)
*) Anode with 1 kΩ in series on mainboard
X104 (IO interfacefor operator panelsfrom PC)
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-130 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X107; plug connector (2 x 10-pin), grid 2.54 mm
Table 9-18 X107 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1/2 P5V VO + 5 V
3 TXOUT0–O
LVDS output signal Bit 0 (–)
4 TXOUT0+O
LVDS output signal Bit 0 (+)
5/6 P3V3 VO +3.3 V
7 TXOUT1–O
LVDS output signal Bit 1 (–)
8 TXOUT1+O
LVDS output signal Bit 1 (+)
9/10 GND V Ground
11 TXOUT2–O
LVDS output signal Bit 2 (–)
12 TXOUT2+O
LVDS output signal Bit 2 (+)
13/14 GND V Ground
15 TXCLKOUT–O
LVDS cycle clock signal (–)
16 TXCLKOUT+O
LVDS cycle clock signal (+)
17/18 GND V Ground
19/20 ––– ––– Reserved
Connector designation: X108; plug connector (2 x 13-pin), grid 2.54 mm
Table 9-19 X108 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 GND V Ground
2 P12V VIPower supply for inverter (max.
1.1 A)
3 BL_ON I Backlight On (5 V ... 12 V = On)
4 P5V_fused VI + 5 V VCC (fused)
5 GND V Ground
6 P3V3_fused VI + 3.3 V VCC (fused)
7, ..., 10 NC ––– Not connected
11 P5V_fused VI + 5 V VCC (fused)
12 USB_D1MB
USB data– Channel 1
13 USB_D1PB
USB data+ Channel 1
14 GND V Ground
15, ..., 23 NC ––– Not connected
24 TEMP_ERR O(Temperature error LED; anodewith 1 kΩ in series on mother
board)
25/26 NC ––– Not connected
X107 (LVDSoutput to operatorpanel front)
X108 (IO interfaceto local operatorpanel front)
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-131 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Factory setting for selection of display type: Setting 9 corresponds to 15” TFT display.
Note
All the displays used in a system must be of the same type (e.g. 3 times 15”TFT XGA resolution).
If the setting is incorrect, the display may be irreparably damaged in a shorttime.
10 m transmitter variant (1 x Videolink): 1 and 3 = any or not S2 fitted
2, 4 – 8 = OFF
20 m transmitter variant (2 x Videolink): 1 and 3 = ON2, 4 – 8 = OFF
9.4.6 Internal status displays (LEDs)
The following LEDs indicate the operating status of the transmitter:
Table 9-20 Operating status indicators on the transmitter
Designation Color Source Meaning
+3V3 Red On ExtremeUSB module at + 3.3 V supply OK
+5V RedOn ExtremeUSB module at
X21/22/23 + 5 V supply OK
H1 Green ExtremeUSB module at Host OK
H2 GreenExtremeUSB module at
X21/22/23 Link OK
+3V3 Red On ExtremeUSB module at + 3.3 V supply OK
+5V RedOn ExtremeUSB module at
X11/12/13 + 5 V supply OK
H3 Green ExtremeUSB module at Host OK
H4 GreenExtremeUSB module at
X11/12/13 Link OK
When the ExtremeUSB line is operating properly, both green LEDs of the transmittermodule (LEX) and both green LEDs of the receiver module (REX) light up on the video-link transmitter.
Rotary selectorswitch S1
DIL switch S2
Transmitter
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-132 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The following LEDs indicate the operating status of the receiver:
Table 9-21 Operating status indicators on the receiver
Designation Color Source Meaning
+3V3 RedOn the ExtremeUSB module
+ 3.3 V supply OK
+5V RedOn the ExtremeUSB module
+ 5 V supply OK
H1 GreenExtremeUSB module
USB port OK
H2 GreenExtremeUSB module
Link OK
H3 Green OpenLDI receiver Video interface (OpenLDI) active
H4 Green +12V, +3.3V, +5V of powersection
Power o.k.
When the ExtremeUSB line is operating properly, both green LEDs of the transmittermodule (LEX) and both green LEDs of the receiver module (REX) light up on the video-link receiver.
9.4.7 Software interfaces
Table 9-22 Layout of the machine control keys (applies to “turning” and “milling”)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
43 44 45 46 47 48 4940 42
50 51 52 53 54
Low-active keys
Receiver
Key layouton the MCP
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.4 Interfaces
9-133 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 9-23 Assignment of input words/bytes to the machine control keys(Key 00, ..., 54 corresponds to the key numbers in Table 9-22)
Input Bit 7(MSB)
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0(LSB)
Word 0Low
Key 40*)
Key 36 Key 35 Key 34 Key 30 Key 00 Key 10 Key 20
Word 0High
Key 42 Key 09Key 08
*)Key 07 Key 04 Key 02 Key 01 Key 11
Word 1Low
Key 46Key 45
*)Key 03 Key 05 Key 43 Key 33 Key 23 Key 13
Word 1High
Key 31 Key 06 Key 14Over-
ride1 EOver-
ride1 DOver-
ride1 COver-
ride1 BOver-
ride1 A
Word 2Low
Key 49 Key 47 Key 28 Key 15 Key 16 Key 17 Key 19 Key 21
Word 2High
Key 22 Key 24 Key 25 Key 26 Key 18 Key 38 Key 29 Key 27
Word 3Low
Key 32 Key 37 Key 39 Key 44 Key 12 Key 48 Key 50 Key 51
Word 3High
Key 52 Key 53 Key 54Over-
ride2 EOver-
ride2 DOver-
ride2 COver-
ride2 BOver-
ride2 A
*) Low-active keys
Remarks:
The “Override2” function only exists in the “milling” version. This function does notexist in the “turning” version; the bits concerned are each set to 1.
Significance with override: A = 1, B = 2, C = 4, D = 8, E = 16.
Input imageon the MCP
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.5 Mechanical design
9-134 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.5 Mechanical design
9.5.1 Operator panel front
Dimensions in mm
Videolink receiver
Fig. 9-3 Front, side and rear view of operator panel front
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.5 Mechanical design
9-135 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Videolinkreceiver
Supporting plate
Connection forvideo link cable
Keyboard interface
Operator panel front
Power supply
2x USB-A
Fig. 9-4 Rear perspective of the operator panel front with premounted videolink receiver
9.5.2 MCP
The following diagram shows the front and side view of the “milling” MCP. Fig. 9-7 showsthe rear view with the connections, programming switch S3 and the status LEDs.
Dimensions in mmThreaded bolt M5(for detailed drawing see Fig. 9-6)
Fig. 9-5 “Milling” MCP
Milling MCP
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.5 Mechanical design
9-136 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Welded threaded bolts (see Fig. 9-5) instead of drilled holes with press-in sleeves areused to secure the operator panel front and the MCP.
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
523
10
Spacer ringThreaded bolt M5
M5
Front panel
Fig. 9-6 Bolt for securing operator panel front and MCP
X302
X303/4
X40
1
X404
X402 X403
X301
87654321
H1H2H3H4
S3
Grounding connectionM5 thread
Fig. 9-7 Rear view of MCP (“milling” and “turning”) showing position of the connections,programming switch S3 and the status LEDs H1, ..., H4
Table 9-24 Meaning of status LEDs
No. Color Meaning
H1 Red Hardware faults
H2 Red Temperature error
H3 Green Power OK
H4 Yellow Operator panel front interface active
Threadedbolt
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.5 Mechanical design
9-137 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 9-25 Assignment of DIP Fix switch S3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning /value
Meaning /value
Baud rate
onoff
1.5 Mbaud187.5 kbaud
Cyclictransmit time frame
Receptionmonitoring
onoffoff
offonoff
200 ms100 ms50 ms
2400 ms1200 ms600 ms
Bus address
offoff 0
off
offon 1
off
onoff 2
off
onon 3
off
offoff 4
on
offon 5
on
onoff 6
onon 7
offoff 8
off
offon 9
off
onoff 10
on
onon 11
on
offoff 12
on
offon 13
on
onoff 14
onon 15
onoff
Interface to MPI customer operator panelStandard hardware
Fig. 9-8 shows the wiring of the emergency stop button.
1 12 2
Fig. 9-8 Block diagram of emergency stop button
EMERGENCYSTOP
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.5 Mechanical design
9-138 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
All of the information given above for the “milling” MCP also applies to the “turning” MCP.
Exceptions (see diagram below): – A handwheel is integrated in place of the second override switch.– The keys are different.
Dimensions in mmThreaded bolt M5(for detailed drawing see Fig. 9-6)Exchangeable key caps
Exchangeable keys
Fig. 9-9 “Turning” MCP
Turning MCP
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.5 Mechanical design
9-139 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.5.3 Videolink transmitter
The following diagram shows the PCU with the mounted videolink transmitter(see Subsection 9.6.3 for information on mounting).
Dimensions in mm
PCU 50
Videolinktransmitter
PCU 50
114
Ret
aini
ng s
crew
s fo
r vi
deol
ink
tran
smitt
er
Mounting bracket
PC
U 5
0
Fig. 9-10 PCU 50 with videolink transmitter
PCU
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.6 Installation
9-140 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.6 Installation
Operator panel front with premounted videolink receiver
Machine control panel with QWERTY keyboard and MCP
Videolink transmitter
9.6.1 Operator panel front
The panel cutout for the operator panel front is shown in the following diagram:
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Dimensions in mm
386+1
329+
1
6
4.5
341
395
6.
5
Fig. 9-11 Panel cutout for operator panel front
Individualcomponents
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.6 Installation
9-141 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The operator panel front is connected to the other components by means of cables(see Fig. 9-1)
Machine control panel (MCP):For noise immunity reasons, the USB ribbon cable connection from the operatorpanel front (interface X205) to the MCP (interface X301) must always be installedand secured close to the top side of the metal plate.
No other cables which could cause noise interference should be installed in theimmediate vicinity.
Videolink receiver:The videolink cable connects interface X201 of the videolink receiver (mounted onthe rear of the operator panel front) to interface X101 of the videolink transmitter(mounted on the rear of the PCU).
The cable is secured at the U-shaped panel cutouts on the rear of the operatorpanel front using cable ties (see picture below).Securing in this way also relieves the strain on connectors which do not havestrong connector catches (e.g. USB).
Videolink cable Cable tie Panel cutouts for cable attachment
Videolink receiver
Operator Panel Front(rear)
Fig. 9-12 Cable attachment on rear of operator panel front
Notes
In cases where a high degree of noise interference is likely or the distancebetween the operator panel front and the MCP is relatively large, it isadvisable to purchase USB cables with shielding. Interface X203 behind thefront and interface X302 behind the machine control panel are thenconnected to each other. The ribbon cable does not need to be fitted in thiscase.
Connector X302 on the machine control panel (QWERTY keyboard) can alsobe connected directly to the PCU or a PC using a standard USB cable.
Cableconnections
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.6 Installation
9-142 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Screen saverCaution
If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.
To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide
/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced
9.6.2 Machine control panel
The panel cutout for the machine control panel is shown in the following diagram:
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Dimensions in mm
384 +1
334
+1
7.5
5.5
349
395
6.
5
Fig. 9-13 Panel cutout for machine control panel
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.6 Installation
9-143 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Proceed as follows:
1. Position the operator panel front so that its four threaded bolts (Fig. 9-9) are in-serted in the mounting holes of the prepared panel cutout (Fig. 9-13). The spacer rings (Fig. 9-9) ensure that the rubber seal is not squashed wheninstalled.
2. Secure the operator panel front from the rear side using the M5 nuts and suitablecirclips.
3. Attach the ground connection (see Fig. 9-7).
4. Connect the interfaces, except X404 (see Fig. 9-7).
5. Connect X404 to the 24 V power supply (see Fig. 9-7).
9.6.3 Videolink transmitter
The videolink transmitter is fitted between the mounting brackets under the PCU(see Fig. 9-10).
1. Plug the supplied cables into the connectors of the videolink transmitter, asshown in the photo below.
Hingebolt
Threaded holesfor fasteningscrews
Fig. 9-14 Videolink transmitter with connecting cables
Caution
To prevent damage, plug the cable connectors only into the sockets shown inthe photo.
2. Mount the first mounting bracket on the PCU (see picture below).
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.6 Installation
9-144 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Mounting bracket
Fig. 9-15 PCU 50 with mounting brackets
3. Hook the videolink transmitter into this mounting bracket (see Fig. 9-17).
4. Mount the second mounting bracket after attaching it to the opposite hingebolt (see Fig. 9-14) of the videolink transmitter.
5. Plug the connecting cable into the connectors on the PCU (see picture be-low).
PCU 50
Videolinktransmitter
Fig. 9-16 Videolink transmitter hooked into place with the hinge bolts
6. Swivel the videolink transmitter into place on the PCU (see picture below).
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.6 Installation
9-145 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Hingebolts
PCU 50PCU 50
Fig. 9-17 Hinge of the videolink transmitter before being locked in position
7. Push the videolink transmitter forwards in the locking mechanism (to the leftin Fig. 9-17, see arrow) until it locks down into place (see picture below).
Mountingscrew
Hingebolts
PCU 50
Videolinktransmitter
PCU 50
Fig. 9-18 Videolink transmitter, locked in position and screwed tight
8. Secure the videolink transmitter to the mounting brackets with the screwssupplied (see Fig. 9-18).
The videolink transmitter is then securely attached to the PCU mounting brack-ets (see figure below) and can be mounted with the PCU in accordance withrequirements.
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.6 Installation
9-146 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
PCU 50
Videolinktransmitter
Fig. 9-19 Videolink transmitter fully mounted to the PCU 50
Caution
If it is necessary to dismantle the videolink transmitter, please release thefastening screws and slide the video transmitter horizontally before swiveling itaway from the PCU, in accordance with step 7. and Fig. 9-17. Otherwise, damage is likely.
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.7 Technical data
9-147 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.7 Technical data
Operator panel frontTable 9-26 Technical data for operator panel front
Dimensions (WxHxD) approx. 416 x 382 x 65mm
Weight approx. 6.5 kg
Display 15” TFT
Keys Vertical and horizontal softkeys (short-stroke keys)
Voltage supply Rated voltage 24 V, voltage range 19 – 31 V
Power consumption approx. 19 W
Interfaces Videolink, USB, 24 V terminal connection
Degree of protection Front: IP54; rear: IP00
Ambient temperatureduring operation
External: 0 °C to 45 °C(on display)
Internal: 0 °C to 55 °C
Ventilation Free convection, without fan
Housing Front panel: Stainless steel, brushed diagonally (grain 240)Rear panel: Galvanized steel plate
Machine control panelTable 9-27 Technical data for MCP
Dimensions (WxHxD) Turning: approx. 416 x 370 x107 mm
Milling: approx. 416 x 370 x 84 mm
Mounting depth max. 65 mm
Weight approx. 4.4 kg
Keys Mechanical short-stroke keys
Voltage supply Rated voltage 24 V, voltage range 19 – 31 V
Interfaces USB, MPI, 24 V terminal connection
Degree of protection Front: IP54; rear: IP00
Ambient temperatureduring operation
External Internalduring operation
0 °C to 45 °C (due to display) 0 °C to 55 °C
Ventilation Free convection, without fan
Housing As for operator panel front
Videolink transmitterTable 9-28 Technical data for videolink transmitter
Dimensions (WxHxD) approx 265 x 277 x 35 mmDimensions (WxHxD) approx. 265 x 277 x 35 mm
Weight approx. 2.2 kg with two brackets, without PCU
Voltage supply Videolink transmitter is supplied with power from the PCU
Interfaces Videolink, USB, LVDS, keyboard and special interface
Degree of protection IP00 / mounted on PCU: IP20
Ambient temperature 0 °C to 55 °C during operation
Ventilation Free convection, without fan
Housing Galvanized steel plate
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.8 Spare parts
9-148 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.8 Spare parts
The following spare part kits are available for the operator panel front 15” TFT(width 416 mm):
Table 9-29 Spare part kits for operator panel front 15” TFT
Name Description Order No. (MLFB)
HandwheelHandwheel for machine control panel,width 416mm, T-version 6FC5247-0AF50-0AA0
Rotary switchRotary selector switch for feedrate /rapid traverse override, 1x23G,grad=32, knob and cover
6FC5247-0AF50-1AA0
Mouse USB mouse for front 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0
EMERGENCYButton 3SB2000-1AC01
EMERGENCYSTOP 1)
Holder 3SB2908-0AASTOP 1)
Switching element 3SB2404-0C
Ill i t d kComplete 3SB3001-0AA71
Illuminated key1)
Switching element 3SB3400-0A1)Switching element with lamp 3SB3400-1D
1) Submit orders to SIEMENS Amberg
Remove the handwheel in the following way (see picture below):
1. Slacken the two hexagon-socket screws in the rotary knob and pull therotary knob off the spindle.
2. Undo the three M3 fastening screws using a T10 Torx screwdriver.
3. Pull the handwheel backwards out of the front panel and disconnect thewiring.
Handwheel spindle Fastening screws M3
O-ringGrub screw(hexagon socket)
Rotary knob (detached) HandwheelSupply terminals
Fig. 9-20 Removal of handwheel
Installation is performed in the reverse order (installation kit is shown on theright-hand side of Fig. 9-20). Make sure that the O-ring is fitted correctly.
Exchangehandwheel
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.8 Spare parts
9-149 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Remove the rotary switch in the following way (see picture below):
1. Prise the cap (cover) off the rotary knob (snap-on fitting!).
2. Loosen the nut of the collet using a wrench (width 10).
3. Pull the complete rotary knob off the shaft of the rotary selector switch.
4. Remove the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front sideusing a wrench (width 14).
5. Unplug the connector at the end of the rotary selector switch cable from thereceptacle.
6. Remove the rotary selector switch.
Fastening nut
Rotary knob
Cap
Scale
Rotary selector switch spindleCollet nut
Fig. 9-21 Removal of rotary selector switch
Install the rotary selector switch in the following way:
The installation kit for a rotary selector switch is shown on the left in the follow-ing picture.
Fastening nut
Terminal board
Rotary knob
Cap
Connecting cable
O-ring
Arrow ring
Fig. 9-22 Installation of rotary selector switch
1. Push the O-ring onto the shaft of the new rotary selector switch (for sealingpurposes).
2. Insert the rotary selector switch into the front cutout so that pressure is ap-plied to the O-ring.
3. Fasten the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front sideusing a wrench (width 14).
Exchange rotaryswitch
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.8 Spare parts
9-150 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
4. Attach the arrow ring to the rotary knob.
5. Attach the complete rotary knob to the shaft.
6. Tighten the collet nut of the rotary knob using a wrench (width 10). Whendoing so, make sure that the arrow point is aligned with “0”.
7. Place the cap (cover) on the rotary knob and snap on.
8. Connect the cable in the way shown on the right-hand side of Fig. 9-22.Observe the recommended cable folds.
The second rotary selector switch is installed in the same way, except that therecommended cable folds shown in the picture below should be used.
Fig. 9-23 Both rotary selector switches installed (top switch [right] not yet connected)
The following picture shows the mouse prior to removal.
Mouse boardConnecting cable Cable connector
Fastening screwClamping frame
Fig. 9-24 Mouse prior to removal
Replacement ofmouse
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.8 Spare parts
9-151 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Remove in the following way:
1. Unplug the cable connector from the mouse board.
2. Undo the four M3x6 fastening screws using a T10 Torx screwdriver.
3. Release the clamp frame.
The following picture shows how the unit should then look.
Fig. 9-25 Mouse fastening released
4. Lever the mouse out of the front panel.
The picture below shows the removed mouse.
Fig. 9-26 Removed mouse
Installation is performed in the reverse order.Make sure that the mouse symbol is the correct way up.
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
04.049.9 Heat dissipation
9-152 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
9.9 Heat dissipation
The following correlations apply to heat dissipation at the operator panel front(the surfaces of the front and bottom side are not considered when calculatingthe convection surface):
The heat produced by the operator panel front is generated almost exclusivelyby the display unit (approx. 19W). It is therefore sufficient to apply 20W as thebasis for calculation.
T1 T2
The necessary free convection surface area of the space to be enclosed (steel oraluminum sheet, 1.5 mm thick) is calculated, referred to a temperaturedifference T2 – T1 = T 10 K, approximately from:
Pvtot. [W]A [m2] =
5 T [K]
Example: T1 = 45 °C, T2 = 55 °CPvtot = 20 W
A = 0.4 m2
Ope
rato
r pa
nel f
ront
MCP
Fig. 9-27 Heat dissipation by means of natural convection
9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver
10-153 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm Wide,without Videolink Receiver
The following description applies to the components:
Designation Remarks Order number
SINUMERIK operator panel front Width 416 mm
With mech. keys, without integratedVideolink receiver
6FC5203–0AF50–0AA0
SINUMERIK machine control panelMCP 416C–M
Variant Milling, mech. keys,rapid traverse and feed override,mouse
6FC5203–0AF50–3AA1
SINUMERIK machine control panelMCP 416C–T
Variant Turning, mech. keys, hand-wheel and feed override, mouse
6FC5203–0AF50–4AA1
Validity
10
04.0410.1 Overview
10-154 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.1 Overview
The operator panel consists of
a 15” TFT operator panel front
a machine control panel (MCP 416C–M or T) with integrated CNC keyboardand mouse
The following diagram shows how these components are bedded into a com-plete, distributed system. For more information, see Chapter “Distributed Instal-lation”.
PCU
Machine control panel
15” TFT operator panel front
EMERGENCYSTOP
Override
Override/handwheel C
NC
key
boar
dar
ea
1)
1) The videolink receiver must be ordered separately
Con
trol
ele
men
tsar
ea
Videolinkreceiver
Videolinktransmitter
*) IO front interface 26-pin
**) LVDS 20-pin
1) Direct installation
Fig. 10-1 Config. with SINUMERIK 15” TFT operator panel front, 416 mm wide, without integrated videolink receiver
CautionThe PCU should not be mounted in the “air flow downwards” position (i.e. theinterfaces at the top) to prevent heat accumulation.
Note
The videolink receiver must be ordered separately. Order No.: 6FC5247–0AF22–0AA0
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.2 System features
10-155 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.2 System features
The operator panel (Fig. 10-1) consists of
an operator panel front with 15” display and integrated operator control functions inthe form of vertical and horizontal softkeys and
a machine control panel with integrated CNC keyboard.The key labels and displays on the panel front are different for variants “T” (Turning)and “M” (Milling). In addition, the “T” variant has a handwheel instead of the secondoverride switch.
A data transmission line has been created to allow the PCU to be installed at a distance(distributed installation) from the operator panel:
The operator panel front (operator panel front + MCP) communicates with the PCUvia transmission path videolink receiver – videolink cable – videolink transmitterngvideo, where the image data are transmitted using videolink technology and the key-board data using USB technology.
As a result, the PCU and operator panel can be installed up to 20 m apart (XGA reso-lution).
The NC and MCP functions on the operator panel communicate via MPI.
NC and PCU also communicate by means of MPI.
Only TFT displays are supported.
Hardware support for USB only for version 1.1 and earlier
There is an EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine control panel. This also has tobe wired up (see Fig. 10-8).
The machine control panel and PCU must be supplied with 24 V DC
Note
To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel front should beswitched on at the same time as the PCU using the 24 V supply.
Operatorpanel
Communi-cation
EMERGENCYSTOP
Powersupply
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.3 Description
10-156 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.3 Description
10.3.1 Operator panel front
Control elements: Horizontal and vertical softkeys
Interfaces: – I/O interface cable K1 (connector 2 x 13-pin)– Display cable K2 (connector 2 x 10-pin)
Bearing edge: Top/bottom: 18 mmRight/left: 16 mm
Fastening: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5
Seal: To be provided by customer
10.3.2 Machine control panel for turning and milling
1. CNC keyboard
MF2 keyboard (without function keys)
Operating area keys: MACHINE, PROGRAM, OFFSET, PROGRAM MANAGER,ALARM and CUSTOM
Other keys: ALARM CANCEL, HELP, GROUP CHANNEL, INSERT, SELECT andNEXT WINDOW
Integrated mouse
2. Machine control panel operating elements
54 keys (technology-specific and manufacturer-specific)
Turning: – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %, 29 latched positions)– 1 x handwheel (100 pulses/revolution), wheel diameter approx. 60 mm
Milling: – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %, 29 latched positions)– 1 x rapid traverse override (0 – 100 %, 23 latched
positions)
1x EMERGENCY STOP button, 2 x NC contacts (16 mm system)
1x illuminated key, machine ON (22 mm system).
3. Interfaces
Inputs: – 1 x plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock– 1 x USB-B 2 – 1 x MPI interface, Sub-D, 9-pin– 1 x 24 V power supply: terminal (3-pin)
Outputs: – 2 x USB-A– 2 x 4-pin (reserved for optional interfaces, not fitted in standard production)
4. Fastening: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5
5. Seal: To be provided by customer
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.3 Description
10-157 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.3.3 Cable
1. MPI cable: MPI/PROFIBUS cable (cut-to-length) and connector from Siemens
2. USB connection cable between X205 (video link receiver) and X301 (MCP):10-pin cable with fitted socket connectors (supplied with operator panel front)
3. Videolink cablesee “Distributed Installation”
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.4 Interfaces
10-158 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.4 Interfaces
10.4.1 Hardware interfaces – overview
Table 10-1 Overview of hardware interfaces
Interface
Type Function Designation Type
Operatorpanel front
– IO interface cable– Display interface cable
K1K2
Connector 2 x 13-pinConnector 2 x 10-pin
– USB inputUSB i t
X301X302
Plug connector, 2 x 5-pinUSB B
p– USB input
(reserved – option for X301)X302
g pUSB-B
(reserved – option for X301)– USB output X303 USB-A
Machine
USB output– USB output
X303X304
USB AUSB-A
controlpanel
– MPI interfaceOptional interface
X401X402
SUB-D, 9-pinPlug connector 1 x 4 pinpanel – Optional interface
(Input, reserved)X402 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pin
(Input, reserved)– Optional interface
(Input reserved)X403 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pin
(Input, reserved)– 24 V power supply X404 Terminal (3-pin)
The abbreviations in the “Signal type” column in the tables below have the fol-lowing meanings:
I Input O OutputB Bidirectional V Power supply
10.4.2 Interface assignment for operator panel front
Connecting leads K1 and K2 between operator panel front and videolink re-ceiver (see Fig. 10-1).
For pin assignments of IO/USB and LVDS interfaces, see Chapter “ConnectionConditions”.
10.4.3 Interface assignments for machine control panel
The two interfaces X301 and X302 (see Fig. 10-1) are connected in parallel andconfigured as “high powered interfaces” with max. 500 mA, 5 V.
X301 is used to form the connection between the keyboard and videolinkreceiver (X205); max. permissible ribbon cable length: 1 m.
X302 supports a standard USB cable with length of max. 5m. This cable canbe used to form a direct connection between the keyboard and the PCU(e.g. for loading customer-specific keyboard tables).
Signal types
IO/USB and LVDSinterface
X301 / X302
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.4 Interfaces
10-159 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Caution
The two interfaces X301 and X302 should not be used simultaneouslybecause they are connected in parallel.
Connector designation: X301; plug connector (2 x 5-pin) with lock
Table 10-2 X301 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 P5 V Supply voltage 5 V
2 USB_PB
Data+
3 USB_MB
Data–
4 / 5 M (GND) V Ground
6 / 7 / 8 NC – Not assigned
9 SDA B Serial data for EEPROM
10 SCL I Clock for EEPROM
Connector designation: X302; USB-B connector (4-pin)
Table 10-3 X302 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 P5 V Power supply +5 V
2 USB_DM0B
Data–; channel 0
3 USB_DP0B
Data+; channel 0
4 M (GND) V Ground
X303 / 304 are used to connect simple USB expansion such as a USB mouseor USB keyboard and are designed as a “low powered interface” with max.100 mA, 5 V.
Connector designation: X303; USB-A connector (4-pin)
Table 10-4 X303 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
A1 1P5 VPower supply +5 V
for external USB device
A2 USB_DM2B
Data–; channel 2
A3 USB_DP2B
Data+; channel 2
A4 M (GND) V Ground
X303 / X304
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.4 Interfaces
10-160 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X304; USB-A connector (4-pin)
Table 10-5 X304 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
B1 2P5 VPower supply +5 V
for external USB device
B2 USB_DM3B
Data–; channel 0
B3 USB_DP3B
Data+; channel 0
B4 M (GND) V Ground
The MCP is connected to the MPI of the NC by means of interface X401.(See Figure 10-7).
Connector designation: X401; 9-pin Sub-D socket
Table 10-6 X401 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1/2 NC – Not assigned
3 RS_OPI B RS-485 data
4 ORTSAS_OPIO
Output Request to Send, user in-terface
5 M5EXTV
5V external ground
6 P5EXTV
5V external potential
7 NC – Not assigned
8 XRS_OPI B RS-485 data
9 IRTSPG_OPI I In Request to Send PG
Baud rate (max. of 1.5 Mbaud) and station address of the MCP at the MPI busare set at DIP switch S3 of the keyboard controller.
Option
Connector designation: X404; 3-pin Phoenix terminal block (see Fig. 10-7)
Table 10-7 Assignments of connector X404
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 PE Shield connection
2 0V V Ground
3 24V Power supply +24 V
X401 (MPI)
X402 / 403
X404 (powersupply)
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.4 Interfaces
10-161 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.4.4 Key layout
Table 10-8 Layout of the machine control keys (applies to “turning” and “milling”)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
43 44 45 46 47 48 4940 42
50 51 52 53 54
Low-active keys
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.5 Mechanical design
10-162 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.5 Mechanical design
10.5.1 Operator panel front
Dimensions in mm
59.5
34
IO front interface (26–pin)
LVDS (20-pin)
Fig. 10-2 Front, side and rear view of operator panel front without videolink receiver
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.5 Mechanical design
10-163 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Videolink receiver
Operator panel front
382
73
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 10-3 Example: Side and rear views of operator panel front with videolink receiver installed (for mounting seeChapter “Distributed Installation”)
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.5 Mechanical design
10-164 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.5.2 Machine control panel
Fig. 10-4 shows front and side views of the machine control panel “Milling” vari-ant, Fig. 10-5 the exchangeable key caps.
Dimensions in mm
Threaded bolt M5(for detailed drawingsee Fig. 10-6)
416
370
Fig. 10-4 MCP 416C-M: Front and side views
Exchangeable key caps
Fig. 10-5 Exchangeable key caps
MCP 416C-M
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.5 Mechanical design
10-165 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The MCP 416C-M is shipped with a set of 10 exchangeable key caps (color:light basic) with the following labeling:
Table 10-9 Labeling of exchangeable key caps supplied with MCP
Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol
Info (7155) (6035) H(7159)
Spray gun(7156)
Chuck Open/Closed(7158)
Unlock door forworkpiece conveyor
(7162)
Change axis(7154)
Axis5...n
(7161)
Acknowledgment(7158)
Chip conveyor(7160)
Welded threaded bolts (see diagram below) are used to mount the operatorpanel front and machine control panel:
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
523
10
Spacer ringThreaded bolt M5
M5
Front panel
Fig. 10-6 Bolt for securing operator panel front and machine control panel (detail ofFig. 10-4)
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.5 Mechanical design
10-166 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The next diagram shows the rear of the machine control panel with the position of ter-minals and operating and display elements:
X302
X303/4
X40
1
X404
X402 X403
X301
87654321
H1H2H3H4
S3
Grounding connectionM5 thread
Status LEDs
Programmingswitch
Detail X404(power supply)
Fig. 10-7 Rear of machine control panel (MCP 416C-M and MCP416C-T)
The meaning of the status LEDs is as follows:
Table 10-10 Meaning of status LEDs
No. Color Meaning
H1 Red Hardware faults
H2 Red Temperature error
H3 Green Power OK
H4 Yellow Operator panel front interface active
Table 10-11 Assignment of DIP Fix switch S3
No. Meaning Default
Setting Value
1 Baud rate ON 1.5 Mbaud
2Cycle
OFF Cyclic transmit time frame:100 ms
3Cycle
ON100 msReception monitoring: 1200 ms
4 OFF
5Bus address
ON6
6Bus address
ON6
7 OFF
8 HW platform OFF Standard hardware
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.5 Mechanical design
10-167 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Fig. 10-8 shows the wiring of the emergency stop button.
1 12 2
Fig. 10-8 Block diagram of emergency stop button
All information given above for the MCP 416C-M also applies analogously to theMCP 416C-T.
Exceptions (see diagram below): – A handwheel is integrated in place of the second override switch.– The keys are different.
59.75
238.340.2
Dimensions in mmThreaded bolt M5(for detailed drawing see Fig. 10-6)Exchangeable key caps
416
370
Fig. 10-9 MCP 416C-T: Front and side views
EMERGENCYSTOP
MCP 416C-T
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.5 Mechanical design
10-168 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The MCP 416C-T is shipped with a set of 30 exchangeable key caps (color:light basic) with the following labeling:
Table 10-12 Labeling of exchangeable key caps supplied with MCP
Meaning Sym-bol
Meaning Sym-bol
Meaning Sym-bol
Pick-up(7135)
Tailstock(7143)
Teststop_Safety(7149)
Minus(7111) – Chuck_3
(7146)
Tool_monitor_Ar-tis
(7136)
Program control(7141)
Bar_Feed (7150)Workpiece_time
(7153)
Turret_2 (7095)Work-
piece_changer(7093)
P1(7055) P1
Spindle(7148)
Tool_moni-tor_Leukhardt
(7151)
P2(7056) P2
Turret_1 (7094)Conveyor_belt
(7138)P3
(7059) P3
Workpiece_counter(7152)
Plus(7112) + P4
(7060) P4
Control_switching(7137)
Turret(7092)
P5(7063) P5
Oil_trap(7140)
Chuck_4(7147)
P6(7064) P6
P7(7067) P7
P8(7068) P8 Unlabeled
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.6 Installation
10-169 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.6 Installation
Operator panel front
Machine control panel
The panel cutout for the operator panel front is shown in the following diagram:
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Dimensions in mm
386+1
329+
1
6
4.5
341
395
6.
5
Fig. 10-10 Panel cutout for operator panel front
Proceed as follows to install the operator panel front:
1. Insert the operator panel front and the machine control panel with their fourthreaded bolts (Figs. 10-6 and 10-9) into the mounting holes of the preparedpanel cut-out (Figs. 10-10 and 10-11). The spacer rings (Fig. 10-6) ensure that the rubber seal is not squashedwhen installed (required to afford degree of protection IP54; not included inscope of delivery).
2. Secure the components from the rear side using the M5 nuts and suitablecirclips (torque 1.8 Nm).
Individualcomponents
Panel cutout foroperator panelfront
Mounting
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.6 Installation
10-170 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3. Make the ground connections (see Fig. 10-7).
4. Connect the interfaces, except X404 (see Fig. 10-7).
5. Connect X404 to the 24V power supply (see Fig. 10-7).
The panel cutout for the machine control panel is shown in the following dia-gram:
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Dimensions in mm
384 +1
334
+1
7.5
5.5
349
395
6.
5
Fig. 10-11 Panel cutout for machine control panel
Note
For noise immunity reasons, the USB connection from the videolink receiver(interface X205) to the MCP (interface X301) must always be installed andsecured close to the top side of the metal plate.
The shield must be connected if a shielded cable is used.
No other cables which could cause noise interference should be installed in theimmediate vicinity.
Panel cutout formachine controlpanel
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.6 Installation
10-171 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Screen saverCaution
If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.
To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide
/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.7 Technical data
10-172 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.7 Technical data
Operator panel front
Table 10-13 Technical data for operator panel front
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front panel IP54 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Power supply (via I/OUSB cable and display cable)
Display Backlightinverter
Logic / USB(with / without
load)
VoltageCurrent (typ. / max. mA; approx.)
5 V +/– 5%420 / 600
12 V +/–10%900 / 1050
5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1000
Power consumption Typical, approx. 15 W Maximum approx. 24 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 416 mm Height: 382 mm Depth: 59.5 mm
Weight approx. 6 kg
Tightening torques, max.Tension jacks:
0.5 NmWelded studs:
M3: 0.45 Nm / M4: 1 NmM5: 1.8 Nm
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–25 ... 55 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
Display
Size 15” TFT
Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels
MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.7 Technical data
10-173 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Machine control panel
Table 10-14 Technical data for MCP 416C–M or –T
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front panel IP54 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption, max. 2 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 416 mmHeight: 370 mm
Depth MCP–M: 84 mmDepth MCP–T: 100 mm
Weight approx. 7 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–25 ... 55 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel
10-174 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel
Table 10-15 Spare parts packages for machine control panel
Name Description Order No. (MLFB)
HandwheelHandwheel for machine control panel,width 416 mm, T-version
6FC9320–5DM00
Rotary switchrapid traverse
1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer anddial
6FC5247–0AF21–0AA0
Rotary switchfeed
1x29G, T=32, cap, button and pointer 6FC5247–0AF21–0AA0
Mouse USB mouse for front 6FC5247–0AF01–0AA0
EMERGENCYButton 3BS2000–1AC01
EMERGENCYSTOP
Holder 3SB2908–0AASTOP
Switching element 3SB2404–0C
Ill i t dComplete 3SB3001–0AA71
Illuminatedkeys
Switching element 3SB3400–0Akeys
Switching element with lamp 3SB3400–1D
Key cover (forlabeling)
1 set of 90, ergo-gray and 20 each ofred / green / yellow / medium gray
6FC5248–0AF12–0AA0
Remove the handwheel in the following way (see picture below):
1. Slacken the hexagon-socket screw in the rotary knob and pull the rotaryknob off the axis.
2. Undo the M15 fastening nut,
3. Remove the washer
4. Pull the handwheel backwards out of the front panel and disconnect thewiring.
Handwheel spindleGrub screw(hexagon-socket)(not visible)
Rotary knob
Supply terminals
Seal
M15 fastening nut
Fig. 10-12 Removal of handwheel
Installation is performed in the reverse order (for installation kit, seeFig. 10-12). Make sure that the seal is fitted correctly.
Exchangehandwheel
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel
10-175 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Remove the rotary switch in the following way (see picture below):
1. Prise the cap (cover) off the rotary knob (snap-on fitting!).
2. Loosen the nut of the collet using a wrench (width 10).
3. Pull the rotary knob off the shaft of the rotary selector switch.
4. Remove the fastening nut on the rotary switch axis from the front side usinga wrench (width 14).
5. Remove the connector at the end of the rotary switch cable from its socket(make a note of connector orientation).
6. Remove the rotary selector switch.
CapRotary selector switch spindle Collet nut
Fig. 10-13 Removal of rotary selector switch
Install the rotary selector switch in the following way (installation kit in next pic-ture):
Fastening nut
Terminal board
Rotary knob
Cap Connecting cable
O-ring
Fig. 10-14 Installation of rotary selector switch
1. Push the O-ring onto the shaft of the new rotary selector switch (for sealingpurposes).
2. Insert the rotary selector switch into the front cutout so that pressure is ap-plied to the O-ring.
3. Fasten the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front sideusing a wrench (width 14).
4. Attach the arrow ring to the rotary knob.
Exchangerotary switch
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel
10-176 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
5. Attach the complete rotary knob to the shaft.
6. Tighten the collet nut of the rotary knob using a wrench (width 10) (distancebetween knob and assembly front approx. 0.5 mm). When doing so, makesure that the arrow point is aligned with “0”.
7. Place the cap (cover) on the rotary knob and snap on.
8. Connect the cable in the way shown on the right-hand side of Fig. 10-14.Observe the recommended cable folds.
The second rotary selector switch is installed in the same way, except that therecommended cable folds shown in the picture below should be used.
Fig. 10-15 Both rotary selector switches installed (top switch [right] not yet connected)
The following picture shows the mouse prior to removal:
Mouse boardConnecting cable Cable connector
Fastening screwClamping frame
Fig. 10-16 Mouse prior to removal
Replacement ofmouse
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel
10-177 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Remove in the following way:
1. Unplug the cable connector from the mouse board.
2. Undo the four M3x6 fastening screws using a T10 Torx screwdriver.
3. Release the clamp frame.
The following picture shows how the unit should then look:
Fig. 10-17 Mouse fastening released
4. Lever the mouse out of the front panel.
The picture below shows the removed mouse:
Fig. 10-18 Removed mouse
Installation is performed in the reverse order.Make sure that the mouse symbol is the correct way up.
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
04.0410.9 Heat dissipation
10-178 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
10.9 Heat dissipation
The following correlations apply to heat dissipation at the operator panel front(the surfaces of the front and bottom side are not considered when calculatingthe convection surface):
The heat produced by the operator panel front is generated almost exclusivelyby the display unit (approx. 19 W). It is therefore sufficient to apply 20 W as thebasis for calculation.
T1 T2
The necessary free convection surface area of the space to be enclosed (steel oraluminum sheet, 1.5 mm thick) is calculated, referred to a temperaturedifference T2 – T1 = T 10 K, approximately from:
Pvtot. [W]A [m2] =
5 T [K]
Example: T1 = 45 °C, T2 = 55 °CPvtot = 20 W
A = 0.4 m2
Ope
rato
r pa
nel f
ront
Machinecontrolpanel
Fig. 10-19 Heat dissipation by means of natural convection
10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver
11-179 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Direct Control Key Submodule
The following description applies to the components:
Designation Order number
Direct control key submodule 6FC5247–0AF11–0AA0
Installation kit for OP 015A and TP 015A *) 6FC5247–0AF30–0AA0
*) Installation kit for OP 012 included in the scope of delivery of the direct control key sub-module
LEDs
Connection forOP12 cable(not visible)
Coding switches:top = onesbottom = tens
Fig. 11-1 Direct control key submodule complete with coding switches and LEDs
The task of the direct control key submodule (DKM) is to directly transfer theoperating signals for the two rows of keys on the sides of an operator panelfront to SIMATIC without diversion through intermediate firmware. The signal-to-key assignments are shown in Table 11-1 and Figure 11-3.
The DKM can be combined with operator panel fronts of type OP 012 (see Sub-section 11.2.1), OP 015A (see Subsection 11.2.2) or TP 015A (see Subsec-tion 11.2.3).
The DKM converts the key signals to PROFIBUS DP protocol by means of theASIC LSPM2 (PROFIBUS DIN 19245 Part 1, 12 Mbaud).
Power is supplied via the operator panel front. The Profibus is completely iso-lated from the DKM/operator panel front by means of an opto-coupler andDC/DC converter.
The DKM operates as a slave on PROFIBUS. The address can be set between1 and 99 using rotary switches. Two bytes of data are transferred.
In SIMATIC, the keys are handled as if they were 16 ordinary digital inputs.
Validity
Brief description
11
04.0411.1 Interfaces
11-180 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
11.1 Interfaces
The DKM has the following interfaces:
Connection foroperator panelfront
PROFIBUSconnection
Fig. 11-2 Direct control key submodule with connections
The ribbon cable from the operator panel front (see e.g. Figure 11-8) is insertedthrough the cutout in the enclosure (see illustration above).
Here, the switching states of the vertical direct control keys can be tapped with-out intermediate firmware. These signals can be evaluated in the direct controlkey submodule and in pushbutton panels (e.g. PP031-MC).
Direct control key interface X11 on the keyboard controller for the operatorpanel front: to DIN 41651, plug connector, cable length max. 0.5 m.
Table 11-1 Assignment of interface X11: 2 x 8 vertical direct control keys
Pin Name Type Remarks
1, ..., 16 DT 1, ..., 16 Data O Data output, direct control key #1, ..., 16
17 / 18 P5V_D_fusedV
+ 5 V (fused)
19 / 20 GNDV
Ground
Operator panelconnection
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
04.0411.1 Interfaces
11-181 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
DT1
DT2
DT3
DT4
DT5
DT6
DT7
DT8
DT9
DT10
DT11
DT12
DT13
DT14
DT15
DT16
Fig. 11-3 Assignment of direct control keys on an operator panel front
9-pin connector (see Figure 11-2).
Note
The Profibus cable used should have a connector with a straight outgoingcable.
Profibusconnection
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
04.0411.2 Mounting
11-182 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
11.2 Mounting
The DKM is installed to one side of the PCU on the operator panel front andconnected to the keyboard controller via a short ribbon cable.
Mounting the DKM requires an installation kit appropriate to the operator panelfront used (kit for the OP 012 already included with the DKM).
OP 015A and TP 015A require an installation kit (see illustration below) whichmust be ordered separately (see “Validity” at the start of this chapter).
Keyboard controllercover plate for OP 015A
OP 012 DKM cable for TP 015ADKM cable for OP 015A
Fig. 11-4 DKM installation kit for OP 015A and TP 015A
11.2.1 Combination with OP 012
The OP 012 outputs the signals from the direct control keys (see Figure 11-3) atconnector X11 (see illustration below).
I/O USBcable K1
Displaycable K2
OP 012 Direct controlkeyinterfaceX11
Fig. 11-5 OP 012 rear side
Installation kit
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
04.0411.2 Mounting
11-183 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-headscrews at the four corners and lifting off the PCU.
Cover plate forkeyboardcontroller
Displaycable K2 2)
I/O USBcable K1 2)
2) Cable shown folded together4) Slit for softkey labeling strips
Width = 483
Hei
ght =
310
1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs
1)1)
1) 1)
Displaysupport plate
3)
3) 3)3)
3)
3) 3) 3)
3)
3)
3)
3) Enclosure screws
4)
3)
4)4)
4)
Cableclamp
Fig. 11-6 OP 012 rear side
2. Remove the ribbon cable clamp alongside the keyboard controller coverplate (see illustration above), by inserting a pointed tool in each of the twoslits and loosening the fixing cams by levering in the direction shown (seeillustration below).
OP 012
Previous cover plate
Cableclamp
Tilting motion oftool
Rubber rim
Fig. 11-7 Removing the cable clamp from the OP 012
Preparation
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
04.0411.2 Mounting
11-184 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3. Unscrew the keyboard controller cover plate. It is no longer needed for assembly.
4. Remove the rubber rim from the edge of the housing cutout (used to securea pushbutton panel cable) (see Fig. 11-7).
1. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the ribbon cable supplied with the DKMthrough the slit in the cover also supplied with the DKM and into socket X11on the keyboard controller.
2. Screw down the new cover tightly using the screws supplied (see illustrationbelow).
OP 012
Fixing nipple for DKM(1 of 3)
Cable to DKM
New cover plate
Fig. 11-8 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 012
3. Install the PCU as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.
4. Set the PROFIBUS address 01 to 99 with the coding switches on the DKM(see Fig. 11-1; upper/lower coding switch: “Ones”/“Tens”).
5. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (see illustration below).
Assembly
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
04.0411.2 Mounting
11-185 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
DKM
PCU 50
OP 012
Fixing nipple for DKM
Cover plate
Cable from OP 012 to DKM
Retainingscrews
Fig. 11-9 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 012
6. Screw the DKM firmly to the cover using the knurled screws on the side.
The illustration below shows the fully assembled unit comprising OP 012,PCU 50 and DKM:
PCU 50
DKM
OP 012
Fig. 11-10 Installed direct control key submodule
7. Insert the PROFIBUS plug (with straight outgoing cable) into the socket ofthe DKM (see Fig. 11-10).
If the DKM is not connected to PROFIBUS (or in the event of another fault), the“bus error” LED lights up (see Fig. 11-1).
Note
The direct control key submodule must be removed first on deinstallation of thePCU.
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
04.0411.2 Mounting
11-186 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
11.2.2 Combination with OP 015A
1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-headscrews at the four corners and lifting off the PCU.
2. Unscrew the keyboard controller cover plate (see illustration below):
Cover plate forkeyboard controller
Fig. 11-11 OP 015A rear side
1. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the DKM ribbon cable (Figure 11-4; la-beled “OP 015A”) into socket X11 on the keyboard controller (see illustrationbelow, observe folding).
Directcontrol keyinterfaceX11
I/O USB cableK1
Direct control keycable
Display cableK2
Fig. 11-12 OP 015A: Keyboard controller connections
2. Screw down the cover plate supplied with the installation kit and labeled “OP015A” (see Figure 11-4).
Preparation
Assembly
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
04.0411.2 Mounting
11-187 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3. Fold the DKM cable as shown in the illustration below:
DKM cable
I/O USB cableK1
Display cableK2
Fig. 11-13 OP 015A: DKM cable routing
4. Install the PCU as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.
5. Set the PROFIBUS address 01 to 99 with the coding switches on the DKM(see Fig. 11-1).
DKM
PCU 50
OP 015A
Fixing nipple fordirect control keysubmodule
Keyboardcontroller coverplate
Cable from TP 015A toDKM
Retainingscrews
Fig. 11-14 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 015A
6. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM.
7. Screw the DKM firmly to the keyboard controller cover plate using theknurled screws.
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
04.0411.2 Mounting
11-188 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
11.2.3 Combination with TP 015A
1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-headscrews at the four corners and lifting off the PCU.
Cover plate forkeyboard controller
Fig. 11-15 TP 015A rear side
2. Unscrew the keyboard controller cover plate (see illustration below).
The plate is required for installation.
DKM interfaceX11
I/O USB cable K1
Display cableK2
Fig. 11-16 TP 015A: Keyboard controller connections
1. Insert the DKM ribbon cable (Figure 11-4; labeled “TP 015A”) into socketX11 on the keyboard controller (see illustration below).The cable is ready folded.
Preparation
Assembly
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
04.0411.2 Mounting
11-189 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
DKM cable
I/O USB cable K1
Display cableK2
Fig. 11-17 TP 015A: DKM cable routing
2. Tighten the screws in the cover plate. To do this, turn over the cable asshown in the illustration below:
DKM cable
I/O USB cable K1
Display cableK2
Fig. 11-18 TP 015A: Fitting the cover plate
3. Install the PCU as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.
4. Set the PROFIBUS address 01 to 99 with the coding switches on the DKM(see Fig. 11-1).
5. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (see illustration below).
6. Screw the DKM onto the fixing nipple with the knurled screws.
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
04.0411.2 Mounting
11-190 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
DKM
TP 015A Fixing nipplefor direct control keysubmodule
Cable from TP015A to DKM
Retainingscrews
PCU 50
Fig. 11-19 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the TP 015A
11 Direct Control Key Submodule
12-191 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
PCU 20
The PCU 20 component can be used in combination with the operator panelfronts OP 010, OP 010C, OP 010S, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012 andTrumpf operator panel. It is available in the following variants:
Processorclock speed
User memory(SDRAM)
Onboard FLASHmemory
Order number6FC5210–0DF00 ...
166 MHz 16 MB 8 MB ...–0AA0
66 MHz 32 MB 16 MB ...–0AA1
233 MHz 32 MB 16 MB ...–1AA0
233 MHz 32 MB 16 MB ...–1AA1
Robust, easy-to-service design (continuous operation, high noise immunity)
Compact construction for space-saving installation
All-around fire protection (to EN60950)
Single-chip PC processor with embedded operating system
Linear Flash Memory Card (ATA Flash)or Flash Card 100/200 type I/II, max. 64 MBor CompactFlash Card (PCMCIA) with adapter
Screen resolution: 640 x 480 (VGA), up to 1024 x 768 (XGA)
Power supply : 24 V DC
Interfaces:
– COM1 serial RS-232 interface (25-pin Sub-D socket connector)
– COM2 serial RS-232 interface (9-pin Sub-D socket connector)
– PS/2 keyboard (6-pin mini-DIN)
– USB interface (4-pin USB socket connector)
– MPI/DP interface RS-485 (9-pin female Sub-D), max. 1.5 Mbaud
– Ethernetport 10/100 Mbaud (8-pin RJ45 socket)
– Memory card interface (68-pin PC card connector)
– Floppy disk drive interface (34-pin ribbon cable connector socket)
– Interfaces to operator panel front:– LVDS interface for TFT operator panel front (20-pin connector,
2.54 mm)– CMOS interface for STN operator panel front (34-pin
connector, 2.54 mm)– operator panel front I/O interface for USB data signal/display selection/ LEDs/power supply (26-pin connector, 2.54 mm), – USB interface for operator panel front (internal)
Features
12
04.0412.1 View
12-192 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
12.1 View
The Figures 12-1 to 12-5 show different views of the PCU 20.
Top *)
*) Orientation based on operation with the 19” operator panel front
Right *)
Left *)
Bottom *)
Fig. 12-1 PCU 20: viewed in perspective
Fix
ing
lugs
Inte
rfac
es
Fix
ing
lugs
Ret
aini
ng s
crew
s
Pow
er s
uppl
y in
terf
ace
Ret
aini
ng s
crew
s
Width = 297
Hei
ght =
267
Ext
. flo
ppy
disk
driv
e (o
ptio
nal)
Depth: 53 mm (without screws protruding)
Rating plate
Fig. 12-2 Top view PCU 20
12 PCU 20
04.0412.2 Interfaces and connections
12-193 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
12.2 Interfaces and connections
Note
The orientation drawings “top”, “right”, “left” etc. refer to the mounting positionwhen operated with OP 012 (see Fig. 12-1 and 12-7) viewed at the rear of thePCU 20/OP 012 combination.
The pin assignments of the individual interfaces can be found in Chapter “Con-nection Conditions”, Subsection “Secondary electrical conditions”.
12.2.1 Interfaces on right side of casing
Ethernet MPI/L2-DPUSBCOM1/V.24PS/2 mouse
53
Memory card slotCOM2/RS-232
Dep
th =
56
Fig. 12-3 PCU 20 side view from right with interfaces
Table 12-1 Interfaces on right side of housing
Name Connection Function
COM1/RS-232 25-pin sub-D socket Serial interface (RS-232-C)
COM2/RS-232 9-pin male sub D connector Serial interface (RS-232-C)
PS/2 mouse/keyboard
PS/2 Mouse connector/keyboard connection
USB 4-pin USB socket External connection for Universal Serial Bus
MPI/DP(RS 485)
9-pin sub-D socket Multi-Point-Interface/Profibus DP connectionConnection of an S7 programmable controller
Ethernet 8-pin RJ45 socket Connection for local area network (LAN), softwareoption
Memory card 68-pin PC card connector Slot for– Linear Flash Memory Card (ATA Flash) or– Flash Card 100/200 type I/II or– CompactFlash Card (PCMCIA) with adapter
Pin assignments
12 PCU 20
04.0412.2 Interfaces and connections
12-194 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
12.2.2 Interfaces on left side of casing
The following interfaces are located on the left-hand casing panel:
Interfaces for the operator panel front:
CMOS for STN display(OP 010)
I/O USB interface
LVDS for TFT display
Data interface forexternal floppy diskdrive
Reset
24 V supply connection
Fig. 12-4 Interfaces on left side of casing
Fastening screw for cover plate ofexternal floppy disk drive port
Shield connection
Ground terminal
Interfaces for the operator panel front:
I/O USB interface
LVDS interface for TFTdisplay
Fig. 12-5 Rear of PCU 20 housing complete with interfaces
12 PCU 20
04.0412.2 Interfaces and connections
12-195 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Interfaces for the operator panel front to be mounted:
– Front interface for connecting the I/O USB cable
– LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display
– CMOS interface for connecting an STN display (X420)
Procedure for mounting the operator panel front: see Subsection 12.3.1.
Table 12-2 Interfaces on the left side of the casing
Connection Function
LVDS LVDS interface for TFT operator panel front
I/O USB I/O interface/USB data
CMOS CMOS interface for STN operator panel front (X420)
24 V 24 V supply connection
Floppy Data interface (34-pin ribbon cable plug socket) for externalfloppy disk unit
Note
Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PCU reboots.
12.2.3 Mounting bracket on underside of casing
Mounting bracket for screwing to theoperator panel front
Fig. 12-6 View of PCU 20 from below
12 PCU 20
04.0412.2 Interfaces and connections
12-196 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
12.2.4 Pin assignments
Cable length: max. 30 m
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
Cable length: max. 5 m
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
Cable length: max. of 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
Cable length: max. 0.5 m
Cable length: max. 0.5 mThis interface is accessed through the opening in the base plate.
Cable length: max. 0.5 mThis interface is on the mother board and cannot therefore be seenfrom the outside! This interface can only be accessed by opening thecasing. Details can be found in the documentation for the operatorpanel fronts.
Caution
The STN interface is mechanically identical to the external floppy disk interfacewhich is accessible from the outside. The devices may be damagedpermanently if the STN display is inadvertently connected to the floppy diskinterface!
Serial port COM 1(X9)
Serial port COM2(X11)
PS/2 keyboard/mouse interface(X6)
USB interface(X40)
MPI/DP interface(X800)
Ethernet/RJ45interface (X805)
Display interface(LVDS) for TFToperator panelfront X400)
I/O interface foroperator panelfront (X44)
X420:STN interface foroperator panelfront
12 PCU 20
04.0412.3 Mounting
12-197 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
12.3 Mounting
12.3.1 Assembly with operator panel front and installation
The PCU 20 meets the relevant demands placed on a fire protection casing toEN60950. It can therefore be integrated without an additional fire protection sur-round.
When used in combination with the operator panel front (e.g. OP 012), thePCU 20 is first screwed to the operator panel front and this is then secured tothe assembly panel using tension jacks. The procedure is described in this manual in the chapter relating to the individ-ual operator panel front.
Please note the following during installation:
As far as possible, extreme environmental conditions should be avoided.Protect the PCU from dust, humidity and heat.
Do not expose the PCU to direct sunlight.
Install the device such that no danger (e.g. by falling down) may result.
The clearance at the PCU rear side must be at least 10 mm to make surethat sufficient ventilation is provided (see Fig. 12-7). Clearances on thesides, see Chapter “Heat Dissipation”.
Do not cover the vent slots.
Permissible mounting positions:
Interfaces
Interfaces
Inte
rfac
es
Interfaces
Preferred mounting positionwhen operating with the 19”operator panel fronts
Interfaces
Interfaces
*)
*) Clearance for ventilation: 10 mm
*)
To beavoided
Preferred mountingposition when operatingwith OP 010S
Fig. 12-7 Permissible installation positions of the PCU 20 with the 19” operator panel frontAn inclined position of ± 5 is permitted. Vertical mounting is recommended.
Combination withoperator panel front
12 PCU 20
04.0412.3 Mounting
12-198 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
12.3.2 Preparing for operation
Before you connect the PCU to a power supply, you must connect an operatorpanel front.
1. Insert the interconnecting cables for the operator panel front into the ap-propriate sockets on the interface side of the PCU 20 (see Fig. 12-4 and12-5).
2. After the operator panel front has been connected, the device is ready.
Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable is required can be found in the manual for your I/O device.
Note
When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components aredesigned for use in industry.
Caution
When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, memorycard, etc.), make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected fromthe power supply. Otherwise damage may result.This does not apply to USB connections.
The PCU 20 is supplied with 24 V DC (see Fig. 12-3).
A mains switch is not provided so that the power supply is turned on/turned offby plugging/unplugging the power supply plug (see above).
After connection of the power supply, the preinstalled system boots automati-cally and finally shows the start screen.
ConnectingI/O devices
Connecting thepower supply
Turning on andturning off
Booting
12 PCU 20
04.0412.5 Accessories
12-199 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
12.4 Technical dataTable 12-3 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
IP20
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption, max. 60 W
Mains buffering time 20 ms
Mechanical data
Dimensions (mm) Width 297 Height 267 Depth 56
Weight approx. 4 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with OP 010)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation Open circuit ventilation
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values 0 ... 55 °C –25 ... 55 °CTemperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
12.5 Accessories
The external floppy disk drive can be connected to the PCU 20.The port for the external floppy disk drive is located on the left side panel of thecasing (see Fig. 11-4).For further information on the floppy disk drive, see Section “3.5 Floppy DiskDrive” in this manual.
Floppy disk drive
12 PCU 20
04.0412.5 Accessories
12-200 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
12 PCU 20
Notes
13-201 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
PCU 50
13.1 Overview
The high-performance SINUMERIK PCU 50 features onboard interfaces forcommunication via Ethernet and PROFIBUS DP/MPI, leaving the integratedslots free for other cards. The USB port at the back of the device provides “hotplug and play” functionality for a standard PC keyboard and mouse.
The SINUMERIK PCU 50 comes supplied with the operating system WindowsNT 4.0 EmbSys or Windows XP ProEmbSys, and for backing up and restoringdata, the Ghost 6 data backup software.
The HMI-Advanced software can be ordered separately
The description applies to the following devices:
ProcessorOperating
systemRAM Other features
Order number6FC5 2...
P ti II128 MB – ...10-0DF01-0AA0
Pentium II,333MHz
NT 4.0 128 MB incl. HMI Advanced ...10-0DF02-0AA0333MHz
128 MB incl. MCI board ...20-0AA00-1AA0
Pentium III,NT 4 0
128 MB – ...10-0DF05-0AA0Pentium III,500MHz
NT 4.0128 MB incl. MCI board ...20-0AA01-1AA0
C l NT 4 0128 MB – ...10-0DF20-0AA0
Celeron,566 MHz
NT 4.0128 MB incl. MCI board ...20-0AA20-0AA0
566 MHzXP 256 MB – ...10-0DF21-2AA0
C l NT 4 0256 MB – ...10-0DF22-0AA0
Celeron,1.2 GHz
NT 4.0256 MB incl. MCI board ...20-0AA22-0AA0
1.2 GHzXP 256 MB – ...10-0DF22-2AA0
Rugged design (continuous operation, high noise immunity)
Compact construction for space-saving installation
Easy-to-service design
Easy installation with four screws at the rear side of the operator panel front
Mounting position and location to a large degree variable
Processor: See table above
Validity
Features
13
04.0413.1 Overview
13-202 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
User memory (RAM), max. 512 MB
10.4 GB hard drive
Operating system Windows NT (not touch panels) or Windows XP
Screen resolution:
– Max. 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) with Pentium processors
– Max. 1600 x 1200 pixels with Celeron processors
Power supply 24V DC
Interfaces:
– Parallel interface (LPT1)
– Serial interfaces: 1 x RS-232-C (25-pin), 1 x RS-232-C (9-pin)
– PS/2 keyboard interface
– PS/2 mouse interface
– MPI/DP (max. 12 Mbaud)
– VGA interface for external monitor
– Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud
– 2 slots: 1 x PCI and 1 x shared PCI/ISA
– PC card slot
– USB interface (for Windows NT: For standard PC keyboard and mouse)
– With PCU > 500 MHz: Additional USB interface
– Interfaces to operator panel front:LVDS interfaceCMOS interfaceIO interface
Note
Where the Windows NT operating system is used, the USB interface onlysupports keyboards and mouse units.
Combination with touch panels TP 012 and TP 015A is only possible underWindows XP.
If other USB devices are used, the noise immunity of the entire system may bereduced. The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices.
13 PCU 50
04.0413.2 View
13-203 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.2 View
Top *)
*) Orientation relates to operation with OP 012
Right *)
Fig. 13-1 PCU 50 500MHz: Perspective view with the hard disk drive installed
Inte
rfac
es
Inte
rfac
e fo
r ex
tern
al fl
oppy
dis
k dr
ive
Casing cover screws
Screws for power supply cover
HandleShipping lock
Rating platePower supply
Hard disk drive
Width = 297
Hei
ght =
267
Depth: 80 mm (without screws protruding)
Fig. 13-2 Top view of PCU 50
13 PCU 50
04.0413.3 Interfaces and connections
13-204 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.3 Interfaces and connections
The pin assignments of the individual interfaces can be found in Chapter “Con-nection Conditions”, Subsection “Secondary electrical conditions”.
13.3.1 Interfaces on right side of casing
Cover plate for PCI slotconnection
Cover plate for connectionPCI/ISA slot
Ethernet
MPI/DP
USB *)
COM2(serialmouse)VGA
COM1LPT1
PS/2 keyboard
PS/2 mouse
24 V power supply
Dep
th =
80Slot 1
Slot 2
Cover plate for PC card slot
*) Top USB interface only for PCU 50 > 500MHz
Fig. 13-3 PCU 50 side view from right with interfaces
Table 13-1 Interfaces on right side of housing
Interface/connection Function
LPT1/Printer Parallel interface (e.g. printer), 25-pin sub D socket connector
COM1/RS-232 Serial interface 1 (RS-232), 25-pin sub D socket connector
COM2 Serial interface 2 (RS-232), 9-pin male sub D connector
Keyboard PS/2 keyboard connection
Mouse PS/2mouse connector
USBPCU 50 500 MHz One external USB connection Windows NT: one connection
can be used for a standard PCUSBPCU 50 > 500 MHz Two external USB connections
can be used for a standard PCor mouse
MPI/DP (RS-485)Multi-Point Interface/Profibus DP connectionConnection of an S7 PLC, 9-pin sub D socket connector
VGA VGA interface for external monitor, 15-pin female sub D connector
Ethernet Connection for local area network (LAN)
PC cardslot Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or Flash Card 100/200 Type I/II
PCI slot Slot for expansion boards 1)
PCI/ISA slot Slot for expansion boards 1)
Power supply connection 24 VDC
1) If expansion boardsare installed, the cover plates in Fig. 13-3 are replaced by the front plates of theboards. Please refer to the module documentation for more details.
Pin assignments
13 PCU 50
04.0413.3 Interfaces and connections
13-205 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.3.2 Interfaces on left side of casing
Connection for external floppy disk drive (34-pin plug connector)Device fan Reset pushbutton switch
Fig. 13-4 Side view of PCU 50 from left with the port for an external floppy disk drive
The connection shown in Fig. 13-4 can be used to connect an external floppydisk drive (see Section 13.8 and Fig. 14-7).
Note
Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PCU reboots.
13.3.3 Ports on bottom side of casing
There is a ground connection on the bottom side of the casing (see Fig. 13-5).
Ground terminal
Fig. 13-5 Bottom side of the PCU 50
13.3.4 Casing rear side
The two interfaces for the operator panel front to be mounted are located behinda rectangular cutout in the rear side of the casing:
– the IO interface for connecting the IO USB cableand
– the LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display
Procedure for mounting the operator panel front: See Subsection 13.4.1.
13 PCU 50
04.0413.4 Mounting
13-206 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.4 Mounting
13.4.1 Mounting preparation
The appropriate mounting brackets must be screwed to the PCU before it isattached to an operator panel front or a videolink transmitter (see Subsection13.8.1 or catalog).
Appropriate mounting brackets are provided for each of the following PCU 50mounting options:
1. Standard mounting for assembly of PCU + operator panel front
2. Flat mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter
3. Upright mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter
4. Central mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter
The illustration below shows the PCU and mounting brackets (standard) cor-rectly positioned before they are screwed together. Torque M3: 0.8 Nm; M4: 1.8 Nm.
M3
M3
M3
M3
M4
M4
M4
M4
Lugs with hinged catch
Lugs without hinged catch
Notice: The lugs with hinged catch must point towards the fan end!
Fig. 13-6 PCU 50 with standard mounting brackets
You can find the assembly instructions:
for option 1 in “Mounting” in Chapter “OP 012”
for options 2, 3 and 4 in “Mounting PCU with videolink transmitter” in Chap-ter “Distributed Installation”.
Mounting bracket
Assembly withother components
13 PCU 50
04.0413.4 Mounting
13-207 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.4.2 Notes on installation
Please note the following during installation:
As far as possible, extreme environmental conditions should be avoided.Protect the PCU from severe vibrations / jolts, dust, humidity and heat.
An external fire protection casing is required.
Do not expose the PCU to direct sunlight.
Install the device such that no danger (e.g. by falling down) may result.
Ventilation clearance:
– On fan side: 100 mm
– On rear side: 10 mm (see Fig. 13-7)
Do not cover the vent slots.
The permitted installation positions are shown in Fig. 13-7:
Interfaces
Device fan
Interfaces
Interfaces
Device fan
Inte
rfac
es
Device fan
Device fan
Device fan
Dev
ice
fan
Mounting positionfor operation with OP 012
Hard disk
Hard disk Interfaces
Inter-faces
Hard disk
Hard disk
Hard disk
Hard disk
Impermissible mounting position
*)
*) 10 mm clearance for ventilation
*)
Fig. 13-7 Permitted installation positions of the PCU 50Inclined position: Deviations of ± 5 relative to the installation positions shown in the illustration are per-mitted.
Mounting position
13 PCU 50
04.0413.5 Startup
13-208 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.5 Startup
Before you connect the PCU to a power supplyyou must unlock the harddiskand connect up the I/O devices (operator panel front, keyboard, mouse... ).
1. Insert the interconnecting cables of the I/O devices into the appropriatesocket connectors on the interface side of the PCU 50 (see Fig. 13-3 andTable 13-1.)
2. After the I/O devices have been connected, the device is ready.
Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable is required, is to be found in the User’s Manual of your I/O device.
Note
When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components aredesigned for use in industry!
Caution
When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, etc.),make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the powersupply. Otherwise damage may result.This does not apply to USB connections.
The PCU 50 is supplied with 24VDC (see Fig. 13-3 and Subsection 13.7.2).
Caution
The device should only be connected to a 24VDC power supply which satisfiesthe requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV).
The cable cross-section must be large enough to ensure that no damage canbe caused by the cables if there is a short-circuit at the PCU.
A mains switch is not provided which means that the device must be switchedon and off at the external power supply.
13.5.1 Booting
When the power supply is switched on, the preinstalled system boots automati-cally and finally shows the start screen (see IM4: Start-up Guide, Section “Boot-ing the system”).
When the system boots, the system parameters stored in the BIOS (Basic InputOutput System, see below) become operative.
ConnectingI/O devices
Connecting thepower supply
Turning on andturning off
13 PCU 50
04.0413.5 Startup
13-209 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
If you let the system boot automatically, a query will appear on the screen ask-ing whether you wish to go
1. to the User main menu or
2. to the Service menu
As a user you will generally select number 1. Use the Input key (see Fig. 13-8)to confirm your selection and let the system boot to the chosen menu.
The following table contains all adjustable BIOS parameters together with theirdefault values:
Table 13-2 Adjustable standard BIOS parameters of the PCU 50
Designation Standard setting
Menu / Parameter PCU 50/70 500 MHz
PCU 50/70> 500 MHz
Main
System Time xx:xx:xx
System Date xx/xx/xxxx
Disk A:1.44 MB, 3 1/2” (connected externally
=> disable floppy disk check)
Primary Master Depending on hard disk
Primary Slave None
Secondary Master None
Secondary Slave None
Memory Cache Write back
Boot Options
Quick Boot Mode Enabled
SETUP prompt Enabled
POST Errors Enabled
Floppy check Disabled
Summary screen Enabled
Keyboard Features
Num Lock Off
Key Click Disabled
Keyboard auto-repeat rate 30/s
Keyboard auto-repeat delay 1/2secs
Hardware options
PCI MPI/DP Enabled
On-board Ethernet Enabled
LAN Remote Boot Enabled
Cardbus/PCMCIA slot Enabled
Fan control ––– Enabled
SafeCard functions Enabled
Boot manager
BIOS settings
13 PCU 50
04.0413.5 Startup
13-210 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Menu / Parameter PCU 50/70> 500 MHz
PCU 50/70 500 MHz
Legacy USB support Enabled
CRT/LCD selection Simultaneous
LCD screensize Expand
DSTN contrast 154
PS2 mouse Auto Detect
Advanced
COM/LPT Configuration
Internal COM1 Enabled
Base I/O address 3F8
Interrupt IRQ4
Internal COM2 Enabled
Base I/O address 2F8
Interrupt IRQ3
Internal LPT1 Enabled
Mode EPP
Base I/O address 378 –––
Interrupt IRQ7
PCI Configuration: PCI Device Slot 1 / 2
Option ROM scan Enabled
Enable master Enabled
Latency timer 0040 h
PCI Device Slot 3 / 4 *)
Option ROM scan Disabled –
Enable master Disabled –
Latency timer 0040 h –
PCI/PnP ISA IRQ Exclusion
IRQ3 Available
IRQ4 Available
IRQ5 Available
IRQ7 Available
IRQ9 Available
IRQ10 Available
IRQ11 Reserved
PCI IRQ line 1 5
PCI IRQ line 2 Auto-select
PCI IRQ Line 3 / 4 *) Auto-select
Installed O/S Other
Reset configuration data No
Floppy disk controller Enabled
13 PCU 50
04.0413.5 Startup
13-211 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Menu / Parameter PCU 50/70> 500 MHz
PCU 50/70 500 MHz
Local bus IDE adapterPrimary
& SecondaryBoth
Large disk access mode DOS
Hard disk pre-delay Disabled –––
Memory gap at 15MB Disabled
Video Adapter Settings
Frame Buffer Size ––– 8MB
AGP Rate ––– 4 x
Default Primary Video Adaptor ––– AGP
Security
Supervisor password is Disabled
User password is Disabled
Set supervisor password [Enter]
Set user password [Enter]
Password on boot Disabled
Fixed disk boot sector Normal
Diskette access Supervisor
Power
APM Enabled
Power savings Disabled
Standby timeout off
SuspendTimeout off –––
Hard disk timeout Disabled
Boot Sequence
Hard drive
Removable devices
CD–ROM Drive
–––IBA 4.0 22 Slot
0048
*) BIOS lines ” PCI Device Slot 3 / Slot 4” and “PCI IRQ Line 3 / Line 4”:relevant only for PCU 70
After installing or mounting additional components (e.g. ext. floppy disk drive),these must be registered with the system in the BIOS setup.
You can activate this via the operator panel front (Fig. 13-8) as described below.
1. Boot the device.
2. After you are prompted to activate BIOS Setup, press key <F2>. The BIOSSetup menu will appear.
3. In the menu, use the cursor keys for navigating to the desired selection field,e.g. ”Disk A:”
Changing BIOSsettings
13 PCU 50
04.0413.5 Startup
13-212 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
4. Change the setting using the + key (simultaneously press <SHIFT> and <X>keys) or the <–> key (in the numerical key group).
5. If required, you can use the right/left cursor keys to go to other Setupmenus.
6. Use <Escape> (<Alarm Cancel> key) to access the “Exit” menu (can also beaccessed by continuously pressing the cursor right key).
7. Press the <Input> key to quit the setup menu.
8. Press the <Input> key to confirm your decision to exit BIOS Setup with“Yes”.
The system will then boot as described above.
F2 key
Shift key
Input key
Escape key
press <F2> to enter BIOS setup
ALARMCANCEL
SHIFT
INPUT
Fig. 13-8 PCU 50: Using the BIOS Setup via an operator panel front
Note
Any changes to BIOS settings, with the exception of the Boot sequence andthe LPT mode (EPP, EPC), require you to sign an OEM agreement.
13.5.2 Touch screen calibration
Whenever a new touch panel (TP 012 or TP 015A, combined with PCU 50 with500 MHz processor > and Windows XP) is connected, a calibration must beperformed.
Versions 5.63 SR3 and 5.64 SR3 of the 3M Touch software are included in thebasic software for WinXP up to and including V07.03.03 and WinXP V07.03.05onwards, respectively.
A functioning touch panel system with PCU 50 (see above) is required.
1. Boot up the system in service mode.
2. Start the SINUMERIK desktop (password-protected).
3. Open the calibration menu with “Start” –> “Programs” –> “Touchware” –>“Touchware” (see illustration below).
Procedure
13 PCU 50
04.0413.5 Startup
13-213 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Note
On the TP015A the default calibration is centrosymmetric to the centerpoint. This means that you must press the top right of the screen to activatethe “Start” button (bottom left).
Fig. 13-9 Menu for touchscreen calibration (Touchware version 5.64 SR3)
Note
Depending on the software version and setting, the screen can include 2, 4or 5 calibration points.
You can toggle between 2 and 5 points (Touchware version 5.63 SR3) orbetween 2 and 4 points (Touchware version 5.64 SR3) from the menu“Tools” –> “Options” –> “Advanced” –> “Style”.
4. Press the “Calibrate” button.
13 PCU 50
04.0413.5 Startup
13-214 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The following display appears:
Fig. 13-10 Calibration screen
5. Using the tip of one finger, touch the calibration point indicated by the handsymbol as precisely as possible for as long as the “Hold” prompt is dis-played.
“Hold” disappears after a few seconds and the hand symbol moves to thenext calibration point.
6. Repeat step 5 until all available points have been calibrated.
When the parameters have been saved, the following menu appears:
Fig. 13-11 Test menu
7. To test the calibration, move your finger around the screen and watch thecursor.
You can calibrate the screen again if necessary by pressing “Calibrate”.
8. Once calibration has been successful, leave the menu by pressing “Done”–> “Close”.
If you take too long, the action will be aborted with a timeout and you will haveto start again.
13 PCU 50
04.0413.5 Startup
13-215 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.5.3 Working with PC cards
The PCU 50 is equipped with a PC card interface. This can be used to oper-ate cardbus cards (32 bit) and PCMCIA cards (16 bit). Communicationboards for MODEM, FAX MODEM, ISDN, Token Ring, ETHERNET, memoryextensions and SCSI interfaces can be inserted in checkcard format.
Before using these cards:
Software The “Cardware” software is required for Windows NT.See catalog for information on ordering.
BIOS settings See IAD, SINUMERIK 840D Start-Up Guide
Caution– Before you insert the PC card, the ejector for cardbus/PC cards must be
fully depressed. Otherwise, if you are inserting slim PC cards (e.g. FlashMemory Cards), the card may get stuck in the slot.
The PC card then cannot be inserted properly.
– Before you insert or withdraw cardbus/PC cards, you must discharge yourbody’s static loading by briefly touching a grounded object.
Otherwise faults can occur.
– When you plug it in, the PC card nameplate must point towards the back ofthe PCU.
Otherwise the PC card and/or the PCU could be damaged.
– Only take out the card when data is no longer being transferred (risk of lossof data and system crash).
Handling When inserting the card, proceed as follows (see Fig. 13-12):
1. Open the interface cover by loosening the plastic rivets with a flat-bladedscrewdriver (there are two parts).
2. Remove the cover plate from the guide.
3. Insert the required PCMCIA card or cardbus card.
Cover plate fastening rivets
PC card eject button
Cover platePC card slot
Fig. 13-12 PC card interface
13 PCU 50
04.0413.6 Technical data
13-216 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.6 Technical dataTable 13-3 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
IP20
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Max. power consumption PCI / ISA slot Total
5 V12 V
–12 V
2 A0.3 A0.1 A
3 A0.6 A0.15 A
Power consumption typically 40 W maximum 130 W
Mains buffering time 20 ms
Mechanical data
Dimensions (mm) Width 297 Height 267 Depth 77
Weight approx. 6 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with OP 012)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Noise < 55dB(A) to DIN 45635
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation Open circuit ventilation
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values15 W 1): 5 ... 55 °C20 W 1): 5 ... 50 °C30 W 1): 5 ... 45 °C
–20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 10 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
1) Max. output expansions (PCI/ISA slots, PC card, USB interface)
13 PCU 50
04.0413.7 Spare parts
13-217 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.7 Spare partsSpare parts for the PCU 50 are:
Spare part PCU variant Order number
Hard disk with mounting plate PCU 50 500 MHz 6FC5247-0AF08-0AA0g pand damper PCU 50 > 500 MHz 6FC5 247-0AF08-0AA1 *)
Device fan A5E00019079
Backup battery 3.6 V W79084-E1003-B1
Power supply 24V DCPCU 50 500MHz A5E00166828
Power supply 24V DCPCU 50 > 500 MHz A5E00100846
*) Can also be installed in PCU 50 500MHz
13.7.1 Replacing the hard disk
Ribbon cable for hard disk connection
Plug connector for connectingan external floppy disk drive
Hard disk holder
Fig. 13-13 PCU 50 500MHz: Perspective view with the hard disk drive swung out
13 PCU 50
04.0413.7 Spare parts
13-218 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The installed hard disk drive is connected via a ribbon cable to the socket in thePCU mother board (see Fig. 13-13).
Procedure:
1. Lock the shipping lock of the hard disk by turning the handle to the “non op-erating” position (see Fig. 13-14 on the left).
2. Loosen the four fastening screws of the drive holder
3. Swing the drive holder open (see Fig. 13-13).
4. Remove the ribbon cable from the socket. To do this, push back the twolatching lugs on the connector.
5. Repeat the above steps in reverse order to install the new drive. The newdrive must be of the same type as the removed one.
6. Release the shipping lock or else the system will not boot (“operating” posi-tion; see Fig. 13-14 on right).
Fig. 13-14 Shipping lock of hard disk drive: left locked; right unlocked
13.7.2 Changing the power supply
1. Lock the shipping lock for the hard disk (see Fig. 13-14).
2. Loosen the fastening screws of the hard disk. The hard disk cables, how-ever, may remain connected.
3. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. 13-2).
4. Remove the screws securing the power supply cover to the casing and liftoff the cover (see Fig. 13-15).
5. Only for power supply No. A5E00100846: Unplug the connecting cable con-nector from the main board (see Fig. 13-16).
6. Release the two fastening screws on the casing.
7. Pull the power supply up and out of the casing.
8. Repeat the above steps in reverse order to install the new power supply.
13 PCU 50
04.0413.7 Spare parts
13-219 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Split rivets fordevice fan
Power supply cover
Power supply
Device fan*) *)
*)
*) Retainingscrews for the power supply cover
*)
Retaining screwsfor the power supply
Fig. 13-15 Removal/installation of the power supply (Art. No. A5E00166828)
Power supplycover
Power supply
Fixingscrews
Fixingscrews
Connector for powersupply
Fig. 13-16 Removal/installation of the power supply, Art. No. A5E00100846
13 PCU 50
04.0413.7 Spare parts
13-220 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.7.3 Changing the device fan
To change the device fan, proceed as follows:
1. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws(see Figure 13-2).
2. Pull the top, long card (if inserted) out of the PCI slot (see Fig. 13-26).
3. Remove the card guide rail by taking out the split rivets (Fig. 13-17).
4. Disconnect the device fan cable from the socket (see Fig. 13-18 and Fig.13-19).
5. Pull out the two split rivets, then the hollow rivets (see Figs. 13-17, 13-19and 13-25).
6. Change the device fan.
7. Installation is in reverse order.
Note
When installing the device fan, note the direction of flow from the device fan(blower outward; note the arrow on the device fan casing).
Split rivets forsecuring the devicefan (see also Fig.13-25)
Split rivets forsecuring the cardguide rail (see alsoFig. 13-26)
Devicefan
*)
*) Direction of air flow
Fig. 13-17 Device fan replacement for PCU 50 500 MHz
13 PCU 50
04.0413.7 Spare parts
13-221 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.7.4 Changing the battery
A backup battery (3.6 V lithium battery) supplies the hardware clock with powereven when the device has been switched off. In addition to the time, the BIOSsettings of the device are also stored. If the backup battery fails to operate or if itis separated from the plug contact, these data are lost.
Thanks to the low power consumption of the clock and the high capacity of thelithium battery, the battery can back up the clock for at least 8.5 years. For thisreason, changing the battery is hardly ever necessary.
If the battery voltage is too low, the current time will be lost and a correct deviceconfiguration can no longer be ensured.
In this case, the backup battery must be replaced with a new one. The battery islocated on the main board (see Figs. 13-18 and 13-19).
WarningRisk of injury and damage, risk of pollutant discharge.
A lithium battery can explode if handled incorrectly. Pollutants can bedischarged if old batteries are not disposed of correctly.
Do not throw new or discharged lithium batteries into a fire. Do not solder thecell body. Do not recharge lithium batteries. Do not force open lithium batteries.
Lithium batteries should only be ordered from Siemens (Order No.:W79084-E1003-B1).
Wherever possible, old lithium batteries should be returned to the batterymanufacturer/recycler and disposed of as special waste.
Proceed as follows (PCU 50 500 MHz, see Fig. 13-18; PCU 50 > 500 MHz,see Fig. 13-19):
1. Turn off the device, remove the mains cable and release all interconnectingcables.
2. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. 13-2).
3. Remove the battery plug (see also Fig. 13-26) from the socket on the motherboard and release the battery clip.
4. Install the new battery and secure it.
5. Plug the battery plug on the mother board.
6. Close the device.
Battery supply forclock andconfiguration
Battery voltage toolow
Changing thebattery
13 PCU 50
04.0413.7 Spare parts
13-222 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Plug for device fanconnection
Batteryconnectingplug
RAM bank 0 Base for RAM bank 1(not assigned)
Backup battery
Locating hole for boardretainer
Fig. 13-18 Main board PCU 50 500 MHz (cutout) with location of RAMs and backup battery
RAM bank 0
RAM bank 1
Backup batteryPlug for device fanconnection
Connector forprocessor fan
Fig. 13-19 Main board PCU 50 > 500 MHz (cutout) with location of RAMs and backup battery
13 PCU 50
04.0413.8 Accessories
13-223 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
13.8 Accessories
The following accessories are available for the PCU 50:
Table 13-4 Accessories for PCU 50
Component Order number
PCU 50 500 MHz PCU 50 > 500 MHz
Component PCU 50 6ES7791-0KS00-0XA0 6ES7648-2AC10-0CA06ES7791-0KT00-0XA0
6ES7648 2AC10 0CA06ES7648-2AC20-0CA0
Mounting bracket(see Subsection13.8.1)
standard 1)flat 2)
book 2)central 3)
6FC5248-0AF20-2AA06FC5248-0AF20-0AA06FC5248-0AF20-1AA06FC5248-0AF20-3AA0
Memory expansion(see Subsection
PCU 50 500 MHz(SO-DIMM PC 100)
PCU 50 > 500 MHz(SO-DIMM PC 133)
(see Subsection13 8 2) 4) 128MB 6ES7791-0KS00-0XA0 6ES7648-2AC10-0CA013.8.2) 4) 128MB
256 MB6ES7791-0KS00-0XA06ES7791 0KT00 0XA0
6ES7648-2AC10-0CA06ES7648 2AC20 0CA0
) )256 MB 6ES7791-0KT00-0XA0 6ES7648-2AC20-0CA0
Expansionboards (see Subsection13.8.3)
(according to AT/PCI specification)
Floppy disk device (parallel con-nection; see Chapter “3.5” FloppyDisk Drive” in this manual)
6FC5235-0AA05-0AA1
Floppy disk device (USB connec-tion; see Chapter “3.5” Floppy DiskDrive with USB interface” in thismanual)
6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1
____________________________________________1) for PCU or videolink receiver behind operator panel front 2) for PCU + videolink transmitter in control cabinet (see “Distributed Installa-tion”)3) for PCU + videolink transmitter behind operator panel front (see “DistributedInstallation”)4) see Figures 13-18 and 13-19.
13.8.1 Mounting bracket
The four mounting options for the PCU 50 have already been described in Sub-section 13.4.1.
A special set of mounting brackets is available for each of these mounting op-tions (see table 13-4).
13.8.2 Memory expansion
Two slots are provided on the mother board (“Banks, see Fig. 13-18 and 13-19)for 144-pin SO DIMMmemory modules. Use these modules to extend the usermemory of the PCU to 512MB.
The basic configuration is a 128/256MB SDRAM module.Standard memory
13 PCU 50
04.0413.8 Accessories
13-224 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Memory (MByte) 64 MB module 128 MB module 256 MB module
128 2 – –
128 – 1 –
192 1 1 –
256 – 2 –
256 – – 1
320 1 – 1
384 – 1 1
512 – – 2
Procedure:
1. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. 13-2).
2. Insert the module(s) into the base (Fig. 13-18). When doing so, pay attentionto the recess (anti-rotation element) on the plug side of the SO-DIMM mod-ule.
3. Press the module downwards, applying slight pressure until the lockingsnaps into place.
4. Close the device.
Caution
Risk of damage! The submodules must be seated firmly in the receptacle,otherwise they may fall out and be damaged.
The memory configuration is detected automatically when the system is booting(see IAM: Start-up Guide, Section “Booting the system”).
After expanding the memory, it is advisable to then optimize the use of the com-puter resources.
To do this, in the Windows interface Control Panel, increase the size of virtualmemory (also called the “SWAP file”) to correspond to the memory extension.
Proceed as follows:
1. When booting, use the Service menu to start the SINUMERIK Desktop, as de-scribed in the “HMI Advanced installation and startup (IM4)” document in Sub-section 3.4.5.
2. Activate the Control Panel by means of “Start” / “Settings” / “Control Panel”.
3. In the Control Panel, choose “System” / “Performance” / “Virtual Memory” /“Change”. This will display a window corresponding to Fig. 13-20.
4. Modify the values “Initial Size” and “Maximum Size”. These should be the samesize and exceed the installed RAM by at least 12 MByte.
*) For Windows XP: See IM4 (Start-up Guide for HMI Advanced).
Typical recommended values:
Mounting
System boot
Memoryoptimization(Windows NT *)
13 PCU 50
04.0413.8 Accessories
13-225 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Memory capacity (MB) Initial Size Maximum Size
512 550 550
5. Activate the “Set” menu button and exit the menu by pressing “OK”.
Fig. 13-20 Adjusting the virtual memory
Note
In the event of a repair and return of equipment, the memory extension is takeninto account.
In the event of a spare parts and return goods service, the memory extension isnot taken into account.
13.8.3 Expansion boards
The PCU 50 is designed for use of modules according to the AT/PCI specifica-tion (see Fig. 13-25).
Note
You must sign an OEM agreementbefore you can use PCI/ISA modules.
It is not recommended to use ISA modules, since with future PCUs, thisinterface is not installed.
13 PCU 50
04.0413.8 Accessories
13-226 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The dimensions of the boards must not exceed the specified dimensions.Otherwise, contact problems, malfunctions and installation difficulty cannot beruled out. The diagrams show cards of the full AT/PCI overall length. Dependingon the slot, restrictions may apply with respect to the overall length.
175 mm
106.
7 m
m
A31 A1
6.89 ”
4.20
1”
Fig. 13-21 XT module
121.
92 m
mA31 A1C18 C1
4.8”
175 mm6.89 ”
Fig. 13-22 AT module
174.63 mm
106.
68 m
m
8.19
mm
6.875”
0.32
2” 4.2”
Fig. 13-23 Short PCI module (5 V)
13 PCU 50
04.0413.8 Accessories
13-227 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
265 mm10.48 ”
106.
68 m
m4.
2”
8.19
mm
0.32
2”
Fig. 13-24 2/3-length PCI module (5 V)
Note
To allow longer PCI modules to be guided along the guide rails of ISA modules,they must be provided with a so-called extender. This should be included in thescope of supply of the longer PCI module.
Split rivetsfor devicefan(see alsoFigure13-17)
PCI slot
Boardretainer
Bus board
Retaining screw forboard retainer
For expansion boards
Shared ISA/PCI slot Device fan
Cover plates
Retainingscrews forcover platesor external boardconnections
Fig. 13-25 Slots for expansion boards
13 PCU 50
04.0413.8 Accessories
13-228 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Board retainer
Retaining screwfor boardretainerDevice
fan
Plasticsupport
Guide rail for expansionboard
Batteryconnector
Fig. 13-26 Mounting of an expansion board
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. 13-2).
2. Release the fastening screw to remove the board retainer and remove theplastic support (if fitted) from its slot by pushing it through to the inside (seeFigs. 13-25 and 13-26).
3. Release the fastening screws to be able to remove the corresponding coverplate (see also Fig. 13-3).
4. Carefully insert the module into the desired slot; firm seat should be en-sured.
5. Screw the connecting plate of the module tight.
6. Mount the board retainer.
7. Locate the module by inserting a new plastic holder (enclosed) into the ap-propriate slot of the board retainer until it locates the edge of the module withits groove. Use a diagonal cutter to cut off the protruding part of the plasticholder.
8. Close the device.
Mounting
13 PCU 50
14-229 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
PCU 70
Note
The component PCU 70 is based on the PCU 50. For this reason, reference isfrequently made to the PCU 50 in the following technical description. The maindifference is the increased number of PCI slots and the resulting increase in theoverall depth of the device.
The SINUMERIK component PCU 70 can be installed in two different ways:
Centrally (on the rear panel of a SINUMERIK operator panel front: see rele-vant operator panel front chapter)
Distributed (in a control cabinet: see Chapter “Distributed Installation”).
The description applies to the following devices:
ProcessorOperating
systemRAM
Screen resolutionmax.
Order number6FC5210...
Pentium III,NT 4 0 126 MB
1024 x 768 pixels–0DF04–0AA0
Pentium III,500 MHz
NT 4.0 126 MB1024 x 768 pixels
(XGA)...–0DF04–0AA0
Celeron,NT 4 0 256 MB 1600 x 1200 pixels –0DF24–0AA0
Celeron,1.2 GHz
NT 4.0 256 MB 1600 x 1200 pixels ...–0DF24–0AA0
Celeron,1.2 GHz
XP 256 MB 1600 x 1200 pixels ...–0DF24–2AA0
Robust, easy-to-service design (continuous operation, high noise immunity)
Compact construction for space-saving installation
User memory (RAM), max. 512 MB
Hard disk, min. 10.4 GB (interchangeable)
Power supply 24 V DC
Interfaces:
– Parallel interface LPT1/2 serial interfaces V.24
– PS/2 keyboard interface/PS/2 mouse interface
– MPI/DP (max. 12 Mbaud)
– VGA interface for additional monitor
– Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud
– 4 slots: 3x PCI and 1x shared PCI/ISA
– PC card slot
– USB interface (for Windows NT: for standard PC keyboard and mouse)– on PCU (1.2 GHz): Two USB interfaces
– 2 interfaces to the operator panel front or videolink transmitter:LVDS interface/IO interface
Introduction
Features
14
04.0414.1 View
14-230 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
14.1 View
Top
Right
Left
Fig. 14-1 Perspective view of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz version)
Inte
rfac
es
Inte
rfac
e fo
r ex
t. flo
ppy
disk
driv
e
Hard disk module
Width = 297
Hei
ght =
267
Housing cover screws
Screws for power supply cover
HandleShipping lock
Depth = 122 mm (without screws protruding)
ScrewsHard disk module
Rating plate for power supply
Fig. 14-2 Top view of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz version)
14 PCU 70
04.0414.2 Interfaces and connections
14-231 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
14.2 Interfaces and connections
14.2.1 Interfaces on right side of casing
Slot 1 (master/slave)
Cover plate for connectionPCI/ISA slot
Ethernet
MPI/DP
USB *)
COM2(serialmouse)VGA
COM1LPT1
PS/2 keyboard
PS/2 mouse
24 V power supply
Dep
th =
122
Cover plate for PC card slot
Slot 4 (slave)
Slot 3 (slave)
Slot 2 (master/slave)
Cover plates for PCI slot connections
*) O
n P
CU
70
(500
MH
z) o
nly
on
e U
SB
inte
rfac
e
Fig. 14-3 Side view of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz; see Fig. 14-1) from right with interfaces
Table 14-1 Interfaces on right side of housing
Connection Function
LPT1/Printer Parallel interface (e.g. printer), 25-pin Sub-D socket connector
COM1/RS-232 Serial interface 1 (RS-232-C), 25-pin Sub-D socket connector
COM2 Serial interface 2 (RS-232), 9-pin male Sub-D connector
Keyboard PS/2 trackballkeyboard connection
Mouse PS/2 mouse connector
USBPCU (500 MHz) One ext. USB port (can be used only for standard PC keyboard or mouse)
USBPCU (1.2 GHz) Two external USB connections
MPI/DP (RS-485)Multi-Point Interface / PROFIBUS DP connection; Connecting an S7 program-mable controller, 9-pin Sub-D socket connector
VGA VGA interface for external monitor, 15-pin Sub-D socket connector
Ethernet Connection for local area network (LAN)
PC card slot Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or 100/200 Type I/II flash card
PCI slot Three slots for expansion boards 1)
PCI/ISA slot Slot for expansion board 1)
Power supply 24 V DC
1) If expansion boards are installed, the cover plates in Fig. 14-3 are replaced by the front plates of the relevant board. See description of the relevant board.
CautionThe MCI board of the SINUMERIK 840Di should be fitted in Slot 1 only.
14 PCU 70
04.0414.2 Interfaces and connections
14-232 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
14.2.2 Interfaces on left side of casing
Device van
Connection for externalfloppy disk drive (34-pinplug connector)
Reset pushbutton switch
Fig. 14-4 Side view of PCU 70 from left (1.2 GHz; see Fig. 14-1) with the port for an external floppy disk drive
The connection shown in Fig. 14-4 can be used to connect an external floppydisk drive (see Section 14.6 and Fig. 14-7).
Note
Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PC reboots.
14.2.3 Ports on bottom side of casing
There is a ground connection on the bottom side of the casing (see Fig. 13-5).
Ground terminal
Fig. 14-5 Bottom side of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz) with ground connection
14 PCU 70
04.0414.2 Interfaces and connections
14-233 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
14.2.4 Casing rear side
The two interfaces for connecting an operator panel front or, in a distributedconfiguration, a videolink transmitter are behind a rectangular cutout in the rearside of the casing:
– the IO interface for connecting the IO cableand
– the LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display.
Procedure for mounting: see Subsection 14.3.1.
14.2.5 Pin assignments
The pin assignments of the individual interfaces can be found in Chapter “Con-nection Conditions”, Subsection “Secondary electrical conditions”.
14 PCU 70
04.0414.3 Start-up
14-234 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
14.3 Start-up
Caution
In a distributed configuration, the display type must be set on the videolinktransmitter before the system is first switched on as it is not automaticallydetected (see Chapter “Distributed Installation”, Section “Operating andmonitoring devices”).
If the settingis incorrect, the display could sustain damage within a fewseconds.
14.3.1 Mounting and installation
A special set of mounting brackets is required for each mounting method. Theseare not supplied with the PCU 70 and must be ordered separately (see Sec-tion 14.6).
Two methods can be used to mount the PCU 70:
1. Central installation when PCU is mounted on the operator panel front.
For installation instructions, see relevant operator panel front chapter, “Mounting” section.
2. Flat installation for distributed configuration of PCU + videolink transmitter.
In this case, the PCU can be installed at a distance of up to 20 m from the operator panel front (e.g. in a control cabinet).
For installation instructions see “Distributed Installation”, “Mounting aPCU 50 with videolink transmitter”.
Notice
When attaching the mounting brackets, make sure that they are positionedcorrectly (the brackets are not symmetrical). The hinged catches must pointtowards the fan end.
14.3.2 Notes on installation
Please note the following during installation:
As far as possible, extreme environmental conditions should be avoided.Protect the PCU against severe vibration / shocks, dust, humidity, direct sun-light and heat.
An external fire protection casing is required.
Install the device such that no danger (e.g. by falling down) may result.
Ventilation clearance:
– Fan end: 100 mm
– Elsewhere: 10 mm
Do not cover the vent slots.
14 PCU 70
04.0414.3 Start-up
14-235 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Interfaces
Interfaces
Device fan
Inte
rfac
es
Device fan
Dev
ice
fan
Hard disk
Hard disk
Hard disk
Impermissible mountingposition
Fig. 14-6 Preferred mounting positions of PCU 70Inclined position: Deviations of ± 5 relative to the installation positions shown in the illustration are per-mitted.
14.3.3 Preparing for operation
With a distributed configuration, make sure that you read the warning notice atthe beginning of Section 14.3 before you switch on the power!
Before you connect the PCU to a power supplyyou must unlock the harddiskand connect up the I/O devices (operator panel front, keyboard, mouse... ).
1. Insert the interconnecting cables of the I/O devices into the appropriatesocket connectors on the interface side of the PCU 70 (see Fig. 14-3 andTable 14-1).
2. After the I/O devices have been connected, the device is ready.
Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable is required, is to be found in the User’s Manual of your I/O device.
Note
When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components aredesigned for use in industry.
Caution
When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, etc.),make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the powersupply. Otherwise damage may result.
This does not apply to USB connections.
The PCU 70 is supplied with 24 V direct voltage.
Mounting position
ConnectingI/O devices
Connecting thepower supply
14 PCU 70
04.0414.3 Start-up
14-236 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Caution
The device should only be connected to a 24 V DC power supply whichsatisfies the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV).
The cable cross-section must be large enough to ensure that no damage canbe caused by the cables if there is a short-circuit at the PCU.
A mains switch is not provided which means that the device must be switchedon and off at the external power supply.
14.3.4 Booting
See Chapter “PCU 50”, Section “Booting”.
14.3.5 Working with PC cards
See Chapter “PCU 50”, Section “Working with PC cards”.
Turning on andturning off
14 PCU 70
04.0414.4 Technical data
14-237 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
14.4 Technical dataTable 14-2 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
IP20
Approvals CE, cULus
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Max. power consumption PCI / ISA slot Total
5 V12 V
–12 V
2 A0.3 A0.1 A
3 A0.6 A0.15 A
Power consumption typically 40 W maximum 140 W
Mains buffering time 20 ms
Mechanical data
Dimensions (mm) Width 297 Height 267 Depth 122
Weight approx. 6.5 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with OP 012)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Noise < 55 dB(A) to DIN 45635
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation Open circuit ventilation
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values15 W 1): 5 ... 55 °C20 W 1): 5 ... 50 °C30 W 1): 5 ... 45 °C
–20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 10 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
1) max. output expansions (PCI/ISA slots, PC card, USB interface)
14 PCU 70
04.0414.6 Accessories
14-238 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
14.5 Spare parts
Spare part Order number
Hard disk with mounting plate and damper 6FC5247–0AF08–0AA1Hard disk with mounting plate and damper 6FC5247–0AF08–0AA1
Device fan A5E00019079
Backup battery 3.6 V W79084–E1003–B1
Power supply 24 V DC500 MHz (85 W) A5E00117073
Power supply 24 V DC1.2 GHz (105 W) A5E00188815
Information on spare part replacement can be found in the “PCU 50 Compo-nents” chapter.
14.6 Accessories
Component Order numbers
3.5” floppy disk drive, external 6FC5 235–0AA05–0AA1
3.5” floppy disk drive, USB 6FC5 235–0AA05–1AA1
PCU 70 (500 MHz) PCU 70 (1.2 GHz)
Memory expansion 128 MB 6ES7791–0KS00–0XA0 6ES7648–2AC10–0CA0Memory expansion(SDRAM PC 100) 3)
128 MB256 MB
6ES7791–0KS00–0XA06ES7791 0KT00 0XA0
6ES7648–2AC10–0CA06ES7648 2AC20 0CA0(SDRAM PC-100) 3) 256 MB 6ES7791–0KT00–0XA0 6ES7648–2AC20–0CA0
Expansion boards (according to AT/PCI specification)
Mounting bracketstandard 1)
flat 2)6FC5248–0AF20–2AA06FC5248–0AF20–0AA0
____________________________________________1) for PCU + operator panel front assembly2) for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter3) see Figures 13-18 and 13-19.
14.6.1 External floppy disk drive
Fig. 14-7 shows the external floppy disk drive that can be connected to the driveconnection on the left side of the casing (see Fig. 14-4).For further information, see Chapter “3.5 Floppy Disk Drive” in this manual.
Fig. 14-7 External floppy disk drive
Replacing spareparts
14 PCU 70
04.0414.7 System information
14-239 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
14.6.2 Memory expansion
Two slots are provided on the mother board (“Banks”, see “Changing battery” inthe “PCU 50 Components” chapter) for 144-pin SO DIMM memory modules.You can use these modules to extend the user memory of the PCU to 512 MB.
The basic configuration is a 128/256MB SDRAM module.
Memory (MB) 128 MB module 256 MB module
128 1 –
256 2 –
256 – 1
384 1 1
512 – 2
See “Memory expansion” in Chapter “PCU 50”.
14.6.3 Expansion boardsSee “Expansion boards” in Chapter “PCU 50”.
14.7 System information
Information on the boot manager and reading out/changing BIOS settings canbe found under “System information” in Chapter “PCU 50”.
Standard memory
Mounting, systemboot
14 PCU 70
04.0414.7 System information
14-240 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
14 PCU 70
Notes
15-241 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Distributed Installation with Videolink
With “Distributed Installation with Videolink” in SINUMERIK, up to three identicaloperator panel fronts (see Table 15-2) can be operated at a distance of up to 20m from the PCU.This spatial flexibility allows you to install the PCU at less hazardous locationsof the system (e.g. control cabinet).
The following description applies to the components:
Designation Properties Order number
Videolink receiver ...–0AA0
Videolink transmitter1 : 1 1) 6FC5247–0AF22–... ...–1AA0
Videolink transmitter1 : 2 ...–2AA0
Mounting bracket forVideolink receiver
behind operator panel front(identical to that for PCU)
...–2AA0
Mo nting bracket forFlat for PCU 50/70 6FC5248–0AF20–... ...–0AA0
Mounting bracket forVideolink transmitter
Upright for PCU 506FC5248 0AF20 ...
...–1AA0Videolink transmitter
Central for PCU 50 ...–3AA0
5 m ...–1AF0 2)
Videolink cable10 m
6FX2002 1VL01...–1BA0 2)
Videolink cable 20 m
6FX2002–1VL01–......–1CA0 2)
25 m ...–1CF0 2)
1) see Fig. 15.42) ...–1XX0 is the length code: A = 0, B = 1, etc.
Table 15-1 Possible combinations of the various transmitter and receiver types
receiver
transmitter 6FC5247–0AF20–0AA0
6FC5247–0AF21–0AA0
6FC5247–0AF22–1AA0
6FC5247–0AF22–2AA0
6FC5247–0AF20–1AA0 + + – –
6FC5247–0AF21–1AA0 + + – –
6FC5247–0AF22–0AA0 – – + +
Use
Validity
15
04.04
15-242 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 15-2 Maximum permitted number of operator panel fronts which can be combined with a PCU in a distributedinstallation with videolink
PCU ...
Operatorpanels
NumberOP 010
from.._0AA1
NumberOP
010S
NumberOP
010C
NumberOP 012
NumberTP 012
NumberOP 015
NumberOP
015A
Number15” OPs416 mm
NumberTP
015A
PCU 50 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
PCU 70 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Used for
– Slimline operator consoles with any orientation
– Closed fan-free operator consoles
Robust due to separate installation of the PCU in protected areas (e.g. con-trol cabinet)
Simple implementation of a second/third operator panel front with digitalscreen quality
Additional USB ports for service and I/O devices (keyboard, mouse, etc.)
Extensive use of software-neutral technology for all operating systems
SINUMERIK “distributed installation with videolink” comprises a selection ofcomponents based on the building block principle – suitable for a wide variety ofoperator panel fronts:
Videolink transmitter for mounting on a PCU 50/70
– 1:1 (with one output) or
– 1:2 (with two outputs)
Videolink receiver for mounting on a TFT operator panel front (OP 010 S/C,OP 012, OP 015, OP 015 A, TP 012 or TP 015A)
Note
OP 010 is not supported (owing to STN color display).
Videolinkcable in standard lengths 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 25 m
Application-specific fixing sets such as
– flat mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter in control cabinet
– upright mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter in controlcabinet
– central mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter behind oper-ator panel front (not with OP 010S)
– standard mounting bracket for mounting the receiver on the operatorpanel front (not required for OP 010S).
Features
Components
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.1 Overview
15-243 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.1 Overview
The maximum cable length for the videolinks is 20 m.
Caution
All of the displays used in a system must have the same resolution since theycan be damaged within a few seconds if they are incorrectly set.It is therefore essential to observe the “Caution” note in Subsection 15.4.1.
15.1.1 Configurations
Figs. 15-1 and 15-2 show the possible configurations for the distributed installa-tion with videolink:
Mounting bracketflat6FC5248–0AF20–0AA0
PC
U
Vid
eolin
ktra
nsm
itter
PCU
Videolink transmitter
VideolinkreceiverVideolink receiver
Operator panel frontOperator panel front
USB
2 x USB
Mounting bracket6FC5 248–0AF20–0AA0 or6FC5 248–0AF20–1AA0 required
USB
Videolink–Transmitter 1:1
Videolinktransmitter 1:1
PCUPCU
VideolinkreceiverVideolink receiver
Operator panel frontOperator panel front
USB
Mounting bracket6FC5 248–0AF20–0AA0 or6FC5 248–0AF20–1AA0 required
VideolinkreceiverVideolink receiver
Operator panel frontOperator panel front
Videolink–Transmitter 1:2
Videolink
PCUPCU
USB
USB
USB
6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0
Mounting bracketupright6FC5248–0AF20–1AA0
USBMounting bracket6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0required
6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0
6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0
2 x USB
2 x USB
transmitter 1:2
Fig. 15-1 Distributed installation with videolink configuration with up to two operator panel fronts
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.1 Overview
15-244 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
In Fig. 15-1 (left top and center), the PCU and videolink transmitter componentsare combined to form a unit. They can be mounted physically separated fromthe operator panel front, i.e. in a distributed installation (e.g. in a control cabi-net).
The two installation options shown bottom left can be used: “flat mounting” and“upright mounting”.
A third installation option (not shown here), “central mounting”, is identical to “flatmounting”, except an additional operator panel front is directly mounted behindthe videolink transmitter (see Fig. 15-2).
The mounting kits (see Subsection 9.5.3) must be ordered separately (see be-low).
The associated operator panel front and videolink receiver components whichare combined to form a unit are shown on the right. They can be mounted in anoperator console.
Fig. 15-2 shows another application option for distributed configuration with vi-deolink:The PCU with the videolink transmitter is mounted behind an additional (central)operator panel front (not intended for OP 010S). This allows up to three operatorpanel fronts to be operated at a PCU at the same time.
PCUPCU USB
VideolinkVideolink transmitter
Operator panel frontOperator panel front
Videolink–receiverVideolink receiver
Operator panel frontOperator panel front
2 x USB
Mounting bracket
Videolink–receiverVideolink receiver
Operator panel frontOperator panel front
USB
Mounting bracket6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0
PCUPCU USB
Videolink
Operator panel frontOperator panel front
Videolink–receiverVideolink receiver
Operator panel front
Mounting bracket
required
USB
USB
6FC5248–0AF20–3AA0
6FC5 248–0AF20–3AA0 required
required
USB
USBUSB
USB
6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0
6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0
6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0
Videolink transmitter
1:1
1:2
2 x USB
2 x USB
Fig. 15-2 Configuration with up to three operator panel fronts on one PCU
Configuration withup to two operatorpanel fronts
Configuration withup to 3 operatorpanel fronts
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.1 Overview
15-245 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Notice
If a central operator panel front is used, it is important to ensure that DIP switchS2 of the videolink transmitter is set to the correct position (see Section 15.4).
15.1.2 View
Videolinktransmitter1:2
*) see note below
PCU 50
Videolinkcable (≤ 20 m)
Fig. 15-3 View of distributed installation with videolink: Example with two OP 012 operator panel fronts
Fig. 15-3 shows the components for distributed installation with videolink:The PCU communicates with two operator panel fronts (here OP 012) bymeans of
– videolink transmitters 1:2 mounted on the PCU
– two videolinkcables and
– two videolinkreceivers (not visible in the illustration since they are mountedbehind the operator panel fronts; see Figs. 15-4 and 15-19).
Operator panel fronts, PCU and videolinkreceivers should be supplied with24 V DC (the videolink transmitter is supplied with power from the PCU).
Note
To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel frontshould be switched on at the same time as the PCU via the 24 V DC supply.
Power supply
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.2 Description of components
15-246 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.2 Description of components
15.2.1 Videolink receiver
Videolink receiver
Supporting plate
Keyboard interface
Power supply
Standard mounting bracket(not required for OP 010S)
2 x USB-A
Cable tie(see Section 15.6)
Videolink cable
Hinged catches (covered) tohelp attach videolinkreceiver to operator panelfront (see Section 15.6)
Fig. 15-4 Videolink receiver for mounting to OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012 or TP 015A
Fig. 15-4 shows the position of the receiver interfaces:
Inputs:
– 1 x videolink for 1, ..., 20 m (video data plus USB signals)
– 1 x 24 V DC power supply
Outputs:
– 2 x USB-A
– 1 x keyboard interface (for USB keyboard)
– 1 x LVDS interface (not visible in Fig. 15-4)
– 1 x IO/USB interface ( “ “ “ )
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.2 Description of components
15-247 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.2.2 Cable
The videolink cable is available in four standard lengths:
5 m: Order No. 6FX2002–1VL01–1AF0
10 m: Order No. 6FX2002–1VL01–1BA0
20 m: Order No. 6FX2002–1VL01–1CA0
25 m: Order No. 6FX2002–1VL01–1CF0
Other lengths require special preparation and have longer delivery times.
Fig. 15-5 Videolink cable
The housing can be removed on angular connectors. This reduces the outerdimensions and allows the connector to be introduced into conduits with 35 mmdiameter or greater. The minimum diameter for permanently mounted connec-tors is 42 mm.
Note
These high-quality cables should not be shortened or lengthened.
For technical reasons, the length is limited to max. of 20 m.
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.2 Description of components
15-248 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.2.3 Videolink transmitter
Fig. 15-6 shows a videolink transmitter (mounted on the PCU with the aid of the“flat” mounting bracket, see Subsection 15.5.1).
Videolinktransmitter
PCU 50Connections forvideo link cable
USB-A
Display codingswitch S1 *)
USB-A
Mounting bracket (flat)
Cover platefor covering the opening usedto connect a central operatorpanel front
*) IMPORTANT: Please read Subsection 15.4.1!
Fig. 15-6 PCU with videolink transmitter (1:2 variant) and flat mounting bracket
The videolink transmitter is mounted on the underneath of the PCU between themounting brackets. It does not require a separate power supply because it issupplied via the interfaces to the PCU.
The videolink transmitter is available in two versions:
1. Videolink transmitter 1:1
Inputs (not visible in Fig. 15-6):
– 1 x LVDS interface
– 1 x IO/USB interface
Outputs:
– 1 x videolink for 1, ..., 20 m (video data plus USB signals)
– 1 x USB-A
– 1 x LVDS interface (for connecting a centr. operator panel front)
– 1 x IO/USB interface ( “ “ “ “ “ “ “)
2. Videolink transmitter 1:2
Inputs: same as 1.
Outputs:
– 2 x videolink for 1, ..., 20 m (video data plus USB signals)
– 2 x USB-A
– 1 x LVDS interface (for connecting a centr. operator panel front)
– 1 x IO/USB interface ( “ “ “ “ “ “ “)
Design
Description
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.3 Interfaces
15-249 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.3 Interfaces
The standard pin assignments for the interfaces are summarized in “ConnectionConditions”, “Pin assignments” section.
15.3.1 Hardware interfaces – overviewTable 15-3 Overview of hardware interfaces
Interface
Type Function Designation I/O Type
Videolinktransmitter
1:1
– Videolink (incl. USB)– USB interface– LVDS interface– I/O interface for operator panel for PC– LVDS interface for central operator pane front– I/O interface for central operator panel front
X101X102X103X104
X107
X108
OOI
I/O
O
I/O
Socket connector,36-pin USB-A
Plug conn., 2 x 10-pinPlug conn., 2 x 13-pin
Plug conn., 2 x 10-pin
Plug connector, 2 x13-pin
Videolinktransmitter
1:2
as for videolink transmitter 1:1plus:– second videolink (incl. USB)– USB interface
X105X106
OO
Socket connector,36-pin USB-A
Videolink re-ceiver
– Videolink (incl. USB)– USB interface– Keyboard interface– Power supply– I/O interface for operator panel– LVDS interface
X201X203/204
X205X206X207
X208
IOOI
I/O
O
Socket connector,36-pin 2 x USB-A
Plug conn., 2 x 5-pinTerminal block, 3-pinPlug conn., 2 x 13-pin
Plug connector, 2 x10-pin
Vid li k t itt 5 m
– Video link transmitter<=>video Videolink I/O
10 m
Cable
<=>video link receiver
Videolink I/O20 m
Cable link receiver25 m
– Videolink transmitter <=> LVDSI/O
Flat ribbon, 20-pin Videolink transmitter < >PCU I/O
I/OFlat ribbon, 26-pin
15.3.2 Interface pin assignment for videolink transmitter
The abbreviations in the “Signal type” column in the tables below have the fol-lowing meanings:
I InputO OutputB BidirectionalV Supply voltageOC Open collector
Signal types
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.3 Interfaces
15-250 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA)
Connector designation: X102 / X106; USB socket connector (4-pin),type A
Max. line length: 5 mMax. number of hubs: 3
Note
It is advisable to use only “self-powered” hubs (i.e. hubs with their own powersupply).
X106 is switched off with switch S2 with transmitter 1:2 (see Section 15.4).
15.3.3 Interface assignment for video link receiver
Both interfaces are designed as high-current USB (500 mA)
Plug identifier: X203/X204; USB socket,2 x 4-pin, Type A
Max. cable length: Mouse, printer, keyboard: 5 mIf hub used: 3.5 m *)
_________________________________________________________1) Length incl. supply lead to hub and connected terminal; max. of one hub is permitted. It isimportant to note that some keyboards already have a hub.
Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA)
Connector designation: X205; plug connector, 2x5-pin
Max. line length: 0.5 m
Table 15-4 Pin assignment of connector X205 (USB keyboard interface)
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 P5V_fused VO + 5 V (fused) for external USBinterface
2 USB_DMB
USB data –
3 USB_DPB
USB data +
4, 5 GND V Ground
6, ..., 10 NC ––– Not assigned
Connector designation: X206; terminal block, 3-pin
Table 15-5 Pin assignment of connector X206 (videolink receiver)
Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 24 V DC VI 24 V DC
2 GND V Ground for 24 V DC
3 PE ––– Protective earth
X102/X1061 (USB)
X203/X204 (USB)
X205 (USBkeyboardinterface)
X206 (powersupply)
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.4 Operating and monitoring devices
15-251 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.4 Operating and monitoring devices
15.4.1 Videolink transmitter
For selecting the display type.
Setting 0 Display switched off (factory setting)
Setting 8 12” TFT SVGA 800 x 600 pixels
Setting 9 15” TFT XGA 1024 x 768 pixels
Setting B 10” TFT VGA 640 x 480 pixels
USBinterface
Videolinktransmitter
Illustration not toscale!
Fig. 15-7 Rotary switch S1 for setting of display type in delivered status(switch position 0)The values 1, 3, ..., F are displayed as dashes due to lack of space.
Note
– On delivery, S1 is set to “0”.
– Before starting operation, S1 must be set to the display type being used as described in the list above.
– The selected switch setting only becomes effective when the PCUis (re)started.
– All displays used in a system must have the same resolution.
Caution
If the settingis incorrect, the displays could be damaged within a few seconds.
Rotary selectorswitch S1
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.4 Operating and monitoring devices
15-252 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
With the 1:2 configuration, the USB signal must be switched to the selectedinterfaces (X106 or X108) using S2. The default setting is activation of the inter-nal interface X108. Interface X106 can only be used for flat and upright mount-ing.
Table 15-6 Function of selector S2
Function Keyswitch pos.
USB signal ⇒ X 106(X 108 not effective, 2nd USB interface active)
1/1
USB signal⇒ X 108 (X 106 not effective, central operator panel front active)
2/2 (default)
1
12
2
X 1
06
X 1
08
Fig. 15-8 DIP switch S2 for controlling the USB signal
The recommended default setting for S2 is 2/2 (central operator panel front).
Notice
If a central operator panel front (see Subsection 15.1.1) is connected toX107/108, the DIP switch S2 must be set to “X108” (2/2), otherwise thekeyboard, mouse and USB connector on the operator panel front will notfunction.
The second USB interface X106 cannot then be used.
15.4.2 Videolink receiver
A temperature monitor is integrated in the receiver module. When the threshold75 ± 5 °C is exceeded, the “TEMP” LED on the operator panel front lights up.The LED goes out again when the temperature falls below the threshold69 ± 5 °C.
15.4.3 Operator panel interlock
The purpose of the operator panel interlock is to prevent operator inputs beingmade at different panels simultaneously. The screen display must remain activeand is not affected by the interlock.
DIP switch S2
Temperaturemonitor
Function
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU
15-253 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU
Note
The tightening torques for all screws are: M3: 0.8 Nm / M4: 1.8 Nm
We recommend the following mounting directions for optimum heatdissipation:
– “Device fan upwards”
– “Device fan to left” (not possible with “upright” mounting;Subsection 15.5.2)
15.5.1 Flat mounting
Assemble the PCU and videolink transmitter in the following way:
1. Check switch S2 (if fitted). With “flat” mounting, it must be set to 1/1 (X 106)(see Subsection 15.4.1).
2. Set S1 according to the used display type.
Caution
To prevent damage, it is essential to observe Subsection 15.4.1 whensetting S1.
Hingebolt
Threaded holesfor fasteningscrewsDIP switch S2 Rotary selector switch S1
⇒ PCU
USB interfaceX 102
USB interfaceX 106
I/O/USB cable K1Display cable K2
Fig. 15-9 Videolink transmitter 1:2 with connecting cables
PCU + videolinktransmitter
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU
15-254 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
“Flat” mounting bracket
Connection for centraloperator panel front
PCU 50
Fig. 15-10 PCU with flat mounting brackets
3. Mount one mounting bracket on the PCU first (see Fig. 15-10).
4. Hook the videolink transmitter into this mounting bracket (see Fig. 15-12).
5. Attach the second mounting bracket after you have positioned it on thevideo link transmitter hinge pin opposite (see Fig. 15-9).
6. Plug the connecting cable into the socket on the PCU (see illustration be-low).
PCU 50
Videolinktransmitter
I/O/USB cable K1
Display cable K2
Fig. 15-11 Videolink transmitter hooked into place with the hinge bolts
7. Swivel the videolink transmitter into place on the PCU (see illustration be-low).
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU
15-255 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Hinge bolts
PCU 50
Videolinktransmitter
Mountingbracket (flat)
Hingebearing
Fig. 15-12 Hinge of the videolink transmitter prior to alignment on the PCU
8. Slide the videolink transmitter along the angular hinge bearing (to left inFig. 15-12, see arrow) and push it into the position shown in the illustrationbelow.
Mountingscrew
Hinge bolts
Videolinktransmitter
PCU 50
Fig. 15-13 Videolink transmitter, aligned and screwed tight
9. Secure the videolink transmitter to the mounting brackets with the screwssupplied (see Fig. 15-13).
The videolink transmitter is then securely attached to the PCU mounting brack-ets (see figures 15-14 and 15-15) and can be mounted with the PCU in accor-dance with requirements.
Caution
If it is necessary to dismantle the videolink transmitter, please release thefastening screws and slide the video transmitter horizontally before swiveling itaway from the PCU, in accordance with step 8. and Fig. 15-12. Otherwise, damage is likely.
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU
15-256 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Cover plateoverconnectionfor centraloperatorpanel front
PCU 50
Videolink transmitter
Fig. 15-14 PCU/transmitter unit assembled for “flat” mounting
Dimensions in mm
PCU 50Videolinktransmitter
PCU 50
114
Ret
aini
ng s
crew
sfo
r th
e vi
deo
link
tran
smitt
er
Mountingbracket (flat)
PC
U 5
0
290
309
232
337
Mounting slotsfor M4 screws
Device fan
Fig. 15-15 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the flat mounting brackets
With “flat” mounting, the assembly unit comprising the PCU and videolink trans-mitter is mounted flat against the control cabinet wall panel (see Fig. 15-1).
Features:
Easily accessible hard disk
Relatively large amount of space required in control cabinet
Installation ofPCU/transmitterunit
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU
15-257 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.5.2 Upright mounting
Assemble the PCU and videolink transmitter in the following way:
1. Set the switch S2 (if fitted) to 1/1 (X106; see Subsection 15.4.1).
2. Disconnect the two cables from the transmitter.
3. Insert the free ends of the ribbon cables in the sockets of the PCU first (seeFig. 15-11).
4. Reconnect the two cable ends to the transmitter.
5. Screw the PCU and videolink transmitter together using the “upright” mount-ing bracket (see Fig. 15-16).
6. Set the display switch S1 to the used display type.
Caution
To prevent damage, it is essential to observe Subsection 15.4.1 whensetting S1.
PCU 50
Dimensions in mm
Videolink transmitter
PC
U 5
0
113
5017.5
360
7,3
85
PCU 50
280
Upr
ight
mou
ntin
g br
acke
t
Mountingslots forM4/M5screws
Device fan
Upr
ight
mou
ntin
g br
acke
t for
join
ing
the
PC
U a
nd v
ideo
link
tran
smitt
er to
geth
eran
d fo
r at
tach
ing
to th
e m
ount
ing
pane
l
Upr
ight
mou
ntin
g br
acke
t for
join
ing
the
PC
U a
nd v
ideo
link
tran
smitt
er to
geth
er a
ndfo
r m
ount
ing
to th
e as
sem
bly
pane
l
375.
6
Fig. 15-16 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the upright mountingbrackets
PCU + videolinktransmitter
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU
15-258 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
With “upright” mounting, the rear plate of the PCU/videolink transmitter unit ismounted at an angle of 90 ° to the rear panel (see Fig. 15-1).
Features:
Only one mounting position possible: Fan at top
Space required with PCU 50 less than that required for flat mounting
Keep a clearance for hard disk operation (approx. 10 cm).
Installation ofPCU/transmitterunit
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU
15-259 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.5.3 Central mounting on operator panel front
The components are joined together in the same way as for “upright” mounting,with the following exceptions:
Switch S2 (see Subsection 15.4.1) (if fitted) must be set to 2/2 (X108).
The cover plate on the transmitter (see Fig. 15-14) must be removed prior tomounting.
The “central” mounting brackets are used (see Fig. 15-17).
The assembled PCU/videolink transmitter unit is connected to an operatorpanel front and secured using the knurled screws of the mounting bracketsin the way described under “Installation” in Chapter “Operator Panel FrontOP 012”.
Dimensions in mm
Videolink transmitter
PC
U 5
0
117.8
124
338.
424
.8
289
PCU 50
PCU 50Device fan
Mou
ntin
g br
acke
ts (
cent
ral)
Fig. 15-17 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the central mountingbrackets to be attached to the operator panel front
With “central” mounting, the PCU/videolink transmitter unit is mounted in theusual way directly behind an operator panel front.
Features:
Mounting depth of the operator panel front increased by approx. 30 mm
Not possible with OP 010S, not possible with PCU 70 (too heavy).
PCU + videolinktransmitter
Installation ofPCU/transmitterunit
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front
15-260 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front
Before the receiver is mounted on the panel front, the two interface cables forthe panel front (IO/USB cable K1 and display cable K2) must be inserted intothe correct sockets on the videolink receiver (visible behind the casing cut-out).
For more information, see Chapter “OP 012”, Sections “Interfaces” and “Mount-ing”.
The operator panel front OP 010S and the receiver are screwed together with-out additional mounting brackets.
265
260
86,8
36
13,4
Dimensions in mm
Videolinkreceiver
OP 010S
Videolink cableUSB cable
Supporting plate
Retaining screws4 x M3 to secure thereceiversupport plate tothe operator panelfront (2 of 4)
Fig. 15-18 Front, side and rear view of operator panel front OP 010S with screwed-on videolink receiver
OP 010S
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front
15-261 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Two mounting brackets (must be ordered separately) are required to mount thereceiver on a panel front of type OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012or TP 015A (see Fig. 15-4) (see Subsection 15.1.1).
1. The mounting brackets are screwed to the receiver; the ends with the hinge-type catches must point to the right (in Fig. 15-4) or to the left (in Fig. 15-19).
2. The receiver mounting bracket unit is latched (like a PCU) into the operatorpanel front by means of the two hinged catches, closed shut and securedwith the four knurled screws.
338.4260
269
Dimensions in mm
Videolinkreceiver
OP 012
42
Videolink cable
USB cable
OP
012
Mounting bracket
OP 012
Knurled screw forattaching the mountingbracket to the operatorpanel front (1 of 4)
Mounting bracket
Hinged catch for latching intooperator panel front (1 of 2)
Fig. 15-19 Operator panel front (example OP 012 with bolted-on videolink receiverorder no. 6FC5247–0AF22–0AA0), front, rear and side view
Fig. 15-4 shows the outward-bound connections: the dual USB interface, the videolink interface (cable connected),the keyboard interface and the power supply connection.
Since some of the connections do not have a cable strain relief, it is recom-mended to fix the cables to the U-shaped lugs on the supporting plate usingcable ties (see Fig. 15-4).
OP 010C, OP 012,OP 015, OP 015A,TP 012, TP 015A
Cable connections
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.7 Technical data
15-262 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15.7 Technical data
For the technical data of the operator panel fronts, please refer to the corre-sponding Chapters: “OP 010S”, “OP 010C”, “OP 012”, “OP 015”, “OP 015A”, “TP 012” and “TP 015A”.
For the technical data of the PCUs, please refer to the corresponding Chapters:“PCU 50” and “PCU 70”.
Videolink transmitter
Table 15-7 Technical data for videolink transmitter
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
IP00/mounted on PCU: IP20
Approvals CE/cULus
Electrical data
Voltage supply from the PCU
Power consumption, max. ...–1AA0: 1.9 W ...–2AA0: 2.5 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 265 mm Height: 277 mm Depth: 35 mm
Weights
Videolinktransmitter:
1.2 kg
Mountingbracket
flat/central: 0.6 kg
Mountingbracketupright:1.0 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing
10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing
50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation Free convection, without fan
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1/–3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3/2K4
Temperature limiting values 5 ... 55 °C –25 ... 55 °CTemperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
Operator panelfront
PCU 50/70
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.7 Technical data
15-263 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Videolink receiver
Table 15-8 Technical data for videolink receiver
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
IP00
Approvals CE/cULus
Electrical data
Voltage supply from the PCU
Power consumption, max. 40 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 260 mm Height: 265 mm Depth: 37 mm
Weights 1.8 kg
Mechanical ambientconditions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing
10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing
50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation Free convection, without fan
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values 0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–25 ... 55 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
04.0415.7 Technical data
15-264 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
15 Distributed Installation with Videolink
Notes
16-265 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Distributed Installation with TCU(Thin Client Unit)
16.1 Overview
The Thin Client Unit (TCU) for distributed installation allows the spatial separa-tion of SINUMERIK OP/TP operator panel fronts and SINUMERIK PCUs andthe connection of up to four operator panel fronts to a PCU with one TCU each.To this end the user interface of a PCU 50/70 is copied to several OPs with oneTCU each.
Ethernetswitch
PCU 50/70 (+ OP/TP)
Up to 4OP/TPs+ TCUs
Ethernet
USB floppy
SINUMERIK 840D
Fig. 16-1 Distributed installation with TCU (example configuration with connection to the SINUMERIK system)
The description applies to the following SINUMERIK 810/840D components:
Designation Order number
Thin Client Unit (TCU) 6FC5312-0DA00-0AA0
Basic ThinClient PCU soft-ware for PCU 50/70 with
Single license on CD-ROM6FC5253-1CX10-0XA8ware for PCU 50/70 with
WinXP
Single license on CD ROM05/04; software version 1.0
6FC5253-1CX10-0XA8
Flat OP layout thanks to minimized mounting depth and low power loss
Graphics: Resolution 640 x 480 to 1024 x 768 pixels; 16-bit color resolution
Low-vibration installation of the SINUMERIK PCU in the control cabinet
Validity
Features
16
04.0416.1 Overview
16-266 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Efficient operator control of larger machines thanks to up to 5 identical oper-ator panels
Signal transmission between PCU and operator panel front via IndustrialEthernet (see Section 16.6 “Accessories”)
Easy installation and service-friendly layout thanks to the component struc-ture
PCU functionality the same as in a centralized configuration (e.g. number ofPCI slots). The same operator screen is shown synchronously at all OPsand can be used from all OPs. Use via a Thin Client is the same as use viaan operator panel front connected directly to the PCU. The screen on thepassive operator panel is blacked out.
The system can be operated from the active operator panel. Operation froma passive operator panel can be selectively enabled.
Mixed use of operator panel fronts on a TCU or with an integrated TCU andan operator panel front directly on the PCU is possible.
The distance between the PCU and the operator panel fronts is determinedby the maximum distance between two network nodes/access points(100 m).
Operator panel fronts OP 010/OP 010C/OP 010S/OP 012/TP 012/ OP 015/OP 015A/TP 015A with TFT display
Operator panel fronts with the same screen resolution
SINUMERIK PCU 50/PCU 70 1.2 GHz with Windows XP and with basicPCU software WinXP 7.4 and basic PCU software Thin Client.
The TCUs are connected to the PCU via Ethernet as Thin Clients in their ownsubnetwork (via DHCP server on the PCU).
Ports:
2 x USB 1.1 for connection of mouse and keyboard
Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s
Prerequisites
Design
16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit)
04.0416.1 Overview
16-267 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
X206: 24 V DCpower supply
X203/X204: 2 USB-A ports
X202: Ethernet interface
X201: Compact Flash interfaceDetail
X207/X208: interfaces forconnecting cables K1 and K2 tothe operator panel front (covered)
Cable tieto secure theconnector
Hinged catch forlatching intooperator panelfront (1 of 2)
24 V 0V PE
Mounting bracket (1 of 2)
Ethernet cable
Fig. 16-2 View of TCU with the interfaces (Ethernet cable connected and 1 mounting bracket already fitted)
View
16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit)
04.0416.2 Configurations
16-268 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
16.2 Configurations
PCU TCU
Mounting brackets required: flat for PCU 50/70 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 (for mounting in controlcabinet)upright for PCU 50 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0 ( “ “ “ )for TCU 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0
Operator panelfrontEthernet
Fig. 16-3 Distributed installation with TCU: minimum configuration with no central operator panel front on the PCU
PCU TCU
Mounting brackets required: 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 (for PCU 50/70 and TCU)
Operator panelfrontEthernet
Operator panelfront
Fig. 16-4 Distributed installation with TCU: minimum configuration with central operator panel front on the PCU
PCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
TCU
Operator panelfront
Operator panelfront
Operator panelfront
Operator panelfront
Operator panelfront Ethernet
Mounting brackets required: for PCU 50/70 and TCU 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0(without operator panel front, see Figure 16-3).
Switch
Fig. 16-5 Distributed installation with TCU: maximum configuration
16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit)
04.0416.3 Interfaces
16-269 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
16.3 Interfaces
16.3.1 Overview
Table 16-1 Overview of interfaces
Function Designa-tion
I/O Type
– CompactFlash interface– Ethernet interface– USB interface– 24 V DC power supply– I/O interface *)– LVDS display interface *)
X201X202
X203/204X206X207X208
I/OOOI
I/OO
50-pin base8-pin RJ45 socket2 x USB-A3-pin terminal block2 x 13-pin plugconnector2 x 10-pin plugconnector
*) for connection to an operator panel front
16.3.2 Description of interfaces
If not stated specifically below, the pin assignments for the connections can betaken from the “Connection Conditions” Chapter.
50-pin base
8-pin standard Ethernet socket
Both interfaces are designed as high-current USB (500 mA).
Plug identifier: X203/X204; USB socket,2 x 4-pin, Type A
Max. cable length: Mouse, printer: 5 mIf hub used: 3.5 m *)
_________________________________________________________*) Length incl. supply lead to hub and connected terminal; max. of one hub is
permitted. It is important to note that some keyboards already have a hub.
Terminal block, 3-pin
24 V DC; for detailed view of terminal assignments see Figure 1-1
X207: 26-pin plug connector for the IO/USB cable K1 for connecting the opera-tor panel front
X208: 20-pin plg connector for the LVDS display cable K2 for connecting theoperator panel front
Pin assignments
CompactFlashinterface X201
Ethernet interfaceX202
USB X203/X204
Power supply X206
Operator panelinterfacesX207/X208
16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit)
04.0416.4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front
16-270 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
16.4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front
Before the two components are assembled, the two interface cables for the op-erator panel front (IO/USB cable K1 and display cable K2, see illustration below)must be inserted into the correct sockets on the TCU (visible behind the casingcut-out).
For more information, see Chapter “OP 012”, Sections “Interfaces” and “Mount-ing”.
The operator panel front OP 010S and the TCU are screwed together withoutadditional mounting brackets.
84.8
34
Dimensions in mm
TCU
OP 010S
Supportingplate
Retaining screws4 x M3 to secure the TCUsupporting plate tothe operatorpanel front (2 of 4)
265
13.4
260
2 x USB Ethernet
OP
010
S
OP 010S
Fig. 16-6 Mounted TCU with OP 010S, front, side and rear view
OP 010S
16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit)
04.0416.4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front
16-271 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Two mounting brackets (must be ordered separately) are required to mount theTCU on an OP 010S, OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012 or TP015A operator panel front (see Fig. 16-2 and “Accessories” subsection).
1. The mounting brackets are screwed to the TCU; the ends with the hinge-type catches (in Figure 16-7) must point to the left.
2. Latch the TCU mounting bracket unit into the operator panel front by meansof the two hinged catches (like a PCU), close it after connecting cables K1and K2 and secure it with the four knurled screws.
Dimensions in mm
TCU
OP 012
Ethernet cable
2 x USB
OP
012
Mounting bracket
OP 012
Knurled screw forsecuring the mountingbracket on the operatorpanel front (1 of 4)
Mountingbracket
Hinged catch for latching intooperator panel front (1 of 2)
40
269
260338.4
Power supplyconnection
Fig. 16-7 Mounted TCU (example: with OP 012), front, side and rear view
Fig. 16-7 shows the outward-bound connections: the dual USB interface, the Ethernet interface (cable connected),the keyboard interface and the power supply connection.
Since some of the connections do not have a cable strain relief, it is recom-mended to fix the cables to the U-shaped lugs on the supporting plate usingcable ties (see Fig. 16-2).
OP 010C, OP 012,OP 015, OP 015A,TP 012, TP 015A
Cable connections
16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit)
04.0416.5 Technical data
16-272 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
16.5 Technical data
Table 16-2 Technical data for Thin Client Unit
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
IP20
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Voltage supply 24 V DC
Power consumption, max. 36 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 260 mm Height: 265 mm Depth: 37 mm
Weight 1.8 kg
Mechanical ambientconditions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing
10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing
50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721-3-3
300 m/s2, 6 ms,18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation Free convection, without fan
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1/-3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3/2K4
Temperature limiting values 0 ... 55 °C –25 ... 55 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit)
04.0416.6 Accessories
16-273 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
16.6 Accessories
Table 16-3 Accessories for Thin Client Unit
NameDescription Num-
berOrder number
Mounting bracketfor TCU behindoperator panelfront
6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0
Mountingbracket
SINUMERIK810D/840D
Flat mountingbracket forPCU 50/70
1 set(x 2) 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0
Upright mountingbracket forPCU 50
6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0
Ethernetcable
SIMATIC NET,IE FC TP cable
Standard cablefor universal use
1 6XV1840-2AH10
cable IE FC TP cableTrailing cable 1 6XV1840-3AH10
Ethernetswitch
SIMATIC NET Electrical Lean SwitchELS TP 40 for linear network struc-tures
1 6GK1102-6AA00
switchSIMATIC NET Electrical Lean SwitchELS TP 80 for star network structures
1 6GK1102-7AA00
16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit)
04.0416.6 Accessories
16-274 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit)
Notes
17-275 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Handheld Terminal HT 6
17.1 Overview and function blocks
Validity The following description applies to the handheld terminal HT 6(order number 6FC5403-0AA10-0AA0)
The SINUMERIK HT 6 (Handheld Terminal with a 6” display diagonal) is an op-eration and programming device and can be used in conjunction with the SI-NUMERIK 810D, 840D, FM 357-2H and 840Di controllers. The following components and cables are necessary for connection:
X5
X4
X3
Distributor box,e.g.6FX2006-1BH01
Terminal block– for HT 6 power supply– EMERGENCY STOP wiring for HT 6– Enabling button wiring for HT 6
Computer unit
MPI (187.5 kbaud) for SINUMERIK 840D/810DMPI cable
Otherbus devices
HT 6 cable
OPI (1.5 Mbaud) for SINUMERIK 840D
Handheldterminal (HT 6)
MPI (1.5 Mbaud) for SINUMERIK 840Di
Fig. 17-1 Connection diagram for Handheld Terminal HT 6
The handheld terminal must be connected to the MPI bus as the final node onthe MPI bus. The bus terminating resistors are integrated in the device.
Note
The HT6 cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX2002-4EA04-... sincethe bus terminators are integral components of this cable. Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalogReferences: /Z/ Catalog NCZ
Overview
Connections
17
04.0417.1 Overview and function blocks
17-276 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
HT 6 cableOrder No.: 6FX2002... Comment Appropriate distribution box...-1AA83-10 3-core enabling cable 6FX2006-1BC01...-1AA23-10 4-core enabling cable 6FX2006-1BH01
Examples (available by the meter, max. 40 m):...-1AA83-1BA0 10 m ...-1AA23-1CA0 20 m
Note
Distributor box 6FX2006-1BF00 cannot be used.
Caution
An EMERGENCY STOP is triggered if the connection between the HT 6 andthe distributor box is interrupted (e.g. the HT 6 cable was unplugged).EMERGENCY STOP overriding does not take place automatically (seeSection 17.4).
80486DX4 microprocessor
– Operating system DR-DOS
– Clock frequency 100 MHz
Memory:
– SDRAM 16 MB
– FLASH 8 MB
– PC memory card: 8 MB FLASH, can be plugged in externally
LCD with
– 5.7” diagonal, monochrome (blue) STN, 320*240 pixels (1/4 VGA),backlit, variable brightness and contrast
– 16, ..., 20 lines, 38, ..., 52 characters per line (as configured)
Membrane keyboard with
– Machine control key block: RESET, ALARM CANCEL, JOG, TEACH,AUTO, CONTROL PANEL FUNCTION, STOP, START, 12 traversing keys (6+ and 6– with slide-in labels)
– Horizontal softkey bar with eight keys
– Number block (12 keys, shift key switches to alpha characters)
– Cursor key block (nine keys)
– Customer-configurable keys: S1, S2, U1, ..., U8 (with slide-in labels)
– Function keys: Operating area (MENU SELECT), HELP, Recall (^)
Rotary override switch (19 positions with stop)
EMERGENCY STOP button
At the rear of the device:
– Enabling buttons (two buttons with two channels each, with two positionsfor Safety Category 3)
Function blocks
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.2 User interface and interfaces
17-277 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
– HT 6 cable connection
– Serial RS-232 interface (COM1)
– PC memory card interface
– PS/2 keyboard interface
– Reset pushbutton switch
– Belt fastener
– Two M5 threaded holes for customized bracket.
17.2 User interface and interfaces
17.2.1 User interface
X1
Y2
Z3
A4
B5
C6
Display
Softkeys
EMERGENCY STOP
Traversing keys,for configuring andlabeling by thecustomer 1)
Special keys,for configuration bythe customer
Function keys,for configuring andlabeling by thecustomer 1)
Rear side: Two enablingbuttons
Connectingcable
Override switch(with fixed stop)
1) See Section 17.7
Fig. 17-2 User interface of HT 6
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.2 User interface and interfaces
17-278 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The Shift key is used to switch the function of the number block keys betweentext and numerical mode. Changeover only becomes effective when the Shiftkey is released. In text mode, each key is assigned to several alpha characters.The required character is selected with Shift + character key.
EMERGENCY STOP buttonPress the red button in emergency situations:
when a person is at risk,
when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.
As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives arebrought to a standstill with max. braking torque.
Machine Manufacturer
For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP, please refer to the machinetool manufacturer’s instructions!
The rear of the HT 6 complete with the enabling buttons and the interface cov-ers is shown in Fig. 17-3.
– PC-MEMORY card interface– MF2 keyboard interface– RESET key (under the cover)
Enabling button
RS-232 interface(under the cover)
Connecting cable
Belt fastener
Interface cover:
M5 threaded boltsfor fixing bracket
Fig. 17-3 Rear of the HT 6 with the interfaces
The enabling button is designed as a 2-channel, 2-position switch (see Sec-tion 17.3).
In the case of operations that require enabling (e.g. manual traversing within adanger zone), only one enabling button has to be operated.
Note
Press the enabling button firmly as far as the stop to ensure reliable action.
Number block
EMERGENCYSTOP
Enabling button
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.2 User interface and interfaces
17-279 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
There are two M5 threaded bushes on the rear of the HT 6 for attaching to afixing bracket supplied by the customer, see following Figure. For both threads, compliance with the maximum tightening torque of 1.8 Nm isessential to ensure that the bushes are not overloaded.
16
117
M5
Fig. 17-4 M5 threaded bushes for fixing bracket
17.2.2 Interfaces
Connector designation:X101Connector type: 15-pin high-density Sub-D pin with UNC 4-gland
Table 17-1 Pin assignments on connector X101
Pin Signal name Signal mode Signaltype
1 B RS485 differential signal B
2 NC Not connected
3 ZS2.2 Enabling button, Contact 2
4 ZS1.2 Enabling button, Contact 1
5 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button, Contact 1
6 A RS485 differential signal B
7 NC Not connected
8 ZS1.1 Enabling button, Contact 1
9 NA1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button, Contact 1
10 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button, Contact 2
11 GND M (Mext for HT 6) VI
M5 threadedbushes for fixingbracket
HT 6cable interface(X101)
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.2 User interface and interfaces
17-280 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 17-1 Pin assignments on connector X101
Pin Signaltype
Signal modeSignal name
12 Ub 24 V (power supply for HT 6) VI
13 ZS2.1 Enabling button, Contact 2
14 SHIELD Shield
15 NA2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button, Contact 2
Installation of connecting cable:
Release the two M3 Torx screws of the connecting cable cover
Remove cover
Plug connecting cable into the socket and attach with the fixing screws
Replace cover and tighten screws again.
Connector designation: X201Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D, pinMax. cable length: 30 m
Table 17-2 X201 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal mode Signaltype
1 DCD Data Carrier Detect O
2 RxD Receive Data I
3 TxD Transmit Data O
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready I
5 1M Ground VO
6 DSR Data Send Ready O
7 RTS Request To Send I
8 CTS Clear To Send O
9 RI Ring Indicator I
Signal type
B: Bidirectional I: Input O: OutputVI: Voltage Input VO: Voltage Output
Releasing the RS-232-C cover:
Pull the lug on the cover upwards.
Rotate the cover to the side; the RS-232-C is accessible.
To reassemble, place cover on the HT 6 and latch in place with gentle pres-sure.
RS232C interface(X201)
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.2 User interface and interfaces
17-281 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X401Connector type: 68-pin PC card connector
Table 17-3 X401 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal type Pin Signal name Signal type
1 1M VO 35 1M VO
2 D3 36 XCARDDET O
3 D4 37 D11
4 D5 B 38 D12
5 D6 39 D13 B
6 D7 40 D14
7 XCSCARDF 41 D15
8 A10 42 XCSCARDF O
9 XOEP 43 NC
10 A11 44 NC
11 A9 O 45 NC
12 A8 46 A17
13 A13 47 A18
14 A14 48 A19 O
15 XWEP 49 A20
16 NC 50 A21
17 1P5VO
51 1P5VO
18 VPPVO
52 VPPVO
19 A16 53 A22
20 A15 54 A23O
21 A12 55 A24O
22 A7 56 A25
23 A6O
57 NC
24 A5O
58 RESET O
25 A4 59 NC
26 A3 60 NC
27 A2 61 XREG O
28 A1 62 NC
29 1M VO 63 NC
30 D0 64 D8
31 D1 B 65 D9 B
32 D2 66 D10
33 NC 67 NC
34 1M VO 68 1M VO
Explanation
A0, ..., A25: Address 0, ..., 25 B: BidirectionalD0, ..., 15: Data 0, ..., 15 O: Output VO: Voltage Output
PC memory cardinterface (X401)
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.2 User interface and interfaces
17-282 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Release interface cover:
Unlatch cover by depressing the lug
Hold the cover at the two recesses and pull off
To reassemble, place cover on the HT 6 and latch in place with gentle pres-sure.
Connector designation: X301Connector type: 6-pin mini DIN socket
Table 17-4 X301 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal mode Signaltype
1 KDATA Keyboard Data I
2 NC Not connected
3 1M GroundVO
4 1P5 +5 V (power supply)VO
5 KCLK Keyboard Clock O
6 NC Not connected
Signal type
I: Input O: Output VO: Voltage Output
Release the interface cover: As described above
The HT 6 can be booted up again using the RESET button.The RESET button is located under the interface cover and can be accessedthrough an opening using a screwdriver.
Release the interface cover: As described above
The following manuals are available for the handheld terminal (HT 6):
References: /BAH/ Operator’s Guide HT 6/IAM IM2/ “HT 6 Start-Up” Chapter/PJE/ HMI Embedded Configuring Package/IAM/BE1/ HMI Option Package
Note
The IP 54 degree of protection is only ensured when the interface covers andthe RS-232-C covers are closed.
PS/2 keyboardinterface (X301) forMF2 keyboard
RESET button
References forfurther reading
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.3 Distribution box
17-283 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
17.3 Distribution box
The handheld terminal is connected to a distribution box. The distribution boxhas an interface to the MPI bus and a terminal block for connecting the EMER-GENCY STOP circuit, enabling button circuit, 24 V power supply and an equipo-tential bonding connection.
The following are suggested for the connections
– Distribution box (Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01) for 3-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2002-1AA83, see Subsection 17.3.1)
– Distribution box (Order No. 6FX2006-1BH01) for 4-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2002-1AA23, see Subsection 17.3.2)
To ensure that the drained currents do not become a source of interference intheir own right, compliance with the following points is essential: Use a stranded reference potential conductor (of up to 30cm in length and at
least 10 mm2 cross-section). Securely tighten all fixing screws of cable connectors, modules and cables
referred to a potential. Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are pro-
tected against corrosion. In order to avoid capacitive charges on unused cable cores, the unused
cores of the EMERGENCY STOP and enabling buttons (terminalsNAUS1.1, NAUS1.2, NAUS2.1, NAUS2.2, ZS1, ZS2, ZUSTICO) must beconnected to the equipotential bonding terminal.
17.3.1 Distribution box for 3-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01)
10.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X5
X4
X3
Equipotentialbondingconnection
11 12 1326 hole forM25connector
X5
X3
Rating plate
34
X4
120
110
52
50
10090
36.5
Fig. 17-5 Distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01: Location of interfaces and terminal blocks
Distribution boxand HT 6
EMC measures
Position ofinterfaces andterminal blocks
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.3 Distribution box
17-284 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The 24 V supply is connected to terminal block X3 (see illustration below):
Terminal 9 UbTerminal 10 GND
The HT 6 is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distribution box bymeans of the HT 6 cable.
Note
When drilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, therequirements of degree of protection IP54 must be complied with.
The distribution box is connected to the appropriate interface via MPI bus termi-nal X5, e.g. on the MPI bus.
The EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to terminal block X3 (see illustra-tion below).
Terminal Assignments
1 / 2EMERGENCY STOP contact 1
Input / output
11 / 12EMERGENCY STOP contact 2
Input / output
EMERGENCY STOP button
12 2
X4
Enabling button
X33 4 5 6 7 8
Ub GND
9 101 11 13
2.1 2.21.1 1.2 1.1 2.1 1.2/2.2
X1015 10 15 9 8 13
HT 6
3 4
HT 6 cable6FX2002-1AA83
Distribution box6FX2006-1BC01
1 2
Cableconnector
Fig. 17-6 Distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01: Connection to the HT 6
24 V supply for theHT 6
Connecting theHT 6
Connection toMPI bus
Connecting theEMERGENCYSTOP button
Connecting theenabling button(three-core)
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.3 Distribution box
17-285 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X3Connector type: Terminal block for 1.5 mm2
Table 17-5 Distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01: X3 pin assignments for terminal block
Pin Signal name Signal mode Signaltype
1 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 (24 V, 1 A) I
2 NA1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 (24 V, 1 A) O
3, ..., 6 NC Not connected
7 ZS1.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A)O
8 ZS2.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A)O
9 Ub 24V (power supply for HT 6)
10 GND M (Mext for HT 6) I
11 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 (24 V, 1 A)
12 NA2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.2 (24 V, 1 A) O
13 ZS1.2/ZS2.2 Enabling button (24V, 1A) I
Connector designation: X4Connector type: Circular connector for screw connectionSpecial requirement Interface must comply with IP54
Table 17-6 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: X4 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal mode Signaltype
1 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24V, 1A) I
2 MPI_A
3 GND M (Mext for HT 6)I
4 Ub 24 V (power supply for HT 6)I
5 ZS1.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1A) O
6 ZS1.2/ZS2.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1A) I
7, 8 NC Not connected
9 NA1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O
10 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) I
11 NC Not connected
12 NA2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O
13 MPI_B
14 ZS2.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) O
15, ... 17 NC Not connected
Terminal block(X3)
HT 6 interface (X4)
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.3 Distribution box
17-286 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X5Connector type: 9-pin sub-D socket connectorMax. cable length: 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud
Table 17-7 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: Pin assignment of connector X5
Pin Signal name Signal mode Signaltype
3 MPI_BB
8 MPI_AB
Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection be-tween the distributor box and the earth potential.
17.3.2 Distribution box for 4-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2006-1BH01)
10.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X5
X4
X3
Equipotentialbondingconnection
11 12 13 141526 hole forM25connector
X5
X3
Rating plate
34
X4
120
110
52
50
10090
36.5
Fig. 17-7 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Location of interfaces and terminal blocks
The 24 V power supply is connected to terminal block X3.
Terminal 9 UbTerminal 10 GND
The HT 6 is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distributor box bymeans of the HT 6 cable.
MPIinterface(X5)
Connecting theequipotentialbonding
Position ofinterfaces andterminal blocks
24 V supply for theHT 6
Connecting theHT 6
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.3 Distribution box
17-287 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Note
When drilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, therequirements of degree of protection IP54 must be complied with.
The distributor box is connected to the appropriate interface via MPI bus termi-nal X5, e.g. on the MPI bus.
The EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to terminal block X3 (see illustra-tion below).
Terminal Assignment
1EMERGENCY STOP contact 1
Input
2EMERGENCY STOP contact 1
Output
11EMERGENCY STOP contact 2
Input
12EMERGENCY STOP contact 2
Output
EMERGENCY STOP button
12 2
X4
Enabling button
X33 4 5 6 7 8
Ub GND
9 101 11 13
2.1 2.21.1 1.2 1.1 2.1 2.2
X1015 10 15 9 8 13
HT 6
3 4
HT 6 cable6FX2002-1AA23
Distributor box6FX2006-1BH01
1 2
14
1.2
Cableconnector
Fig. 17-8 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Connection to the HT 6
Connection toMPI bus
Connecting theEMERGENCYSTOP button
Connecting theenabling button(four-core)
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.3 Distribution box
17-288 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X3Connector type: Terminal block for 1.5 mm2
Table 17-8 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: X3 pin assignments for terminal block
Terminal Signal name Signal mode Signaltype
1 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) I
2 NA1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O
3, ..., 6 NC Not connected
7 ZS1.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A)O
8 ZS2.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A)O
9 Ub 24V (power supply for HT 6)
10 GND M (Mext for HT 6) I
11 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A)
12 NA2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O
13 ZS2.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A)I
14 ZS1.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A)I
15 KEY2Indicator for plugged in short-circuit plug. Ifso –> 24 V
O
Connector designation: X4Connector type: Circular connector for screw connectionSpecial requirement: Interface must comply with IP54
Table 17-9 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: X4 pin assignments
Pin Signal name Signal mode Signaltype
1 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) I
2 MPI_A B
3 GND M (Mext for HT 6)I
4 Ub 24 V (power supply for HT 6)I
5 ZS1.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) O
6 ZS2.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) I
7, 8 NC Not connected
9 NA1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O
10 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) I
11 KEY2Indicator for plugged in short-circuit plug. If so–> 24 V
O
12 NA2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O
13 MPI_B B
14 ZS2.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) O
15 NC Not connected
16 ZS1.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) I
17 HR_B Not connected
Terminal block(X3)
HT 6 interface (X4)
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.3 Distribution box
17-289 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X5Connector type: 9-pin sub-D socket connectorMax. cable length: 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud
Table 17-10 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Pin assignment of connector X5
Pin Signal name Signal mode Signal type
3 MPI_BB
8 MPI_AB
Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection be-tween the distributor box and the earth potential.
MPIinterface(X5)
Connecting theequipotentialbonding
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation
17-290 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
17.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation
Trouble-free disconnection and connection of the HT 6 during machine opera-tion requires the following:
Release or override of the HT 6 EMERGENCY STOP
Connection of the HT 6 to the OPI/MPI via a PROFIBUS repeater.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
NCU/CCU
HT 6
Distributor
MPI/OPI
Terminating resistor closed
Terminating resistor open
Repeater RS-485
Distributor
Fig. 17-9 Connecting the HT 6 using a PROFIBUS repeater
A PROFIBUS repeater must be connected upstream of the HT 6 distributor boxfor each branch. The individual bus segments (MPI/OPI cable and/or the localsegments between repeater and HT 6) must be terminated with connector resis-tors at the ends of the bus.
The repeater can be ordered under Order No. 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0. For fur-ther information please refer to the Catalog
/IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET
Note
The HT 6 already has an installed bus terminating resistor.
The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed 2m.
Cable lengths for MPI/OPI, see /IAD/ Start-Up Guide 840D or /IAC/ Start-UpGuide 810D, Chapter 3.
Purpose
Repeater RS 485
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation
17-291 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
M (GND)
HT 6
P (24 V) M (0 V)
Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01
1 2
EMERGENCY STOP circuit (system EMERGENCY STOP)
9 10
EMERGENCY STOPbutton
11 12
24 V
Keyswitch 1) with positive-action contacts
X3
X4
1) Keyswitch consisting of
2 switching elements 3SB3400-0A and
Operator control element 3SB30 or 3SB36(appropriate safety lock as required)Catalog: Switchgear and Systems (NSK) from A&D CD
Signal to PLC 2)
Short-circuit connector
2) triggers a timer. If the signal level is still “low” after themonitoring period (approx. 5 min), the PLCmust initiate an EMERGENCY STOP.To ensure a reliable HIGH/LOW signaltransition, use a pull-down resistor ifnecessary.
10 1 12 9
10 1 12 9
X4 (distributor):
Keyswitch = ON(EMERGENCY STOP bypasspassive)HT 6 plugged in
Sample circuit
Fig. 17-10 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: Sample circuit for EMERGENCY STOP override (illustration showskeyswitch set to “ON” with HT 6 connected)
Note
Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the samplecircuits.
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation
17-292 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
M (GND)
HT 6
P (24 V) M (0 V)
Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01
1 2
EMERGENCY STOP circuit (system EMERGENCY STOP)
9 10
EMERGENCY STOPbutton
11 12
24 V
Keyswitch 1) with positive-action contacts
X3
X4
1) Keyswitch consisting of
Two switching elements 3SB3400-0A and
Operator control element 3SB30 or 3SB36(appropriate safety lock as required)Catalog: Switchgear and Systems (NSK) from A&D CD
Signal to PLC 2)
short-circuit connector
Keyswitch = ON(EMERGENCY STOP bypasspassive)HT 6 plugged in
2) triggers a timer. If the signal level is still “low” after the monitoringperiod (approx. 5 min), the PLC must initiate anEMERGENCY STOP.
To ensure a reliable HIGH/LOW signal transition,use a pull-down resistor if necessary.
4 10 1 12 9 11
10 1 12 9
3) At 24 V, when short-circuit connector is pluggedin. Can be routed to the PLC.
Signal KEY2 to PLC 3)
X4 (distributor):
4
15
11
Sample circuit
Fig. 17-11 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Sample circuit for EMERGENCY STOP override (illustration showskeyswitch set to “ON” with HT 6 connected)
Note
Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the samplecircuits.
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation
17-293 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Keyswitch is set to “ON” position, HT 6 connection at distributor is active (incl.EMERGENCY STOP).1. Override the EMERGENCY STOP circuits of the HT 6 using the keyswitch.
2. This connects the HT 6 supply voltage and the signal to the PLC to the LOWsignal level (provide a pull-down resistor if necessary). This HIGH-LOW tran-sition starts a timer in the PLC, which opens the EMERGENCY STOP circuitvia the relevant PLC outputs and series-connected relays after the change-over period (approx. 5 min) if the keyswitch is not reset to its initial positionwithin this period.
3. The HT 6 must be removed within the changeover period and the EMER-GENCY STOP circuit overridden using a short-circuit connector.
Changeover from short-circuit connector to HT 6 connection is carried out inreverse order.
Danger
EMERGENCY STOP switches that are inactive
may not be recognizable as such
may not be accessible.
This is to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP switch from being usedinadvertently.
Sequence ofoperationsDisconnecting the
HT 6
Sequence ofoperationsConnecting the
HT 6
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.5 Configuring the HT 6, setting interface parameters
17-294 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
17.5 Configuring the HT 6, setting interface parameters
Note
Interface parameters are configured using the IK Screen Kit.
References: /FBPH/, Configuring HT 6 Operator InterfaceIK, Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration
17.5.1 Interface signals of HT 6
MCP simulation is available for the HT 6. MCP simulation of the HT 6 must beparameterized with the function block FB1 as MCP, to enable the basic PLCprogram to monitor the HT 6 for failure.
The parameter setting for the start address n is set in the PLC user program(FB1).
Table 17-11 HT 6 interface -> PLC
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
EBFunction key block
EBn
(REF) TEACH AUTO (MDA) JOG QUIT RESET(WCS/MCS)
EB 1Function key block
EBn+1Controlpanelfunction
U4 U3 Reserved U2 U1 (INC) (REPOS)
JOG keys positive direction
IBn+2 Reserved(AXSEL1) AXSEL0 JOG6+ JOG5+ JOG4+ JOG3+ JOG2+ JOG1+
JOG keys negative direction
IBn+3 Reserved Reserved JOG6– JOG5– JOG4– JOG3– JOG2– JOG1–
IBn+4 Reserved
IBn+5 Reserved U8 U7 U6 U5 Step Reserved Reserved
EBn 6Start key block
EBn+6Reserved(HW1) * (HW0) *
Reserved ReservedSF2 SF1 START STOP *
EBn 7Feed override
EBn+7
E * D * C * B * A *
Notes:– Only the keys on light gray background are evaluated by the basic PLC program (FC26).– Only the keys on dark gray background are evaluated in FC26 from SW 6.1.– Signals shown in () brackets do not exist, but are emulated by the software (e.g. with a softkey).– Transfer of the signals to the PLC can be inhibited in the software, except for those marked with *.– Use of keys U1 to U8 and S1, S2 and their inputs can be customized by the PLC user.
Input signals
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.5 Configuring the HT 6, setting interface parameters
17-295 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The parameter setting for the start address n is set in the PLC user program(FB1).
Table 17-12 PLC –> HT 6 interface
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
QBn WCS/MCS
QBn+1
Traversing keysfor axis system
QBn+2 (reserved) AXSEL0
QBn+3
QBn+4
QBn+5
QBn+6
QBn+7
Notes:– Signals are evaluated by the HT 6 status display.– Signals on a gray background are supplied by the basic PLC program (FC26).– The other signals may need to be supplied by the user program.
FC 26 exists analogous to PLC functions FC 19 and FC 25. It is described in References: /FB/ P3, Basic PLC Program
Machine data that specify the coding of compensation values must be set asfollows:
MD 12000: OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
MD 12020: OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
MD 12040: OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
MD 12060: OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
As standard, the following signals cannot be influenced by means of MCPemulation; they are initialized on control power-up:
Keyswitch to position 0
Spindle speed override to 0
Rapid traverse overlay to 0
The only parameters for FC 26 are “BAGNo” and “ChanNo”. That is why theinformation that is normally transmitted to the caller via the parameters “Feed-Hold” and “SpindleHold” has to be calculated by the user.
Output signals
Signals notsupported
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.5 Configuring the HT 6, setting interface parameters
17-296 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
17.5.2 Standard configuration of the HT 6 (without MCP)
For the default setting of the HT 6, the FB1 call in DB100 available on the basicprogram diskette (tool box) must be used.This call is valid for the first MCP or the HT 6.
This setting corresponds to the hardware of the HT 6 when supplied.The default setting is:
MPI address: 14
+ The parameter settings in FB1 for the handheld programming unit correspond tothose of the first MCP:MCPNum:=1 // One HT 6MCPIn:=P#E0.0 // HT 6 input signalsMCPOut:=P#A0.0 // HT 6 output signalsMCPStatRec:=P#A12.0 // Status double wordMCPStatSend:=P#A8.0 // MCPMPI:=TRUE // MCP1BusAdr:=14 //
Please note the following when using SW 05.03.04 (for 840D) or SW 03.03.04(for 810D):The following must be set while OB 100 is booting:DB8.DBB2=0, if HT 6 is configured as the first MCPDB8.DBB64=0, if HT 6 is configured as the second MCP
This is not necessary with any of the higher SW versions.
Parameterizationof basicPLC program(FB1)
PLC SW
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.6 Technical data
17-297 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
17.6 Technical data
Table 17-13 Technical data
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
IP54
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Input voltage DC 24 V (via HT 6 cable)
Current, typ. 500 mA EMERGENCY STOP/enabling but-ton: 1 A
Power consumption, max. 12 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Diameter:approx. 290 mm
Depth: 53 mm70 mm (incl. override)
Weight approx. 1.5 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721-3-3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values 0 ... 45 °C –20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
Display
Size 5.7 ” STN
Resolution 320 x 240 pixels
Service life At ambient temperatures of > 40 °C and long periods ofnon-use, it is advisable to activate the screen saverfunction (via display machine dataDISPLAY_BLACK_TIME).
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.7 Spare parts and accessories
17-298 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
17.7 Spare parts and accessories
17.7.1 Spare parts
The following spare parts are available for the HT 6:
Table 17-14 Spare parts for HT 6
Designation Order number Remarks
Front with keyboard 6FC5448-0AA10-0AA0 –
EMERGENCY STOP androtary override switch
6FC5447-0AA10-0AA0Kit contains both spareparts
Warning
– Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel!
– Unintentional machine movements are dangerous! We therefore strongly recommend a function test after spare partreplacement.
Instructions on how to replace spare parts can be found in Subsection 17.7.2(replacement of labeling strips).
Fig. 17-12 Front with keyboard
Note
The inner protective film on the front face must be pulled off before the newfront with keyboard is installed.
Replacing the frontwith keyboard
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.7 Spare parts and accessories
17-299 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Caution
– Make sure your workstation complies with anti-static (ESD) guidelines!
– Wear anti-static overalls!
– Protect the display and protective glass against scratches!
1. Remove the front with keyboard (see Subsection 17.7.2 [Changing theslide-in labels], points 1. ..., 3.).
2. Remove the base of the housing by unscrewing the 8 housing screws andopen it carefully.One of these screws is located under the connecting cable cover (see pic-ture below). This cover (secured with 2 screws) must therefore be removedbeforehand.
Housing base
Housing lid
EMERGENCYSTOP cable
LCD interface cable
Override cable MPI connectingcable
Cover forconnecting cable(rear)
Fig. 17-13 HT 6 after housing has been unscrewed and opened
3. Undo the connectors on the two cables which are still connecting the hous-ing parts (EMERGENCY STOP and MPI connecting cable) and put thehousing base to one side.
4. Remove the EMERGENCY STOP switch by unscrewing the threaded ring,either manually or with a wrench (supplied by Rafi, Order No. 5.58002.019)and pull the switch out downwards.
Removing theEMERGENCYSTOP and rotaryoverride switch
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.7 Spare parts and accessories
17-300 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
EMERGENCYSTOP switch
Rear face ofhousing lid
Threaded ring
Flat gasket
Positioning pin
Fig. 17-14 Dismantled EMERGENCY STOP switch
5. Remove the override switch, backlight inverter connector and LCD ribboncable from the board (pull the latter carefully out sideways when the clamp-ing frame has been removed; see Fig. 17-16).
EMERGENCYSTOP switch
LCD ribbon cable
Override connector
Backlight inverterconnector
Override rotary switch(covered)
Fig. 17-15 Rear view of housing lid after housing base has been removed
Clamping frameof socket
Fig. 17-16 Releasing (left) and attaching (right) a membrane connector(on the OP 012)
6. Undo the 8 fixing screws in the board.
7. Pull the board carefully upwards off the housing lid and turn the lid over. Caution: Protect the plug connectors on the rear against damage!
8. Unscrew the nut securing the rotary override switch (12 mm A/F) and pullthe switch out downwards.
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.7 Spare parts and accessories
17-301 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Sealing ring
Fastening nutA/F 12
Fig. 17-17 Dismantled rotary override switch
Install the unit by following the same procedure in the reverse order, but notethe following points:
Note
EMERGENCY STOP switch– Hole in flat gasket must be centered over the positioning pin.– Positioning pin must latch into hole in housing.– Torque for threaded ring: 0.8 Nm.
Rotary override switch:– Make sure that the sealing ring is seated correctly.– When fitted, the cable must be pointing towards the edge of the housing and
folded so that it remains inside the housing seal.– Torque for fastening nut: 0.7 Nm.
Board:– Before installation the backlight inverter cable must be connected and
the ribbon cable threaded through the slit in the board.– Place the board in position vertically, making sure that you do not bend the
plug connectors.– Tighten the board fastening screws (torque: 0.8 Nm).– Connect the cable again (carefully push in the ribbon cable as far as the stop,
then secure with the clamping frame).
Front with keyboard:– Install as described in Subsection 17.7.2 (procedure for changing the
slide-in labels, point 6).– Push the override knob (in zero position) onto the axis and tighten the
screws.– Fit the cover to the override knob.
Housing:– Place base on lid, making sure that seal is correctly seated.– Screw together with a torque of 0.8 Nm
Fitting theEMERGENCYSTOP and rotaryoverride switch
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.7 Spare parts and accessories
17-302 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
17.7.2 Accessories
The following accessories are available for the HT 6:
Table 17-15 Accessories for HT 6
Designation Order number Remarks
Distributor incl. short-circuitconnector
6FX2 006-1BH01 for 4-core enabling
Connecting cable for distribu-tor 6FX2006-1BC01
6FX2 002-1AA83-10for 3-core enabling, lengthmax. 40 m
Connecting cable for distribu-tor 6FX2006-1BH01
6FX2 002-1AA23-10for 4-core enabling, lengthmax. 40 m
Slide-in labels––– (included in HT 6scope of supply)
for user labeling (seeabove)
In the case of the HT 6, the traverse and function keys U1, ..., U8 (seeFig. 17-2) can be labeled by the customer as required.
Changing the slide-in labels
The labeling strips can be replaced after the HT 6 front with keyboard has beendisassembled (Fig. 17-18, right).
Note
The deinstalled front with keyboard must be totally protected from soiling,otherwise the readability of the display and key labels can be permanentlyaffected.
If the inner face becomes dirty, any dirt must be carefully removed using anIsopropanol cleansing agent or a cellulose cloth soaked in Isopropanol.
Slide-in labels
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.7 Spare parts and accessories
17-303 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Knob of rotaryoverride switch
Clamping lugs(2 of 4)
Film labels
Groove for levering offthe front and keyboard
Flat connector
Cover
Fig. 17-18 Changing the slide-in labels
Procedure
1. Deinstall knob for rotary override switch in the zero position (Fig. 17-18, left):
– Lever off the cover plate with a flat-ended tool (screwdriver),– Release expansion screw with screwdriver,– Pull knob off the spindle.
2. Depress the four clamping lugs and lever off the front with keyboard by in-serting e.g. a screwdriver in the grooves in the handhold (Fig. 17-18, right).
3. Pull out flat connector carefully vertically.
4. Turn front with keyboard round and pull out labeling films (if fitted).
5. Push in the new labeling strips.
6. When replacing the front with keyboard, plug in the flat connector verticallytaking care not to bend the protruding pins in the base and latch the cover inplace applying gentle pressure.
7. Install the override button following the previous steps in reverse order:– Replace with pointer at zero.– Clamp with expanding screw.– Put on the cover.
Labeling the slide-in labels
You can also make your own slide-in labels from normal paper(80 g/m2).
The dimensions (in mm) can be obtained from Fig. 17-19. The crosses indicatethe center of the text or symbol.
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
04.0417.7 Spare parts and accessories
17-304 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Slide-in labels fortraversing keys
Slide-in labels forfunction keys
14,7
Fig. 17-19 Dimensional drawing for labeling the slide-in labels
17 Handheld Terminal HT 6
18-305 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
18.1 Handheld unit B-MPI
SIEMENS
%5060
708090
1001100102030
40
A
B
CD
IF
G
H
I
J
K
A
114 110
252
77
Fig. 18-1 Handheld unit
A EMERGENCY STOP button, two-channelB Two-line digital display 2 x 16 charactersC 20 keys freely assignable by userD 16 LEDs freely controllable by userE Keyswitch with On/Off positionF Override switch with 12 positionsG Electronic handwheelH Connecting cable, 10 m, or max. 3.5 m as a coiled cableI 2 enabling buttons designed as 2-position, 2-channel switchesJ Magnetic clampK Suspension lug
Operating anddisplay elements
18
04.0418.1 Handheld unit B-MPI
18-306 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Key symbols The key symbols are on a slide-in label that can be changed as necessary.
The labeling strip is located between the PCB and the front of the housing andcan be accessed from the right.
To change the labeling strip, proceed as follows.
Remove the labeling strip carefully to approx. halfway using flat pliers.
Slide half of the new labeling strip under the old one.
Remove the old labeling strip and slide the new one in to its final position.
Magnetic clamp The magnetic clamp is not intended for permanent fixing of the HHU to the per-pendicular sheet metal parts.
Caution
The HHU cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX2002-4EA04-IAF0(or other lengths), since the bus terminators are integral components of thiscable. Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalogReferences: /Z/ Catalog NCZ
If the connection between the HHU and the distributor box is interrupted(HHU cable pulled out), an emergency stop is triggered. There is noautomatic EMERGENCY STOP overriding.
The handheld unit and the distributor are offered in two wiring versions.
1. In the version with 2-channel enable keys and 3-core connection of thesekeys.
2. In the version with 2-channel enable keys and 4-core connection of thesekeys.In this version, monitoring for cross short-circuit in the enable circuit is pos-sible.
Due to modified connector design, these HHUs can only be operated on thedistributor designed for the corresponding mode. In the version with 4-core con-nection of the enable keys, the connector insert of the connector is arrangedcoded at an angle of 45to avoid destruction of the unit by accidental wrongconnection.
Changing thelabeling strip
HHU variants
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box
18-307 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
18.2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box
LEDs Keys Digital
display
Rotaryswitch
Keyswitch
Enablingbutton
Distri-butor
MPI bus
EMERGENCYSTOP
Enabling button
Handwheel pulses
24V DC
Male connector
EMER-GENCYSTOP
HHU
MPI sub-module
DIP switch
Hand-wheel
Fig. 18-2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box
The HHU is connected to the distributor box, connector X4. The EMERGENCYSTOP button, enabling buttons and handwheel signals are not transmitted tothe PLC but decoupled in the distributor box terminal block X3. Power supply tothe HHU is via the distributor box. All other signals are transmitted to the PLCvia the MPI/OPI bus.
Note
Bus terminating resistors are integral components of the HHU.
A maximum of two handheld units may be connected per bus segment.
Further HHUs may be connected using repeaters.
Connection todistributor box
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation
18-308 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
18.3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation
Trouble-free plugging and unplugging of the HHU during machine operationrequires:
activation and deactivation of the power supply to the distributor box,
release or override of the EMERGENCY STOP switch of the HHU,
connection of the HHU to the OPI/MPI via PROFIBUS repeater.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
NCU/CCU
HHU
Distributor
MPI/OPI
Terminating resistor closed
Terminating resistor open
Repeater RS-485
Distributor
Fig. 18-3 Connecting the HHU via PROFIBUS repeater
A PROFIBUS repeater must be connected upstream of the HHU distributor boxfor each branch. The individual bus segments (MPI/OPI line and/or the repeaterand HHU) must be terminated with terminating resistors at the ends of the bus.
The repeater can be ordered under the number 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0. For further information please refer to the Catalog
/IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET
Note
The HHU already has an installed bus terminating resistor.
The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed2 m.
Purpose
Repeater RS-485
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation
18-309 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
A keyswitch with two positions and two contacts must be installed at each HHUconnection point.
EMERGENCY STOPterminals
M(GND)
HHU
P (24V) M (0V)
Distributor box for HHU
Circular connector forconnecting the HHU
1 2
EMERGENCY STOP circuit (system EMERGENCY STOP)
9 10
EMERGENCY STOPbutton
11 12
24V
Keyswitch 1) with positive-action contacts
X3
X4
1) Keyswitch consisting of 2 switching elements 3SB3400-0A and operator control element 3SB30 or 3SB36(appropriate safety lock as required)Catalog: Switching devices and systems (NSK) at A&D CD
Sample circuit
Signal to PLCtriggers a monitoring timer. If the signal level is still “low”after the monitoring period(approx. 5 min), the PLCmust initiate anEMERGENCY STOP.
Keyswitch = ON(EMERGENCY STOP passive)HHU connected
Fig. 18-4 Sample circuit for emergency stop override (illustration shows keyswitch set to “ON” with HHU connected)
Note
Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the samplecircuits.
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation
18-310 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Initial state
Keyswitch is set to “OFF” position, HHU connection at distributor is passive.
EMERGENCY STOP terminals to the HHU are short-circuited.
Signal “HHU Stop” = 1 (or “HHU”=0), end communication.
1. Plug in the HHU connector and tighten the screwsThe EMERGENCY STOP on the HHU must be released.
2. Set keyswitch to “ON”, active. HHU is activated.
3. Signal “HHU Stop” = 0, communication commences with the HHU.
Initial state
Keyswitch is set to “ON” position, HHU connection at distributor is active (incl.EMERGENCY STOP).
Set keyswitch to “OFF”, passive position.
Signal “HHU Stop” = 0 switchover to 1 (end communication).
HHU has no voltage and goes into passive mode.
EMERGENCY STOP of HHU is short-circuited.
1. Loosen the HHU connector and unplug it.
2. The keyswitch is required for reasons of security, to ensure that an EMER-GENCY STOP is triggered if an attempt is made to activate the HHU while itis not connected.
Danger
EMERGENCY STOP switches that are inactive
may not be recognizable as such
may not be accessible.
This is to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP button (e.g. on the HHU) from beingused inadvertently.
Sequence ofoperationsConnecting the
HHU
Sequence ofoperationsDisconnecting the
HHU
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.4 Operating more than one HHU
18-311 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
18.4 Operating more than one HHU
If more than one HHU is to be connected to a bus segment, or if the HHU can-not be connected at the end of the bus, a PROFIBUS repeater is recommendedfor the connection of the HHUs.
OFF
ON
OFF OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
NCU/CCU
HHU
Distributor
MPI/OPI
Terminating resistor closed
Terminating resistor open
OFF
ON
MCP
Repeater RS-485HHU
Distributor
Fig. 18-5 Connecting the HHU via repeater
The repeater can be ordered under Order No. 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0. For fur-ther information please refer to the Catalog
/IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET
Note
If HHUs are connected to the ends of the bus, the repeaters may be omittedsince the HHU already contains an installed bus terminating resistor.
The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed2 m.
Cable lengths for MPI/OPI, see /IAD/ Start-Up Guide 840D or /IAC/ Start-UpGuide 810D, Chapter 3.
For further information about simultaneous operation of several HHUs on oneNCU, please refer to the Description of Functions, Basic Machine, Part 1,Chapter “Basic PLC Program” (P3), Section “Configurability of machine controlpanel, handheld unit”, subheading “Switchover of MPI, OPI address”.
Purpose
Repeater RS 485
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.5 HHU control elements and interface
18-312 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
18.5 HHU control elements and interface
EMERGENCY STOP button, NC contact, 24V/2A contact load
Press the red button in emergency situations:
1. if life is at risk,
2. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.
As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives arebrought to a standstill with max. braking torque.
Machine Manufacturer
For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP:See machine tool manufacturer’s instructions!
EMERGENCY STOP button
HHU
Distributor 1 2
X4
Enabling button
X33 4 5 6
Handwheel
A BA B
7 8
EMERGENCY STOP
24V 0V
9 1011 12 13
2.1 2.2 1.1 1.2 ZS1 ZS2 COM
Fig. 18-6 Internal circuit of EMERGENCY STOP button, handwheel, enabling buttons3-core
Description ofcontrol elements
Internal circuit ofHHU anddistributor boxwith 3-coreconnection ofenabling button
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.5 HHU control elements and interface
18-313 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
EMERGENCY STOP button
HHU
Distributor1 2
X4
Enabling button
X33 4 5 6
Handwheel
A BA B
7 8
EMERGENCY STOP
24V 0V
9 1011 12 13
2.1 2.2 1.1 1.2
14 15
ZS
1.2ZS
2.2
Key2ZS
2.1
ZS
1.1
Fig. 18-7 Internal circuit of EMERGENCY STOP button, handwheel, enabling buttons4-core
The enabling buttons are designed as 2-position switches and are located atthe left and right of the handheld unit. The keys are NO contacts and connectedin parallel. They are two-channel keys. Connection 3- or 4-core, depending ontype. A 4-core connection allows cross short-circuit monitoring in the enablecircuit.
24 V/2 A contact load.
The electronic handwheel supplies two tracks with rectangular signal. The sig-nals can be tapped from the distributor box and taken to the NCU connectorX121 via the cable distributor.
Keyswitch with two positions is transmitted to the PLC.
Switch with 12 positions is transmitted to the PLC.
20 keys are transmitted to the PLC and are freely assignable by the user. Thelabeling symbols can be changed (unscrew HHU).
16 LEDs in the keys, freely controllable via the PLC.
2-tier digital display, each with 16 characters controlled via the PLC.
The HHU is connected to the distributor box via the connecting cable (either acoiled cable with max. length 3.5 m or a 10 m connecting cable).
The EMERGENCY STOP button and the enable keys, as well as handwheelsignals and power supply are connected to terminal block X3.
Internal circuit ofHHU anddistributor boxwith 4-coreconnection ofenabling button
Enabling button
Handwheel
Keyswitch
Override switch
Keys
LED
Digital display
Connecting cable
Interface todistributor box
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.6 Technical data for HHU
18-314 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
18.6 Technical data for HHU
Table 18-1 Technical data for HHU
Electrical data
Power supply 24 V
Power consumption approx. 250 mA
EMERGENCY STOP button 24 V 2 A NC contact
Enabling buttons designed as2-position switches
24 V 2 A 2 parallel NOcontacts
Electrical handwheel 2 tracks 500 mA TTL level
General data
Keyswitch 2 positions ON/OFF
Override switch 12 positions
Connecting cable 3.5 m or 10 m long
Mechanical data
Dimensions Height Width Depth
252 mm 114 mm 110 mm
Weight 1.2 kg without connecting cable
Ambient conditions
Temperature ranges Application/op-eration
Transportation/Storage
0 ... 55 C –20 ... 60 C
Temperature rate of change within 1 minute max. 0.2 K
Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721–3–3, Class 3K5
Within 1 minute max. 0.1 %
Protective class IP65
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.7 Settings in the HHU
18-315 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
18.7 Settings in the HHU
The software version of the HHU is displayed after booting as long as the HHUis not communicating with the PLC.
Example: Display on the HHU
Waiting for PLC
V04.01.01 F / 1.5 M *)
→ SW version of HHU is V04.01.01→ Bus address of HHU is Fhex (15dec) *) Display switches→ Baud rate of HHU is 1.5 MBaud between F and 1.5 M
To set the bus parameters and the IDLE time, two quadruple DIP switches areprovided on the basic module of the HHU.
The HHU must be opened for access to the DIP switches.
Note
Open the device only if the HHU connector has been previously removed!
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
123412
4ON OFF
S1
S2
ON OFF
S1
S2
via DIPswitch
1.5 Mbaud
BusAddress15
IDLE time100 ms
1
2
3
4
ON OFFSetting for baud
rate and bus address
Keyswitch pos.not used
1
2
3
4S2
Keyswitch pos.not used
S1
Switch settings
viadisplay *)
____________________________*) from SW V04.01.01
3
Fig. 18-8 DIP switches in the HHU
Displaying theHHU’s softwareversion
DIP switch
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.7 Settings in the HHU
18-316 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 18-2 Settings on switches S1 and S2 in HHU
Meaning S11
S12
S13
S14
S21
S22
S23
S24
Setting thebaud rate and
via display(SW 4.1.1 only)
on
baud rate andbus address via DIP switches (all
SW versions)off
IDLE time *) 100 msecs off onIDLE time *) 100 msecs off on
Baud rate *)1.5 Mbaud on
Baud rate *)187.5 kbaud off
Bus address *) 1514131211109876543210
ononononononononoffoffoffoffoffoffoffoff
ononononoffoffoffoffononononoffoffoffoff
ononoffoffononoffoffononoffoffononoffoff
onoffonoffonoffonoffonoffonoffonoffonoff
As-deliveredstate
SW V01.01.02 off on on off on on on onstate(Default) SW V04.01.01 off on on on on on on on
*) If S1.4 = on and SW version V04.01.01: Switch has no function
Note
The maximum possible transmission rate for SINUMERIK 810D is 187.5kbaud. Therefore set switch S1.3 to “off” before start-up.
With switch position S1.4 = on and software version V04.01.01, busaddresses from 0 to 31 can be set, i.e. up to 32 nodes can be supported onthe OPI/MPI.
Bus addresses that are already assigned are preceded by the * characteron the display.
Meaning of DIPswitches
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters
18-317 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
18.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters
It is necessary to set the GD parameters for the submodule to communicate viathe MPI interface. The setting can be activated in the boot phase (while waitingfor the first GD message frame) from the PLC (“Waiting for PLC” status) via the
operator interface of the HHU using the key combination Jog (top left out-
side) and T2 T2
(top right outside). The individual parameters are then inter-rogated via the HHU display and entered via the HHU keyboard. The defaultvalues can be changed within the permissible value range by means of keys +
and -. The Automatic key selects the next parameter. Selection of thenext parameter causes the preceding parameter to be stored in the flashEPROM. The parameters need therefore only be set during start-up and wheninterfaces are changed. If interface parameter assignment is not activated afterpower On, the stored values are accepted or the default values (see table) areloaded.
HHUAS 315(PLC)
Send
Receive
Fig. 18-9 Sending and receiving seen from the HHU
There are separate GD parameters for sending and receiving.
GD 1 . 1 . 1
Object number
GBZ number (global identifier number)
GD circle number (global data number)
Fig. 18-10 Meaning of GD parameters
Note
The GD parameters of the HHU and AS315 or PLC block FB1/0B100 must beset identically.
Meaning of GDparameters
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters
18-318 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 18-3 Value range for the GD parameters on the HHU
Designation Display Defaultvalue
Valuerange
Receive GD circle no. Rec-GD-No: 2 1-16
Receive global identifiernumber
Rec-GBZ-No: 1 – (fixed)
Object number for re-ceive global identifiernumber
Rec-Obj-No: 1 – (fixed)
Transmit GD circle no. Send-GD-No: 2 – (fixed)
Transmit GI no. Send-GBZ-No: 2 – (fixed)
Object number for sendglobal identifier number
Send-Obj-No: 1 – (fixed)
In software ver-sion 4 and higher
Baud rate Baud rate: 1.5 M(baud)
187.5 /1.5M
Bus address Bus address: 15 0–31
18.8.1 Interface signals for handheld unit
The FC13 “HHUDisp” supports operation of the LCD display. For a detailed de-scription, please refer to:
References: /FB/, P3, “Basic PLC Program”.
Note
The customer is responsible for programming the transfer of key signals to theinterface in a PLC user program.
Layout of keys and LEDs
T21 T11 T2
T7
T16
T12
T13
T14
T1 T6 T21 T11
T3 T8 T22 T12
T4 T9 T23 T13
T5 T10 T24 T14
T2
T7
T16
T15
a) Standard inscription b) Numbered keys
Fig. 18-11 HHU control keys
PLC module
User interface
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters
18-319 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
You can tap the signals for the keys, feedrate override switch, keyswitch andacknowledgment of the digital display at the input area. The address range isset by parameter assignment with STEP7 tools.
ByteNo. Input signals to PLC
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
EBm
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
EBm + 1
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
EBm + 2
Feedstart
user-as-signable
key
AUTO-MATIC
NC Stop Spindlestop
Feedstop
user-as-signable
keyJOG
m + 2T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
EBm + 3
user-as-signable
key
Hand-wheel
user-as-signable
key
user-as-signable
key
user-as-signable
key
user-as-signable
keyNC Start Spindle
startm + 3
T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9
EBm +4
Directionkey –
Rapid tra-verse
override
Directionkey +
user-as-signable
keym +4T24 T23 T22 T21
EBAcknow-ledgment
di it lKey-
Rapid traverse/feedrate override switch
m + 5g
digitaldisplay
yswitch
I D C B A
Tx = 1 key pressedTable 18-4
Setting % EDCBA
1 0 00001
2 10 00100
3 20 01100
4 30 01101
5 40 01111
6 50 01110
7 60 01010
8 70 01011
9 80 01000
10 90 11001
11 100 11010
12 110 11111
0 (horizontal position) 1 (vertical position)
Input image ofhandheld unit
HHU rotary selector switchsettings
HHU keyswitch
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters
18-320 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The signals for controlling the LEDs, HHU mode, display signals and digital dis-play are present at the output area.
L1
L3
L4
L5
L6
L8
L9
L10
L11 L2
L12 L7
L13
L14
L16
L15
Fig. 18-12 Control keys with integrated LEDs in HHU
ByteNo. Output signals to HHU
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
OBm 1
OBm + 1
New datafor se-
lected line
Selec-tion line
OBm + 2 L 8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
OBm + 3 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9
Lx = 1 LED lights up
Output image ofhandheld unit
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters
18-321 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Control of the digital display in the HHU
ByteNo. Output signals to HHU
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
OB Default setting of 1st character (right) of selected lineOBm + 4
OB Default setting of 2nd character of selected lineOBm + 5
OB Default setting of 3rd character of selected lineOBm + 6
OB Default setting of 4th character of selected lineOBm + 7
OB Default setting of 5th character of selected lineOBm + 8
OB Default setting of 6th character of selected lineOBm + 9
OB Default setting of 7th character of selected lineOBm + 10
OB Default setting of 8th character of selected lineOBm +11
OB Default setting of 9th character of selected lineOBm + 12
OB Default setting of 10th character of selected lineOBm + 13
OB Default setting of 11th character of selected lineOBm + 14
OB Default setting of 12th character of selected lineOBm + 15
OB Default setting of 13th character of selected lineOBm + 16
OB Default setting of 14th character of selected lineOBm + 17
OB Default setting of 15th character of selected lineOBm + 18
OB Default setting of 16th character (left) of selected lineOBm + 19
Output image ofdigital display
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters
18-322 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Note
The value of the output byte QBm bit 7 must always be 1!This sets the output mode of the display.
The digital display is used as a 2-line alphanumeric display with 16 digits perline. The display data are coded according to the character set given in the ASCIIcode table for the digital display via the QBm + 4...19 bytes. The decimal pointis a separate character. The display always starts line by line right-justified withthe byte QBm + 4 and is built up towards the left up to QBm + 19.
QBm + 1, Bit 0This bit is used to select the line to be written.Bit 0 = 0: The 1st line is selected.Bit 0 = 1: The 2nd line is selected.
QBm + 1, Bit 7This bit is used to request writing in of new data into a line. The bit is set by theuser program and can be reset on detection of the acknowledgment bit IBm + 5,bit 7.Bit 7 = 0: Reset requestBit 7 = 1: Set request
IBm + 5, Bit 7This bit is set by the system after the new data has been accepted.Bit 7 = 0: No new dataBit 7 = 1: New data has been accepted
18.8.2 Example signal chart
Example of a signal chart when writing data for two lines
1. Selecting the line with QBm + 1, bit 0.
2. Writing new data with QBm + 4...19.
3. Set request: New data for selected line QBm + 1, bit
4. Acknowledgment digital display IBm + 5, bit 7, via system.
5. Reset request
Display
Selecting the line
New data forselected line
Acknowledgmentof digital display
Example signalchart
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters
18-323 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Note
The request must be reset before a new line is written!
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1.
2.
3.
4.
Upper line
Lower line
Data for upper line Data for lower line
a : PLC user sets signal and waits for acknowledgmentb : System sets acknowledgmentc : User resets requestd : System resets acknowledgement
a
b
Selecting the line
Writing new data
Requirement: New data
Acknowledgement digital
dc
a
b
dc
display
Fig. 18-13 Signal chart example for writing data into the HHU display
Representation of characters on specification of the corresponding bit pattern orhexadecimal format in the bytes QBm + 4...19. The characters from Hex 20 toHex 7F are default values.
ASCII code fordigital display
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters
18-324 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 18-5 ASCII coding for HHU display
0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Bit 7...4
20H 30H 40H 50H 60H 70H A0H B0H C0H D0H E0H F0H Bit 3 ... 0
0000
21H 31H 41H 51H 61H 71H A1H B1H C1H D1H E1H F1H
0001
22H 32H 42H 52H 62H 72H A2H B2H C2H D2H E2H F2H
0010
23H 33H 43H 53H 63H 73H A3H B3H C3H D3H E3H F3H
0011
24H 34H 44H 54H 64H 74H A4H B4H C4H D4H E4H F4H
0100
25H 35H 45H 55H 65H 75H A5H B5H C5H D5H E5H F5H
0101
26H 36H 46H 56H 66H 76H A6H B6H C6H D6H E6H F6H
0110
27H 37H 47H 57H 67H 77H A7H B7H C7H D7H E7H F7H
0111
28H 38H 48H 58H 68H 78H A8H B8H C8H D8H E8H F8H
1000
29H 39H 49H 59H 69H 79H A9H B9H C9H D9H E9H F9H
1001
2AH 3AH 4AH 5AH 6AH 7AH AAH BAH CAH DAH EAH FAH
1010
2BH 3BH 4BH 5BH 6BH 7BH ABH BBH CBH DBH EBH FBH
1011
2CH 3CH 4CH 5CH 6CH 7CH ACH BCH CCH DCH ECH FCH
1100
2DH 3DH 4DH 5DH 6DH 7DH ADH BDH CDH DDH EDH FDH
1101
2EH 3EH 4EH 5EH 6EH 7EH AEH BEH CEH DEH EEH FEH
1110
2FH 3FH 4FH 5FH 6FH 7FH AFH BFH CFH DFH EFH FFH
1111
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.9 Distributor box for handheld unit
18-325 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
18.9 Distributor box for handheld unit
The handheld unit is connected to the distributor box.The distributor box is designed for installation in the control cabinet or in a sepa-rate housing.The distributor box has an interface to the MPI bus and a terminal block for con-necting the EMERGENCY STOP button, the enabling buttons, the handwheeland the 24 V power supply. The equipotential bonding connector is also ar-ranged at the distributor box. Equipotential bonding has to be made using alow-resistance connection between the distributor box and the earth potential.The equipotential bonding conductor should be a stranded cable having across-section of at least 10 mm2 and a length of less than < 30 cm, if possible.
References: /PHF/ Configuring, Manual/PHD/ Configuring, Manual
The distributor box is available both in standard version and in a UL-certifiedversion. In conjunction with the UL-certified distributor box, HHU and HT 6 areUL-certified for USA and Canada. Both variants of the distributor box are me-chanically installation-compatible and electrically connection-compatible.
The distributor must be designed for 3-core or 4-core connection of the enablekeys, depending on the HHU used.
The 24VDC power supply is connected to terminal block X3, terminals 9 and 10.
The HHU is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distributor box. Whendrilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, the requirements ofdegree of protection IP54 must be complied with.
The distributor box is connected to the relevant interface (e.g. to the MPI bus forFM-NC, 810D, 840D or to the OPI - possible only for 840D) via the X5 MPI busconnection.
The first channel of the EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to the X3 ter-minal block, terminals 1 and 2. The second channel of the EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to the X3terminal block, terminals 11 and 12.
The electronic handwheel can be connected to terminal block X3, terminals 3 to6. If the handwheel is to be connected to the NCU, a connection must be madeto the cable distributor.
The enabling buttons are connected to terminal block X3.
Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection be-tween the distributor box and the earth potential. The equipotential bonding con-ductor should be a stranded cable having a cross-section of at least 10 mm2
and a length of less than < 30 cm, if possible.
Distributor boxand HHU
Versions of thedistributor box
Connecting the24VDC powersupply
Installing thedistributor box
Connecting theMPI bus or OPI
Connecting theEMERGENCYSTOP button
Connecting thehandwheel
Connecting theenabling button
Connecting theequipotentialbonding
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.9 Distributor box for handheld unit
18-326 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Caution
The 2nd channel of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit may be connected only if a2-channel handheld unit is used,i.e. 6FX2007-1AC01 or 6FX2007-1AC11 and
6FX2007-1AC02 or 6FX2007-1AC12 and6FX2007-1AC03 or 6FX2007-1AC13 and6FX2007-1AE03 or 6FX2007-1AE13
10.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X5
X4X3
11 12 13 141526 hole forM25connector
X5
X3
34
X4
120
110
52
50
36.5
Front view Side view
Equ
ipot
entia
l bo
ndin
g co
nnec
tion
10090
X111
X121
Fig. 18-14 Distributor box for MPI and MPC bus
X111 and X121 exist only in the 3-core connection version of the enable but-tons.X3/terminals 14/15 exist only in the 4-core connection version of the enablebuttons.
For link to MPC bus.The distributor box can be used for the MPI or the MPC bus.
Terminal block for HHU control elementsTerminal block designation X3Terminal block Terminals for 1.5 mm2
Table 18-6 Assignment of terminal block X3 with enable key, 3-core
Pin Signal, name Signal type
1 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 (24V, 2A) I, input
2 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 (24V, 2A) O, output
3 / 4 Handwheel track A / handwheel track A I/O, bidirec-5 / 6 Handwheel track B / handwheel track B
I/O, bidirectional
7 / 8 Enable key ZS1 (24V, 2A) / Enable key ZS2 (24V, 2A) O, output
Position ofinterfaces andterminal blocks
X111, X121
X3
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.9 Distributor box for handheld unit
18-327 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 18-6 Assignment of terminal block X3 with enable key, 3-core
Pin Signal typeSignal, name
9 24V (power supply for HHU)
10 0V (Mext for HHU) I, input
11 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 (24V, 1A)
p
12 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.2 (24V, 1A) O, output
13 Enabling button ZS1 (24V, 2A) I, input
Table 18-7 Assignment of terminal block X3 with enable key, 4-core
Pin Signal, name Signal type
1 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 (24V, 2A) I, input
2 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 (24V, 2A) O, output
3 / 4 Handwheel track A / handwheel track A I/O,5 / 6 Handwheel track B / handwheel track B
I/O,bidirectional
7 / 8 Enable button ZS1.1 (24V, 2A) / Enable button ZS2.1 (24V, 2A) O, output
9 24V (power supply for HHU)
10 0V (Mext for HHU) I, input
11 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 (24V, 1A)
p
12 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.2 (24V, 1A) O, output
13/14 Enable button ZS 2.2 / Enable button ZS 1.2 I, input
15 Key 2 Not as-signed
BHG interfaceConnector designation X4Connector type Circular connector for screw connectionSpecial requirement Interface must comply with IP54
Signal names
EMERGENCY STOP buttonEMERGENCY STOP buttonProtective conductorEnabling buttonEnabling button+24V0VHandwheel track AHandwheel track AHandwheel track BHandwheel track BMPI bus cables
MPI interfaceConnector designation X5Connector type 9-pin sub-D socket connectorMax. cable length 200 mSpecial feature Electrical isolation
X4
X5
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.9 Distributor box for handheld unit
18-328 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 18-8 Pin assignment of connector X5
X5
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1 / 2 Not assigned 6 P5 VO
3 RS_KP B 7 Not assigned
4 RTSAS_KP O 8 XRS_KP B
5 M (GND) VO 9 RTSPG_KP I
Signal names
RS_KP, XRS_KP differential RS485 data - C bus from PLCRTSAS_KP Request to Send AS - C bus from PLCRTSPG_KP Request to Send PG - C bus from PLCM GroundP5 5 V
Signal type
B Bidirectional O OutputVO Voltage Output I Input
The interference currents are earthed via the shield plates. To prevent thesedischarged currents from becoming a source of interference themselves, makesure that the path of the interference currents to earth is of low-resistance.
Securely tighten all fixing screws of cable connectors, modules and cablesreferred to a potential.
Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are pro-tected against corrosion.
Use short potential reference cables of < 30cm and a cross section of 10mm2.
In order to avoid capacitive charges on unused cable cores, the unusedcores of the EMERGENCY STOP and enabling buttons (terminalsNAUS1.1, NAUS1.2, NAUS2.1, NAUS2.2, ZS1, ZS2, ZUSTICO) must beconnected to the equipotential bonding terminal.
EMC measures
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.10 Spare parts
18-329 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
18.10 Spare parts
The following spare parts are available:
Table 18-9 Spare parts HHU
Designation Length Connector Coding Remarks Ident No.(EuchnerOrder No.,see below)
Coiled cable 3.5 m 17-pin0
for 6FX2007-1AB03...-1AC03
075384Coiled cable 3.5 m 17 pin
45 for 6FX2007-1AE03 078999
Straight cable 10 m 17-pin0
for 6FX2007-1AB13...-1AC13
075385Straight cable 10 m 17 pin
45 for 6FX2007-1AE13 079000
Terminator,for 3-core ZS circuits
for 6FX2006-1BC01...1BF00
075910
Terminator,for 3-core ZS circuits,permanently attachedwith chain
17-pin 0 for 6FX2006-1BC01
...1BF00072764
Terminator,for 4-core ZS circuits,permanently attachedwith chain
17-pin 45 for 6FX2006-1BH01 078952
Keyswitch Complete 072604
Spare key for Key-operated switch 075387
EMERGENCY STOP switch, turn to resetwith 1 NC contact
Replacement for oldHHUs6FX2007-1Axx0
052958
EMERGENCY STOP switch, pull to reset,2-channel, tamper-proof
Replacement for newHHUs6FX2007-1Axx1 andthe following
073985
Handwheel (encoder HKD100V100A05) with ribbon cable 057036
Setting wheel C1702 (operating wheel) for handwheel 071380
Cover for keyboard 075772
Slide-in plastic stripsSet, 1 x printed,1 x unprinted
075909
Override stepper switch, 12-way gray-coded 077097
Rotary button for override stepper switch with arrow dial 073973
For detailed description, see Prodis, article no. 490 700 4 dated 18.5.2000.
Euchner GmbH + CoVertrieb TechnikKohlhammerstr. 16D-70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen
Telephone +49 711 7597-0Fax +49 711 7597 303
Order address
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
04.0418.10 Spare parts
18-330 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box
Notes
19-331 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Mini Handheld Unit
19.1 Dimensions and control elements
A
B
C
H
D
F
G
I
I88 83.5
20 60 108
216
Fig. 19-1 Mini handheld unit
A Emergency stop button, two-channelB Enabling button, two-channelC Axis selection switch for 5 axes and neutral positionD Function keys F1, F2, F3E Traversing keys, +, –F Rapid traverse button for rapid traverse with traversing keys or handwheelG HandwheelH Magnetic clamps for fixing to metal componentsI 1.5 m–3.5 m connecting cable
Operatingelements
19
04.0419.1 Dimensions and control elements
19-332 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
19.1.1 General
The mini handheld unit (Mini HHU) is a small easy-to-handle unit for setting upand operating simple machines in the JobShop area or similar applications.Special attention has been paid to ergonomics and logical operating in the de-sign of the housing and the arrangement of the control elements.
The Mini HHU is intended for connection to 810D and 840D controls. It can alsobe used with the 840C and FM-NC.
19.1.2 Description of control elements
The EMERGENCY STOP button must be operated in cases of emergency
1. when a person is at risk,
2. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.
The enabling button is designed as a 2-way switch. It must be pressed to initiatetraversing movements.
The axis selection switch can be used to select up to five axes.
The function keys can be used to trigger machine-specific functions.
The +, – traversing keys can be used to trigger traversing movements at theaxis selected using the axis selection switch.
The handwheel can be used to initiate movements at the axis selected usingthe axis selection switch. The handwheel supplies two guide signals with 100I/U.
The rapid traverse button can be used to increase the traversing speed of theaxis selected using the axis selection switch. The rapid traverse button is activeboth for traversing commands issued via the +/– keys and for handwheel sig-nals.
EMERGENCYSTOP button
Enabling button
Axis selectionswitch
Function keys
Traversing keys
Handwheel
Rapid traversebutton
19 Mini Handheld Unit
04.0419.2 Circuit diagram and sample connection
19-333 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
19.2 Circuit diagram and sample connection
2
14
2324
12
34
56
7–X
1
1311
21
1222
0.34 mm 2wh
0.34 mm 2bn
0.34 mm 2gn
0.34 mm 2ye
0.34 mm 2gr
0.34 mm 2rs
0.34 mm 2bu
–S2
–S1
Em
ergency stopE
nabling button
EM
ER
GE
NC
Y S
TO
P/enable circuit
128
C
0.14 mm 2rd
–S3
0 – Z – X
– Y – 4 – 5
49 0.14 mm 2bk
810
0.14 mm 2vt
16C
–A2
–A2
15
34
6
23
0.14 mm 2wh–rd 2
22
0.14 mm 2bn–bu 3
21
0.14 mm 2wh–bu 5
20
0.14 mm 2rs–bn 4
19
0.34 mm 2wh–rs 1
18
0.34 mm 2gr–bn 6S
M
–B1
G
24
Axis selection
Handw
heel
Shield
0 V
+5 V
/B
B
/A
A
–B1
17
0.14 mm 2wh–gr
S6
F3
6
15
0.14 mm 2wh–ye
S5
F2
5
14
0.14 mm 2bn–gn
S4
F1
4
13
0.14 mm 2wh–gn
S3
3
12
0.14 mm 2rd–bu
S2
–
2
11
0.14 mm 2gr–rs
S1
+
1
160.14 mm 2ye–bn
78
–A1
to PLC
+24 V D
C+
–F
1F
2F
3S
M0 V
/B/A
BA
5 V D
C
0.14 mm
2bu
–A1
Fig. 19-2 Circuit diagram and sample connection
19 Mini Handheld Unit
04.0419.4 Configuration
19-334 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The mini HHU is connected to the PLC or the connector for handwheels via aflange socket. There is no need for an additional distributor. The signals aresent to the NC in parallel (without MPI). The flange socket is contained in theconnection kit.
19.3 Coding of axis selection switch
The coding of the axis selection switch is carried out in Gray Code.
Table 19-1 Coding of axis selection switch
Connector X1 Switch posi-tion
Function
Pin 8 Pin 9 Pin 10tion
0 0 0 – Mini HHU not connected
1 1 0 0 No axis selected
0 1 0 Z Z axis selected
0 1 1 X X axis selected
1 1 1 Y Y axis selected
1 0 1 4 Axis 4 selected
0 0 1 5 Axis 5 selected
19.4 Configuration
The FC76 module supplied in the toolbox supports configuration of the miniHHU. It is located in the toolbox in the BSP_PROG directory in the file Mi-nibhg.zip. This module is included in the toolbox in version 5.1 and later only.For example inToolbox 5.1.x(8x0d\050104\disk1\Bsp_prog\Minibhg.zip orToolbox 6.1.2(8x0d\060102\bsp_prog\Minibhg.zip.
The FC76 contains a standard program for the mini HHU and is valid for usewith SINUMERIK 840D/810D. The program is generally valid and therefore re-quires several input and output signals when called.
To avoid collisions (caused by simultaneous access to one and the same sig-nal), the FC2 (NCK-PLC interface) that occurs in the basic program must beprocessed before the FC76.
19 Mini Handheld Unit
04.0419.5 Connections
19-335 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
19.5 Connections
A connection kit that must be ordered separately is required for connection ofthe mini HHU. This connection kit contains a 24-way flange socket for installa-tion at the machine and a dummy plug for overriding the EMERGENCY STOPcircuit when the HHU is not connected.
The 6FX2002-4AA21-1xx0 cable can be used to connect the handwheel sig-nals to the NC.
The pin contacts on the cable must be replaced with the socket contacts con-tained in the connection kit.
Connection in accordance with circuit diagram (see Fig. 19-2).
36.6 mm
39 m
m
Casing wallSealing ring
Seal
3.8mm
View of connection side
14591015
16202124
Fig. 19-3 Dimensions of the flange socket
Use the contacts supplied when connecting the cables.
20 x AMP crimp socket contactNo. 163088-2 for AWG 24–20; 0.20 – 0.56 mm2
6 x AMP crimp socket contactNo. 163092-2 for AWG 26–24; 0.12 – 0.25 mm2
Note
The crimping tool suggested should be used:
AMP crimping tool No. 169475-1 or 90277-1.
Connection kit
Connection ofhandwheel signals
19 Mini Handheld Unit
04.0419.6 Technical data
19-336 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
19.6 Technical data
Table 19-2 Technical data for mini HHU
Control elements
Enabling button 1 x: floating
two-channel NO contact
EMERGENCY STOP button 1 x: floating
two-channel NC contact,turn to release
Axis selection switch 5 axes: X, Y, Z, 4, 5 and neutral position
Jog key + Positive traverse direction
Jog key – Negative traverse direction
Jog key Rapid traverse for jog keys and handwheel
Function keys 3 x: F1, F2, F3
Handwheel 100 I/U
Electrical data
Operating voltage for switch-ing signals
24 V
Operating voltage for hand-wheel
5 V
Power consumption 5 V approx. 90 mA
Handwheel signals RS-422
EMERGENCY STOP button 24 V 2 A NC contact
Enabling button 24 V 2 A NO contact
General data
Housing Ergonomically designed housing made from polyamide6, touch-oriented arrangement of control elements
Mounting 2 magnetic clamps
Connecting cable Coiled cable 1.5 m; extendable to 3.5 m;Connector with pin contacts
CE conformity Yes
Mechanical data
Dimensions Height Width Depth
Approx. 250 mm 110 mm 90 mm
Weight Approx. 0.8 kg without connecting cable
Ambient conditions
Temperature ranges Application/op-eration
Transportation/Storage
0 ... 55 C –20 ... 60 C
Temperature rate of change within 1 minute max. 0.2 K
Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5
Within 1 minute max. 0.1 %
Protective class IP65
Connection kit
Flange socket 24-pin with socket contacts and dummy plug
Dummy for overriding the EMERGENCY STOP circuit
19 Mini Handheld Unit
04.0419.7 Spare parts
19-337 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
19.7 Spare parts
The following spare parts are available:
Table 19-3 Spare parts for mini HHU
Designation Ident No.
Servo handwheel, 5 V DC, A/B push-pull, without dial 1009 010
Rotary selector switch, 6 positions, without dial 1009 219
EMERGENCY STOP button, complete with keyset, label and switchingelement
1009 221
Enable key, complete 1009 933
Set of control knobs, for servo handwheel, rotary selector switch andenable key
1009 227
Connection cable, coiled, wired on connector, connection end preas-sembled
1009 081
Flange-mounting socket-outlet, complete with seals and contacts 1009 084
Jumper connector, with jumpered EMERGENCY STOP contacts 1009 046
Crimp contacts
Set of crimp contact sockets,consisting of 10 x 0.12-0.25 mm2, 30 x 0.20-0.56 mm2
Set of crimp contact pins,consisting of 10 x 0.12–0.25 mm2, 30 x 0.20–0.56 mm2
1009 222
1009 223
Tool T
Ejector for crimp socket and pin contacts
Assembly tools for EMERGENY STOP button
Pressure-cap remover for enable key
0080811
1009 224
1009 217
See PRODOK, document “Current position measurement” for detailed descrip-tion.
Current No. 1999/019
Dated: 13.12.1999
R&D Steuerungstechnik GmbH + Co KGService DepartmentHocksteiner Weg 87–95D–41189 Mönchengladbach
Telephone +49 (0) 2166-5506-34Fax +49 (0) 2166-5506-55
Order address
19 Mini Handheld Unit
04.0419.7 Spare parts
19-338 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
19 Mini Handheld Unit
Notes
20-339 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
This description applies to the following Machine Control Panels:
Type Key type Order number
MCP 483C mechanical 6FC5203–0AF22–0AA0
20.1 Brief description
The machine control panel permits user–friendly control of machine functions. Itis suitable for machine–level operation of milling, turning, grinding and specialmachines.
All keys are designed with replaceable caps for machine–specific adaptations.The covers can be freely inscribed using laser. Clear key covers can be usedas an alternative.
The machine control panel is mounted from the rear with special clamping ele-ments supplied with the panel.
Operating elements
Operating modes and function keys
– 50 keys with LEDs
– Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override (key cov-ers for direction keys for turning machines supplied separately pack-aged)
– Default key assignment includes 17 freely assignable customer keys
Spindle control with spindle override (rotary switch with 16 positions)
Feed control with feed override (rotary switch with 23 positions)
Keyswitch (4 positions and 3 different keys)
Emergency stop button (2 NC contacts)
Ports: MPI interface
Expansion slots: 2 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm)
Key type: Mechanical keys
Key cap covers for the Turning version are supplied separately packaged (see“Spare parts and accessories”).
Validity
Design
Design turning
20
04.0420.2 Control elements and interfaces
20-340 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
20.2 Control elements and interfaces
20.2.1 Control elements on front
Front view
A B C FI G HD I J
Fig. 20-1 Machine control panel (milling version)
A: Emergency stop buttonB: Slots for control devices (d = 16 mm)C: Reset buttonD: Program controlE: Operating modes, machine functionsF: Customer-definable keys (T1 to T15)G: Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15)H: Spindle control with override switchI: Feed control with override switchJ: Keyswitch (four positions)
64 inputs (50 keys, two rotary selector switches, keyswitch with four posi-tions)
48 outputs (LEDs, assigned to the keys)
EMERGENCY STOP button (A)Press the red button in emergency situations:
1. if life is at risk,
2. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.
Position of controlelements
Designation ofoperatingelements
Overviewoperatingelements
Description ofcontrol elements
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
04.0420.2 Control elements and interfaces
20-341 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
An EMERGENCY STOP generally shuts down all drives with the greatest pos-sible braking torque in a controlled manner.
Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it.
Machine Manufacturer
For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP:Please read the information supplied by the machine tool manufacturer!
Attach cable tobutton
EMERGENCY STOP machine control
Emergency stop button
Push-onconnection
1
2
41 2
2 (4)
1 (3)
3
Connection numbering: Defaults; in brackets: Optional
Fig. 20-2 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit
Warning
The openings for mounting control devices (letter B in Fig. 20-1) must not bechipped out, but drilled to the required width (risk of damage!).
Circuit forEMERGENCYSTOP button
Mounting slots forcontrol devices
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
04.0420.2 Control elements and interfaces
20-342 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
20.2.2 Display and operating elements at rear
Operating and display elements (see diagram below) are located to the rear ofthe panel:
Sets e.g. baud rate, addresses and protocol (see Subsection 20.3.3)
LED1 (H1): Hardware test running. A red LED lights up to indicate a fault.
LED2 (H2): Temperature monitor: If a temperature of60°C (+/–3°C) is exceeded, a red LED lights up.
LED3 (H3): Voltage monitoring responded
LED4 (H4): During data transfer via the operator panel interface a yellow LED flashes.
Power supplyinterface X10
123M24 P24Shield
Slot for 2 additional controldevices (16 mm)
Operator panel interface(MPI) X20
EMERGENCY STOPbutton
LED1...4
Switch S3Customer groundingterminal
Fig. 20-3 Interfaces, operating and display elements on rear of MCP 483C
20.2.3 Interfaces
The location of the interfaces is shown in Fig. 20-3.
X10: Power supply interface
Phoenix terminal block: 3-pin, straight
X20: Operator panel interface (MPI)
Socket: 9-pin female Sub-D connector strip, straight
X30: Interface for rotary switch feed override
Plug connector, 2 x 5-pin, with lock
S3 DIP switch
Diagnostic LEDs1..4
Position ofinterfaces
Overviewof interfaces
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
04.0420.2 Control elements and interfaces
20-343 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
X31: Interface for rotary switch spindle override
Plug connector, 2 x 5-pin, with lock
References: /PHF/, NCU 570 Manual/PHD/, NCU 571-573 Manual
Connector designation: X10Connector type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal block, straight
Table 20-1 X10 pin assignments
Pin Name Meaning Type
1 P24 24 V potentialV
2 M24 Ground 24VV
(Supplyvoltage)
3 SHIELD Shield connectionvoltage)
Connector designation: X20
Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socketMax. cable length: 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud (MPI connection)
Table 20-2 X20 pin assignments for machine control panel
X20
Pin Name Type Meaning
1/2 Not assigned – –
3 RS_OPI B Differential RS485 data
4 ORTSAS_OPI O Out Request to Send AS (not connected)
5 M5EXT V 5 V external ground
6 P5EXT V 5 V external potential
7 Not assigned – –
8 XRS_OPI B Differential RS485 data
9 IRTSPG_OPI I In Request to Send PG
Signal type
B Bidirectional V Voltage O Output I Input
Power supplyinterface
Operator panelfront interface(MPI)
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
04.0420.3 Mounting, connection and settings
20-344 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
20.3 Mounting, connection and settings
Dimension drawing
482.6
155
20.2
32.1
18.9
45.1
A
A
132.6 132.4
103.3
164.6114.7
37
95.9
37
95.81.5mm –6mm
A–A2:1
Rz
120
Mountingframe
Tension jacks9 jacks
Mounting frame
Surface quality to DIN ISO 2768-L
1)
1) Mounting slots for control devices
Fig. 20-4 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 483C
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
04.0420.3 Mounting, connection and settings
20-345 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
20.3.1 Mounting
The machine control panel is attached by means of 9 tension jacks (tighteningtorque 0.8 Nm; see also dimension drawing 20-4).
450+1
135+1
Fig. 20-5 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 483C
Max. 60 off vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60 a fan must addi-tionally be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine controlpanel constantly below 55 C.
20.3.2 Connections
The 24V supply is connected to the X10 connector at the rear of the machinecontrol panel via a 3-pin terminal block (see Fig. 20-3). The equipotential bond-ing conductor is fixed by means of an M5 screw.
The machine control panel is connected to the OPI on the NCU (X101) using anMPI bus cable via the PCU interface (MPI/DP). The MPI connector is pluggedinto X20 on the rear of the machine control panel (see Fig. 20-3) and fixed withtwo locking screws.
Tension jackfastening
Mounting position
Connecting the24 V power supply
Connecting theMPI connection(X20)
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
04.0420.3 Mounting, connection and settings
20-346 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
20.3.3 Settings
The following settings are possible with the S3 DIP switch (see Fig. 20-3):
Table 20-3 S3 jumpering on machine control panel
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning / value
onoff
Baud rate1.5 Mbaud187.5 kbaud
offonoff
onoffoff
Transmission cycle time200 ms100 ms50 ms
Reception monitoring2400 ms1200 ms600 ms
onoff
on
on
Bus address1514
onoff
off
on
on
1312
onoff
on
off
on1110
onoff
offoff
9 8
onoff
on
on
7 6
onoff
offon
off
5 4
onoff
on
off
off 3 2
onoff
offoff
1 0
onoff
Interface to MPI customer operator panelstandard hardware
The following default setting (840D) is suggested:
Table 20-4 Default settings S3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning
off off on on off on off onBaud rate: 1.5 Mbaud / Transmission cycle time: 100 ms / bus address: 6 / serialhardware
The PLC expects a message frame from the machine control panel at least ev-ery 500 msecs. The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLCat cyclic intervals when no key is pressed. This cycle time is set with S3 DIPswitches 2 and 3. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machinecontrol panel to be adjusted.
Settings fortransmissioncycle time
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
04.0420.3 Mounting, connection and settings
20-347 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervals from thePLC and answers these at cyclic intervals. The receive monitoring time is linkedto the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with theS3 DIP switch (2 and 3).
The bus address for 840D must be set to “6”. Other addresses can be selected,but these must then also be set at FB1 in the basic PLC program.
Before the machine control panel can exchange data with the PLC CPU via theMPI interface, the appropriate interface parameters for the configuration mustbe activated. They are activated by means of the MPI bus address settings us-ing DIP switch S3 in accordance with the following table.
Table 20-5 Correlation between MPI bus address and GD parameters with machinecontrol panel
MPI ad-dress
Preset GD parameters Receive – Transmit
0, ..., 3 Reserved
4 5 . 1 . 1 – 5 . 2 . 1
5 5 . 1 . 1 – 5 . 2 . 1
6 Reserved
7 4 . 1 . 1 – 4 . 2 . 1
8 4 . 1 . 1 – 4 . 2 . 1
9 3 . 1 . 1 – 3 . 2 . 1
10 3 . 1 . 1 – 3 . 2 . 1
11 2 . 1 . 1 – 2 . 2 . 1
12 2 . 1 . 1 – 2 . 2 . 1
13 1 . 1 . 1 – 1 . 2 . 1
14 1 . 1 . 1 – 1 . 2 . 1
15 1 . 1 . 1 – 1 . 2 . 1
(PLC)
Send
Receive
Mac
hine
cont
rol p
anel
Fig. 20-6 Receiving and transmitting from view of machine control panel
Settings forreceive cycle time
Bus address
Interfaceparameters forcommunication viaglobal data
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
04.0420.4 Technical data
20-348 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
20.4 Technical data
Table 20-6 Technical data for machine control panel MCP 483C
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front: IP54 Keyswitch:IP54
Rear: IP00
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption, max. 5 W
Mechanical data
DimensionsWidth: 483 mmHeight: 155 mm
Depth: 77 mmMounting depth: 45 mm
Weight approx. 1.6 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing
10 – 58 Hz: 0,015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 C (to front)0 ... 55 C (to rear)
–25 ... 55 C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
04.0420.5 Spare parts and accessories
20-349 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
20.5 Spare parts and accessories
Table 20-7 Spare part kits for machine control panel MCP 483C
Name DescriptionNum-ber
Order number
EMER-
Actuating element 16 mm EmergencyStop mushroom-head pushbutton(red)
1 3SB20 00-1AC01
EMER-GENCYSTOP
Switching element with one contact,1NO contact
1 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0STOPbutton Switching element with one contact, 1
NC contact2 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0
Holder for 2 switching elements 1 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0
Keyswitch Keyswitch with key 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0
Set of keys Set of keys MSTT 10 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0
Rotaryswitchspindle
SINUMERIK 810D/840D, overridespindle / rapid traverse, rotary switch1x 16G, T=24, cap, knob, pointer, dialsfor spindle and rapid traverse
6 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA0
Rotaryswitch feed
SINUMERIK 810D/840D, overridefeed / rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, knob, pointer, dialsfor feed and rapid traverse
6 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0
Set of ten-sion jacks
SINUMERIK 810D/840D, tension jackset for supplementary componentswith 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm
9 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0
Instructions on how to replace the handwheel, rotary switch and mouse can befound in section “15” TFT operator panel, width 416 mm, without videolink re-ceiver”.
Table 20-8 Accessories for machine control panel MCP 483C
Name DescriptionNum-ber
Order number
Key cover(for labeling)
1 set of 90, ergo-gray and 20 each ofred / green / yellow / medium gray
1 6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0
Key cover(for labeling)
1 set of 90, clear 1 6FC5248-0AF21-0AA0
Key coversfor turning
supplied separately packaged with MCP
Spare parts
Replacing spareparts
Accessories
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
04.0420.5 Spare parts and accessories
20-350 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C
Notes
21-351 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Machine Control Panel MCP 483
This description applies to the following Machine Control Panels:
Type Key type Order number
MCP 483 Film 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA1
21.1 Brief description
The machine control panel MCP 483 permits user-friendly operation of the ma-chine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning,grinding and special machines.
The fifty keys and two control device slots have user-labeled slide-in strips foradapting to specific machines. A DIN-A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips isincluded in the scope of delivery.
The machine control panel is mounted from the rear with special tension jackssupplied with the panel.
Operating elements
Operating mode and function keys:
– 50 keys with LEDs
– Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override
– Default key assignment includes 17 freely assignable customer keys
Spindle control with rotary override switch (16 positions)
Feed control with rotary override switch (23 positions)
Keyswitch (4 positions and 3 different keys)
Emergency-off pushbutton (2 NC contacts)
Interfaces:
MPI interface / PROFIBUS DP
For 6 control devices when connected via PROFIBUS DP
For 16 direct control keys for OP 012/OP 015A/TP 015A when connectedvia PROFIBUS DP
For 2 handwheels when connected via PROFIBUS DP (max. cable length:5 m)
Expansion slots:
2 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm)
Key type:
Membrane keys
Validity
Design
21
04.0421.2 Control elements and interfaces
21-352 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
21.2 Control elements and interfaces
21.2.1 Operating elements front face
Position of operating elements
A B C FE G HD I J
Fig. 21-1 Position of control elements on machine control panel MCP 483 (milling version)
A: Emergency stop buttonB: Slots for control devices (d = 16 mm)C: Reset buttonD: Program controlE: Operating modes, machine functionsF: Customer-definable keys (T1 to T15)G: Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15)H: Spindle control with override switchI: Feed control with override switchJ: Keyswitch (four positions)
Press the red button in emergency situations:
1. if life is at risk,
2. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.
An EMERGENCY STOP generally shuts down all drives with the greatest pos-sible braking torque in a controlled manner.
Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it.
Machine Manufacturer
For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP:Please read the information supplied by the machine tool manufacturer!
Designation ofoperatingelements
EMERGENCYSTOP button
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.2 Control elements and interfaces
21-353 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Attach cable tobutton
EMERGENCY STOP machine control
Emergency stop button
Push-onconnection
1
2
41 2
2 (4)
1 (3)
3
Connection numbering: Defaults; in brackets: Optional
Fig. 21-2 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit
Warning
The openings for mounting control devices (letter B in Fig. 21-1) must not bechipped out, but drilled to the required width (risk of damage!).
21.2.2 Operating and display elements to rear
The control and display elements on the rear of the MCP 483 are located on theCOM board (shown with a gray background in the illustration below):
X30 X31
X50
X10 X20 X60 X61 X70S1
X51, ..., X54 S3
H1, ..., H5
COM board
Equipotential bonding
Fig. 21-3 Rear of the MCP 483 showing the control and display elements and the interfaces
Circuit forEMERGENCYSTOP button
Mounting slots forcontrol devices
COM board
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.2 Control elements and interfaces
21-354 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Setting the handwheel signal type– S1 open: TTL interface– S1 closed: Differential interface
Sets e.g. baud rate, addresses and protocol
Table 21-1 Meaning of diagnostic LEDs H1,..., H5
No. Monitoring of Effect: LED... Diagnostics
H1 Hardware lights up red Initialization error
H2 – (reserved) – –
H3 Voltage lights up green Logic voltages on board OK
H4Operator panel in-terface
flashes yellow Data transfer in progress
flashes green Ready for communication
H5 PROFIBUSlights up green Communication in progress
H5 PROFIBUS
lights up redChannel interference or not yet ready (de-fault after Power On)
21.2.3 Interfaces
The MCP 483 communicates via the COM board (see above). For position ofinterfaces, see Fig. 21-3.
X10: Power supply interface
3-pin Phoenix terminal block
X20: Operator panel interface (MPI/PROFIBUS)
9-pin Sub-D socket connector
X30: Interface for connecting rotary feed override switch (23 graduations)
2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock
X31: Interface for connecting rotary spindle override switch (16 graduations)
2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock
X50: Interface to 4-way keyswitch
1 x 6-pin plug connector
X51-X54: Interface for additional control devices (buttons with 24 V lamps)
each 1 x 4-pin plug connector
X60/X61: Connection for 2 handwheels (TTL/DTTL)
each 15-pin Sub-D socket
Jumper S1
S3 DIP switch
Diagnostic LEDs1...5
Position ofinterfaces
Overview ofinterfaces
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.2 Control elements and interfaces
21-355 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
X70: Connection of direct keys (16 digital inputs; opto-decoupled)
2 x 10-pin plug connector
Equipotential bonding
The equipotential bonding conductor is attached by means of an M5 screw
Connector designation: X51, ..., X54Connector type: 4-pin plug connector
Table 21-2 Pin assignment for connectors X51/X52 *)
Pin Name Meaning Type
1 KT-IN1/4 *) Customer key 1/4
2 KT-IN2/5 Customer key 2/5 O
3 KT-IN3/6 Customer key 3/6
4 M (GND) Ground V
*) KT-IN1/2/3: X51; KT-IN4/5/6: X52
Table 21-3 Pin assignment for connectors X53/X54 *)
Pin Name Meaning Type
1 KT-OUT1/4 *) Customer key 1/4 lamp
2 KT-OUT2/5 Customer key 2/5 lamp O
3 KT-OUT3/6 Customer key 3/6 lamp
4 M24 Ground 24V V
*) KT-OUT1/2/3: X53; KT-OUT4/5/6: X54
Connector designation: X60, X61Connector type: 15-pin Sub D socket
Table 21-4 Pin assignment for connectors X60/X61 *)
Pin Name Meaning Type
1 PV5 Supply voltage 5 VV
2 M (GND) GroundV
3 HWi_A *) Handwheel pulses track AI
4 HWi_XA Handwheel pulses track A (negated)I
5 N.C. Not assigned –
6 HWi_B Handwheel pulses track BI
7 HWi_XB Handwheel pulses track B (negated)I
8 N.C. Not assigned –
9 PV5 Supply voltage 5V V
10 N.C. Not assigned –
11 M (GND) Ground V
12 – 15 N.C. Not assigned –
*) i = 1: X60; i = 2: X61
Interfaces foradditional controldevices
Interfaces for 2handwheels
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.2 Control elements and interfaces
21-356 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X70Connector type: 2 x 10-pin plug connector, 2.54 mm grid
Table 21-5 Pin assignment for connector X70
Pin Name Meaning Type
i = 1, ..., 16 DT_i Direct control key i I
17, 18 P5V_TACO P5 keyboard controllerV
19, 20 M_TACO M keyboard controllerV
Connector designation: X10Connector type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal block, straight
Table 21-6 X10 pin assignments
Pin Name Meaning Type
1 P24 24 V potentialV
2 M24 Ground 24 VV
(Supplyvoltage)
3 SHIELD Shield connectionvoltage)
Interface for directcontrol keys
Power supplyinterface
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.3 Mounting and settings
21-357 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
21.3 Mounting and settings
Dimension drawing
A
A
132.6132.4 95.9
37114.7
164.637
95.8
482.6
155
20.2
32.1
18.9
45.1
1.5mm –6mm
In the sealing area
A–A
Mounting frame
Rz
120
2:1
Tension jacks (x 9)Tightening torque 0.8 Nm
Mounting frame
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 21-4 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 483
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.3 Mounting and settings
21-358 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
21.3.1 Mounting
The machine control panel is attached by means of 9 tension jacks (tighteningtorque 0.8 Nm; see also dimension drawing 21-4).
450+1
135+1
Fig. 21-5 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 483
Max. 60 off vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60 a fan must addi-tionally be installed to keep the environmental temperature of the machine con-trol panel constantly below 55 C.
Tension jackfastening
Mounting position
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.3 Mounting and settings
21-359 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
21.3.2 Settings via DIP switch S3
The connection type is set via switches 9 and 10:
Table 21-7 Connection type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value
– – – – – – – – on on PROFIBUS DP
– – – – – – – – off off MPI
For connection type MPI, the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7:
Table 21-8 MPI parameters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value
Data transfer rate
on – – – – – – – – 1.5 Mbaud
off – – – – – – – – 187.5 kbaud
Transmissioncycle time
Reception moni-toring
– on off – – – – – – – 200 ms 2400 ms
– off on – – – – – – – 100 ms 1200 ms
– off off – – – – – – – 50 ms 600 ms
MPI address
– – – off off off off – – – 0
– – – off off off on – – – 1
– – – off off on off – – – 2
– – – off off on on – – – 3
– – – off on off off – – – 4
– – – off on off on – – – 5
– – – off on on off – – – 6
– – – off on on on – – – 7
– – – on off off off – – – 8
– – – on off off on – – – 9
– – – on off on off – – – 10
– – – on off on on – – – 11
– – – on on off off – – – 12
– – – on on off on – – – 13
– – – on on on off – – – 14
– – – on on on on – – – 15
Choosing theconnection type
Connection type:MPI
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.3 Mounting and settings
21-360 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
For connection type PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS address is set usingswitches 1 to 7:
Table 21-9 PROFIBUS address
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value
PROFIBUS address
off off off off off off off – – – 0
on off off off off off off – – – 1
off on off off off off off – – – 2
on on off off off off off – – – 3
: : : : : : : – – – : (etc.)
on off on on on on on – – – 125
off on on on on on on – – – 126
The code for the standard hardware is set with switch 8:
Table 21-10 Hardware code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value
– – – – – – – off – – Standard hardware
The default setting for DIP switch S3 is:
Data transfer rate: 1.5 Mbaud
Transmission cycle time: 100 ms; reception monitoring 1200 ms
Bus address: 6
Connection type: MPI
Table 21-11 Default setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value
on off on off on on off off off off Standard hardware
Note
Switches 9 and 10 on DIP switch S3 (see Fig. 21-3) are used to set theconnection type, i.e. the transfer protocol and the interface used:
– MPIIf MPI is selected, the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7.
– PROFIBUS DPIf PROFIBUS DP is chosen, the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1to 7.
The same code should be used for the standard hardware (switch 8 = off).
Connection type:PROFIBUS DP
Hardware code
Default settings
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.4 Technical data
21-361 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
21.4 Technical data
Table 21-12 Technical data for machine control panel MCP 483
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front: IP65
Keyswitch:IP54
Rear side:IP00
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption, max.Board7 W
Lamps6 x 1.2 W
Handwheels2 x 0.9 W
Total16 W
Mechanical data
DimensionsWidth: 483 mmHeight: 155 mm
Depth: 70 mmMounting depth: 38 mm
Weight approx. 1.6 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing
10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.5 Spare parts and accessories
21-362 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
21.5 Spare parts and accessories
Table 21-13 Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 483
Name Description Number Order number
Actuating element 16 mm EmergencyStop mushroom-head pushbutton (red)
1 3SB2000-1AC01
EMER-GENCYSTOP
Switching element with one contact,1NO contact
1 3SB2404-0B
STOPbutton Switching element with one contact, 1
NC contact1 3SB2404-0C
Holder for 2 switching elements 1 3SB2908-0AA
Key-switch
Keyswitch with key 16FC5247-0AF02-0AA0
Sets ofkeys
Set of keys (10 sets) for machine con-trol panel
1 set6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0
Rotaryspindleoverrideswitch
SINUMERIK 810D/840D, overridespindle / rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, knob, pointer, dials forspindle and rapid traverse
16FC5247-0AF12-0AA0
Rotaryfeedoverrideswitch
SINUMERIK 810D/840D, override feed /rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x 23G,T=32, cap, knob, pointer, dials for feedand rapid traverse
16FC5247-0AF21-0AA0
Set oftensionjacks
Set of tension jacks (x 9) for supple-mentary componentswith 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm
1 set6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0
Instructions on how to replace the rotary switch can be found in section “15 inchTFT operator panel, 416 mm wide, without videolink receiver”.
Table 21-14 Accessories and options for machine control panel MCP 483
Name Description Number Order number
Slide-inlabels
SINUMERIK 810D/840D slide-inlabels (3 A4 films)
1 set6FC5248-0AF22-1AA1
Cable set foradditionalcontrol de-vices
SINUMERIK 810D/840D Cable setfor additional control devices
1 set6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0
Cable forhandwheelconnection *)
SINUMERIK 810D/840D, Cablefor handwheel connectionMax. cable length: 5 m
16FX8002-4AA21-1xx0
Direct controlkey/handwheelconnection
Direct control key/handwheel con-nection option for6FC5203-0AF22-1AA1/-0AF23-1AA0
16FC5252-0AF00-0AA0
*) See illustration below
Spare parts
Replacing spareparts
Accessories
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.5 Spare parts and accessories
21-363 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
30
100
100 ± 50
1
234
GEORRT
1 0.18 GN
7911
Shield
VIBRSW
6 BL
YEOGRD
GN
VTBNBK
BU
1P51MA_HWXA_HWB_HWXB_HW1P51M
3
4
Shield
5
Pin 1
Housing
2
Explanation:1 Signal connector2 Signal cable
3 Pin-end connector, insulated4 Ring-end connector, insulated
5 Flexible cable 0.75 mm3
*) Max. approved system cable length: 5 m
Dimensions in mm
Length according to length code *) 100
0.180.180.180.180.180.180.18
Fig. 21-6 Connecting cable for handwheelOrder no. 6FX8002-4AA21-1xx0 (xx is the length code: A = 0, B = 1, etc.)
21.5.1 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels
Fig. 21-7 Machine control panel MCP 483
The machine control panel (MCP) shown above is the standard shipped variant.
You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. A printableblank film (A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose.
A spare parts kit containing 3 blank films is also available:Order No.: 6FC5248-0AF22-1AA1 (Item No. A5E00179123)
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.5 Spare parts and accessories
21-364 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Fig. 21-8 Blank film for MCP 483
Instructions are given below on how to print the required key symbols on thefilm supplied or how to create your own individual film.
The software on the DOCONCD includes three files for the blank films:
Template_M_MCP483.doc (defaults for milling – standard shipped file; seeFig. 21-9)
Template_T_MCP483.doc (defaults for turning; see Fig. 21-10)
Template_MCP483.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579;see Fig. 21-11)
Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file, strip lettering as jpg file (see Table 21-15)
Files Template_M_MCP483.doc, Template_T_MCP483.doc and Tem-plate_MCP483.docinclude a table function showing the corresponding key-board positions.
Preparing slide-inlabels
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.5 Spare parts and accessories
21-365 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
One example of the three MCP files (milling and turning) is given below:
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
Part 5
Part 5
Part 6
X Y Z
–
–
+
+
Fig. 21-9 Template_M_MCP483.doc for the “Milling” version
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
Part 5
Part 5
Part 6
+Y +X +C
–C –X –Y
–Z +Z
Fig. 21-10 Template_T_MCP483.doc for the “Turning” version
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.5 Spare parts and accessories
21-366 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Part 5
Part 5
Part 6
Fig. 21-11 Template_MCP483.doc(blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579)
Within the table cells the key symbol required in each case can be copied andpasted into the corresponding table field.
The vertical bars shown in the diagram do not appear on the printed-out labels.
The strip “Part5” is included twice so that it is available optionally as either a1-color or 3-color strip.
Printing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw):
– Draw a 15 x 15 mm square, with fill color white and an invisible borderline.
– Place the symbol in the center of this square.
– Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into a Word doc-ument (Symbols.doc).
Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher,Paint):
– Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) with fill color white.
– Draw the symbol in the center of this square.
– Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Worddocument (Symbols.doc).
Creating your ownsymbols
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.5 Spare parts and accessories
21-367 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The following is a dimension drawing for the blank template for MCP 483:
5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1
2 2
2 2
3
34 4
Part 5
Part 5
Part 6
1: Width 1.9 cm
2: Width 1 cm
3: Width 3.3 cm
4: Width 0.3 cm
5: Width 0.6 cm
Narrow label: width 23 cm, height 0.06 cm
Narrow label: width 24.34 cm, height 0.06 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Fig. 21-12 Dimension drawing for slide-in labels for MCP 483
Note
The slide-in strips are printed on the front with a laser printer. HP Color LaserJet film C2936A is used.
To make the labels easier to slide in, they should be rounded by about 1.5 mm.
The outer lines of the strip are the cutting edge.
It is advisable to run a test print on normal paper before printing the labels onfilm.
Dimensiondrawings
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.5 Spare parts and accessories
21-368 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The file Symbols.doccontains the following key symbols:
Table 21-15 File Symbols.doc
7001 7013 7025 7124
7002 7014 7026 +C 7125
7003 7015 7027 +X 7126
7004 7016 Z 7028 –Y 7127
7005 7017 7029 +Z 7128
100% 7006 7018 7030 –X 7129
7007 7019 7031 +Y 7130
7008 7020 – 7032 –Z 7131
7009 7021 + 7033 –C 7132
7010 Y 7022 7120
X 7011 7023 7121
7012 7024 7123
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-369 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
21.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
This chapter describes:
Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration fora SIMATIC S7 project.
Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 “HW config”.
Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and userprogram (optional)
Note
The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the specialrequirements for configuring the DP slave MCP. For more details about workingwith SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation oronline help.
21.6.1 Prerequisites
The following components are needed to add a DP slave MCP to the hardwareconfiguration:
SIMATIC STEP 7
GSD file for DP slave MCP
Graphics files for DP slave MCP
SIMATIC STEP 7 is required in the following version or later:
SIMATIC STEP 7 as from Version 5.2, Service Pack 1
The GSD file for the DP slave MCP is required in the following version or later:
SI008109.GSD version 1.0 or later
A GSD file contains all the properties of a DP slave in ASCII format. For eachDP slave SIMATIC STEP 7 requires a module-specific GSD file so that the DPslave can be found in the hardware catalog.
The DP slave MCP is displayed in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the “HW config” hard-ware catalog in the following path:
Profile: StandardPROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control> SINUMERIK MCP
If the module is not displayed, the GSD file must be installed. To do this, in “HWconfig” use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. Before installing theGSD file, please read the following instructions concerning the graphics files.
SIMATIC STEP 7
GSD file
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-370 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The graphics files belonging to the GSD file:
SI8109_N.BMP
SI8109_S.BMP
are used to display the DP slave MCP in the “HW config” station window. Theyare automatically installed by STEP 7 when the GSD file is installed. They mustbe located in the same directory as the GSD file.
21.6.2 Functions of the machine control panel
The machine control panel offers the following functions:
Standard
Handwheel
Additional I/Os
The function transfers input/output data from the function keys and user-specifickeys and outputs:
Input data: 8 bytes
Output data: 8 bytes
The input/output data is compatible with the input/output data from the previousmachine control panel:
The input/output data for machine control panel MCP 483 is compatible with theinput/output data from the previous machine control panel:
– Machine control panel (MCP), MPI
– 19” machine control panel
The function transfers the absolute values for the two handwheels that can beconnected to the machine control panel:
Input data: 2 x 2 bytes
Absolute valuehandwheel 1
Low byte High byte
Absolute value handwheel 2
For each handwheel the current handwheel value is transferred as a 16-bit ab-solute value relative to the starting value. The starting value for the sensorcounter in the handwheel is 0.
The absolute values are transferred in big endian format.
The data for both handwheels is always transferred. The absolute value for ahandwheel that is not connected is always 0.
The function transfers the data for all non-standard inputs/outputs:
Direct control keys
Customer keys: 6 signals (bit 0 to bit 6)
Rotary switch
with the following distribution:
Graphics files
Standard
Handwheel
Additional I/Os
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-371 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Input data: 5 bytes
Low byte High byte
CustomerkeysDirect control keys (OP
012)
1. Rotaryswitch
2. Rotaryswitch
Output data: 2 bytes
Low byte High byte
Reserved,always 0
CustomerLEDs
21.6.3 Configuring the DP slave MCP
This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to thehardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in Fig. 21-13 by way ofexample.
The hardware configuration comprises the following modules:
SIMATIC station 300 with SINUMERIK 810D/840D and PLC 317-2DP
SINUMERIK MCP with module: standard, handwheel, extended
Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps:
1. Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration(see Fig. 21-13, page 21-13: 1)
2. Set the PROFIBUS address
3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP according to the functionsrequired.(see Fig. 21-13, page 21-13: 2)
4. Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots
HW config – [SINUMERIK840D (configuration) –– PROFIBUS MCP]
StandardProfile:
Station Edit Insert Target System View Tools Window Help
PROFIBUS(1): DP master system(1)
(9) SINUMEI/ONC/RC
MOTION CONTROLSINUMERIK MCP
Universal module
standard, handwheel
standard, handwheel, ex
standard
standard, extended
PROFIBUS(1): DP master system(1)
Slot DP identification Order number/designation I address O address Com...
1 55 standard, handwheel, extended 0...7 0...72 2IO ––> standard, handwheel, exten 258...2613 192 ––> standard, handwheel, exten 8...12 8...9
(0) 810D/840D
2
X1X23
PLC 317–2DP 2AJ10MPIDPIM360
4 S7 FM NCU
1
2
Fig. 21-13 Configuration with DP slave MCP
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-372 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP isto be added:
– You have created the S7 project
– You have set up a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS master-capableSINUMERIK controller
To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog usingthe menu command View > Catalog.
The DP slave MCP can be found at:
Profile: StandardPROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control> SINUMERIK MCP
Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in thehardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station windowby holding down the left mouse button.
The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the followingsymbol:
When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MCP is added to theconfiguration.
Note
As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it.When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes toa cursor with a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration.
Once you have added the DP slave MCP to the configuration, the “Properties –PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP” dialog box is displayed.
The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified:
– PROFIBUS address
– Data transfer rate
– Profile
Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCPTab card: Parameters
Address: <PROFIBUS address>Button: “Properties...”
Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUSTab card: Network settings
Data transfer rate: 12 MbaudProfile: DP
OK
OK
Preconditions: S7project
Adding a DP slaveMCP
PROFIBUSparameters
Dialog box
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-373 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Note
The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must matchthe PROFIBUS address set on the module(DIP switch S3) (see Subsection21.3.2, Page 21-359).
There is no automatic adjustment!
The following data must match:
1. SIMATIC S7 configuration DP slave MCPPROFIBUS address
2. Machine control panel MCP 483PROFIBUS address (DIP switch S3)
The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be trans-ferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. Themodules are listed in the hardware catalog under the DP slave MCP. The follow-ing modules are available:
Universal module (not applicable)
standard
standard, handwheel
standard, extended
standard, handwheel, extended
Module: standard
The module transfers the data for the “Standard” function:
Input data: 8 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Output data: 8 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Module: standard, handwheel
The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Handwheel” functions:
Input data: 12 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Absolute valueHandwheel 1
(2 bytes)Low byte High byte
Absolute valueHandwheel 2
(2 bytes)
Output data: 8 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Adding a module
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-374 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Module: standard, extended
The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Additional I/Os” functions:
Input data: 13 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Direct controlkeys (OP
012) (2 bytes)Low byte High byte
Customer keys(1 byte)
1. Rotaryswitch(1 byte)
2. Rotaryswitch(1 byte)
Output data: 10 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Reserved(1 byte)
CustomerLEDs
(1 byte)
Low byte High byte
Module: standard, handwheel, extended
The module transfers the data for the “Standard”, “Handwheel” and “AdditionalI/Os” functions:
Input data: 17 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Low byte
Direct key(OP 012)(2 bytes)
High byte
Customizedkeys
(1 byte)
1. Rotaryswitch(1 byte)
2. Rotaryswitch(1 byte)
Absolute valueHandwheel 1
(2 bytes)
Absolute valueHandwheel 2
(2 bytes)
Output data: 10 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Reserved(1 byte)
CustomerLEDs
(1 byte)
Low byte High byte
If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP, the input/output addressesare automatically assigned by STEP 7.
Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the “Properties – DPslave” dialog box. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be sethere.
21.6.4 Linking to the basic PLC and user program
This section describes how to link the DP slave MCP
to the basic PLC program for transferring standard I/O data to the VDI inter-face
to the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response toa module failure
Setting the I/Oaddresses
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-375 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Note
“Handwheel” functionThe “Handwheel” function is not currently supported by the basic PLC program.
“Additional I/Os” functionProcessing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machinemanufacturer) and is not supported by the basic PLC program.
In order to transfer the standard I/O data for the DP slave MCP using the basicPLC program, the corresponding I/O address range must be added to the com-munication parameters for function block FB1.
Function block FB1
The communication parameters of the MCP are designated as MCPx... (wherex = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. A maximum of 2 machine control panels aresupported by the basic PLC program.
To synchronize several MCPs, the PLC program must be adapted accordingly.This is the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility.
To operate a machine control panel MCP 483 as a DP slave, only the followingparameters are relevant:
MCPNum: INT // See below: Note
MCP1In: POINTER // Address of input signals MCP1Out: POINTER // Address of output signals
The MCP2... parameters are only needed if a 2nd MCP is used in addition tothe 1st MCP:
MCP2In: POINTER // Address of input signals MCP2Out: POINTER // Address of output signals
The parameters listed below serve to synchronize two MCPs:
MCP1Stop: BOOL // Transfer of the relevant operating component:MCP2Stop: BOOL // FALSE = start; TRUE = stop
MCP1NotSend: BOOL // Send and receive operation of the relevant MCP2NotSend: BOOL // operating component:
// FALSE = send and receive is active// TRUE = only receive is active
Note
Parameter: MCPNumUp to and including version 7.1 of the basic PLC program, parameter MCPNumshould always be set to 0.
Parameter: MCPxStop and MCPxNotSendThese parameters are irrelevant for connection via PROFIBUS DP.
Basic PLCprogram
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-376 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
ReferencesFor a detailed description of the basic PLC program or of function block FB 1,please refer to:
/FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC ProgramChapter: FB 1: RUN_UP Basic program, startup section
The following function blocks can be used to assign the VDI interface:
FC 19: Machine control panel MCP 483, version M (milling)
FC 25: Machine control panel MCP 483, version T (turning)
Note
Function blocks FC 19, FC 24 and FC 25 are part of the basic PLC program. Itis the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility to call the block correctlyand/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters.
ReferencesA detailed description of the function blocks for transferring machine controlpanel signals to the VDI interface can be found in:
/FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC ProgramChapter: FC 19: MCP_IFM ...Chapter: FC 24: MCP_IFM2 ...Chapter: FC 25: MCP_IFT ...
The following example shows the communication parameter settings for func-tion block FB 1 for a machine control panel:
MCPNum := 0 // Number of active MCPs
MCP1In := P#E 0.0 // Address of input data (8 bytes)MCP1Out := P#A 0.0 // Address of output data (8 bytes)
MCP1StatSend := P#A 0.0 // Preset; no significanceMCP1StatRec := P#A 0.0 // Preset; no significance
MCP1BusAdr := 0 // Preset; no significance
MCP1Timeout := S5T#700MS // Preset; no significanceMCP1Cycl := S5T#200MS // Preset; no significance
MCPMPI := FALSE // MCP/HT 6 operated on “extended” MPI bus
MCP1Stop := FALSE // Preset; no significanceMCP1NotSend := FALSE // Preset; no significance
MCPSDB210 := FALSE // Preset; no significance
If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does notcheck for module failure.
In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the ac-tive DP slave:
PLC operating system
PROFIBUS controller
If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP.
VDI interfaceparameterassignment
Example
PLC user program
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-377 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program tocustomize the response to a DP slave MCP failure:
OB 82: Diagnostic interrupt
OB 86: Rack failure
Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking orga-nization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data.
Note
In the event of the failure of a machine control panel connected via OPI/MPI,the following alarm is tripped by the basic PLC program:
Alarm “40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure”; with x = 0, 1
If the machine control panel is being operated as a DP slave, the user(machine manufacturer) is responsible for triggering a corresponding alarm.
21.6.5 Input/output image
A key and the LED positioned above it form a logical unit. The key and the LEDhave the same number.
Key: Sxy = Key number xy
LED: LEDxy = LED number xy
Fig. 21-14 shows the arrangement of keys and LEDs on the machine controlpanel together with their internal designation. For the sake of clarity, the LEDdesignations are not shown in full.
S13 S14 S15 S16 S29 S30 S31 S44 S45 S46 S47 S48 S49 S50
S12 S07 S08 S26 S27 S28 S41 S42 S43
S11 S05 S06
S10 S03 S04
S09 S01 S02
S23 S24 S25
S20 S21 S22
S17 S18 S19
S38 S39 S40
S35 S36 S37
S32 S33 S34 Key
LEDLED01 LED02LED09 LED18 LED19LED17 LED33 LED34LED32
Fig. 21-14 Designation of keys and LEDs
Customizedresponse
Arrangement: Keys and LEDs
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-378 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Arrangement of key signals in the input image of the DP slave MCP:
Table 21-16 Input image
Signals from machine control panel (keys)
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
EB n+0 Spindle override Mode
D C B A JOGS09
TEACHS10
MDAS11
AUTOS12
EB n+1 Machine functions
REPOSS01
REFS02
var: INCS03
10000 INCS08
1000 INCS07
100 INCS06
10 INCS05
1 INCS04
EB n+2 KeyswitchPosition 0
KeyswitchPosition 2
SpindlestartS48
*SpindlestopS47
Feed startS50
*Feed stopS49
NC Start
S16
*NC Stop
S15
EB n+3 RESETS13
KeyswitchPosition 1
Singleblock
Feed overrideS13 Position 1 block
S14 E D C B A
EB n+4 Direction keys KeyswitchPosition 3
Axis selection
R15S46
R13S44
R14S45
Position 3R1S32
R4S35
R7S38
R10S41
EB n+5 Axis selection
R2S33
R3S34
R5S36
R12S43
R11S42
R9S40
R8S39
R6S37
EB n+6 Freely assignable customer keys
T9S25
T10S26
T11S27
T12S28
T13S29
T14S30
T15S31
notused
EB n+7 Freely assignable customer keys
T1S17
T2S18
T3S19
T4S20
T5S21
T6S22
T7S23
T8S24
Signals marked with * are inverse signals.
Input image
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-379 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Arrangement of LED signals in the output image of the DP slave MCP:
Table 21-17 Output image
Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
AB n+0 Machine function Mode
1000 INCLED07
100 INCLED06
10 INCLED05
1 INCLED04
JOGLED09
TEACHLED10
MDALED11
AUTOLED12
AB n+1 Feed startLED50
Feed stopLED49
NC Start NC Stop Machine functionLED50 LED49
LED16 LED15REPOSLED01
REFLED02
var: INCLED03
10000 INCLED08
AB n+2 Axis selection Singleblock
Spindlestart
Spindlestop
R13LED44
R1LED32
R4LED35
R7LED38
R10LED41
blockLED14
startLED48
stopLED47
AB n+3 Axis selection
R3LED34
R5LED36
R12LED43
R11LED42
R9LED40
R8LED39
R6LED37
R15LED46
AB n+4 Freely assignable customer keys Axis selec-tion
T9LED25
T10LED26
T11LED27
T12LED28
T13LED29
T14LED30
T15LED31
R2LED33
AB n+5 Freely assignable customer keys
T1LED17
T2LED18
T3LED19
T4LED20
T5LED21
T6LED22
T7LED23
T8LED24
AB n+6 notused
notused
notused
notused
notused
notused
RESETLED13
R14LED45
AB n+7 notused
notused
notused
notused
notused
notused
notused
notused
Output image
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
21-380 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483
Notes
22-381 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Machine Control Panel MCP 310
This description applies to the following Machine Control Panels:
Type Key type Order number
MCP 310 Film 6FC5203-0AF23-1AA0
22.1 Brief description
The machine control panel MCP 310 permits user-friendly operation of the ma-chine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning,grinding and special machines.
The 49 keys are equipped with user-labeled slide-in strips for adapting to spe-cific machines. A DIN-A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips is included in thescope of supply.
The machine control panel is mounted from the rear with special tension jackssupplied with the panel.
Operating elements
Operating mode and function keys:
– 49 keys
– Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override
– Default key assignment includes 16 freely assignable customer keys
Feed control with rotary override switch (23 positions)
Keyswitch (4 positions and 3 different keys)
Interfaces:
MPI interface / PROFIBUS DP
For 6 control devices
For 16 direct control keys for OP 012/OP 015A/TP 015A when connectedvia PROFIBUS DP
For 2 handwheels when connected via PROFIBUS DP (max. cable length:5 m)
Expansion slots:
6 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm)
1 slot for EMERGENCY STOP key or override rotary switch (up to d 22 cm)
Key type:
Membrane keys
Validity
Design
22
04.0422.2 Control elements and interfaces
22-382 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
22.2 Control elements and interfaces
22.2.1 Operating elements front face
Position of operating elements
Keyswitch
Spindle control16 customer keysOperating modes andmachine functions
Feed control with override switch
Location for EMERGENCY STOPbutton or spindle override switch
Location for16 mm control units *)
*) Drill openings to required width, do not chip out: Risk of damage to panel!
Programcontrol
Fig. 22-1 Position of control elements on machine control panel MCP 310
If an EMERGENCY STOP button is added: see description in “Machine controlpanel MCP 483”, “Control elements and interfaces”
Warning
The openings for mounting control devices (footnote in Fig. 22-1) must not bechipped out, but drilled to the required width (risk of damage!).
EMERGENCYSTOP button
Mounting slots forcontrol devices
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.2 Control elements and interfaces
22-383 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
22.2.2 Operating and display elements to rear
The control and display elements on the rear of the MCP 310 are located on theCOM board (shown with a gray background in the illustration below).
X50
X31 X10 X20 X70X60
X5154
COM board
Keyswitch
S1
COM board
X30
S3
H1, ..., H5 X61
Equipotential bonding
Fig. 22-2 Rear of the MCP 310 showing the control and display elements and the interfaces
See “Machine control panel MCP 483”, “Control elements and interfaces”
22.2.3 Interfaces
The MCP 310 communicates via the COM board (see above). For position ofinterfaces, see Fig. 22-2.
See “Machine control panel MCP 483”, “Interfaces”
COM board
Description of rearcontrol anddisplay elements
Position ofinterfaces
Interfacedescription
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.3 Mounting and settings
22-384 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
22.3 Mounting and settings
Dimension drawing
310
175
15.3
3331.3
20.2
A
A
109.2578.9104.65
109.2573.9
109.65
1.5mm – 6mm
A–A2:1
Mounting frame
Rz
120
Mounting frame
Tension jacks (x 6)
Tightening torque 0.8 Nm
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 22-3 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 310
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.3 Mounting and settings
22-385 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
22.3.1 Mounting
The machine control panel is attached by means of 6 tension jacks (tighteningtorque 0.8 Nm; see also dimension drawing 22-3).
155+
1
285+1
Fig. 22-4 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 310
Max. 60 off vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60 a fan must addi-tionally be installed to keep the environmental temperature of the machine con-trol panel constantly below 55 C.
Tension jackfastening
Mounting position
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.3 Mounting and settings
22-386 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
22.3.2 Settings via DIP switch S3
The connection type is set via switches 9 and 10:
Table 22-1 Connection type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value
– – – – – – – – on on PROFIBUS DP
– – – – – – – – off off MPI
For connection type MPI, the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7:
Table 22-2 MPI parameters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value
Data transfer rate
on – – – – – – – – 1.5 Mbaud
off – – – – – – – – 187.5 kbaud
Transmissioncycle time
Reception moni-toring
– on off – – – – – – – 200 ms 2400 ms
– off on – – – – – – – 100 ms 1200 ms
– off off – – – – – – – 50 ms 600 ms
MPI address
– – – off off off off – – – 0
– – – off off off on – – – 1
– – – off off on off – – – 2
– – – off off on on – – – 3
– – – off on off off – – – 4
– – – off on off on – – – 5
– – – off on on off – – – 6
– – – off on on on – – – 7
– – – on off off off – – – 8
– – – on off off on – – – 9
– – – on off on off – – – 10
– – – on off on on – – – 11
– – – on on off off – – – 12
– – – on on off on – – – 13
– – – on on on off – – – 14
– – – on on on on – – – 15
Choosing theconnection type
Connection type:MPI
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.3 Mounting and settings
22-387 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
For connection type PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS address is set usingswitches 1 to 7:
Table 22-3 PROFIBUS address
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value
PROFIBUS address
off off off off off off off – – – 0
on off off off off off off – – – 1
off on off off off off off – – – 2
on on off off off off off – – – 3
: : : : : : : – – – : (etc.)
on off on on on on on – – – 125
off on on on on on on – – – 126
The code for the standard hardware is set with switch 8:
Table 22-4 Hardware code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value
– – – – – – – off – – Standard hardware
The default setting for DIP switch S3 is:
Data transfer rate: 1.5 Mbaud
Transmission cycle time: 100 ms; reception monitoring 1200 ms
Bus address: 6
Connection type: MPI
Table 22-5 Standard setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value
on off on off on on off off off off Standard hardware
Note
Switches 9 and 10 on DIP switch S3 (see Figure 21-3) are used to set theconnection type, i.e. the transfer protocol and the interface used:
– MPIIf MPI is selected, the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7.
– PROFIBUS DPIf PROFIBUS DP is chosen, the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1to 7.
The same code should be used for the standard hardware (switch 8 = off).
Connection type:PROFIBUS DP
Hardware code
Default setting
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.4 Technical data
22-388 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
22.4 Technical data
Table 22-6 Technical data for machine control panel MCP 310
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front: IP65
Keyswitch: IP54
Rear: IP00
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption, max.Board7 W
Lamps6 x 1.2 W
Handwheels2 x 0.9 W
Total16 W
Mechanical data
DimensionsWidth: 310 mmHeight: 175 mm
Depth: 64.5 mmMounting depth: 33 mm
Weight approx. 1.2 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing
10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2
3M6 according to EN 60068-2-6
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60068-2-27
Shock stressing
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45°C (to front)0 ... 55°C (to rear)
–20 ... 60°C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.5 Spare parts and accessories
22-389 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
22.5 Spare parts and accessories
Table 22-7 Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 310
Name DescriptionNum-ber
Order number
Keyswitch Keyswitch with key 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0
Sets ofkeys
Set of keys (10 sets) for machine controlpanel
1 set 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0
Rotaryspindleoverrideswitch
SINUMERIK 810D/840D, overridespindle / rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, knob, pointer, dials forspindle and rapid traverse
1 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA0
Rotaryfeed over-rideswitch
SINUMERIK 810D/840D, override feed /rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x 23G,T=32, cap, knob, pointer, dials for feedand rapid traverse
1 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0
Set of ten-sion jacks
Set of tension jacks (x 9) for supplemen-tary componentswith 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm
1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0
Instructions on how to replace the rotary switch can be found in section “15 inchTFT operator panel, width 416 mm, without videolink receiver”.
Table 22-8 Accessories and options for machine control panel MCP 310
Name DescriptionNum-ber
Order number
Actuating element 16 mm Emer-gency Stop mushroom-head push-button (red)
1 3SB2000-1AC01
EMERGENCYSTOPbutton
Switching element with one con-tact, 1NO contact
1 3SB2404-0B
buttonSwitching element with one con-tact, 1 NC contact
1 3SB2404-0C
Holder for 2 switching elements 1 3SB2908-0AA
Slide-inlabels
SINUMERIK 810D/840D slide-inlabels (3 A4 films)
1 set 6FC5248-0AF23-1AA0
Cable set foradditionalcontrol devices
SINUMERIK 810D/840D Cable setfor additional control devices
1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0
Cable for hand-wheel connec-tion *)
SINUMERIK 810D/840D, Cablefor handwheel connectionMax. cable length: 5 m
1 6FX8002-4AA21-1xx0
Direct controlkey/handwheelconnection
Direct control key/handwheel con-nection option for6FC5203-0AF22-1AA1/-0AF23-1AA0
1 6FC5252-0AF00-0AA0
*) See illustration in “MCP 483”, “Spare parts and accessories”
Spare parts
Replacing spareparts
Accessories
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.5 Spare parts and accessories
22-390 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
22.5.1 Membrane keyboard: labeling the slide-in labels
Fig. 22-5 Machine control panel MCP 310
The machine control panel (MCP) shown above is the standard shipped variant.
You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. A printableblank film (A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose.
A spare parts kit containing 3 blank films is also available:Order No.: 6FC5248-0AF23-1AA0 (Item No. A5E00179115)
Fig. 22-6 Blank film for MCP 310
Instructions are given below on how to print the required key symbols on thefilm supplied or how to create your own individual film:
The software on the DOCONCD includes three files for the blank films:
Template_M_MCP310.doc (defaults for milling – standard shipped file, seeFig. 22-7)
Template_MCP310.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205580;see Fig. 22-8)
Preparing slide-inlabels
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.5 Spare parts and accessories
22-391 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file; strip lettering as jpg file (see Table 22-9)
Files Template_M_MCP310.docand Template_MCP310.docinclude a tablefunction showing the corresponding keyboard positions.
One example each for the MCP (milling) and the template is given below:
Fig. 22-7 Template_M_MCP310.doc for the “Milling” version
Fig. 22-8 Template_MCP310.doc(according to labeling plan/template: Item No. A5E00205580)
Within the table cells the key symbol required in each case can be copied andpasted into the corresponding table field.
The vertical bars shown in the diagram do not appear on the printed-out labels.
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.5 Spare parts and accessories
22-392 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Printing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, Corel-Draw):
– Draw a 15 x 15 mm square, with fill color white and an invisible borderline.
– Place the symbol in the center of this square.
– Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into a Word doc-ument (Symbols.doc).
Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher,Paint)
– Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) with fill color white.
– Draw the symbol in the center of this square.
– Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Worddocument (Symbols.doc).
The following is a dimension drawing for the blank template for MCP 310:
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Height 1.48 cm
Narrow strip: width 23 cm, height 0.08 cm
1. Width: 1.9 cm2. Width: 0.4 cm3. Width: 3.05 cm
Fig. 22-9 Dimension drawing for slide-in labels for MCP 310
Note
The slide-in strips are printed on the front with a laser printer. HP Color LaserJet film C2936A is used.
To make the labels easier to slide in, they should be rounded by about 1.5 mm.
The outer lines of the strip are the cutting edge.
It is advisable to run a test print on normal paper before printing the labels onfilm.
Creating your ownsymbols
Dimensiondrawings
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.5 Spare parts and accessories
22-393 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The file Symbols.doccontains the following key symbols:
Table 22-9 File Symbols.doc
7001 7013 7025 7124
7002 7014 7026 +C 7125
7003 7015 7027 +X 7126
7004 7016 Z 7028 –Y 7127
7005 7017 7029 +Z 7128
100% 7006 7018 7030 –X 7129
7007 7019 7031 +Y 7130
7008 7020 – 7032 –Z 7131
7009 7021 + 7033 –C 7132
7010 Y 7022 7120
X 7011 7023 7121
7012 7024 7123
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-394 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
This section describes:
Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration fora SIMATIC S7 project
Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 “HW config”
Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and userprogram (optional)
Note
The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the specialrequirements for configuring the DP slave MCP. For more details about workingwith SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation oronline help.
22.6.1 Prerequisites
The following components are needed to add a DP slave MCP to the hardwareconfiguration:
SIMATIC STEP 7
GSD file for DP slave MCP
Graphics files for DP slave MCP
SIMATIC STEP 7 is required in the following version or later:
SIMATIC STEP 7 as from Version 5.2, Service Pack 1
The GSD file for the DP slave MCP is required in the following version or later:
SI008109.GSD version 1.0 or later
A GSD file contains all the properties of a DP slave in ASCII format. For eachDP slave SIMATIC STEP 7 requires a module-specific GSD file so that the DPslave can be found in the hardware catalog.
The DP slave MCP is displayed in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the “HW config” hard-ware catalog in the following path:
Profile: StandardPROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control> SINUMERIK MCP
If the module is not displayed, the GSD file must be installed. To do this, in “HWconfig” use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. Before installing theGSD file, please read the following instructions concerning the graphics files.
SIMATIC STEP 7
GSD file
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-395 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The graphics files belonging to the GSD file:
SI8109_N.BMP
SI8109_S.BMP
are used to display the DP slave MCP in the “HW config” station window. Theyare automatically installed by STEP 7 when the GSD file is installed. They mustbe located in the same directory as the GSD file.
22.6.2 Functions of the machine control panel
The machine control panel offers the following functions:
Standard
Handwheel
Additional I/Os
The function transfers input/output data from the function keys and user-specifickeys and outputs:
Input data: 8 bytes
Output data: 8 bytes
The input/output data for machine control panel MCP 310 is compatible with theinput/output data from the previous machine control panel OP 032S.
The function transfers the absolute values for the two handwheels that can beconnected to the machine control panel:
Input data: 2 x 2 bytes
Absolute value handwheel 1
Low byte High byte
Absolute value handwheel 2
For each handwheel the current handwheel value is transferred as a 16-bit ab-solute value relative to the starting value. The starting value for the sensorcounter in the handwheel is 0.
The absolute values are transferred in big endian format.
The data for both handwheels is always transferred. The absolute value for ahandwheel that is not connected is always 0.
The function transfers the data for all non-standard inputs/outputs:
Direct control keys
Customer keys: 6 signals (bit 0 to bit 6)
Rotary switch
with the following distribution:
Graphics files
Standard
Handwheel
Additional I/Os
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-396 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Input data: 5 bytes
Low byte High byte
CustomerkeysDirect control keys
(OP 012)
1. Rotaryswitch
2. Rotaryswitch
Output data: 2 bytes
Low byte High byte
Reserved,always 0
CustomerLEDs
22.6.3 Configuring the DP slave MCP
This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to thehardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in Fig. 22-10 by way ofexample.
The hardware configuration comprises the following modules:
SIMATIC station 300 with SINUMERIK 810D/840D and PLC 317-2DP
SINUMERIK MCP with module: standard, handwheel, extended
Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps:
1. Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration.(see Fig. 22-10, page 22-10: 1)
2. Set the PROFIBUS address.
3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP according to the functionsrequired.(see Fig. 22-10, page 22-10: 2)
4. Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots.
HW config – [SINUMERIK840D (configuration) –– PROFIBUS MCP]
StandardProfile:
Station Edit Insert Target System View Tools Window Help
PROFIBUS(1): DP master system(1)
(9) SINUMEI/ONC/RC
MOTION CONTROLSINUMERIK MCP
Universal module
standard, handwheel
standard, handwheel, ex
standard
standard, extended
PROFIBUS(1): DP master system(1)
Slot DP identification Order number/designation I address O address Com...
1 55 standard, handwheel, extended 0...7 0...72 2IO ––> standard, handwheel, exten 258...2613 192 ––> standard, handwheel, exten 8...12 8...9
(0) 810D/840D
2
X1X23
PLC 317–2DP 2AJ10MPIDPIM360
4 S7 FM NCU
1
2
Fig. 22-10 Configuration with DP slave MCP
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-397 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP isto be added:
– You have created the S7 project
– You have set up a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS master-capableSINUMERIK controller
To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog usingthe menu command View > Catalog.
The DP slave MCP can be found at:
Profile: StandardPROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control> SINUMERIK MCP
Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in thehardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station windowby holding down the left mouse button.
The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the followingsymbol:
When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MCP is added to theconfiguration.
Note
As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it.When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes toa cursor with a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration.
Once you have added the DP slave MCP to the configuration, the “Properties –PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP” dialog box is displayed.
The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified:
– PROFIBUS address
– Data transfer rate
– Profile
Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCPTab card: Parameters
Address: <PROFIBUS address>Button: “Properties...”
Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUSTab card: Network settings
Data transfer rate: 12 MbaudProfile: DP
OK
OK
Preconditions: S7project
Adding a DP slaveMCP
PROFIBUSparameters
Dialog box
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-398 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Note
The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must matchthe PROFIBUS address set on the module (DIP switch S3) (seeSubsection 22.3.2, Page 22-386).
There is no automatic adjustment!
The following data must match:
1. SIMATIC S7 configuration DP slave MCPPROFIBUS address
2. Machine control panel MCP 310PROFIBUS address (DIP switch S3)
The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be trans-ferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. Themodules are listed in the hardware catalog under the DP slave MCP. The follow-ing modules are available:
Universal module (not applicable)
Standard
Standard, handwheel
Standard, extended
Standard, handwheel, extended
Module: standard
The module transfers the data for the “Standard” function:
Input data: 8 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Output data: 8 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Module: standard, handwheel
The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Handwheel” functions:
Input data: 12 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Absolute valueHandwheel 1
(2 bytes)Low byte High byte
Absolute valueHandwheel 2
(2 bytes)
Output data: 8 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Adding a module
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-399 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Module: standard, extended
The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Additional I/Os” functions:
Input data: 13 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Direct controlkeys (OP
012) (2 bytes)Low byte High byte
Customer keys(1 byte)
1. Rotaryswitch(1 byte)
2. Rotaryswitch(1 byte)
Output data: 10 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Reserved(1 byte)
CustomerLEDs
(1 byte)
Low byte High byte
Module: standard, handwheel, extended
The module transfers the data for the “Standard”, “Handwheel” and “AdditionalI/Os” functions:
Input data: 17 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Low byte
Direct controlkeys (OP
012) (2 bytes)
High byte
Customer keys(1 byte)
1. Rotaryswitch(1 byte)
2. Rotaryswitch(1 byte)
Absolute valueHandwheel 1
(2 bytes)
Absolute valueHandwheel 2
(2 bytes)
Output data: 10 bytes
Standard data(8 bytes)
Reserved(1 byte)
CustomerLEDs
(1 byte)
Low byte High byte
If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP, the input/output addressesare automatically assigned by STEP 7.
Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the “Properties – DPslave” dialog box. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be sethere.
22.6.4 Linking to the basic PLC and user program
This subsection describes how to link the DP slave MCP
to the basic PLC program for transferring standard I/O data to the VDI inter-face
to the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response toa module failure
Setting the I/Oaddresses
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-400 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Note
“Handwheel” functionThe “Handwheel” function is not currently supported by the basic PLC program.
“Additional I/Os” functionProcessing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machinemanufacturer) and is not supported by the basic PLC program.
In order to transfer the standard I/O data for the DP slave MCP using the basicPLC program, the corresponding I/O address range must be added to the com-munication parameters for function block FB1.
Function block FB1
The communication parameters of the MCP are designated as MCPx... (wherex = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. A maximum of 2 machine control panels aresupported by the basic PLC program.
To synchronize several MCPs, the PLC program must be adapted accordingly.This is the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility.
To operate a machine control panel MCP 310 as a DP slave, only the followingparameters are relevant:
MCPNum: INT // See below: Note
MCP1In: POINTER // Address of input signals MCP1Out: POINTER // Address of output signals
The MCP2... parameters are only needed if a 2nd MCP is used in addition tothe 1st MCP:
MCP2In: POINTER // Address of input signals MCP2Out: POINTER // Address of output signals
The parameters listed below serve to synchronize two MCPs:
MCP1Stop: BOOL // Transfer of the relevant operating component:MCP2Stop: BOOL // FALSE = start; TRUE = stop
MCP1NotSend: BOOL // Send and receive operation of the relevant MCP2NotSend: BOOL // operating component:
// FALSE = send and receive is active// TRUE = only receive is active
Note
Parameter: MCPNumUp to and including version 7.1 of the basic PLC program, parameter MCPNumshould always be set to 0.
Parameter: MCPxStop and MCPxNotSendThese parameters are irrelevant for connection via PROFIBUS DP.
Basic PLCprogram
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-401 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
ReferencesFor a detailed description of the basic PLC program or of function block FB 1,please refer to:
/FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC ProgramChapter: FB 1: RUN_UP Basic program, startup section
The following function blocks can be used to assign the VDI interface:
FC 24: Machine control panel MCP 310, version M (milling)
Note
Function blocks FC 19, FC 24 and FC 25 are part of the basic PLC program. Itis the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility to call the block correctlyand/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters.
ReferencesA detailed description of the function blocks for transferring machine controlpanel signals to the VDI interface can be found in:
/FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC ProgramChapter: FC 19: MCP_IFM ...Chapter: FC 24: MCP_IFM2 ...Chapter: FC 25: MCP_IFT ...
The following example shows the communication parameter settings for func-tion block FB 1 for a machine control panel:
MCPNum := 0 // Number of active MCPs
MCP1In := P#E 0.0 // Address of input data (8 bytes)MCP1Out := P#A 0.0 // Address of output data (8 bytes)
MCP1StatSend := P#A 0.0 // Preset; no significanceMCP1StatRec := P#A 0.0 // Preset; no significance
MCP1BusAdr := 0 // Preset; no significance
MCP1Timeout := S5T#700MS // Preset; no significanceMCP1Cycl := S5T#200MS // Preset; no significance
MCPMPI := FALSE // MCP/HT 6 operated on “extended” MPI bus
MCP1Stop := FALSE // Preset; no significanceMCP1NotSend := FALSE // Preset; no significance
MCPSDB210 := FALSE // Preset; no significance
If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does notcheck for module failure.
In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the ac-tive DP slave:
PLC operating system
PROFIBUS controller
If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP.
VDI interfaceparameterassignment
Example
PLC user program
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-402 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program tocustomize the response to a DP slave MCP failure:
OB 82: Diagnostic interrupt
OB 86: Rack failure
Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking orga-nization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data.
Note
In the event of the failure of a machine control panel connected via OPI/MPI,the following alarm is tripped by the basic PLC program:
Alarm “40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure”; with x = 0, 1
If the machine control panel is being operated as a DP slave, the user(machine manufacturer) is responsible for triggering a corresponding alarm.
22.6.5 Input/output image
A key and the LED positioned above it form a logical unit. The key and the LEDhave the same number.
Key: Sxy = Key number xy
LED: LEDxy = LED number xy
Figure 22-11 shows the arrangement of keys and LEDs on the machine controlpanel together with their internal designation. For the sake of clarity, the LEDdesignations are not shown in full.
S19 S20 S07 S33 S34 S48 S49 S50
S16 S17 S18 S06 S30 S31 S45 S46 S47
S13 S14 S15
S10 S11 S12
S09 S01 S02
S05 S27 S28
S04 S24 S25
S03 S21 S22
S42 S43 S44
S39 S40 S41
S36 S37 S38 Key
LEDLED01 LED02LED09 LED21 LED22LED03 LED37 LED38LED36
S35
S32
S29
S26
S23
LED23
Fig. 22-11 Designation of keys and LEDs
Customizedresponse
Arrangement: keys and LEDs
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-403 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Arrangement of key signals in the input image of the DP slave MCP:
Table 22-10 Input image
Signals from machine control panel (keys)
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
EB n+0 Spindle override Mode
*NC StopS19
SP–S36
SP 100%S37
SP +S38
SingleblockS16
JOGS09
MDAS10
AUTOS13
EB n+1 Spindle KeyswitchPosition 3
Machine function
NC StartS20
SP rightS39
*SP StopS40
SP leftS41
Position 3REFS02
REPS01
TEACHS11
EB n+2 Feed Mach. fu. KeyswitchPosition 0
Machine function
Feed StartS35
*Feed StopS34
INC VARS03
Position 0INC1000
S07INC100
S06INC10S05
INC1S04
EB n+3 RESETS17
KeyswitchPosition 2
KeyswitchPosition 1
Feed overrideS17 Position 2 Position 1
E D C B A
EB n+4 Direction keys Optional customer keys
+S50
–S48
Rapid tra-verseS49
KT4X52.2
KT3X52.1
KT2X51.3
KT1X51.2
KT0X51.1
EB n+5 Free K. Opt. K. Axis selection
T16S18
KT5X52.3
6S47
5S46
4S45
ZS44
YS43
XS42
EB n+6 Freely assignable customer keys WCS/MCSS33
Freely assignable customer keys
T9S29
T10S30
T11S31
T12S32
S33T13S12
T14S14
T15S15
EB n+7 Freely assignable customer keys
T1S21
T2S22
T3S23
T4S24
T5S25
T6S26
T7S27
T8S28
Signals marked with * are inverse signals.
Input image
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
04.0422.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP
22-404 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Arrangement of LED signals in the output image of the DP slave MCP:
Table 22-11 Output image
Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
AB n+0 Spindle override Mode
*NC StopLED19
SP–LED36
SP 100%LED37
SP +LED38
Singleblock
LED16
JOGLED09
MDALED10
AUTOLED13
AB n+1 Spindle notused
Machine functions
NC StartLED20
SP rightLED39
*SP StopLED40
SP leftLED41
usedREF
LED02REP
LED01TEACHLED11
AB n+2 Feed Mach. fu. notused
Machine functions
StartLED35
*StopLED34
var: INCLED03
used1000 INC
LED07100 INCLED06
10 INCLED05
1 INCLED04
AB n+3 notused
notused
notused
notused
notused
notused
notused
notused
AB n+4 Direction keys Optional customer keys
+LED50
–LED48
Rapid tra-verse
LED49
KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
AB n+5 Free K. Opt.K. Axis selection
T16LED18
KT5 6LED47
5LED46
4LED45
ZLED44
YLED43
XLED42
AB n+6 Freely assignable customer keys WCS/MCSLED33
Freely assignable customer keys
T9LED29
T10LED30
T11LED31
T12LED32
LED33T13
LED12T14
LED14T15
LED15
AB n+7 Freely assignable customer keys
T1LED21
T2LED22
T3LED23
T4LED24
T5LED25
T6LED26
T7LED27
T8LED28
Output image
22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310
23-405 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Machine Control Panel OP 032S
The following description applies to the component:
Machine control panel OP 032S Order No. 6FC5203-0AD10-1AA0
Key caps (49 pcs., 48 with LED, can all be assembled variably)
Feedrate override switch
Options for installing optional user keys,EMERGENCY STOP or a second override switch
10 free 24 V inputs6 free 24 V/250 mA outputs
Validity
Features
23
04.0423.1 Control elements
23-406 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
23.1 Control elements
Key 10LED 10
Key 1LED 1
Key 11LED 11
Key 41LED 41
FeedOverrideswitch
Recess fordial (EMER-GENCYSTOP,overrideswitch)
Key 50LED 50
OperatorSupplementary controlelements(EMERGENCY STOPor overrideswitch)
Supplementary control elements(6 buttons, 1 keyswitch)
Fig. 23-1 Front view of machine control panel, overview and location of control elements
When supplied, the following control elements are provided on the machinecontrol panel:
Key caps (49 pcs., 48 with LED, can all be assembled variably)
Feed override switch
The openings for the supplementary control elements are embossed on the rearside of the machine control panel. The diameter for the horizontal cutouts is 16.2 to 16.4 mm.The diameter for the EMERGENCY STOP button is 22.2 to 22.4 mm.
Recommendation: Drill the openings from the rear as follows:
Clamp the machine control panel for machining on the rear (use suitabledrilling support)
Switch the chip extractor on or cover the electrical parts to prevent chipsfrom falling on them
Note
Before drilling the opening, metal chips must be removed from the drills.
Use the appropriate drill to drill the desired openings (openings are cen-tered)
Control elementswhen supplied
Making theopenings with adrilling tool
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
04.0423.2 Interfaces
23-407 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The cutouts should be knocked out only if the control elements used cover thebroken edges on the front panel (no sharp broken edges).
23.2 Interfaces
Table 23-1 Example showing connection of additional override switch
Pin Meaning Switch/wiring
X31 pin 4 Ground = CCN C
X31 pin 3 Significance 22 = 4 4N.C.
N.C.
X32 pin 2 Significance 24 = 1616
8
N.C.
N.C.
X32 pin 1 Significance 23 = 88
2N.C.
N CX31 pin 2 Significance 21 = 2
2
1N.C.
X31 pin 1 Significance 20 = 1 Underside ofoverride switch
56.5
0
10.4
9
34.5
2
26.0556.486.75
16.3
117.1147.45177.8208.15
228.92233
259.98
0
130.7125.6
57
40
0
22.4
X20
X10
1) Location intended for EMERGENCY STOP or second override switch (22 mm)
2) Location for seven control devices (16 mm)
1)
2)
Prepared for 22mm emergency stop mounting geometry Recommended design: Recommended design: SIEMENS 3SB3000-1HA20
Contact 3SB3400-0A 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact
Plugconnector1 x 6–pin 3)
DIL switch
3)
1234
8 1
24/0V
4)
Module variants:3) 571241.9001.014) 571241.9001.00
LED:
Fig. 23-2 Rear view of machine control panel with dimensional data
Making the cutoutsby knocking out
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
04.0423.2 Interfaces
23-408 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
X10
Operator panel frontinterface (MPI)
DIL switch(8-way),jumpering
Power supplyinterface
Display: LED 1, 2: Not usedLED 3 (green): POWER (24 V supply)LED 4 (orange): SEND status (flashes in normal
operation)
ON
Protective earth
S3
Inputs
Outputs DIL switch8 1
Plugconnector1 x 6-pin
For module variants see Fig. 23-2
Pin
41
41
Pin
41
41
1234LED:X
20
Fig. 23-3 Rear view of the machine control panel with overview and location of interfaces
Connector designation: X10Connector type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal blockRecommended type: Phoenix CombiCon
Order no. MVSTBR 2.5/3-ST-5.08
Table 23-2 X10 pin assignments
Pin Name Meaning Type
1 P24 24V potentialV
2 M24 Ground 24VV
(Supplyvoltage)
3 SHIELD Shield connectionvoltage)
Note
The power supply interface should be wired in accordance with the labeling onthe module.
Power supplyinterface (X10)
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
04.0423.2 Interfaces
23-409 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X20Connector type: 9-pin sub-D socket connector, straightMax. cable length: 200 mSpecial features: 1.5 MBaud/187.5 kBaud data transmission rate
Table 23-3 X20 pin assignments
Pin Signal, name Signal type
1 Not assigned –
2 Not assigned –
3 RS_BTSS, RS485 data I/O, bidirectional
4 ORTSAS_BTSS, Out Request To Send AS O, output
5 M5EXT, 5V ground, external V, supply voltage
6 P5EXT, 5V potential, external V, supply voltage
7 Not assigned –
8 XRS_BTSS, RS485 data I/O, bidirectional
9 IRTSPG_BTSS, In Request To Send PG I/O, bidirectional
Note
The inputs/outputs implemented via X31 to X36 can be used as desired. Thefunction of the inputs/outputs is defined in the PLC user program. The following inputs/outputs via X31 to X36 and their use are examples.
OPI interface (X20)
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
04.0423.2 Interfaces
23-410 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The following settings are possible with this DIP switch (8-way):
Table 23-4 S3 jumpering on machine control panel
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning / value
onoff
Baud rate 1.5 Mbaud187.5 kbaud
offonoff
onoffoff
Transmission cycletime200 ms100 ms50 ms
Reception monitoring
2400 ms1200 ms600 ms
onoff
on
on
Bus address1514
onoff
off
on
on
1312
onoff
on
off
on1110
onoff
offoff
9 8
onoff
on
on
7 6
onoff
offon
off
5 4
onoff
on
off
off 3 2
onoff
offoff
1 0
onoff
Interface to MPI customer operator panelstandard hardware
The PLC expects a message frame from the MCP at least every 500 msecs.The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic inter-vals when no key is pressed. This cycle time is set with S3 DIP switches 2 and3. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machine control panel tobe adjusted.
The MCP receives message frames from the PLC at cyclic intervals and re-sponds to them at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linked to thetransmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with S3 DIPswitches 2 and 3.
The bus address must be set to the value 6. Any other setting will be ignored bythe software.
The following default settings are suggested:
Table 23-5 Default settings S3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning
off off on on off on off on
Baud rate: 1.5 MbaudTransmission cycle time: 100 msBus address: 6
Standard hardware
Assignments (S3)
Settings for thetransmission cycletime
Settings for thereceive cycle time
Bus address
Standard setting
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
04.0423.2 Interfaces
23-411 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
These LEDs display the following:
LED 1, LED 2: Not usedLED 3: POWER, 24 V supplyLED 4: SEND, status change on protocol transmission
Connector designation: X31, X32Connector type: 4-pin plug connector
Connector: Berg type Dubox
Table 23-6 X31 and X32 assignments
Pin Signal, name Signal type
X31 X32
1 KT-IN 0, user key 1 KT-IN 3, user key 4
2 KT-IN 1, user key 2 KT-IN 4, user key 5I inputs
3 KT-IN 2, user key 3 KT-IN 5, user key 6I, inputs
4 M5, ground M5, ground
Note:The inputs switch to ground (active low).
User key 1 (X31), 4 (X32)
User key 3 (X31), 6 (X32)
User key 2 (X31), 5 (X32)
Ground
View from connector side ofDubox connector (socket)
Machine control panel OP 032S (rear panel) 1) Color of line, red – pin 1 in cable set
rd1)
Plug connector1 2 3 41 2 3 4
Pin
X31 X32
Display(LED 1 ... 4)
Interfaces foroptional user keys(X31, X32, inputs)
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
04.0423.2 Interfaces
23-412 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X33, X34Connector type: 4-pin plug connector
Connector: Berg type Dubox
Table 23-7 X33 and X34 assignments
Pin Signal, name Signal type
X33 X34
1 SS 0, Keyswitch input 0
SS 2, Keyswitch input 2
2 SS 1, Keyswitch input 1
SS 3, Keyswitch input 3
I, inputs
3 / 4 M5, ground M5, ground
Note:The inputs switch to ground (active low).Other control elements can also be connected to these inputs.
Pin 1
Ground
Pin 1
X33 X34
Keyswitch
Position4
Position1
Connector designation: X35, X36Connector type: 4-pin plug connector
Connector: Berg type Dubox
Table 23-8 X35 and X36 assignments
Pin Signal, name Signal type
X35 X36
1 KT-OUT 0, user lamp 1 KT-OUT 3, user lamp 4
2 KT-OUT 1, user lamp 2 KT-OUT 4, user lamp 5O outputs
3 KT-OUT 2, user lamp 3 KT-OUT 5, user lamp 6O, outputs
4 M24, 24V ground M24, 24V ground
Note:The outputs are designed for 24V/250mA.
Pin 1
User lamp 1 (X35), 4 (X36)
User lamp 3 (X35), 6 (X36)
User lamp 2 (X35), 5 (X36)
Ground 24 V
Interfaces foroptionalkeyswitches (X33,X34, inputs)
Interfaces foroptional userlamps (X35, X36,outputs)
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
04.0423.3 Dimension drawing and panel cutout
23-413 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
23.3 Dimension drawing and panel cutout
5175 169162.5
49.4
12.56
0 13.8 154.7 260295.6
309.4
30.5
11.5
1)
1) Protective-conductor terminal M5, min. 6mm2
0
48.9
19.5
2 24
42.4
125.6
Fig. 23-4 Dimension drawing of machine control panel
M4
7
0.5
136.5 273277.4
279.704.4
6.710
05
38
145.5153158
1) DIN ISO 1101 Permissible mounting position of the operator panel plane max. 60 degrees to the perpendicular
1)
Front panel cutout for installation from the rear: W x H = 301.4 x 153 mmInstallation from the rear is necessary for user keys, etc.
Fig. 23-5 Panel cutout of machine control panel
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
04.0423.4 Technical data
23-414 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
23.4 Technical data
Table 23-9 Technical data for machine control panel OP 032S
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front panel IP54 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption, max. 10.8 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 310 mmHeight: 175 mm
Depth: 56 mmMounting depth: 12 mm
Weight approx. 1.3 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–25 ... 55 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
04.0423.5 Spare parts and accessories
23-415 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
23.5 Spare parts and accessories
The following control elements can be added:
EMERGENCY STOP
– Operator control element: 3SB3000-1HA20
– Switching element (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact) 3SB3400-0A
Cable set for additional control devices for interfaces X31-X36 A maximum of 6 cables are needed per MCP.60 x 500 mm cablesOrder No. 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0
6 keys with lamps + 1 keyswitchThe keys and keyswitch are connected via X31-X34 (input signals).The lamps are connected to X35 and X36 (output signals).Recommended type for keys and keyswitch:
Rafix 16, Lumotast 25, Schlegel QUARTRON Sources: Schlegel (http://schlegel-ekontakt.de), RAFI (http://www.rafi.de)
Key cover (with label) 6FC5148-0AA13-0AA090 ergo-gray20 red20 yellow20 green20 medium gray
Key cover (clear; with sticker) 6FC5148-0AA14-0AA0
Mounting screws (100) 6FC3988-7BJ10
Additional override switch 6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1Override switch with wing cap, spacer, cover, 2 dials.– CBS 1/1x1GG (16/15°) switch
– Spindle override 50–120% dial
– Rapid traverse override 0–100% dial.
The second override switch must be connected via X31-X32.
Supplementarycontrol elements
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
04.0423.5 Spare parts and accessories
23-416 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S
Notes
24-417 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Pushbutton Panel PP 012
24.1 System description
24.1.1 Introduction
PushbuttonpanelPP 012/H
PCBinput/output
PCBDirectKeys
Operator panel Control systems 810D,840D, S7-AS300 or MCU
NC CPU
COM PLC
Individual wiringinterface
PP 012 expansion
OPI/MPI
ConnectionFor 840D
Connection forCPU 3XY or MCU
COM MPI
Key-boardcontroller
Programming deviceHHU
PCB-PP 031R basic module
PCB distributor
HT6
Fig. 24-1 Pushbutton panel PP 012 in example configuration
Machine control panel for machine tools in conjunction with the control systems810D, 840D, S7-300 and FM-NC.
Applications
24
04.0424.1 System description
24-418 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The PP 012 consists of
the basic module
the distributor
the direct keys
the frontplate.
The basic module can be equipped with a handheld unit connection and/oradditional inputs/outputs as options.
The p.c. board is connected to the control system via the MPI interface.
10 control devices can be installed, depending on the current requirements
4-stage mode selector switch
A programming device can be connected to the front panel, COM connec-tion
Selector switch for speed/rapid traverse and feedrate override
Handheld unit connection with jumpering pushbutton
16 inputs for direct keys
PCB_IO as an option, scanning up to 14 individual keys or 120 keys in amatrix, control of a maximum of 16 lamps
24.1.2 Interfaces and monitoring
The PP 012 is connected to the appropriate control system via the MPI/OPIinterface. DIP switches allow you to select a parameter set from three possiblevariants (see Tables 24-46 to 24-48).
Data and control signals correspond to the OPI. Handheld programming de-vices require an external 24 V power supply for operation.
The interface is not supplied with an external 5V potential (P5.EXT).
Carries the signals from the COM interface of the operator panel to the PP 012.
60 inputs and 26 outputs are assigned functions by the PP 012. The transmis-sion is word by word.
24V input voltage
Structure
Communication
Flexibility
MPI/OPI interface
PG interface
COM interface
Inputs/outputs inthe control system
Lower supply
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.1 System description
24-419 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
PP 012 has monitoring LEDs for service and start-up:
Voltage monitoring (POWER ON > 4.7 V)
Temperature monitoring (enabled > 60 °C; disabled < 55 3 °C)
OPI LED flashes during data transfer
Bus request Repeater Segment 1
Bus request Repeater Segment 2
24.1.3 Operator panel front interface
The printed circuit board distributor has three isolated inputs.
When actuated, the EMERGENCY STOP chain will ensure your own personalsafety, as well as protect the product in hazardous situations. The EMER-GENCY STOP chain is also active when the handheld units are removed. TheEmergency Stop button can be jumpered on the handheld unit by pressing S11when the handheld unit is plugged/removed.
This is necessary to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP chain from being inter-rupted.
Note
To effectively deal with any malfunction by the jumpering key S11 (e.g.jamming), the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when amonitoring time (approximately 5 min.) expires (see Figs. 24-7 and 24-17).
The actuating elements S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15 are connected to thecontrol system via the MPI/OPI. In addition, they have isolated contacts (com-mon root) for custom-made wiring.
The lamps HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15 are connected to thecontrol system via MPI/OPI. Alternatively, they can also be controlled from ex-ternal non-isolated contacts.
Are also connected to the control system via MPI/OPI and have isolated con-tacts for custom-made wiring.
Monitoring
Inputs forcustom-madewiring
EMERGENCYSTOP chain
Actuatingelements
Lamps
Emergency stopand operatingmode selectorswitch
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.2 Function blocks
24-420 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.2 Function blocks
Interface/CPU/monitoring
Distributor with repeater
Handheld unit connection XS12
I/O connection X20, X21
Direct control key connection X19
Interconnecting cable COM X26
4-stage mode selector switch WS1
Feed override WS2
Speed/rapid traverse override WS3
Max. 12 control devices, one of them an Emergency Stop button S13 and ajumper button S11
Max. 10 pilot lamps that can be controlled either from PLC or externally
Inputs for configuring global data (GD) (DIP switches)
Isolated operator panel front interface X15 with additional programming de-vice interface X16
DIP switches for generating S16, S17, S18 (baud rate, node address)
Power supply
16 isolated outputs for controlling lamps, four of them optional (key matrixoption)
14 isolated inputs for scanning individual keys/switches
Key matrix option – up to 120 keys can be scanned
Short-circuit-proof 24V output for external keys
Matrix keys momentary-contact
16 isolated inputs for scanning the direct keys from the operator panel.
Function blocksPP 012
Function blocksPCB input/output
Function blocksPCB direct keys
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.3 Block diagrams
24-421 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.3 Block diagrams
Em
erg
ency
sto
p
X8
Mod
e gr
oups
X12
GN
D
5 6 7 8 301
23
HS
1
1M24
1In
terf
ace
MP
IP
ower
on60
10
29
X13
WS
1
X13
Filt
er
F1
2P24
1P24
1M24
S13
X2
2P24
GN
D
GN
D
Sw
itche
sG
D p
roje
ct4
1832 S16.1
Block S1/HS1
Block S2
Block S4
Block S7
Block S3
Block S10
Block S8
Block S9
Blocks S2/HS2
Blocks S3/HS3
Blocks S8/HS8
Blocks S4/HS4
Blocks S7/HS7
Blocks S9/HS9
Blocks S10/HS10
23
47
89
10
1011
1226
2728
X11
X3
X14
Test
conn
ecto
r
31 2
101115139
1
54
32
19
5101
6
2
7
38
4
1112
1211
101
23
4F
eed
Ove
rrid
e
WS
2
X17
X25
GN
D
16
X19
21
S18.4
17
S18.3
S18
.2
GN
D
= 1
PG OPI
X15
X16
Jum
per
P24
S11
M24
X4
7
69
105
41
12
8
112
3
Br1
34
Handwheel
XS
12
121 56 910 14
HHU/HT 6
8 15 7 1713 2 4 33P
24
3M24
Emergency Stop circuit1
Emergency Stop circuit2
X22
X23
X23
Cus
tom
er–S
peci
ficW
iring
X24
12
GND
S1
X11
X10
Block S1
9
43
2
6
11
Rep
eate
r1)
Torq
ue
zah
l/R
apid
tra
vers
eO
verr
ide
WS
31)
X18
.1 GN
D
2P24
M24
2P24
Block S14
Block S15
GN
D
1614
X6
123
(–)(+
)
X1
12
3
Blocks S14/HS14
Blocks S15/HS15
56
9X
14X
64
X26
CO
M
Con
n–ec
tion
to O
P
PC
B d
istr
ibu
tor
PC
B H
HU
78
X5
1 2 3 4
X18
.2
GN
DC 124 816
GN
DV
CC
GN
D
GN
D
VCC
Filt
er 3M24
3P24
GNDS
2
51 52 50 49 50 52 575859 60
124 816C
61
Dire
ct k
ey
16
3231
4443
2122
1413
123
456
78
PG
X27
WS
4A
utho
rizat
ion
key–
oper
ated
sw
itch
GN
DG
ND
VC
CG
ND
D0
... D
15S
B
X20
I/O (
optio
n)
X21
16
GND
16
With distributorII only
Fig. 24-2 Block diagram of PP 012
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.3 Block diagrams
24-422 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
X20X21
D(15:0)
Memory
WD
R1
OU
T_E
NB
lock (HS
20...HS
23)
Block (H
S24...H
S27)
Output power switch24V / 0.5A
Block (H
S28...H
S31)
Block (H
S16...H
S18)
X46 X47 X42X41
X45 X47X46 X41
Block E
12
Block E
24
Block E
14
Block E
21
Block E
22
Block E
23
Block E
30
Block E
61B
lock E62
Block E
63
Block E
52
Block E
53
Block E
54
Block E
55
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6 R7
R8
R9
R10
W1
W2
W4
W8
X42
W3
W5
W6
W7
X43
W9
W10
W11
W12
Block E
19
PB
(even)
M24
P24
X44
M24
X40
I<0.7A
F110A
F210A
M24
Lock with
Authorization
keyswitch
M24
E12
E61
E30
E24
E63
E62
E22
E21
E14
E52
E23
E55
E54
E53
E19
(PB
)
HS
16
HS
19H
S18
HS
17
HS
20
HS
23H
S22
HS
21
HS
24
HS
27H
S26
HS
25
HS
28
HS
31H
S30
HS
29
P24_5
OptionKey Matrix
GN
D
VC
CG
ND
123 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 41 23 4 1 2 3 4
Fig. 24-3 Block diagram of PCB expansion card 12E/12A
GNDVCC
X19
Block F1
Block F2
Block F3
Block F4
X3017 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 20
M (GND)ext.
Block F5
Block F6
Block F7
Block F8
Block F9
Block F10
Block F11
Block F12
Block F13
Block F14
Block F15
Block F16
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
Fig. 24-4 Block diagram of PCB direct keys PP 012
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.4 Operating elements
24-423 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.4 Operating elements
S8 S9 S10 S15
S1 S2 S3 S4
S7
S14
02610
2040 60
8090100110
70
120
0
60
80 90100
110
70
120Power
A B C I F G H ID
S11 XS12
LOGO
0
1 2
3
K
HS1 HS2 HS3 HS4 HS14
HS7 HS8 HS9 HS10 HS15
Fig. 24-5 Position of control elements
A: S13 EMERGENCY STOP button
B: WS1 Selector switch
C: S11 Jumper button
D: XS12 Connection for handheld units
E: X16 Programming device connection
F: X26 COM connection
G: Control devices for variable fitting
H: WS2 Feed override
I: WS3 Speed/rapid traverse override
K: Key-operated authorization switch (on request)
Press the red button in emergency situations:
1. if life is at risk,
2. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.
Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it.
Applies to drives:
An EMERGENCY STOP generally shuts down all drives with the greatest pos-sible braking torque in a controlled manner.
Machine Manufacturer
For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP:
See machine tool manufacturer’s instructions!
Displays power supply, lights green when controller operating voltage >4.7 V
Position of controlelements
Overview ofcontrol elements
EMERGENCYSTOP key
Power
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.4 Operating elements
24-424 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
2-way, 4 stages, 60° switching angle
Centrally mounted with front ring
Keyswitch variant CG4-1A251-600 * FS1 V750D/2J Can be changed by the customer to the knob-operated switch variant FS1
Key can be removed in all positions
Notice
When used as a mode selector switch, the keyswitch should be usedaccording to Guideline 89/392/EEC.
In slots S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15, control devices can be installedas per Table 24-52.
For function and contacts, see Block Diagram, Fig. 24-2.
Pushbutton S11 (designed as a jumper button) is provided with a sealingcap. This prevents the pushbutton from being locked easily.
To effectively deal with any malfunction by the jumpering key S11 (e.g. jam-ming), the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when amonitoring time (approximately 5min.) expires (see Figs. 24-7 and 24-17).
Selector switch
Variably fittedactuating elements
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 10.00
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-425 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.5 Interfaces
24.5.1 Overview
The letters refer to Fig. 24-6.A: S13: Emergency stop
B: WS1: Selector switch
C: X1 to X4, X6, X10, X11, X22 and X24:Input/output interface of individual wiring
D: X8: 24 V power supply
E: LED basic modules H 1...4:H 1: Not usedH 2: OvertemperatureH 3: Power OnH 4: SEND: Status change on protocol transmission
F: X15: Operator Panel InterfaceSocket: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, straight
G: X30: Direct control key connection
H: S16, S17, S18: DIP switches see Table 24-42
K: Connection for equipotential bonding connector via screw connection M5
L: LED distributor:H1: Bus segment 1H2: Bus segment 2
M: X40 ... X43: Connection PCB_IO keyboard matrix/lamps
N: X44: 24 V power supply;X45 ... X47: Connection PCB_IO single contacts/lamps
Notice
Using the key-operated authorization switch assigns inputs X47:1 ... 4.
It cannot be used in this case to scan keys on the extension panel at X47.
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 01210.00
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-426 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
H1H2H4
S18 S16 S17
X8
X1
X11
X10
X18.1 X18.2
X13X12
X17
X6
X3
X2
S11
S13H3
WS1
X15
X16XS12
X22
X24
X5
X23X4
X30Direct control keys
O
B
C
D
I
F
G
H
K
C
C
Basic module
L
I
PCB_IO
X26X40
X41
X42
X43
X47
X46
X45
X44
M N(GND)
Fig. 24-6 Device rear side
Position ofinterfaces
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-427 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
O Outputs
I Inputs
I/O Bi-directional signals
V Voltage
Button designation: S13
Button type: Mushroom turn-to-set button 3SB3000-1HA20 with holder3SB3000-1HA20 and 1 x NO contact 3SB3400-0B (inter-nal use) max. 4 x NC contacts
Table 24-1 Switching element: NC contact 3SB3400-0E
Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctionÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OE_S13.xÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/O
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NC contact S13.x EMER-GENCY STOP
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BZ_S13.x ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference potential S13.x ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Switch designation: WS1
Switch type: CG4-1 A251-600 ΣFS1 V750 D/2J (keyswitch)
Table 24-2 Selector switch interface
Pin Signal Type Signal name Key-switchpos.
Function
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
11ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ERÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁMode
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ15ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ESÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Mode ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
⇑ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BZ_WS ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ13 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EB ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁMode
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VK ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Mode ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
24.5.2 PP 012 individual wiring
Notice
When PLC signals are linked with signals of the individual wiring, note that thesignal change of the individual contacts may take place at different moments.Simultaneously opening and closing the contacts of a key within the actuatingtravel is not possible.
Signal type
Nottaster S13
Selector switchinterface WS1
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 01210.00
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-428 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector X1: – directionpilot lamp HS14
Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08
Table 24-3 Connector X1
Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctionÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BZ_S14ÁÁÁÁÁÁI/O
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference potential NO contactS14
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S_S14.1 ÁÁÁÁ
I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NO contact S14.1 – direction ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S_S14.2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NO contact S14.2 – direction ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HS 14 ÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp HS14 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Connector X2: Pilot lamps HS7 to HS10
Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08
Table 24-4 Connector X2
Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctionÁÁÁÁÁÁ1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁHS 7
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁPilot lamp HS7
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁHS 8
ÁÁÁÁIÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁPilot lamp HS8
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁAll inputsÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HS 9ÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp HS9ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
All inputs“High” active
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HS10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp HS10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Connector X3: Contacts S7 to S10
Connector type: 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-5.08
Table 24-5 Connector X3
Pin Signal Type Signal name Function
1 OE_S7 NC contact S7
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OE_S8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NC contact S8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OE_S9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NC contact S9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OE_S10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NC contact S10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BZOE_S7-10
I/O
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference potential NC contactsS7-10
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁS_S7
I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNO contact S7
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ6ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁS_S8
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNO contact S8
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ7ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁS_S9
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNO contact S9
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁS_S10
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNO contact S10
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BZS_S7-10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference potential NO contactsS7-10
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ11ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ2P24
ÁÁÁÁVÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ+24 V potential
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ12ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2P24 ÁÁÁÁ
VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+24 V potential ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Connector X1
Connector X2
Connector X3
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-429 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector X4: Euchner terminal
Connector type: 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-5.08
Table 24-6 Connector X4
Pin Signal Type Signal name ConnectionXS12 pin
Function
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
KEY 0 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input 1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
KEY 1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input 2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
KEY 2 ÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input 3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
11 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BZ_KEY ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference potential KEY0...2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1M24ÁÁÁÁ
VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Ground 24 VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMER-GENCY_STOP2.2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCYSTOP circuit 2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S11
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
7 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCYSTOP circuit 2.1 ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
STOP circuit 2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
AUFR_RICHTÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/O
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direction callÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1P24S11
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ZUST_TA ÁÁÁÁ
I/O
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6(via S11)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X24:2S11
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ZS1/ZS1.1 *) ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁEnabling button
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ11ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ZS2/ZS2.1 *) ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Enabling button ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
14 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ZSCom-mon/ZS2.2 *)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ*) Two-channel
Connector X6 Connector X6: Direction +; Pilot lamp HS15
Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08
Table 24-7 Connector X6
Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctionÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BZ_S15 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference potential NO contactS15
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S_S15.1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/O ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NO contact S15.1 + directionÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S_S15.2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNO contact S15.2 + directionÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HS 15 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp HS15 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Connector X4
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-430 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector X10 / X11: Contacts S1 to S6; pilot lamps HS1 to HS6
Connector type X10: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08
Connector type X11: 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-5.08
Table 24-8 Connectors X10/X11
Maleconnec-
tor
Pin Signal Type Signal nameFunction
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OE_S2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NC contact S2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OE_S1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NC contact S1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁX10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BZOE_S1-4ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference potential NC con-tact S1 ... S4
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BZS_S1-S6ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference potential NO con-tact S1 .. S6
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OE_S4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NC contact S4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OE_S3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NC contact S3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S_S4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NO contact S4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S_S3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NO contact S3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S_S2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NO contact S2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S_S1.1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NO contact S1.1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
X11 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
7 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BZS_S1.2ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference potential NO con-tact S1.2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S_S1.2ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NO contact S1.2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HS 4ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp HS4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HS 3ÁÁÁÁÁÁI
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp HS3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁAll inputsÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
11 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HS 2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp HS2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
All inputs“High” active
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HS 1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp HS1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Connector X22: Handwheel
Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08
Table 24-9 Connector X22
Pin Signal Type Signal nameÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁHR_A
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁHandwheel track AÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
XHR_AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁO
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Handwheel track A negatedÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HR_BÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
O ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Handwheel track BÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
XHR_BÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Handwheel track B negated
ConnectorsX10/X11
Connector X22
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-431 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector X24: EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1
Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08
Table 24-10 Connector X24
Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctionÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2P24ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+ 24 VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OE_S11/ZS2.2 *)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NC contact S11 X4:9S11
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMER-GENCY_STOP 1.1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁEMERGENCY STOP circuit 1
S11
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMER-GENCY_STOP 1.2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1
*) Two-channel
Connector X8: Power supply
Connector type: 3-pin print terminal block MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08
For pin assignment See “Connection Conditions” chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
Connector X15: Operator panel front interface (MPI)
Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, screw locking UNC4/40
Notice
Use MPI bus connector 6FX2003-0AA02!
Max. cable length: 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud
Table 24-11 Operator panel front interface (MPI) X15
Pin Signal Type Signal name
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NC ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Not assigned
ÁÁÁÁ2 ÁÁÁÁNC ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNot assignedÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁRS
ÁÁÁÁI/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁRS-485 dataÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ORTSASÁÁÁÁ
OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Output Request to Send, user interfaceÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
GND_EXTÁÁÁÁVÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 V external groundÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VCC_EXTÁÁÁÁ
VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 V external potentialÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
7ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NCÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Not assignedÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
XRS ÁÁÁÁI/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
RS-485 dataÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IRTSPG ÁÁÁÁ
I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
In Request to Send PG
Connector X24
Power supplyinterface X8
Operator panelfront interface(MPI) X15
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-432 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector X16 Programming device (PG) interface
Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, screw locking UNC4/40
Max. line length: 5 m
Table 24-12 Connector X16
Pin Signal Type Signal nameÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNC
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNot assignedÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3M24
ÁÁÁÁÁÁV
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁReference potential 24 VÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
RSÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
RS-485 dataÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ORTSASÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Output Request to Send, user interfaceÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
GND_EXTÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 V external groundÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6 / 7ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
N.C.ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Not assignedÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
XRS ÁÁÁÁÁÁI/O
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
RS-485 dataÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IRTSPG ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
In Request to Send PG
The power supply potential P24 is not provided by PP 012. An external 24 Vpower voltage supply enables handheld programming devices 702 and 705 to be connected. External terminals with a separate 5 V power supply can-not be operated (fiber-optic technology).
Connector X26: Serial interface RS-232-C (COM)
Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D, pin, straight, screw locking UNC4/40
Max. cable length: 25 m
For pin assignment: See “Connection Conditions” chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
Connector: Handheld device interface XS12
Connector type: Euchner flange connector RC-17S1NM2H3PWCoding Y (315°)
Max. line length: 50 m
Table 24-13 Handheld unit interface XS12
Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctiongEnabling function
yp g
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY_STOP2.1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Emergency Stop NCcontact 2.1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY STOP
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MPI_A ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/O ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
RS-485 data ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MPI
ÁÁÁ3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3M24 ÁÁÁV ÁÁÁÁÁÁGround 24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁPowerÁÁÁÁÁÁ4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3P24
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ+ 24 V
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Powersupply
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ZS1.1ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Enabling buttonÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁEnabling functionÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ6ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ZS2.2ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Call enable keyÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Enabling function
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
7ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HR_BÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Handwheel BÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁHandwheelÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HR_AÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Handwheel AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Handwheel
Programmingdevice interface(PD) X16
Serial interfaceRS-232-C (COM)X26
Handheld deviceinterface XS12
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-433 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 24-13 Handheld unit interface XS12FunctionSignal nameTypeSignal
Enabling functionPin
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY_STOP1.2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY STOPNC contact 1.2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY STOPÁÁÁÁÁÁ
10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY_STOP1.1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY STOPNC contact 1.1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY STOP
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
11ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
KEY2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Key scanning No.3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Jumper short-circuitconnector
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
12ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY_STOP2.2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY STOPNC contact 2.2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY STOP
13 MPI_B I/O RS-485 data MPI
14 ZS2.1 Enabling button Enabling function
15 HR_XA Handwheel A negated Handwheel
16 ZS1.2 N.C./enable keyNot assigned/enab-ling function
17 HR_XB Handwheel B negated Handwheel
Connector X30: Printed circuit board “Direct keys”
Connector type: Ribbon cable connector plug connector with protectiveshroud 20-pin, 2-row with lock
Table 24-14 Printed circuit board Direct keys
Pin Signal Type Signal nameÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
F1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
F2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
F3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 3
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
F4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 4
5 F5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 5
6 F6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 6
7 F7 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 7
8 F8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IDirect key 8
9 F9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IDirect key 9
10 F10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 10
11 F11 ÁÁÁDirect key 11
12 F12ÁÁÁÁÁÁDirect key 12
13 F13ÁÁÁÁÁÁDirect key 13
14 F14ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 14
15 F15ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 15
16 F16ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Direct key 16
17/18 P5_TACV
5 V keyboard controller
19/20 M_TACV
Ground of keyboard controller
The direct key module serves to connect the 16 direct keys of the operatorpanel.
Printed circuitboard direct keysX30
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-434 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.5.3 Individual wiring PCB input/output
Connector type: 4-pin, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/4-G-3.81
Table 24-15 Printed circuit board input/output X40
Pin Signal Type Signal name
ÁÁÁÁ1 ÁÁÁÁP24_5 ÁÁÁV ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ24 V potentialÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁM24
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁGround 24 VÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E55/W8ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 55/matrix row 8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
N.C.ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
–ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Not assigned
Connector type: 8-pin, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/8-G-3.81
Table 24-16 Printed circuit board input/output X41
Pin Signal Type Signal nameÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E52/W1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 52/matrix row 1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E53/W2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁI
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 53/matrix row 2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E54/W4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 54/matrix row 4
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E55/W8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 55/matrix row 8
5 HS24 Connection of lamp HS24
6 HS25O
Connection of lamp HS25
7 HS26O
Connection of lamp HS26
8 HS27 Connection of lamp HS27
Connector type: 8-pin, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/8-G-3.81
Table 24-17 Printed circuit board input/output X42
Pin Signal Type Signal name
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
W3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Matrix row 3
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
W5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Matrix row 5
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
W6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Matrix row 6
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
W7 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Matrix row 7
5 HS28 Connection of lamp HS28
6 HS29O
Connection of lamp HS29
7 HS30O
Connection of lamp HS30
8 HS31 Connection of lamp HS31
Connector X40
Connector X41
Connector X42
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-435 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector type: 4-pin, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/4-G-3.81
Table 24-18 Printed circuit board input/output X43
Pin Signal Type Signal name
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
W9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Matrix row 9
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
W10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Matrix row 10
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
W11 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Matrix row 11
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
W12 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Matrix row 12
Connector type: 3-pin print terminal block MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08
Table 24-19 Printed circuit board input/output X44
Pin Signal Type Signal nameÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShieldÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
GroundÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
M24 ÁÁÁÁÁÁV
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Ground 24 VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
P24 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
24 V potential
Connector type: 4-pin, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/4-G-3.81
Table 24-20 Printed circuit board input/output X45
Pin Signal Type Signal name
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
P24_5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
24 V potential
ÁÁÁÁ2 ÁÁÁÁM24 ÁÁÁV
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁGround 24 VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁE12/R1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁI
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁInput key 12/matrix line 1ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E24/R2ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 24/matrix line 2
Connector type: 8-pin, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/8-G-3.81
Table 24-21 Printed circuit board input/output X46
Pin Signal Type Signal name
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E30/R3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 30/matrix line 3
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E61/R4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 61/matrix line 4
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E62/R5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 62/matrix line 5
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E63/R6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 63/matrix line 6
5 HS16 Connection of lamp HS16
6 HS17O
Connection of lamp HS17
7 HS18O
Connection of lamp HS18
8 HS19 Connection of lamp HS19
Connector X43
Connector X44
Connector X45
Connector X46
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-436 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector type: 8-pin, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/8-G-3.81
Table 24-22 Printed circuit board input/output X47
Pin Signal Type Signal name
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E14/R7 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 14/matrix line 7
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E21/R8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 21/matrix line 8
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E22/R9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 22/matrix line 9
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
E23/R10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input key 23/matrix line 10
5 HS20 Connection of lamp HS20
6 HS21O
Connection of lamp HS21
7 HS22O
Connection of lamp HS22
8 HS23 Connection of lamp HS23
Connector X47
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.5 Interfaces
24-437 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 24-23 Connector parts for I/O module
Connec-tor
PCB-IO
SignalMINI-COMBICON connector part
Grid 3.81
Connection PhoenixArticle
No.ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MC 1 5/4 ST 3 81 Screw 1 5 1803594ÁÁÁÁ
MC 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1803594ÁÁÁÁ
MC 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1803594ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁX40
FRONT-MC 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1850686ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X40,FK MCP 1 5/4 ST 3 81 Spring force 1 5 1851067
ÁÁÁÁX40,X43
FK-MCP 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Spring force 1.5 1851067ÁÁÁÁX43,
FK-MCP 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Spring force 1.5 1851067ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X43,X45 Housing MCC 1/4-STZ-3.81 Crimp 1852192
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Socket connector MCC-MT 0 2 0 35 Crimp 0 2 to 0 35 1859988
ÁÁÁÁSocket connectorcontact
MCC-MT 0.2...0.35MCC MT 0 5 1 0
Crimp 0.2 to 0.35Crimp 0 5 to 1 0
18599881859991ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁcontact MCC-MT 0.5...1.0 Crimp 0.5 to 1.0 1859991
MC 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1803633
X41,FRONT-MC 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1850725
X41,X42,X46
FK-MCP 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Spring force 1.5 1851106X46, Housing MCC 1/8 STZ 3 81 Crimp 1852231X46,X47
Housing MCC 1/8-STZ-3.81 Crimp 1852231X47
Housing MCC 1/8-STZ-3.81 Crimp 1852231X47
Socket connectorcontact
MCC-MT 0.2...0.35MCC-MT 0.5...1.0
Crimp 0.2 to 0.35Crimp 0.5 to 1.0
18599881859991
Connec-tor
PCB-IO
COMBICON connector partGrid 5.08
Connection PhoenixArticle
No.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X44 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08 Screw 2.5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1779990
Connector partsfor I/O module
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.6 Connection for handheld units
24-438 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.6 Connection for handheld units
Whether a terminator or a handheld unit is connected can be determined byquerying word 0 bit 2, KEY 2. “Terminator connected” corresponds to “High” oninput KEY2.
Interlocking of axis motion via the PLC
Interlocking of the enable key
Jumpering of EMERGENCY STOP contacts on the handheld unit
Manipulation-proof: Sealing cap prevents accidental actuation of key
Jumper button, non-latching
Initiation of a monitoring time for checking the operability of the EMER-GENCY STOP jumpering function
Interruption in power supply for handheld unit connection, two-channel vari-ant, when S11 is actuated.
Warning
It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the enable key is designed to DINEN 602041-1, Subsection 9.2.5.8, and, when released or pushed down, stopsdangerous movements reliably.
When S11 is utilized for the “EMERGENCY STOP” jumpering function, aninterlock of hazardous motions must be implemented via the PLC with S11 anda time monitor activated simultaneously, in addition to Fig. 24-7. If the signalingcontact on S11:31/32 is not properly closed again on expiry of the monitoringtime (approximately 5 minutes), then “EMERGENCY STOP” must be generatedby the PLC.
24.6.1 Functional reliability of EMERGENCY STOP and enabling circuits
See Fig. 24-7
The EMERGENCY STOP circuit is a two-channel configuration with the follow-ing layout:
For circuit 1:NC contacts S13→X4:6→X5:12→XS12:12→EMERGENCY STOP hand-held unit→XS12:1→X5:1→X4:7
For circuit 2:NC contacts S13→X24:4→X5:9→XS12:9→EMERGENCY STOP handheldunit→XS12:10→X5:10→X24:3.
Terminator
Properties ofjumper button S11
EMERGENCY STOPcircuits
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.6 Connection for handheld units
24-439 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
To avoid interruption of the EMERGENCY STOP circuits on changeover be-tween the handheld unit and the terminator at XS12, the EMERGENCY STOPcontacts of the handheld unit can be jumpered via S11.
– Contact S11:13/14 jumpers via X23:1/2 the EMERGENCY STOP contactXS12:1/12 of the handheld unit in circuit 1,
– Contact S11:43/44 jumpers via X23:5/6 the EMERGENCY STOP contactXS12:9/10 of the handheld unit in circuit 2.
The time monitoring function in the PLC serves to detect malfunctions in push-button S11: If contact S11:31/32 does not close properly within the specified time frame, thePLC must interrupt the EMERGENCY STOP circuit. The contact is scanned viacircuit X23:8X23:8→X4:8→X4:1→optocoupler KEY0→Word 0, Bit 0 of the PLC input image (see Section 24.14).
The two-channel variant of the enable function is used for PP 012:
The enable key is called up with:X4:12→X5:17→XS12:16 andX24:2→X5:6 →XS12:6.
It is scanned viaXS12:5→X5:5→X4:10 and XS12:14→X5:14→X4:11.
In addition, the power supply for the handheld units connected at XS12:4 isinterrupted via contact S11:31/32→X23:8 and X5:4 when S11 is actuated.
The interlock between S11 and the enable key must be implemented in thePLC.
Note
Only 2-channel handheld units can be connected.
24.6.2 Two-channel enabling function
The circuit is illustrated in Fig. 24-7 and the terminal assignments in Table 24-24(see below).
The two-channel enable function applies to order nos.6FC5203-0AF25-1AA0 and6FC5203-0AF27-1AA0-Z
Enable circuit
Validity
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.6 Connection for handheld units
24-440 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
HHU
XS12
Enabling buttonPowersupply
MPI
Emergency stop Handwheel
HT6
Powersupply
MPI
Emergency stop
1 2341469 1012 5 13
7 171 2341469 1012 5 13815
1 9 1012 411
Terminator
11
3P24
Emergency stop
X13
S13
X25
PG
inte
rfac
eO
PI X15
X16
Jumper
2P24S11
M24
X4769 105411 128 1 2 334
12
1
5
6
9
10
14
8157
17
132433M24X22
X23 X23
X2412
M (
GN
D)
11
Repeater
2P24
M24
PCB dis–
X5
1234
M (GND) P5
Filter
3M24
3P24
16
32 3144 4321 22
14 131 234
5 6
7 8
PP 012H
Br1EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1
Enabling button
EMERGENCY STOPCircuit 2
5146
1
23
4
123
4
12
1
5
6
9
10
14
8157
13243
11
Terminator(component PP 012H)
Handheld unitType B-MPI
Handheld terminalHT 66FC5403-0AA10-0AA0
HH
U/H
T 6
Br5 *)
2P24
16
Enabling button
16
16
*) Signal to PLC: Triggers a monitoring timer.If the signal level is still “low” or “open” when the monitoring time has expired (approximately5 min.), the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP (see also Fig. 24-17).
Customer–Specific
tributor II
1617
6FX2007-1AE13
Wiring
Fig. 24-7 Connection for handheld unit ZS (two-channel)
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.6 Connection for handheld units
24-441 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 24-24 Terminal assignments XS12 → handheld unit (two-channel)
PIN PP 012H HHU(MPI) HT6 Termin–ator
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMER-GENCY_STOP 2.1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMERGENCY STOPbutton 2.1
EMERGENCY STOPbutton 2.1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
BR1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MPI_AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MPI_A MPI_AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3 3M24 M (GND) M (GND)
4 3P24 P24 P24 BR3
5 ZS1.1 ZS1.1 ZS1.1
6 ZS2.2 ZS2.2 ZS2.2
7 HR_B HRB –
8 HR_A HRA –
9 EMER-GENCY_STOP 1.2
EMERGENCY STOPbutton 1.2
EMERGENCY STOPbutton 1.2
BR2
10 EMER-GENCY_STOP 1.1
EMERGENCY STOPbutton 1.1
EMERGENCY STOPbutton 1.1
BR2
11 KEY2 KEY2 KEY2 BR3
12 EMER-GENCY_STOP 2.2
EMERGENCY STOPbutton 2.2
EMERGENCY STOPbutton 2.2
BR1
13 MPI_B MPI_B MPI_B
14 ZS2.1 ZS2.1 ZS2.1
15 HR_XA HR_XA –
16 ZS1.2 ZS1.2 ZS1.2
17 HR_XB HR_XB –
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.7 Dimension drawings and mounting instructions
24-442 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.7 Dimension drawings and mounting instructions
482.6
155
50
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
70
105
Identification of anode connection:Insert the LED into the key with the +polarity on the correct side.
Fig. 24-8 Dimension drawing of PP 012
The required panel cutout is 451.0 x 137.6 mm.
Mounting background
1.5 to 6 thick
Operator panel front Tension jacksA
A
132.5 132.5
Cutout symmetrical with operator panel front
451+1B B
A-A1.5 to 6
34.2 123.5 155.8 103.3 34.2
482.6
B-B Max. torque
0.5 Nm
35
137.
6+1
155
Fig. 24-9 Panel cutout for PP 012
Dimensiondrawing
Panel cutout
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.8 Installation and mounting
24-443 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.8 Installation and mounting
The PP 012 (for dimensions, see Fig. 24-9 ) is secured by means of tensionjacks (supplied with panel) to the rear of the frontplate. Due to the surroundingseal located on the rear side, the frame profile complies with degree of protec-tion IP65 when all 9 tension jacks are fastened.
Only IP54 can be achieved for the complete pushbutton panel, however, due tothe installation of a keyswitch.
If necessary, the tension jacks (9 items) can be supplied as a spare part (OrderNo. 6FC5 248-0AF13-0AA0).
The 24 V supply is connected via a 3-pin terminal block (see Fig. 24-6 ) at con-nector X8 to the rear of the machine control panel. The equipotential bondingconductor is fastened using an M5 screw and must be linked with the centralground standard part.
Danger
The 24 V DC power supply must always be grounded and designed asProtective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) – protection by function low voltagewith safe isolation!
The PP 012 is connected to the 840D or S7-300 control by means of an MPIbus line. The MPI connector is plugged into X15 on the rear of the PP 012 andsecured with a screw.
Emergency stop, selector switch and single contacts are connected accordingto the required custom-made links.
(For function see Figs. 24-17 to 24-21)
Supply voltages for inputs and outputs must always be grounded!
Note
To use the actuating element WS1 as an operating modeselector switch, a keyswitch CG4-1A251-600 * FS1 V750D/2J should be usedin accordance with EC Directive 89/392/EEC.
Mountingpreparations
Connecting the24 V power supply
Connecting theMPI connection
Connectingindividual wiring
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.9 Labeling control elements
24-444 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.9 Labeling control elements
Device front
02610
2040 60
8090100110
70
120
0
60
80 90100
110
70
120Power
Free layout of labeling areas thanks to the use of slide–in user labels
COMWS1 PG interface
WS3
WS2
Fig. 24-10 Control panel (example)
The following drawing is intended purely as an example; multiple slide-in labelscan also be arranged.
16
16
23.8
19
14
47
80
113
146
19
21.5
55.5
64.5
76.5
85.5
110
1038
7 7
0 Dim
ensi
on
s fo
r la
bel
ing
0Dim
ensi
on
s fo
r la
bel
ing
th
e sl
ide–
in u
ser
lab
els
Cor
ners
rou
nded
R1.
5or
cha
mfe
red
1.5x
45 d
egre
es
14.4
56.4
0
85
180
Cut
ting
edge
bor
derin
g
mus
t be
prin
ted
Win
dow
are
a bo
rder
ing
mus
t not
be
prin
ted
slid
e–in
lab
els
(S11
, XS
12)
(Des
ign
atio
n f
ield
, WS
1)
55
1
1
1
Dim
ensi
on
s fo
r la
bel
ing
th
e sl
ide–
in u
ser
lab
els
(var
iab
le s
wit
chin
g e
lem
ents
S1
to S
4; S
7 to
S10
; S
14;
S15
)
Fig. 24-11 Dimensions for texts on the slide-in labels
Dimensions forlabeling theslide-in labels
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.9 Labeling control elements
24-445 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
HS1
HS2
HS3
HS4
S1
S1
S2
S3S4
S4
S3
HS14
S14
S14
HW-FAULT
1234 4 3 21 1
S18 S16 S17Off
S7–AS300(2)
S7–AS300
840 D
HS15
S15
HS7
HS8
HS9
HS10
S7
S8
S9
S10
S7S8
S9
S10
2P24
2P24
S11
HR–A*HR–AHR–B
*HR–B
S7HS7
S1HS1
S2 HS2
S3 HS3
S4 HS4
S14 HS14
S9 HS9
S15 HS15
S10 HS10
S8 HS8
WS3 WS2
S11WS1
1,6A
T
RequestBUS-
> ϑ
On
S15
X44
X30
Opt
ion
1
X43
4
1
X
42
8
1
X
41
8
1
X43
4
Opt
ion
8
X
47
1
4
X45
1
8
X
46
1
32
1
3 24
Boa
rd IN
– / O
UT
PU
T
S2
S1
Fig. 24-12 Labeling on rear of device
Labelingdevice rear side
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.10 PP 012 expansion
24-446 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.10 PP 012 expansion
A
A64 33482.6
95
70
A–A
CenterOperator control element
25.526.6
1021
42.2
38
Fig. 24-13 PP 012 expansion
Order code 6FC5 247-0AA43-1AA0
Can be equipped with max. 12 control devices, diameter 22 mm, grid 33 mm
Labeling with exchangeable text labels
Front view withsection
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.10 PP 012 expansion
24-447 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Mounting background
1.5 to 6 thick
Operator panel front Tension jacks
A
A
451+1
482.6
34,2 123.5 155.8 103.3 34.2
132.5 132.5
95
77.6
+1
B B
B-BMax. torque
0.5 Nm
A-A1.5 to 6
35
Fig. 24-14 Panel cutout for PP 012 extension
The following drawing is intended purely as an example; multiple slide-in labelscan also be arranged.
16.1
Dimensions for labeling the slide-in user labels(variable switching elements S7 to S12)
23.8
20
13 46 79 112
1450
Corners rounded R1.5or chamfered 1.5 x 45 degrees
208
Cutting edge bordering
must be printed
Window area bordering
must not be printed
1
1
178
20
134679112
145 0
235
178
23.8
16.1
Dimensions for labeling the slide–in user labels(variable switching elements S1 to S6)
1
Slide-in direction
Slide-in direction
.8
Fig. 24-15 Dimensions for texts on the slide-in labels (PP 012 extension)
Panel cutout
Dimensions forlabeling theslide-in labels
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A
24-448 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A
24.11.1 Inputs/outputs
Table 24-25 Inputs (possible combinations)
Without authorization key-operatedswitch
With authorization key-operated switch
Design Key matrix(option)
Switch/independentsingle con-
tacts
Design Key matrix(option)
Switch/independentsingle con-
tacts
ÁÁÁ1ÁÁÁÁÁNo ÁÁÁÁÁ14 contacts 14 No ÁÁÁÁÁ10 contactsÁÁÁÁÁÁ2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ7 keys
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ11 contacts 15 7 keys
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ7 contacts
3 12 keys 10 contacts 16 12 keys 6 contacts
4 14 keys 9 contacts 17 14 keys 5 contacts
5 24 keys 8 contacts 18 24 keys 4 contacts
6 36 keys 7 contacts 19 36 keys 3 contacts
7 48 keys 6 contacts 20 48 keys 2 contacts
8 60 keys 5 contacts 21 60 keys 1 contact
9 72 keys 4 contacts 22 72 keys 0 contacts
10 84 keys 3 contactsFunctions of keys in the matrix:
11 96 keys 2 contactsFunctions of keys in the matrix:+ non-latching keys
12 108 keys 1 contact+ non-latching keys+ single key actuation
no switch function13 120 keys 0 contacts
+ no switch function
16 outputs for driving lamps, four of which are optional.
8 inputs W3, W5, W6, W7, W9, W10, W11, W12 for matrix4 outputs A28 to A31 for controlling lamps
Inputs
Outputs
Optional keymatrix
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A
24-449 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.11.2 Key assignment within matrix
Table 24-26 Key assignment within matrix
Key value Wn Matrix row Rn
Wn W8/E55
W4/E54
W2/E53
W1/E52
E19/PB
Rn E12 E24 E30 E61 E62 E63 E14 E21 E22 E23
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 0 0 1 0 0 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 0 0 1 1 1 3 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 0 1 0 0 0 4 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 0 1 0 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
6 0 1 1 0 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
7 0 1 1 1 0 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0 0 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
9 1 0 0 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
10 1 0 1 0 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
11 1 0 1 1 0
12 1 1 0 0 1
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A
24-450 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Scan input R1 ... Rnn ≤ 10 *)
*) n = number of matrix blocks
Numberof active blocks
= 1 ?
Yes
No
Save the activeblock Rn
Scan inputsW1, W2, W4, W8
Save the activeblock Wn
Scan parity bit E19
Parity“OK” ?
YesSave RnWn
Bounce suppressionfunction
Output of key RnWn
No
Fig. 24-16 Matrix scan sequence
Matrix keyboardscan
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.12 Circuits and wiring
24-451 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.12 Circuits and wiring
There are various possible applications for connecting the key inputs KEY0 toKEY2:
1. Enable key connection according to Fig. 24-7.
2. Use as isolated inputs with reference potential at X4/5
3. Use of button S11 with PLC function without jumpering
For the required jumper assignment and their meaning, please refer to theTables below.
Table 24-27 Custom-made wiring
Br1 Br5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
—
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
—
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Use of the connections X4:1;2;3 as isolated inputs. The refer-ence potential is at X4:4 here.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
PLC function
Table 24-28 Use of the connections
Potential Connect-ing
Application
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ2P24
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X3/11,12 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Control of inputs HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2P24 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X24/1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Controlling the inputs KEY 0 to KEY 2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
KEY0... 2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X4/1 ... 3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Inputs KEY0 to KEY2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
M24 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X4/5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference potential of inputs KEY 0 to KEY 2;no external use.
X5
M24
X4769 105 1112 8 1 2 3
2P24
11 12X3
External contactsBr1 Br52)
2P24S11
X24
2P24
4 43 2 1
2) Signal to PLC: Triggers a monitoring timer.
1) S11 connection with single–channel variant only
1)
If the signal level is still “low” or “open” when the monitoring time has expired (approximately5 min.), the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP (see also Fig. 24-7).
Fig. 24-17 Button S11 with PLC function
Custom-madewiring
Use ofconnections
Button S11 withPLC function
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.12 Circuits and wiring
24-452 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1M24
X1; X2; X6; X11
Blo
ck S
n
2P24
11 12 X3
External contact
HSn
Fig. 24-18 External control of signaling lamps in keys HSn
1 1
2 2
EMER-GENCYSTOP key
EMERGENCY STOP machine control
To PLC
3
4
1 1
2 2
Optional
Fig. 24-19 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit
Ext. control ofpilot lampsHS1 ... HS10
Circuit forEMERGENCYSTOP button
Circuit forEMERGENCYSTOP button
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.12 Circuits and wiring
24-453 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1
2
8
16
4
C
6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1WS3X18.1
X18.2
rd
rd
Fig. 24-20 Connection WS3 spindle speed override spindle speed/rapid traverse
5 V +10 %
X30
F1616
F1515
F1414
F1313
F1212
F1111
F1010
F99
F88
F77
F66
F55
F44
F33
F22
F11
20
19
18
17
+
PCB direct keysPP 012
–
Fig. 24-21 Direct control key connection
Connectingspindle overrideWS3
Connectingdirect control keys
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.12 Circuits and wiring
24-454 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Row
n=
1
Row
s n=
3 to
10
P24
M24PC
B e
xpan
sio
n
W1; W2; W4; W8only as an alternativeto the key matrix,X42, X43 Not assigned
Key
mat
rix
(op
tio
n)
Sin
gle
co
nta
cts
X47
X44
SE
4S
E3
SE
6S
E5
SE
8S
E7
SE
10S
E9
SE
12S
E11
SE
14S
E13
SM
1.11
SM
1.10
SM
1.8
SM
1.7
SM
1.9
SM
1.6
SM
1.5
SM
1.4
SM
1.2
SM
1.1
SM
1.3
Blo
ckS
M1
SM
1.12
Row
n=
2
Lam
ps
Lam
ps
SE
2S
E1
R1
X45
Inpu
ts R
1 to
R10
Whe
n th
ese
are
conn
ecte
d, th
eco
rres
pond
ing
indi
vidu
al c
onta
cts
SM
2.11
SM
2.10
SM
2.8
SM
2.7
SM
2.9
SM
2.6
SM
2.5
SM
2.4
SM
2.2
SM
2.1
SM
2.3
Blo
ckS
M2
SM
2.12
HS29
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
W10
W11
W12M24
P24_5
SM
n.11
SM
n.10
SM
n.8
SM
n.7
SM
n.9
SM
n.6
SM
n.5
SM
n.4
SM
n.2
SM
n.1
SM
n.3
Blo
ckS
Mn
SM
n.12
X42
X41
R2
R3
R4R5R6
R7*)
R9*)R10*)
W1
W2
W8
W4
HS24
HS25
HS26HS27
M24P24_5
X46
assigned when the
key–operated authorization
switch is used
*)
X43
X40
R8*)
HS23
HS22
HS20
HS21
HS18
HS16
HS17
HS19
HS31
HS30
HS28
card
12E
/12A
Fig. 24-22 Connecting the extension panel to PCB expansion card 12E/12A
Connectingexpansion panel
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.12 Circuits and wiring
24-455 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
nc =
not
con
nect
ed
PB
Inp
uts
PL
C
(W1)
(W2)
(W3)
(W4)
(W5)
(W6)
(W7)
(W8)
(W9)
(W10)
(W11)
(W12)
(even)
* Not usable
switch is used
M24
E52
E53
E54
E55
E19
P24
23
X44
M24P24_5
E12
E24
E30
E61
E62
E63
E14*
E21*
E22*
E23*
(W8)
X41
, X42
X40
X43
From centrallowersupply
SE
9*S
E8*
SE
5S
E4
SE
3S
E10
*S
E6
SE
7*S
E2
SE
1
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R8 *
R7 *
R9 *
R10 *
P24_5M24
X45
X47
X46
X45
Individualkeys
SE
W8
ncnc
ncnc
SM
1.7
SM
1.6
SM
1.5
SM
1.4
SM
1.2
SM
1.1
SM
1.3
Blo
ckS
M1
PP 012 extension PCB expansion card 12E/12A
switch is used authorization
1
Fig. 24-23 Wiring example eleven single keys and seven matrix keys
Wiring example
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.13 Technical data
24-456 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.13 Technical data
24.13.1 PP 012
Table 24-29 Technical data for PP 012
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front panel IP54 Rear side IP10A
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption, max. 20 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 483 mmHeight: 155 mm
Depth: 175 mmMounting depth: 105 mm
Weight approx. 3 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 2 – 9 Hz: 3 mm9 – 200 Hz: 10 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3
2 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 10 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 100 m/s2, 11 ms3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3
100 m/s2, 11 ms2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–40 ... 70 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.13 Technical data
24-457 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.13.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring
Contacts with floating outputs S1 to S4; S7 to S10; S11; S14; S15 (NC contactor NO contact)
Table 24-30 NO contacts S1 to S4; S7 to S10; S14; S15
AC DCÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated insulation voltage ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Ue ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
50 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
50 VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated operating current ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Ie ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 A ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁRated operating current at 24 V ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁIe ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 A
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Min. rated operating current at 5 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IminÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 mA
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Volume resistance ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
< 20 mΩ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Switching capacity ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
10 le ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1.1 le
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Max. operating current for reference po-tential
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
8 A ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
8 A
Contacts with floating outputs WS1/9–11; 13; 15;
Table 24-31 Selector switch
Load AC DC
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated operating voltage ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Ue ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
300 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
300 V
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Switching capacityresistiveÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
10 A ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Switching capacityinductiveÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ > 2 A ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁSwitching capacity at resistiveÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 10 AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Switching capacity at24 V inductive
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6 AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated values for arc-freeswitching at 24 V
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0.3 AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0.22 A
Contacts with floating outputs S13
Table 24-32 EMERGENCY STOP button
Utilization category(EN 60947–5–1)
AC DC
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁRated operating voltage
ÁÁÁÁÁÁUe
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ24 V
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ24 V
AC-12 le 10 A
Switching capacityAC-15 le 6 A
Switching capacityDC-12 le 10 A
DC-13 le 3 A
Min. rated operating current at5 V
lmin 1 mA
For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3
Button contactmaker
Selector switch
EMERGENCYSTOP key
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.13 Technical data
24-458 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
X4: KEY 0 to KEY 2
Table 24-33 Inputs X4: KEY 0 to KEY 2:
State Voltageswitched
Current switched
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁRated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁ24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
H signalÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Signal level
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+15 V to +30 V
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Min. 4 mA (at 15 V)Max. 9.5 mA (at 30 V)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁL signal
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0 V or open ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
L signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
–3 V to +5 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁIn a group of ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁCable length ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁmax. 50 mAWG 20–16
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X1, X2, X6, X11
Table 24-34 Inputs HS1 to HS4; HS7 to HS10; HS14; HS15
State Voltage switched Current switched
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp ONÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
50 mA(making current
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp ONÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+18 V to +30 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
(making current max. 600 mA)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp OFF ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
open ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁCable length ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁMax. 10 m AWG 20–16ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X30
Table 24-35 Input X30 direct keys, F1 to F16
State Voltage switched Current switched
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁH signal
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
H signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+5 V or open ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁL signal
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
L signalÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
–3 V to +1 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
< 11 mA
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
In a group of ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
16 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Cable length ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Max 0.6 m AWG 28ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
X44
Table 24-36 Inputs X44
Voltage supply
Total current Rated voltage Upper volt-age limit
Lower voltage limit
Fuse
Max. = 5 A, depend-ing on the lamp load
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
24 V DC ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
30.2 V DC ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
18.5 VDCÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 x 10 A
Inputs
Printed circuitboard input/output(option)
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.13 Technical data
24-459 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
X41, X42, X43, X45, X46, X47: E12, E14, E21 to E24, E30, E52 to E55, E61 toE63, W1 to W12
Table 24-37 Inputs
State Voltage switched Current switched
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
H signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+15 V to +30 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Min. 3.6 mA (at 15 V)Max. 8 mA (at 30 V)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁL signal
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0 V or open ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
L signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
–3 V to +5 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁIn a group of ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁCommon root ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁCable length Max. 50m, AWG 16
X41, X42, X43, X46, X47: HS16 to HS31
Table 24-38 Lamp outputs
State Voltage switched Current switched
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
H signalÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
H signalÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+20 V to +30 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Max. 0.5 A/output
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
L signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
L signalÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Open ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
< 25 µA
ÁÁÁÁÁÁIn a group of ÁÁÁÁÁÁ16 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁCable length Max. 50 m, AWG 16
Startingtotal current
Max. 5 A
X40:1, X45:1
Table 24-39 Outputs P24_5
State Voltage switched Current switched
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Output total current ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Max. 700 mA
Rated value +24 V
Inputs
Lamp outputs
Outputs P24_5
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.14 PLC interface
24-460 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.14 PLC interface
Table 24-40 Input signals
Inputs Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Word 0Low
Mode GD project Isolated inputsLow
WS1/4 ER
WS1/3 ES
WS1/2 EB
WS1/1 VK
*) DIPS16/1
X4/3 KEY2
X4/2 KEY1
X4/1 KEY0
Word 0High
+ direction I/O – direction Variable keysHigh ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S15 E14/R7Key
switch 0
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S14 E12/R1ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S4ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S3 ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S2 ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S1
Word 1Low
I/O GD project Version activation GD projectLow
E23/R10key
switch 3
E22/R9Key
switch 2
E21/R8Key
switch 1
DIPS18/3
E19/PB(parity)
High(reserve)
*) DIPS16/1
DIPS18/4
Word 1High
GD project I/O Emergencystop
Variable keys
*) DIPS16/1
E30/R3 S13ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S10ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S9ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S8 ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S7 E24/R2
Word 2Low
Direct keyLow
F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1
Word 2High
Direct keyHigh
F16GD project
F15 F14 F13 F12 F11 F10 F9
Word 3Low
I/O Spindle speed/rapid traverseLow
E55/W8 E54/W4 E53/W2 E52/W1 D C B A
Word 3High
I/O Feed overrideHigh
E63/R6 E62/R5 E61/R4 I D C B A
*) All bits identified with DIP-S16/1 are simultaneously switched when S16/1 is actuated.
Legend:
High active signals ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
S1... S4;S7... S10;S14; S15
High active/Low active settable via S18.2S18.2 closed Low activeS18.2 open High active
Low active signals Ex/HSx I/O high active via a plug-on card supplied asan option
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.14 PLC interface
24-461 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 24-41 Output signals (see Table 24-40 for legend)
Outputs Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Word 0Lo
Pilot lampsLow
HS8 HS7 HS15 HS14 HS4 HS3 HS2 HS1
Word 0High
Not assigned Pilot lampsHigh
HS10 HS9
Word 1Lo
I/OLow
HS23 HS22 HS21 HS20 HS19 HS18 HS17 HS16
Word 1High
Option Key matrix on I/O I/OHigh
HS31 HS30 HS29 HS28 HS27 HS26 HS25 HS24
Word 2Lo
Not assignedLow
Word 2High
Not assignedHigh
Word 3Lo
Not assignedLow
Word 3High
Not assignedHigh
Notice
When the mode is switched over, “Low” can be output briefly for all signals onselector switch SW1!
I.e., all safety-relevant signals are linked such that they are only possible ifswitch WS1 has a defined position.
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 01210.00
04.0424.15 Initialization
24-462 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.15 Initialization
The following settings are possible with the switches DIP S16, S17, S18:
Table 24-42 Assignments of S16, S17, S18 on PP 012
S17 S16 S18 Meaning
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
on Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud OPI
off Baud rate: 187.5 kbaud MPI
on on not applicable
on off 200 ms cycl. Cycle time
off on 100 ms cycl. Cycle time
off off 50 ms cycl. Cycle time
on on on on Bus address: 15
on on on off Bus address: 14
on on off on Bus address: 13
on on off off Bus address: 12
on off on on Bus address: 11
on off on off Bus address: 10
on off off on Bus address: 9
on off off off Bus address: 8
off on on on Bus address: 7
off on on off Bus address: 6
off on off on Bus address: 5
off on off off Bus address: 4
off off on on Bus address: 3
off off on off Bus address: 2
off off off on Bus address: 1
off off off off Bus address: 0
off off Set of parameters 1
on off Set of parameters 2
on on Set of parameters 3
on Hardware reset “ON”
off Hardware reset “OFF”
on Pushbutton panel – factory set-ting: NC function
off Pushbutton panelNO function
X Reserve GD project
Jumpering
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.15 Initialization
24-463 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 24-43 Default setting for 840D
Application:Connecting the PP 012 to an 840D
S17 S16 S18S17 S16 S18Meaning
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1Meaning
X off on off on on off off off off X off 187.5 kbaud/1.5 MbaudTrans cycle time 100 msTrans. cycle time 100 msBus address 6Bus address 6Parameter set 1
Requirement:None, can be directly connected to the MPI/OPI of the 840D
Table 24-44 Default setting for S7-300
Application:Connecting the PP 012 to an S7-300
S17 S16 S18S17 S16 S18Meaning
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1Meaning
off off on off on on off on off off X off 187.5 kbaudTrans cycle time 100 msTrans. cycle time 100 msBus address 6Bus address 6Parameter set 2
Requirement:A global data table created using HISTEP
Table 24-45 Setting for S7-300 with two machine control panels
Application:Connecting two PP 012s to an S7-300
S17 S16 S18S17 S16 S18Meaning
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1Meaning
off off on off on on off on off on X off 187.5 kbaudTrans cycle time 100 msTrans. cycle time 100 msBus address 6Bus address 6Parameter set 3
Requirement:A global data table created using HISTEP
The load on the PLC by the PP 012 can thus be adapted.
The PLC expects a message frame from the PP 012 at least every 500 msecs.The PP 012 sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic intervals when no keyis pressed. This cycle time is set on S17 DIP switches 2 and 3.
DIP switchsettings
Settings for thetransmissioncycle time
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.15 Initialization
24-464 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The switchover of the sets of parameters (GD identifications) for communicationbetween control system and PP 012 is implemented via DIP switch S16/1 orS18/3. The switchover does not take effect until after the PP 012 power is switched on.
Transmit data = PP 012→ controllerReceive data = controller → PP 012
Table 24-46 Parameter set
Index Designation Parame-ter set 1
Parame-ter set 2
Parame-ter set 3
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Receive GD circuit no.ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Receive GI no.ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Object number for receive GI ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Internalassign-
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Send GD circuit no. ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
assign-mentsÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Transmit GI no. ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
mentsÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Object number for transmit GI ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1
When the PP 012 is operated in conjunction with an S7-300 CPU, set of param-eters 2 is selected and a global data table is created using HISTEP.
The communication link to the PP 012 must be parameterized as follows:
Table 24-47 Global data for set of parameters 2
GD identification ebf/s7-300:: ebf/PP 012::ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
GD 1.1.1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
>>ab60:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
eb0:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁGD 1.2.1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁeb60:8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ>>ab0:8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁThe specifications “ab60” and “eb60” for S7 are only examples; the signals canalso be transferred to other locations.
The GD identification is generated by the compiler.
GD 1.1.1 PP 012 is receiverGD 1.2.1 PP 012 is transmitter
This assignment corresponds to set of parameters 2 as per Table 24-46.
Note
Make sure that a data width of eight bytes is always assigned for the input andoutput image!
If two PP 012s are to be connected to an S7-300 CPU, set of parameters 3must be set, and the following global data table must be created using HISTEP.
Communicationparameters
Global data table
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.15 Initialization
24-465 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 24-48 Global data for set of parameters 3
GD identification ebf/s7-300:: ebf/PP 012:: ebf/PP 012_2::ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
GD 1.1.1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
>>ab60:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
eb0:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁGD 1.2.1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
eb60:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
>>ab0:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁGD 2.1.1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
>>ab120:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
eb0:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
GD 2.2.1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
eb118:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
>>ab0:8
Further GD communications can be configured in the following lines.
Danger
The transmission path (MPI/OPI) from PP 012 to the central controller must bemonitored by the user.
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.16 Example of parameter settings for communication SIMATIC S7 / PP 012
24-466 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.16 Example of parameter settings for communicationSIMATIC S7 / PP 012
Your program can read the information of the GD package status from the oper-ands you assign the corresponding GDS identification in the global data table inthe STEP 7 tool “Communication Configuration”.
If a communication error occurs, the operating system writes error information tothese operands (described in the Table below). You can then use this informa-tion to create conditional program branches as a response to the communica-tion errors.
For the status information of the communication, a double word (32 bit) is pro-vided.
For the contents of the double word, see the Table below:
Table 24-49 Status information
Bit Status: Description of error Fromsend CPU
FromreceiveCPU
0 Area length error in sender + +
1 Block cannot be found in sender + +
2 I/O access error in sender + +
3 GD packet lost– by sender – in transit– by receiver
+ +
4 Syntax error in GD packet + +
5 GD object missing from GD packet +
6 Wrong assignment of GD object length insender and receiver
+
7 Address range length error in sender +
8 GD package cannot be found in receiver +
9 I/O access error in receiver +
10 Timeout in receiver +
11 Restart of receiver +
12–30 Reserved +
31 Receive new data +
References: / / SIMATIC S 7, User Manual
Note
Monitoring of the MPI link between SIMATIC S7 and PP 012 can beimplemented with the global data bit, bit 31. The user can reset bit 31 andprovide it with a watchdog. If this bit is not set again within the predefined timeinterval, a fault in the line is the cause.
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.16 Example of parameter settings for communication SIMATIC S7 / PP 012
24-467 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 24-50 Example
GD identifier as314//cpu1: pp012_1//cpu1:
GST md120
GDS 1.1 md130
SR 1.1 4 1
GD 1.1.1 >>ab120:8 ab0:8
GDS 1.2 md140
SR1.2 4 4
GD 1.2.1 eb118:8 >>eb0:8
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.17 Service information
24-468 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.17 Service information
1. Prize the button cap off forwards with a screwdriver
2. Lever out the button holder using lamp remover LZ5
3. Change the lamp using service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube
4. Refit the button holder and cap in reverse order
Note
Lamp remover LZ5 is not a SIEMENS product. It can be obtained from theSchlegel company.
1. Prize the cap and the label holder off forwards with a screwdriver
2. Use the lamp remover of service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube tochange the lamp
3. Refit the cap and the label holder
Notice
When using LEDs, make sure that they are connected with the correct polarity(see Fig. 24-8: Dimension drawing of PP 012) !
1. Screw off the dummy plug
2. Press the contact maker onto the base and install the lamp if necessary
3. Insert the pushbutton through the front plate and screw on the cap nut withseveral turns
4. Screw the cap nut tight. Please note the position of the anti-rotation element
5. Screw the cap nut tight (max. torque 0.8 Nm)
1. Create the slide-in labels (see Fig. 24-10)
2. Remove the protective film from the label slot
3. Slide in the labels (with print facing the operator side)
4. Align the texts in the window
Note
Slide in the labels when the PP 012 operator panel front is not yet installed.
Lamp replacementfor illuminatedkeys, illuminatedswitches
Changing thelamps on pilotlamps
Mountingadditional controlelements
Insert slide-inlabels
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.17 Service information
24-469 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1. Loosen the cap nut on the pushbutton until the contact maker has almostbeen reached.
2. Pull the pushbutton and the contact maker approximately 3 mm out of thefixture (the locating pin of the pushbutton must be freed).
3. Turn the pushbutton approx. 20° to the right or left, remove it from the con-tact maker and remove the cap nut.
4. Change the contact element, remove the defective contact maker from thefixture and press the new contact maker down into the fixture.
5. Insert the pushbutton into the opening and screw on the cap nut partially.
6. Press the pushbutton down until it rests on the contact maker. When doingso, observe the position of the locking lose.
7. Screw the cap nut tight (max. torque 0.8 Nm).
Changing acontact maker
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.18 Configuration
24-470 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.18 Configuration
24.18.1 Configurer
Note
When replacing the existing PP 031 devices with variants of the PP 012,downwards compatibility cannot always be assumed!
Table 24-51 Delivery variants
Pushbutton panel PP 012 6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 X – X A A 0
PP 012 basic unitEMERGENCY STOP with 2 NC contacts + 1NO contact, keyswitch, 8 illuminated keys withincandescent lamps, button caps 2*GR, 2*RT,2*GB, 2*Kl, 2* dummy plugs BVR22, program-ming device and RS-232-C interfaces, fee-drate override, cover plate for 2nd override,with blank special film for slide-in labels withdimensional drawing,PCB direct control keys with ribbon cable 1)
6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 4 – 0 A A 0
PP 012HSame as basic device, plus handheld deviceconnection socket 17-pin and jumper button
6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 5 – 1 A A 0
connection socket, 17-pin, and jumper buttonwith repeater function and distributor box,two-channel enabling function
PP 012/SSpecial variant based on PP 012;the components included are clearlyidentified by a list of optional extras
6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 6 – 0 A A 0 – Z
PP 012H/SSpecial variant based on PP 012H;the components included are clearly
6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 7 – 1 A A 0 – Z
the components included are clearlyidentified by a list of optional extras,two-channel enabling function
1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 0113 Part 1, “Pushbuttons/Colors” section.
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.18 Configuration
24-471 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Extensions to the PP 012 (can be ordered and installed by the customer separately)
Override switch, 16-level speed 6 F C 5 2 4 7 – 0 A A 3 4 – 0 A A 1
“+/–” keys raised 6 F C 5 2 4 7 – 0 A A 4 1 – 0 A A 0
PCB expansion card 12E/12A 6 F C 5 2 4 7 – 0 A A 4 2 – 0 A A 0
Extension panel with 12 slots 6 F C 5 2 4 7 – 0 A A 4 3 – 1 A A 0
2x NC contacts for Emergency Stop buttons 3 S B 3 4 0 0 – 0 E
Spare parts kit PP 031-MC 5 covers, 5 films, 2 sealing caps,set of key caps, 5 incandescent lamps withbase, 1 dummy plug, 1 illuminated key contactmaker, 1 printing drawing A5E00122711A-A1
6 F C 5 2 4 7 – 0 A A 2 7 – 0 A A 0
Extensions for project-specific variants
Slide-in labels as per customer layout
Set of light emitting diodes (ultra-bright)
Knob FS1 for WS1
Actuator and contact maker 1) according to Table 24-52
Key-operated authorization switch at customer request
PCB_input/output with key matrix at customer request
1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 0113 Part 1, “Pushbuttons / Colors” section.
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.18 Configuration
24-472 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.18.2 Project-specific components
Table 24-52 Control elements that can be retrofitted by the userFunction Upper part
actuator/accessoriesHolder switching ele-ment/pilot lamp
Mount-inglocation
Application
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pilot lamp ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Lamp nipple28 mm ∅ RXJN-GB (yellow)RXJN-GN (green)RXJN-RT (red)RXJN-BL (blue)RXJN-KL (transp. glass)RXJN-WS (white)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Lampholder AL5 with in-candescent lampT5.5K/30 or spot LEDL5.5K28UG (green)L5.5K28UR (red)L5.5K28UW (white)L5.5K28UY (yellow) L5.5K28UB (blue)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S1 ... S4S7 ... S10S14, S15
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Lamp
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/RF reset ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pushbutton 28 mm ∅RXJT-GB (yellow)RXJT-GN (green)RXJT-RT (red)RXJT-BL (blue)RXJT-KL (transparentglass)RXJT-GSW (black)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Butt ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S111 NC contact (internal), 2 NO con-tact + 1 NC contact (external)For S1 1 NC contact (internal), 2NO contact + 1 NC contact (ext.)For S2...S4, S7...S10 1 NC con-tact (internal), 1 NO contact + 1NC contact (external)For S14, S15 1 NC contact int., 2NO contacts ext.ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Illuminated keyswith fixture forT5.5K
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pushbutton 28 mm ∅RXJT-GB (yellow)RXJT-GN (green)RXJT-RT (red)RXJT-BL (blue)RXJT-KL (transparentglass)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Illuminated key contac-tor ATL2 with incandes-cent lamp T5.5K/30 orspot LEDL5.5K28UG (green)L5.5K28UR (red)L5.5K28UW (white)L5.5K28UY (yellow)L5.5K28UB (blue)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
For S1 1 NC contact (internal), 2NO contact + 1 NC contact (ext.)For S...S4, S7...S10 1 NC contact(internal), 1 NO contact + 1 NCcontact (external)For S14, S15 1 NC contact (inter-nal), 2 NO contacts (external)Lamp externally controllable
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
KeyswitchSwitching angle900
2 positions keys, removablein both positions
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Safety lock cylinder28 mm ∅RXJSSA 15 E
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Button contact makerAT2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
For S1 1 NC contact (internal), 2NO contact + 1 NC contact (ext.)For S1...S4, S7...S101 NC contact (int.), 1 NO contact+ 1 NC contact (ext.) S14, S15 1NC contact (int.), 2 NO contacts(ext.)
Raised keys6FC5247-0AA41-0AA0
2 RTAO pushbuttonswith plunger elongation
2 AT2Special design
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁDesignation
fieldReplaceable text insertstrips
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁDummy plug BVR22 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S14 and S15 with base unit
Selectorswitch
Knob FS1 WS1 Re-equipping to knob-operatedswitch
Speed/rapid traverseoverride
6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1 WS3 Connection to PCB PP 031R
Emergency Switching element: 2 3SB3400-0ES13
Expans. NC contact EMER-Emergencystop
gNC contacts S13
pGENCY STOP
Note
When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the correspondingfunctionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part1 or VDE 0113 Part1, Section“Pushbuttons/Colors”.
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.18 Configuration
24-473 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24.18.3 Rating plates
One of the following rating plates is attached to the components and modules:
Example:
Key: F2 Place of manufactureL3 Date of manufactureA5E00112382 ID numberA/B/C/D Product version6FC5203-0AF24-0AA0 Order numberPP 012 Component name
Example:
A5E00017606 A1 L2 F2
Key: A5E00017606 ID numberA1 Product versionL2 Date of manufactureF2 Place of manufacture
In case of technical queries or service, please quote all data on the rating plateto the local SIEMENS office responsible for your equipment.
Components
Printed circuitboards
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
04.0424.18 Configuration
24-474 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012
Notes
25-475 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel
The following description applies to the MPI Interface(order number 6FC5203-0AE00-0AA0)
A customer operator panel can be connected via the MPI interface. 64 digitalinputs and 64 digital outputs with CMOS level (5) are available on the modulefor this purpose.
The mounting position is subject to the following restrictions:
Mounting positions max. 75 off vertical permissible.
For mounting positions greater than 60 a fan must additionally be installedto keep the environmental conditions constantly below 55 C.
25.1 Interfaces
ON
X231
LEDs
S3
X20
MPI connection
X10
X221X211
H3H1H4H2
289.464.7
207.3
92.7
7.2
3.5Holes 3.6
Equipotential bonding terminal
Fig. 25-1 Front view of the MPI interface for customer operator panel
Validity
Brief description
Installation
Position ofinterfaces
25
04.0425.1 Interfaces
25-476 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X10Connector type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal block, straight
Table 25-1 X10 pin assignments
X10
Pin Name Type
1 SHIELD
2 M24 VI
3 P24
Signal names
SHIELD shield connectionP24 24 V potentialM24 24 V ground
Signal type
VI Voltage Input
Note
The maximum length of the equipotential bonding connection (stranded cable,10 mm2) must not exceed 30 cm.
Connector designation: X20Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, straightMax. cable length: 200 mSpecial features: 1.5 MBaud/187.5 kBaud data transmission rate
Table 25-2 X20 pin assignments for MPI
X20
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1/2 Not assigned 6 2P5 VO
3 RS_OPI B 7 Not assigned
4 RTSAS_BTSS O 8 XRS_OPI B
5 2M VO 9 RTSPG_BTSS I
Signal names
RS_BTSS, XRS_BTSS Differential RS485 data-OPIRTSPG_BTSS Request to Send PG OPIRTSAS_BTSS Request to Send AS OPI2M Ground signal, isolated2P5 +5 V, isolated
Signal type
B Bi-directionalO OutputVO Voltage OutputI Input
Power supplyinterface
MPI interface
25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel
04.0425.1 Interfaces
25-477 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X211, X221 (2 x 32-pin)X231 (2 x 10-pin)
Connector type: Ribbon cable connector DIN 41651Max. cable length: 0.5 m
Potential pins:
The inputs/outputs (interfaces X211, X221, X231) can be loaded with a maxi-mum current of 0.2 A via the internal 5 V power supply of the MPI interface module. This value stands for the total of all currents flowing overthese interfaces.
64 outputs may drive a maximum current of 200 mA.
The maximum current per output is limited to 5 mA.
X221
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1 OUT 0 33 IN 14 I
2 OUT 1 34 P5 V
3 OUT 2 35 IN 15
4 OUT 3 36 IN 16
5 OUT 4 37 IN 24
6 OUT 5 38 IN 17
7 OUT 6 39 IN 25I
8 OUT 7O
40 IN 18I
9 OUT 8O
41 IN 26
10 OUT 9 42 IN 19
11 OUT 10 43 IN 27
12 OUT 11 44 IN 20
13 OUT 12 45 M (GND) V
14 OUT 13 46 IN 21
15 OUT 14 47 IN 28I
16 OUT 15 48 IN 22I
17 M (GND) V 49 IN 29
18 IN 0 50 IN 23 V
19 IN 8 51 IN 30 I
20 IN 1 52 P5 V
21 IN 9 53 IN 31 I
22 IN 2 I 54 Not assigned
23 IN 10 55 M (GND) V
24 IN 3 56 OUT 16
25 IN 11 57 OUT 17
26 IN 4 58 OUT 18
27 M (GND) V 59 OUT 19O
28 IN 5 60 OUT 20O
29 IN 12 61 OUT 21
30 IN 6 I 62 OUT 22
31 IN 13 63 OUT 23
32 IN 7 64 Not assigned
Digital inputs/outputs withC-MOS level (5V)
25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel
04.0425.1 Interfaces
25-478 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
X211
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1 Not assigned 33 IN 39
2 OUT 47 34 IN 45
3 OUT 46 35 IN 38 I
4 OUT 45 36 IN 44
5 OUT 44O
37 IN 37
6 OUT 43O
38 M (GND) V
7 OUT 42 39 IN 36
8 OUT 41 40 IN 43
9 OUT 40 41 IN 35
10 M (GND) V 42 IN 42
11 Not assigned 43 IN 34 I
12 IN 63 I 44 IN 41
13 P5 V 45 IN 33
14 IN 62 46 IN 40
15 IN 55 47 IN 32
16 IN 61I
48 M (GND) V
17 IN 54I
49 OUT 39
18 IN 60 50 OUT 38
19 IN 53 51 OUT 37
20 M (GND) V 52 OUT 36
21 IN 52 53 OUT 35
22 IN 59 54 OUT 34
23 IN 51 55 OUT 33
24 IN 58 56 OUT 32O
25 IN 50I
57 OUT 31O
26 IN 57I
58 OUT 30
27 IN 49 59 OUT 29
28 IN 56 60 OUT 28
29 IN 48 61 OUT 27
30 IN 47 62 OUT 26
31 P5 V 63 OUT 25
32 IN 46 I 64 OUT 24
Note
The inputs/outputs are assigned CMOS level (5 V). The outputs are notshort-circuit-proof. Applying a higher voltage to the inputs will destroy them.
25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel
04.0425.1 Interfaces
25-479 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
X231
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1 OUT 48 11 OUT 56
2 OUT 49 12 OUT 57
3 OUT 50 13 OUT 58
4 OUT 51O
14 OUT 59O
5 OUT 52O
15 OUT 60O
6 OUT 53 16 OUT 61
7 OUT 54 17 OUT 62
8 OUT 55 18 OUT 63
9/10 M (GND) V 19/20 P5 V
Signal names
OUT 0 ..63 OutputsIN 0 .. 63 InputsP5 5 V power supplyM 0 V
Signal type
O OutputI InputV Voltage
Signal Description
OUT 0 – OUT 63: Output signals with C-MOS level 5V max. 5mA.
IN 0 – IN 63: CMOS inputs with 5V level
Note
OUT 0 to OUT 47:are switched over at cyclic intervals between 5 V and 0 V level after POWERON. After booting of the control, these outputs can be triggered via the PLC.
OUT 48 to OUT 63:are set to 5 V level after POWER ON (connection and triggering of relaypossible). After booting of the control, these outputs can be triggered via thePLC.
IN 0 to 63:5 V ––> Status FALSE read from PLC0 V ––> Status TRUE read from PLC
LED H1, ..., H4:H3: POWER: 24V supplyH1: Not usedH4: SEND: Status change on protocol transmissionH2: Not used
LEDs
25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel
04.0425.2 Settings
25-480 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
25.2 Settings
The following settings are possible with the S3 DIP switch (see Fig. 25-1):
Table 25-3 Assignments of S3 on MPI interface for customer operator panel
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning
Baud rate
onoff
1.5 Mbaud187.5 kbaud
Transmission cycle time Reception monitoring
offonoff
onoffoff
200 ms100 ms 50 ms
2400 ms1200 ms 600 ms
Bus address
onoff
on
on
1514
onoff
offon
on
1312
onoff
on
off
on1110
onoff
offoff
9 8
onoff
on
on
7 6
onoff
offon
off
5 4
onoff
on
off
off 3 2
onoff
offoff
1 0
onoff
MPI interface to customer operator panelstandard hardware
The following default settings are suggested:
Table 25-4 MPI interface for customer operator panel, default settings of S3 for 840D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:
on off on off on on off on – Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud– Transmission cycle time: 100 ms– Bus address: 6– MPI interface to customer operatorpanel
Table 25-4 MPI interface for customer operator panel, default settings of S3 for 810D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:
off off on off on on off on – Baud rate: 187.5 kbaud– Transmission cycle time: 100 ms– Bus address: 6– MPI interface to customer operatorpanel
Jumpering
25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel
04.0425.2 Settings
25-481 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The PLC expects a message frame from the interface module at least every500 msecs. If no key is pressed, the interface module sends message frames tothe PLC at cyclic intervals. The S3 switches (2 and 3) are used to set this cycletime. In this way, the load on the PLC caused by the interface module can beadjusted.
The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervals from thePLC and answers these at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linkedto the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with theS3 DIP switch (2 and 3).
The bus address for 840D must be set to “6”. Other addresses can be selected,but these must then also be set at FB1 in the basic PLC program.
Settings fortransmissioncycle time
Settings for receiptcycle time
Bus address
25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel
04.0425.3 Technical data
25-482 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
25.3 Technical data
Table 25-5 Technical data of MPI interface for customer operator panel
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
IP00
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption Max. 5 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 293 mm Height: 92 mm Depth: 15 mm
Weight approx. 0.5 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3
300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values 0 ... 55 °C –20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel
26-483 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
19” Machine Control Panel
The following description applies to the machine control panels:
Designation Properties Order number
19” machine control panelKey variant, screwmounted
6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0
19” machine control panel,membrane
Membrane variant,screw mounted
6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0
Machine control panel(MCP)
Membrane variant,mounted with tensionjacks
6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0
26.1 Function blocks
Microcontroller
Program memory
Data memory
64 inputs/48 outputs (5 V, no electrical isolation)
Voltage monitor
Temperature monitor
Watch dog timer
Isolated operator panel front interface (MPI)Baud rate for SINUMERIK 840D/810D: 1.5 MBdBaud rate for SINUMERIK FM-NC: 187.5 kbaud
Fig. 26-1 View (example: machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0; milling version)
Validity
26
04.0426.2 Block diagram
26-484 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26.2 Block diagram
Isolated MPI
Terminal block
9-pinSub-Dsocketconnector
P24
48 outputs 64 inputs
Controller
Monitoring:voltage, temperature,watchdog
KeyboardLEDs
SerialI/Ocontroller
5
6
9
1
Program memory Data memory
2P5
24 V
5 V
5 V1P5
X20
X10
DC/DC converter
Fig. 26-2 Block diagram of machine control panel
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.3 Control elements and interfaces
26-485 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26.3 Control elements and interfaces
26.3.1 Control elements
Front view
5
% %8
Y
4 6
7
Z
1
10010
100001000
[.]
X
9
WCSMCS
A B C FI G HD I
– +
T1 T2 T3
T4
T7
T10
T13 T14 T15
T12T11
T8 T9
T6T5
R1 R2 R3
R4
R7
R10
R13 R14 R15
R12R11
R8 R9
R6R5
J
Fig. 26-3 Machine control panel for milling machine (M-version)
A: EMERGENCY STOP keyB: Installation locations for control devices (d = 16 mm)C: Reset buttonD: Program controlE: Operating modes, machine functionsF: User keys (T1 to T15)G: Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15)H: Spindle controlI: Feed controlJ: Keyswitch (four positions)
% %–X
+X
–Z +Z
–C
+C
1
10010
100001000
[.]
+Y
–Y
WCSMCS
T1 T2 T3
T4
T7
T10
T13 T14 T15
T12T11
T8 T9
T6T5
R1 R2 R3
R4
R7
R10
R13 R14 R15
R12R11
R8 R9
R6R5
Fig. 26-4 Machine control panel for turning machine (T version)
The machine control panel operates on 5 VDC.
Position ofcontrol elements
Designation ofoperatingelements
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.3 Control elements and interfaces
26-486 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
64 inputs (30 keys, 2 rotary selector switches, keyswitch with four positions)
48 outputs (LEDs, assigned to the keys)
All keys are scanned individually, i.e. all keys can be pressed simultaneously.
EMERGENCY STOP button (A)Press the red button in emergency situations, if
1. life is at risk,
2. there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.
An EMERGENCY STOP generally shuts down all drives with the greatest pos-sible braking torque in a controlled manner.
Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it.
Machine Manufacturer
For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP:Please read the information supplied by the machine tool manufacturer!
Connect cable tobutton
EMERGENCY STOP machine control
Emergencystop button
Terminal
1
2
41 2
4
3
3
Fig. 26-5 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit
Warning
The openings for mounting control devices (letter B in Fig. 26-4) must not bechipped out, but drilled to the required width (risk of damage!).
Overviewoperatingelements
Description ofcontrol elements
Circuit forEMERGENCYSTOP button
Mounting slots forcontrol devices
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.3 Control elements and interfaces
26-487 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26.3.2 Interfaces
Rear view of machine control panel
Operator panel frontinterface (MPI) X20
Power supplyinterface X10
Switch S3
X10
X20
S3 3 1
4 2
EMERGENCYSTOP key
”
1 2 3 4
LED1...4Connection for equipotential bonding conductor
Fig. 26-6 Position of interfaces on rear side of machine control panel
X20: Operator panel front interface (MPI)
Socket: 9-pin female Sub-D connector strip, straight
X10: Power supply interface
Phoenix terminal block: 3-pin, straight
S3: DIL switch (8-way)
For setting of baud rate see: Section 26.4 “Jumpering”
References: /PHF/, NCU 570 Manual/PHD/, NCU 571-573 Manual
LEDs 1...4:
LED1: Not used
LED2: Not used
LED3: POWER: 24 V supply
LED4: SEND: Status change on protocol transmission
Position ofinterfaces
Overviewinterfaces
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.3 Control elements and interfaces
26-488 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connector designation: X20Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, straightMax. cable length: 200 mSpecial features: 1.5 MBaud/187.5 kBaud data transmission rate
Table 26-1 X20 pin assignments for machine control panel
X20
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1/2 Not assigned 6 2P5 VO
3 RS_OPI B 7 Not assigned
4 RTSAS_BTSS O 8 XRS_OPI B
5 2M VO 9 RTSPG_BTSS I
Signal names
RS_BTSS, XRS_BTSS Differential RS485 data-OPIRTSPG_BTSS Request to Send PG OPIRTSAS_BTSS Request to Send AS OPI2M Ground signal, isolated2P5 +5 V, isolated
Signal type
B Bi-directionalO OutputVO Voltage OutputI Input
Connector designation: X10Connector type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal block
Table 26-2 X10 pin assignments
Pin Name Meaning Type
1 P24 24 V potentialV
2 M24 Ground 24 VV
(Supplyvoltage)
3 SHIELD Shield connectionvoltage)
Operator panelfront interface(MPI)
Power supplyinterface
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.4 Mounting, connection and settings of machine control panel
26-489 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26.4 Mounting, connection and settings of machine controlpanel
Dimension drawing
146.2
4.8 +0,1
155
8,80
0 8.8
125
241.
2
357.
4
473.
648
2.6
Rearinstallation
1) Required clearance2) M4 retaining screw, DIN 125 washer (plain)3) Mounting position max. 75 to the vertical (see note)4) M5 grounding connector5) Installation locations for control devices (see Figure 26-3 and warning in Subsection 26.3.1)
Frontinstallation
1)
Detail
500
46.5
42
Front
3)
4)
4)
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÉÉÉÉÇÇÇÇÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
without flangeM4 welding stud
2)
Mountinglevel
> 6
0
5)
Fig. 26-7 Dimension drawing of machine control panel (version 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0 / 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0)
Note
For mounting positions greater than 60 a fan must additionally be installed tokeep the environmental conditions of the machine control panel constantlybelow 55 C.
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.4 Mounting, connection and settings of machine control panel
26-490 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26.4.1 Mounting
The machine control panels 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0 and6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 are attached using 10 M4 x 10 screws. Lockingelements are recommended in order to avoid damage to the surface.
1.5
1.0/100
07.
7–0
.5
116.
20.
2
232.
40.
2
348.
60.
2
457.
1+
0.5
464.
80.
2
129.7+0.5
7.7–0.5
137.40.2
0
1) Recommended for rear mounting only2) DIN ISO 11013) Distance when mounting the machine control panel and operator panel: 18
2)
3)
Panel cutout of machine control panelR1.51)
4.3 or M4
Panel cutout for operator panel front
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 26-8 Panel cutout for machine control panels 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0 and 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0
Screw fastening
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.4 Mounting, connection and settings of machine control panel
26-491 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0 is attached using tensionjacks (see Fig. 26-9).
Cutout symmetrical panel symmetrical to operator panel
Installation surface1.5 to 6 thick Operator
panel Clip
max. torque0.5 Nm
132.5
451+1
132.5
155.8123.534.2 34.2103.3
1.5 to 6
35
482.6
155
137.
6 +
1Fig. 26-9 Panel cutout for machine control panel 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0
26.4.2 Connections
The 24V supply is connected to the X10 connector at the rear of the machinecontrol panel via a 3-pin terminal block (see Fig. 26-6). The equipotential bond-ing conductor is fixed by means of an M5 screw.
The machine control panel is connected to the OPI on the NCU (X101) using anMPI bus cable via the interface (X4) or the PCU interface (MPI/DP). The MPIconnector is plugged into X20 on the rear of the machine control panel (see Fig.26-6) and fixed with a screw.
Tension jackfastening
Connecting the24V power supply
Connecting theMPI connection(X20)
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.4 Mounting, connection and settings of machine control panel
26-492 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26.4.3 Machine control panel settings
The following settings are possible with the S3 DIP switch (see Fig. 26-6):
Table 26-3 S3 jumpering on machine control panel
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning / value
onoff
Baud rate 1.5 Mbaud187.5 kbaud
offonoff
onoffoff
Transmission cycletime200 ms100 ms 50 ms
Reception monitoring2400 ms1200 ms 600 ms
onoff
on
on
Bus address1514
onoff
off
on
on
1312
onoff
on
off
on1110
onoff
offoff
9 8
onoff
on
on
7 6
onoff
offon
off
5 4
onoff
on
off
off 3 2
onoff
offoff
1 0
onoff
MPI interface to customer operator panelStandard hardware
The following default settings are suggested:
Table 26-4 Default settings S3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning
off off on on off on off on
Baud rate: 1.5 MbaudTransmission cycle time: 100 msBus address: 6
Standard hardware
The PLC expects a message frame from the machine control panel at least ev-ery 500 msecs. The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLCat cyclic intervals when no key is pressed. This cycle time is set with S3 DIPswitches 2 and 3. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machinecontrol panel to be adjusted.
Jumpering
Settings fortransmissioncycle time
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.4 Mounting, connection and settings of machine control panel
26-493 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervalsfrom the PLC and answers these at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitor-ing time is linked to the transmission cycle time of the machine control paneland is set with the S3 DIP switch (2 and 3).
The bus address must be set to the value 6. Any other setting will be ignored bythe software.
Settings for receiptcycle time
Bus address
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.5 Setting the interface parameters
26-494 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26.5 Setting the interface parameters
Before the machine control panel can exchange data with the PLC CPU via theMPI interface, the appropriate interface parameters for the configuration mustbe activated. They are activated by means of the MPI bus address settings us-ing DIP switch S3 in accordance with the following table.
Table 26-5 Correlation between MPI bus address and GD parameters with machinecontrol panel
MPI ad-dress
Sequence for configuring pur-poses
Preset GD parameters Receive -Transmit
0, ..., 3 Reserved
4 5. Machine control panel 5 . 1 . 1 – 5 . 2 . 1
5 5. Machine control panel 5 . 1 . 1 – 5 . 2 . 1
6 Reserved
7 4. Machine control panel 4 . 1 . 1 – 4 . 2 . 1
8 4. Machine control panel 4 . 1 : 1 – 4 . 2 . 1
9 3. Machine control panel 3 . 1 . 1 – 3 . 2 . 1
10 3. Machine control panel 3 . 1 . 1 – 3 . 2 . 1
11 2. Machine control panel 2 . 1 . 1 – 2 . 2 . 1
12 2. Machine control panel 2 . 1 . 1 – 2 . 2 . 1
13 1. Machine control panel 1 . 1 . 1 – 1 . 2 . 1
14 1. Machine control panel 1 . 1 . 1 – 1 . 2 . 1
15 1. Machine control panel 1 . 1 . 1 – 1 . 2 . 1
AS 314(PLC)
Send
Receive
Mac
hine
cont
rol p
anel
Fig. 26-10 Receiving and transmitting from view of machine control panel
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.6 Technical data
26-495 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26.6 Technical data
Table 26-6 Technical data for machine control panel
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front panel IP54 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE / cULus
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption, max. 5 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 483 mmHeight: 155 mm
Depth: 88.5 mmMounting depth: 46.5 mm
Weight approx. 0.5 kg
Basic color of casing Anthracite, acc. to SN 47030, Part 2, Color code: 614
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2
3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2
2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–20 ... 60 °C (membrane)–25 ... 55 °C (mech)
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.7 Spare parts
26-496 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26.7 Spare parts
For machine control panel no. 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0 the followingsets of key cover labels are available:
Table 26-7 Key caps for machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0
Order number Number Description
6FC5148-0AA14-0AA0 16 Transparent, with stickers
6FC5148-0AA13-0AA0
9020202020
ergo-grayred
greenyellow
mid-gray
The following slide-in labels are available for machine control panel numbers6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0:
Table 26-8 Slide-in labels for machine control panel 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0,6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0
Order number Number Description
6FC5248-0AF22-0AA0 33 A4 films, membrane keys for
labeling with laser printer
The following rotary switches are available for machine control panel numbers6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0, 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0:
Table 26-9 Rotary switch for machine control panel
Order number Number Description
6FC5247-0AA21-0AA0 2One rotary switch each for axis and spindleoverride with rotary knobs and covers
The following key sets are available for machine control panel numbers6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0, 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0:
Table 26-10 Key set for machine control panels above
Order number Number Description
6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 10Set of keys for keyswitchconsisting of 10 x set of 3 577 213
Key covers andslide-in labels
Rotary switch formachine controlpanel
Set of keys
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.7 Spare parts
26-497 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26.7.1 Slide-in label film
The slide-in label film shown in Fig. 26-11 can be ordered under the number6FC5 248-0AF22-0AA0 and printed with user-specific labels.
Distance fromside margin32
2.32
14
14
15
1114
115
1) Labeling area for 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0, ; 2) Labeling area for 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0
546
.815
.05
15.0
515
.05
15.0
515
,.515
.05
15.0
515
,.5
44
44
44
44
44
35
190
1)
2)
Fig. 26-11 Slide-in labels for machine control panel 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0,A4 format for laser printers with clear window for LEDs, no lines or text
26 19” Machine Control Panel
04.0426.7 Spare parts
26-498 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
26 19” Machine Control Panel
Notes
27-499 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Standard PC Keyboard MF-II
This description applies to the following components:
Component Order number
SINUMERIK 810D/840D/840C Standard PC keyboard(MF-II)incl. 2m PS/2 cable (KBPC PX/US; S26381-K340-V110)incl. detachable trackball rest
6FC5203-0AC01-0AA0
Fig. 27-1 View of standard PC keyboard MF-II
The standard PC keyboard MF-II combines USB and PST technologies, de-pending on the connecting cable. This professional keyboard has a striking,modern design and useful extra features. For greater ease of use it includes fiveadditional function keys for one-stroke launch of applications. The detachabletrackball rest offers ergonomic operation and can simply be removed if space isat a premium. These features make the standard PC keyboard MF-II the idealchoice for professional use.
Compact design with low profile, ergonomic keys, up to 6 charactersassignable to one key
MF-II compatible, 104/105 key layout
System compatibility: PS/2 and USB
Interface: PS/2 or USB, depending on the cable usedPower On function only with PS/2 cable, ACPI function only with USB cable(T26139-Y3812-V1)
Operating systems: Windows 3.11/95/NT/XP
Restricted suitability for industrial use; not intended for permanent use. Onlyfor use in installation and servicing
Validity
Brief description
Features
27
04.04
27-500 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 27-1 Technical data for the standard PC keyboard MF-II
Input voltage + 5V DC
Power consumption Max. 0.3 W
Degree of protection to DIN EN60529 (IEC 60529)
IP20
Humidity classification in accor-dance with DIN EN 60721–3–3
Class 3K5 condensation and icing excluded,Low air temperature 0 °C
Permissible ambient temperatureStorage and transporta-
tion–20 ... 50 °C
Operation15 ... 32 °C
Weight Approx. 1 kg
Width Height Depth
Di-men-
Without trackball rest 472 mm 36 mm 175 mmmen-sions With trackball rest 472 mm 36 mm 248 mm
Product security IEC 60959, UL 1950
Ergonomics ISO 9241–4/EN 29241–4
Electromagnetic compatibilityCE certification in accordance with EU Directives89/336/EEC (EN 55022/B) EN 55024 EN61000–3–2 EN 61000–3–3
Technical data
27 Standard PC Keyboard MF-II
28-501 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C
The following description applies to the component:
Designation Key type Order number
CNC full keyboard KB 483C mechanical 6FC5203-0AF20-0AA0
28.1 Brief descriptionThe CNC full keyboard KB 483C is an operating component of the CNCs SI-NUMERIK 810D, 840Di and 840D. It is fitted with short-stroke keys.
It is supplied with a USB cable (1.5 m) and tension jacks for mounting.
The key layout is predefined and cannot be modified, i.e. the key caps cannotbe transposed.
Fig. 28-1 Layout of CNC full keyboard KB 483C
Keys
– 78 mechanical keys in standard/US QUERTY layout
Keygroups
– Alpha keygroup with special characters
– Numerical keygroup with special characters
– Cursor keygroup
– NC function keys with hot keys for fast selection of operating area
Connections
– USB 1.1
Validity
Design
28
04.0428.2 Dimension drawings
28-502 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
28.2 Dimension drawings
X302
482.6
PE
con
nect
ion
M5
scre
w te
rmin
al 132.
511
0.5
0.5
20.210.8 447.2 0.5
PE connection screw terminal Cable clamp
US
B c
able
incl
uded
in th
e sc
ope
of s
uppl
y
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 28-2 Front, side and rear views of CNC full keyboard KB 483C
28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C
04.0428.3 Control elements and interfaces
28-503 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
28.3 Control elements and interfaces
28.3.1 Control elements
see Fig. 28-1
The key codes assigned to the relevant node in the matrix are stored in the key-board table. When a key is actuated, the appropriate code is read from the tableand sent to the PCU.
Note
In contrast to standard USB keyboards, no key code is transmitted when theShift key alone is pressed.
The keyboard does not support Suspend mode or a Remote Wakeup function.
1. Keyboard level 2. Keyboard level
Labeling Key functionon standardPC keyboard
Shift key USBcode
Labeling Key functionon standardPC keyboard
Shiftkey
USBcode
q q 14 Q q 14
w w 1a W w 1a
e e 08 I e 08
r r 15 R r 15
t t 17 T t 17
y y 1c Y y 1c
u u 18 U u 18
i i 0c I i 0c
o o 12 O o 12
p p 13 M p 13
a aNo shift key
04 A aSHIFT
04
s sNo shift key
16 S sSHIFT
16
d d 07 D d 07
f f 09 F f 09
g g 0a G g 0a
h h 0b H h 0b
j j 0d J j 0d
k k 0e K k 0e
l l 0f L l 0f
z z 1d Z z 1d
x x 1b X x 1b
c c 06 C c 06
Key assignments
Keyboard codes
28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C
04.0428.3 Control elements and interfaces
28-504 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1. Keyboard level 2. Keyboard level
Labeling Key functionon standardPC keyboard
Shift key USBcode
Labeling Key functionon standardPC keyboard
Shiftkey
USBcode
v v 19 V v 19
b b 05 B b 05
n n No shift key 11 N n SHIFT 11
m m
y
10 M (GND) m 10
’ ’ 34 ” ” 34
* * SHIFT 25 None 35
[ [ 2f 2f
] ] 30 30
\ \ 31 | | 31
, , 36 < < 36
; ; 33 : : 33
Blank space Blank space 2c +/– ~ 35
1 1 1e ! ! 1e
2 2 1f @ @ 1f
3 3 20 # # 20
4 4 21 $ $ SHIFT 21
5 5 22 % % 22
6 6 23 ^ ^& 23
7 7 24 & & 24
8 8 25 * * 25
9 9No shift key
26 ( ( 26
0 0No shift key
27 ) ) 27
– –(NB) 56 _ 2d
. . 37 > > 37
/ / 38 ? ? 38
= = 2e Not assigned
+ + 57 ~ ~ 35
BACKSPACE BACKSPACE 2a BACKSPACEShift keyBACKSPACE
2a
DEL DEL 4c DEL Shift DEL SHIFT 4c
INSERT INSERT 49 INSERT Shift INSERTSHIFT
49
INPUT RETURN 28 INPUT Shift RETURN 28
TAB TAB RIGHT 2b TAB TAB LEFT 2b
ALARM CANCEL ESC 29
HELP F12 45
CHANNEL F11 44
MACHINE Shift F11 SHIFT 44 Not assigned
PROGRAMMANAGER
7 (NB)No shift key
5F
PROGRAM 1 (NB)No shift key
59
28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C
04.0428.3 Control elements and interfaces
28-505 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
1. Keyboard level 2. Keyboard level
Labeling Key functionon standardPC keyboard
Shift key USBcode
Labeling Key functionon standardPC keyboard
Shiftkey
USBcode
ALARM 9 (NB)No shift key
61
OFFSET 3 (NB)No shift key
5b Not assigned
CUSTOM Shift F12 SHIFT 45
g
NEXT WINDOW Home 4a NEXT WINDOW Shift Home 4a
END END 4d END Shift ENDSHIFT
4d
PAGE UP Page up 4b PAGE UPSHIFT
4b
PAGE DOWN Page Down 4e PAGE DOWN 4e
SELECT 5 (NB) 5d Not assigned
CURSOR UP Cursor up No shift key 52 CURSOR UPShift Cursorup
52
CURSOR DOWN Cursor down 51CURSORDOWN
Shift Cursordown
SHIFT
51
CURSOR RIGHTCursor right
4f CURSOR RIGHTShift Cursorright
SHIFT4f
CURSOR LEFT Cursor left 50 CURSOR LEFTShift Cursorleft
50
CTRL Control CONTROLNot assigned
ALT Alt ALTNot assigned
SHIFT No USB key code is transferred if the SHIFT key is pressed on its own
28.3.2 Interfaces
The interface (see Fig. 28-2) is designed as a ”high powered interface”(5 V/500 mA). As a result, the keyboard can be connected only to USB hubswhich possess their own power supply and whose downstream ports are capa-ble of supplying a 500 mA current. A standard USB cable of max. 5 m in length(recommended: 1.5 m) is supported.
Connector designation: X302Connector type: USB-B connector, 4-pin
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
USB upstream portX 302
28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C
04.0428.4 Mounting
28-506 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
28.4 Mounting
112.
5+1
450+1
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 28-3 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard KB 483C (plate thickness 1.5 - 6.0 mm)
Dimension drawing for mounting
Detail: Mounting of tension jacksTorque: 0.8 Nm
Rear viewwith tension jacksrear view with tension jacks
Dimensions in mmMounting frame
Fig. 28-4 Dimension drawing for mounting the CNC full keyboard KB 483C
Panel cutout
28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C
04.0428.5 Spare parts and accessories
28-507 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Mounting position
Mounting position max. 60 to the vertical
Front
Fig. 28-5 Mounting position
28.5 Spare parts and accessories
Table 28-1 Set of tension jacks for CNC full keyboard KB 483C
Order number Number Description
6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9Tension jack set for supplementary compo-nents with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm
Set of tensionjacks
28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C
04.0428.6 Technical data
28-508 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
28.6 Technical data
Table 28-2 Technical data for CNC full keyboard KB 483C
Safety
Protective class / Approvals III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 / CE
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529 Front: IP54 Rear side: IP00
Sealing to cabi-ing to EN 60529(IEC 60529)
Front: IP54 Rear side: IP00Sealing to cabi
net: IP65
Noise immunity
ESD Air discharge ± 8 kV / contact discharge ± 4 kV
HF radio 10 V/m, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 80 – 1000 MHz
Burst (on USB cable) ± 2.5 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz
HF conducted ” ” 10 V, 80 % AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 – 80 MHz
Electrical data
Supply volt. / current (typ.) 4.75, ..., 5.25 V / 80 mA
Power consumption, max. 0.4 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 483 mm Depth: 31 mmHeight: 133 mm
pMounting depth: 20.2 mm
Weight approx. 1.3 kg
Max. distance from PCU 5 m (recommended: 1.5 m)
Basic color of casing Anthracite 614
Key colors Pastel Turquoise RAL 6034, Pantone YellowLight Basic 700, Medium Basic 701
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–25 ... 55 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C
29-509 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C
The following description applies to the component:
Designation Keyboard Order number
CNC full keyboard KB 310C mechanical 6FC5203-0AF21-0AA0
29.1 Brief description
The CNC full keyboard KB 310C is an operating component of the CNCs SI-NUMERIK 810D, 840Di and 840D. It is fitted with short-stroke keys.
It is supplied with a USB cable (1.5 m) and tension jacks for mounting.
The key layout is predefined and cannot be modified, i.e. the key caps cannotbe transposed.
Fig. 29-1 Layout of CNC full keyboard KB 310C
Keys
Standard/US QWERTY layout
75 mechanical keys
Validity
Design
29
04.0429.2 Dimension drawings
29-510 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Arrangement
Alpha keygroup with special characters
Numerical keygroup with special characters
Cursor keygroup
NC function keys with hot keys for fast selection of operating area
Connections
USB 1.1
29.2 Dimension drawings
X302 – USB-B Cable clamp for USB-cablePE terminals
175
153
Mou
ntin
g br
acke
ts
Dimensions in mm 310
31
20
Fig. 29-2 Front, side and rear views of CNC full keyboard KB 310C
29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C
04.0429.3 Control elements and interfaces
29-511 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
29.3 Control elements and interfaces
29.3.1 Control elements
see Fig. 29-1
see “CNC Full Keyboard 483C”, “Control elements” section
29.3.2 Interfaces
The interface (see Fig. 29-2) is designed as a “high powered interface” (5 V/500mA). As a result, the keyboard can be connected only to USB hubs which pos-sess their own power supply and whose downstream ports are capable of sup-plying a 500 mA current. A standard USB cable of max. 5 m in length (recom-mended: 1.5 m) is supported.
Connector designation: X302Connector type: USB-B connector, 4-pin
For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”
Key assignments
Keyboard codes
USB upstream portX 302
29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C
04.0429.4 Mounting
29-512 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
29.4 Mounting
Note
When mounting, install and secure the USB connecting cable properly toensure that it cannot chafe against the frame of the keyboard.
155+
1
285+1
Fig. 29-3 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard KB 310C (plate thickness 1.5 – 6.0 mm)
Panel cutout
29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C
04.0429.4 Mounting
29-513 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Dimension drawing for mounting
Detail: Mounting of tension jacksTorque: 0.8 Nm
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 29-4 Dimension drawing for mounting the CNC full keyboard KB 310C
Mounting position
Mounting position max. 60 to the vertical
Front
Fig. 29-5 Mounting position
29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C
04.0429.5 Technical data
29-514 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
29.5 Technical data
Table 29-1 Technical data for CNC full keyboard KB 310C
Safety
Protective class / Approvals III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 / CE
Degree of protection accord- Front: Rear side: Sealing to cabi-g ping to EN 60529 IP54 IP00
gnet: IP65
Noise immunity
ESD Air discharge ± 8 kV / contact discharge ± 4 kV
HF radio 10 V/m, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 80 – 1000 MHz
Burst (on USB cable) ± 2.5 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz
HF conducted “ ” 10 V, 80 % AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 – 80 MHz
Electrical data
Supply volt. / urrent, typ. 4.75, ..., 5.25 V / 80 mA
Power consumption, max. 0.4 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 310 mm Depth: 31 mmHeight: 175 mm
pMounting depth: 20 mm
Weight approx. 0.9 kg
Max. distance from PCU 5 m (recommended: 1.5 m)
Basic color of casing Anthracite 614
Key colors Pastel Turquoise RAL 6034, Pantone YellowLight Basic 700, Medium Basic 701
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C
04.0429.6 Spare parts and accessories
29-515 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
29.6 Spare parts and accessories
Table 29-2 Set of tension jacks for CNC full keyboard KB 310C
Order number Number Description
6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9Tension jack set for supplementary compo-nents with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm
Set of tensionjacks
29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C
04.0429.6 Spare parts and accessories
29-516 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C
Notes
30-517 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S
The following description applies to the component:
OP 032S CNC full keyboard Order No. 6FC5203-0AC00-1AA0
Standard/US QWERTY layout
74 mechanical keys
Alpha keygroup with special characters
Numerical keygroup with special characters
Cursor keygroup
NC function keys
Fig. 30-1 Front view of CNC full keyboard OP 032S
30.1 Interfaces
Connector designation: X111Connector type: Mini DIN connector 6-pin, straightCable length to PCU: max. 2.5 m
Validity
Features
PS2 keyboardinterface to PCU(X111)
30
04.0430.2 Mounting instructions, dimension drawing and panel cutout
30-518 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
30.2 Mounting instructions, dimension drawing and panelcutout
0
13.8 295.6 309.4154.7
175169
162.5
12.56
0
Fig. 30-2 Dimension drawing of CNC full keyboard OP 032S
5
7.5
6.74.4
0
136.5 273277.4
279.7
0.5
145.5153
158
M4 (6 times) 1)
7 (4 times)
1) Riveted, press-fit nut M4 or
threaded hole M4
Front panel cutout for installation from the rear: W x H = 301.4 x 153 mm
Fig. 30-3 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard OP 032S (rear view)
30 CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S
04.0430.3 Technical data
30-519 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
30.3 Technical data
Table 30-1 Technical data for CNC full keyboard OP 032S
Safety
Protective class / approvals III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 / CE
Degree of protection accord- Front: IP54 Rear side: IP20g ping to EN 60529
Noise immunity
ESD Air discharge ± 8 kV / contact discharge ± 4 kV
HF radio 10 V/m, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 80 – 1000 MHz
Burst (on USB cable) ± 2.5 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz
HF conducted ” ” 10 V, 80 % AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 – 80 MHz
Electrical data
Supply volt. / current, typ. 4.75, ..., 5.25 V / 80 mA
Power consumption, max. 0.4 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 24 mmDimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 24 mm
Weight approx. 1.3 kg
Mechanical ambient condi-tions
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2
3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2
2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Shock stressing 150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3
150 m/s2, 11 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Shipping(in packaging)
Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)
–25 ... 55 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
30 CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S
04.0430.4 Spare parts and accessories
30-520 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
30.4 Spare parts and accessories
Table 30-2 Spare parts and accessories
Designation Remarks Order number
Retaining screws 100 jacks 6FC3998-7BJ10
Key covers 1 set 6FC5248-0AA02-0AA0
30 CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S
31-521 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3.5” Floppy Disk Drive
The following description applies to the SINUMERIK 3.5” floppy disk drive(order number 6FC5235-0AA05-0AA1)
The AT-compatible floppy disk drive with lockable front door is used to read andwrite data from/to 3.5” disks. It can be installed in a customer operator panelfront.
3.5” floppy disk drive including connecting cables for connection to the PCU20/50/70 (length: max. 0.5 m).
50
145
Fig. 31-1 Front view
Ribbon cable socket connector
48.6 185
Fig. 31-2 Side view (right)
Validity
Function
Function block
Dimensiondrawings
31
04.04
31-522 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
185
17
1 2 3
Fig. 31-3 Top view
M3 fixing screw Max. depth ofengagement: 4 mm Ribbon cable socket connector (34-pin)
Shieldconnection M4
X111(not assigned)
X121(power supply interface)
Ground terminal
Fig. 31-4 Rear view
X121: 3-pin terminal block
Table 31-1 Pin assignments for power supply
X1
Pin Name Meaning Type
1 P24 external +24 V DCVI2 M external Ground VI
(Voltage Input)3 PE Protective conductor
(Voltage Input)
Powersupply interface
31 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive
04.04
31-523 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
6
3.6
112
133.8
118
130
25 32 38.7R3
42
M3 fixing screwMax. depth of engagement: 4 mm
Mounting depth (calculated from surface of mounting panel): 185 mm depth dimension (see Figs. 31-2 and 31-3) + 20 mm clearance for cable outlet
Panel cutout
Fig. 31-5 Dimension drawing for drive mounting
Caution
The disk drive can be mounted in any position except upside down.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
5.5
0
3.5
Ø2.4+0.1
8.5–0.1
Ø5
710 degrees
2.5
_______1) all around
SIEMENS
Section A - B
49.9–0.2
44.2
5.53
0
138.5–0.1
R1.5
144.6–0.2139.1
11)
5.5
03 B
A
Fig. 31-6 Dimension drawing of blanking plate
Installationinstructions
Dimensiondrawingblanking plate
31 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive
04.04
31-524 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 32-3 Technical data for floppy disk drive
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529
Front panel IP54 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption Max. 5 W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width: 145 mmHeight: 50 mm
Depth: 202 mmMounting depth:185 mm
Weight approx. 0.8 kg
Distance from PCU max. 0.5 m
Mechanical ambient conditions
Vibration stressing 10 – 100 Hz: 1.5g101 – 200 Hz: 1.0g201 – 600 Hz: 0.5g
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)
Relevant standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values 0 ... 55 °C –20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %
Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
Technical data
31 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive
32-525 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface
This description applies to the following components:
Component Order number
3 5” floppy disk drive with USB interface6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1
3.5” floppy disk drive with USB interface6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2
Cover (spare part) 6FC5247-0AA20-0AA0
The floppy disk drive is used for reading and writing data from/onto 3.5” floppy disks with 1.44 MB capacity
Can be mounted in front panels
System can be booted from floppy drive
Connection: USB 1.1
Can be supplied in two variants to suit different operating conditions.
3.5” floppy disk drive with 1 m long USB cable connected.
Validity
Features
Scope of delivery
32
04.0432.1 Notes about operation
32-526 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
32.1 Notes about operation
It is not permissible to use a longer USB cable.
The drives are high-power devices (power consumption up to 500 mA); theymust not therefore be operated on low-power USB outputs (up to 100 mA).
Floppy disks should not be left in the drive for longer than necessary as
1. they and the drive are not then protected against dust,
2. the risk of data errors increases at temperatures higher than 45 C.
32.1.1 Floppy disk drive (order no. 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1)
A PCU operating with PCU basic software WinNT4.0 = V07.03.03 is required tooperate the USB floppy disk drive (Order No. ...-1AA1) on the SINUMERIKPCU 50 (566 MHz / 1.2 GHz) with Windows NT 4.0. You can install this version by loading service pack V07.03.03 (available fromyour local Siemens sales office).
The service pack V07.03.03 adds the driver for the USB floppy disk drive to thesoftware version V07.03.02 which is preinstalled on shipped PCU 50s.
The USB disk drive can be operated on SINUMERIK PCU 50s and PCU 70swith Windows XP without a separate driver.
To use the USB floppy disk drive on the following SIMATIC panels OP/TP 270 MP 270B MP 370a separate driver is required. This driver can be downloaded from the Siemenswebsite (Service & Support page for SIMATIC panels) (USB Storage DriverV1.0). The driver also includes documentation with installation instructions.
No separate driver is required to operate the USB floppy disk drive on SIMATICpanel PCs (except for Windows NT 4.0 operating system).
32.1.2 Floppy disk drive (Order No. 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2)
A PCU 50 / 70 (566 MHz / 1.2 GHz) with BIOS V02.03.07 and PCU basic soft-ware WinNT4.0 V07.03.03 or WinXP V07.03.02.01 is required to operate theUSB floppy disk drive (Order No. ...-1AA2). You can install the PCU basic software WinNT V07.03.03 by loading servicepack V07.03.03 (available from your local Siemens sales office).Service pack V07.03.03 adds the driver for the USB floppy disk drive to the soft-ware version V07.03.02 which is preinstalled on shipped PCU 50s.
Longer USB cable
Required power
Leaving floppy disksin drive
SINUMERIK PCU 50and PCU 70
SIMATIC panels andpanel PCs
SINUMERIK PCU 50and PCU 70
32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface
04.0432.1 Notes about operation
32-527 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The USB disk drive can be operated on SINUMERIK PCU 50s andPCU 70s with Windows XP without a separate driver.
Only one floppy disk drive may be connected to each PCU 50 / 70; the drivemust be connected before the PCU is switched on.
When the BIOS settings remain unchanged, the USB floppy disk drive can beaccessed as drive b: In operation with HMI Advanced, the entry “FloppyDisk=”in file MMC.INI must therefore be adapted.
Reading the emergency boot disks V02.03.x or V02.04.x from the USB diskdrive takes a very long time. We therefore recommend the use of the emer-gency boot disks V02.05.00 (available from your local Siemens sales office).
The USB floppy disk drive is approved for operating systems MS Win-dows 2000 and MS Windows XP. The appropriate drivers for the disk drive aresupplied with the operating system software.
To use the USB floppy disk drive on the following SIMATIC panels OP/TP 270 MP 270B MP 370a separate driver is required. This driver can be downloaded from the Siemenswebsite (Service & Support page for SIMATIC panels) (USB Storage DriverV1.0). The driver also includes documentation with installation instructions.
SIMATIC panel PCs
SIMATIC panels
32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface
04.0432.2 Description
32-528 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
32.2 Description
32.2.1 Dimension drawings
50
145
Fig. 32-1 Front view
Fig. 32-2 Top view
Fig. 32-3 Side view from right
32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface
04.0432.2 Description
32-529 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
32.2.2 Hardware interface
Table 32-1 Connector assignments - USB standard 1.1
Contact No. Signal name Description
1 Vcc Power supply
2 – Data Data–
3 + Data Data +
4 Ground Ground
The cable is fitted with a standard USB-A connector at the device end
Strain relief
Fig. 32-4 Strain relief of cable
32.2.3 Software interface
The drive complies with USB standard 1.1.
Note
The driver software is not included in the scope of supply.
Pin assignments
Cable
32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface
04.0432.2 Description
32-530 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
32.2.4 Installation instructions
133.80mm.
112.00mm.
42.0
0mm
.
118.00mm.
32.0
0mm
.
38.7
0mm
.
d 6.00mm
d 3.30mm
Fig. 32-5 Panel cutout
Caution
The mounting position of the disk drive is shown in Figs. 32-6 and 32-7. Thedrive must not be installed upside down.
+/– 20
Fig. 32-6 Side view of mounting position
32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface
04.0432.2 Description
32-531 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
+/– 20
Fig. 32-7 Front view of mounting position
Note
The front cover must be closed to prevent ingress of dirt or damage.
32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface
04.0432.3 Technical data
32-532 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
32.3 Technical data
Order number ...-1AA1
Table 32-2 Technical data for the USB floppy disk drive(order number 6FC235-0AA05-1AA1)
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection ac-cording to EN 60529
Front panel IP54 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Input voltage 5.25 V DC
Power consumption Max. 2.5 W
Mechanical data
DimensionsWidth: 145 mmHeight: 50 mm
Depth: 161 mmMounting depth: 144 mm
Weight approx. 0.3 kg
Orientation any (except upside down)
Distance from PCU max. 5 m
Mechanical ambient con-ditions
Operation Transportation/Storage
Vibration stressing 10 – 200 Hz: 0.5 g 10 – 200 Hz: 1 g
Shock stressing 5 g; 30 ms 10 g; 11 ms
Applicable Standards EN 60721–3–3, 3M4 EN 60721–3–2, 2M2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, wa-ter spray and the formationof ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Transportation/storage
Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values 4 ... 50 °C –20 ... 60 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h
Relative air humidity limits(no condensation)
20 ... 80 % 5 ... 90 %
Permissible change in rela-tive air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface
04.0432.3 Technical data
32-533 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Order number ...-1AA2
Table 32-3 Technical data for the USB floppy disk drive(order number 6FC235-0AA05-1AA2)
Safety
Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178
Degree of protection ac-cording to EN 60529
Front panel IP54 Rear side IP00
Approvals CE
Electrical data
Input voltage 5.25 V DC
Power consumption Max. 2.5 W
Mechanical data
DimensionsWidth: 145 mmHeight: 50 mm
Depth: 161 mmMounting depth: 144 mm
Weight approx. 0.32 kg
Orientation any (except upside down)
Distance from PCU max. 5 m
Mechanical ambient con-ditions
Operation Transportation/storage
Vibration stressing 10 – 200 Hz: 0.5 g 10 – 200 Hz: 1 g
Shock stressing 5 g; 30 ms 10 g; 11 ms
Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3, 3M4 EN 60721–3–2, 2M2
Climatic ambient conditions
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Moisture condensation, wa-ter spray and the formationof ice
not permissible
Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils
Operation Storage Transportation
Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2
Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4
Temperature limiting values 4 ... 50 °C –22 ... 60 °C –40 ... 65 °C
Temperature rate of change max. 20 K/h max. 30 K/h
Relative air humidity limits(no condensation)
20 ... 80 %at 4 ... 52 °C
5 ... 90 %at –22 ... 60 °C
5 ... 95 %at –40 ... 65 °C
Permissible change in rela-tive air humidity
max. 0.1 % /min
32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface
04.0432.3 Technical data
32-534 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface
Notes
33-535 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Heat Dissipation
For the technical data for the control components (e.g. degree of protection,power loss, etc.), please refer to the “Technical data ...” section for the individualcomponent.
Note
To calculate the heat dissipation, the total power loss PVtotal of allheat-generating components in a casing must be taken into account.Total power lossPVtotal= Pv1 + Pv2 + Pv3 + ...[ω]
Convection surface area A [m2]:The surface areas of the front and bottom faces are not included in theconvection surface area calculation.
Heat dissipation can take place as follows:
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence
Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling
Heat dissipation by open-circuit ventilation
Means of heatdissipation
33
04.04
33-536 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
PVtot[W] A [m2] =
5 T [K]
Operatorpanel front
T1 T2
Operatorpanel front
T1 T2
Air flow through fan: 100...165 m3/h
PVtot[W] A [m2] =
10 * T [K]
Operatorpanel front
T1 T2
Notes:Air filters must be provided tomaintain the permissibleenvironmental conditions stated inthe “Technical data ...” section.
The necessary free convection surface area A[m2] of the space to beenclosed (steel or aluminum sheet, 1.5 mm thick), relative to a temperaturedifference T2 – T1 = T 10 K, is calculated as an approximation from:
The approximate air flownecessary for removing lost heat iscalculated from:
Heat dissipation by natural convection
Heat dissipation by natural convection and
internal air turbulence
Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling
3.5 * PVtot [W] V [m3/h] =
T [K]
Recommendation:The fan must be mounted in such away to ensure optimum heatdissipation.In addition, ventilation clearance ofmin. 100 mm must also be providedin front of the fan.In the case of open-circuit coolingor ventilation, the ventilation slotsmust be kept clear.
Operatorpanel front
T1 T2
Heat dissipation by open-circuit ventilation
Fig. 33-1 Means of heat dissipation
Note
If the convection surface area A [m2] is not large enough for “Heat dissipationby natural convection”, then “Heat dissipation by natural convection andinternal air turbulence” or “Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling orventilation” should be used.
For hot spots and heat concentration in narrow casings, “Heat dissipation bynatural convection and internal air turbulence” is recommended.
For thermally critical applications, the total power loss PVtotal can also bedetermined as follows:– Current measurement at 24 V supply voltage– Power loss with PVtotal [W] = U (24 V) * I (measured value in amps)
33 Heat Dissipation
04.04
33-537 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
The power loss (thermal) dissipated by the components in an operator unitshould be dissipated using open-circuit ventilation. The required volumetric flow V must be calculated for a temperature difference of T2 – T1 = ∆T 10 K.
External temperature = T1 = 45 degreesInternal temperature = T2 = 55 degrees ––> ∆T = 10 K
OP 012 13 WPCU 50 40 W
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––PVtotal = 53 W
(max. 180 W)
Example for heat dissipation with open-circuit ventilation: PCU 50 with OP 012
Calculating the thermal powerloss(including internal power supply unit):
3.5 * PVtotal [W] V = = 18.6 [m3/h]
T [K]
Operatorpanel front
T1 T2
PCU
Fig. 33-2 Calculating heat dissipation for PCU 50 with OP 012
Calculating thethermal power lossPCU 50
33 Heat Dissipation
04.04
33-538 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
33 Heat Dissipation
Notes
34-539 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Connection Conditions
34.1 Secondary electrical conditions
The controller is tested for compliance with the ambient conditions specifiedbelow. Trouble-free operation is only ensured if:
these ambient conditions are maintained when storing, transporting andoperating the equipment.
original components and spare parts are used. This applies in particular tothe use of specified cables and plug connectors.
the equipment has been correctly mounted/installed.
The equipment may not commissioned until it has been clearly identified thatthe machine in which the controller is installed, is in full conformance with thespecifications in EC Directive 98/37/EC.
References: /EMV/, Planning Guide
The connection conditions must be carefully maintained for the completesystem. Please contact your local Siemens office or representative for anyassistance.
Note
Please refer to the documentation for the respective operator components forinformation on deviations to the standard connection conditions.
Compliance withthe connectionconditions
Additionalinformation
Assistance andsupport
34
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-540 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
34.1.1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Relevant standards: EN 50081–1 and –2, EN 55011, EN 55022, EN 61800–3
Table 34-1 Limit values, radio interference suppression in industrial environments
Limit value in accordance with
Cable-borne interference suppression Limit value class A
Radio interference Limit value class A
If compliance with limit value class B (residential areas) is required, please con-tact your local Siemens office or representative.
Notice
The user must consider radio interference suppression for the completeinstallation. Particular attention should be paid to cables. Please contact yourlocal Siemens office or representative for assistance and support.
Relevant standards: EN 50178, EN 61000–3–2 and –3–3,EN 61000–6–2, EN 61000–4–2, –3, –4, –5, –6, –8 and –11EN 61800–3
Tested phenomena:
Static discharge
Radio frequency radiation
Cable-borne interference (burst)
Surge voltages
Cables subject to HF radiation
Magnetic fields with electrical power frequencies
Voltage dips and interruptions
Voltage fluctuations and flicker
Harmonic currents
RI suppression
Noise immunityand low-frequencyphenomena
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-541 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
34.1.2 Power supply
The AC power supply is only required for external equipment and accessoriesand is not included in the standard scope of delivery.
Table 34-2 Requirements of AC power supply
Rated voltage 230 V AC
Tolerance
Frequency
Ramp-up time at power-on
–20 %, +10 % (184 V to 253 V)
50/60 Hz 10 %
Any
Harmonic content According to EN 50178 10 %
Transient voltage dips
Voltage interruptions at rated voltage andcurrent
Restoration time
Events per hour
3 ms
10 s
10
Warning
The DC supply is always referenced to ground and may not be generatedby an auto-transformer.
To ensure protective separation of the end user interface, the DC powersupply must be implemented with protective separation according toEN 50178. Refer to Subsection 34.1.3.
In the case of supply cables > 10 m, protective elements must be fitted atthe device input in order to protect against lightning (surge voltage).
The DC supply voltage must be connected to the ground/shield of the NCfor EMC and/or functional reasons. For EMC reasons, this connectionshould only be made at one point. As a rule, the connection is provided asstandard in the S7-300 I/Os. If this is not the case in exceptionalcircumstances, the ground connection should be made to the grounding railof the NC cabinet; also refer to /EMC/ EMC Design Guideline.
Requirements ofAC power supply
Requirements ofDC power supplies
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-542 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 34-3 Requirements of the DC supply
Rated voltage according to IEC 61131-2
Voltage range (average value)
Voltage ripple at rated voltage andcurrent peak-to-peak
Ramp-up time at power-on
24 V DC
20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC
5 % (unfiltered 6-pulse rectification)
Any
Harmonic content According to EN 50178 10 %
Non-periodic overvoltages Value
Duration of overvoltage
Restoration time
Events per hour
35 V
500 ms
50 s
10
Transient voltage dips Duration of voltage dips
Restoration time
Events per hour
5 ms
10 s
10
34.1.3 Protective separation acc. to EN 50178
The complete system includes end user interfaces (EUI) and interfaces for ser-vicing, startup and maintenance.
End user interfaces are interfaces freely accessible to the machine operator, i.e.tools or other equipment is not required. The end user interfaces are imple-mented with protective separation in accordance with EN 50178.
Warning
The interfaces for servicing/installation and start-up/maintenance purposes areprovided without protective separation.
If necessary, these interfaces can be isolated safely using a supplementaryadapter (insulation voltage 230 V AC). These adapters are not included in theSiemens scope of delivery. You can buy these parts from your local dealer whowill help you to make the proper choice.
Warning
Protective separation can only be achieved if the system configurationspecified below is strictly adhered to. When mounting additional components(e.g. S7-300 FM, IP) with an end user interface, please make sure that the enduser interface has a basic insulation for at least 230 V AC.
User interfaces (UI)
Interfaces forservicing, startupand maintenance
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-543 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Basic insulation Protective separation
M (GND)
3 x 400 V AC
MP
Housing/shield
840D / 611 digital
1
2
3
4
10
44
5
6
11
S7-300 I/Os
MSTT/MCPPCU
9
24 V
8
Person
M (GND)
7
10
11
Terminalblock
11
ÎÎÎMachine
5
4
HHU/ HT 6
Distribution box
Fig. 34-1 Protective separation acc. to EN 50178
Fig. 34-1 shows the various electrical potentials of the 840D/611D/S7-300 sys-tem. Legend:
1. Isolated power supply to SIMODRIVE electronics with 230 V AC basic in-sulation
2. Floating transistor triggers for the three-phase rectifier bridge with 230 V ACbasic insulation
3. Floating transistor triggers for each axis of the three-phase inverter bridgewith 230 V AC basic insulation
4. Floating signal connections from the NC to the PCU or HHU with 230 V ACbasic insulation.
5. Non-floating signal line between NC and I/O devices.
6. Non-floating end user interface with protective separation for 230 V ACthrough interfaces 1 to 4 and 7.
7. Protective separation of 5 V DC power supply provided from a24 V DC supply.
8. 24 V DC power supply unit for external devices and for the machine adapta-tion control according to applicable standards in the form of a PELV circuit(Protective Extra Low Voltage).
9. Floating interfaces to the machine (not accessible to the end user).
10. Floating signal interfaces directly accessible to the end user (e.g. V.24).Make sure that there is either protective separation with respect to the linesupply voltage or that there are two basic insulation levels, for 230 V ACeach, for these interfaces.
11. 5 V DC power supply with basic insulation, fed from a 24 V DC supply.
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-544 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
34.1.4 Grounding concept
The grounding concept is described below using a SINUMERIK 840D as anexample. The 840D system consists of a number of individual components,each of which must comply with EMC and the appropriate safety standards. Theindividual system components are:
NCU box
Machine control panel MCP
Keyboard
Operator panels (operator panel front + PCU)
NCU terminal block
Distributor box and handheld unit
S7-300 I/O with IM 361 interface module
Single I/O module (EFP)
The NCU box is a 50 mm wide cassette that is integrated into the infeed/regen-erative feedback (I/RF) unit, FD and MSD.
The individual modules are attached to a metal cabinet panel by means ofscrews. Make sure that near the screws a low-impedance contact of the NCUbox with the cabinet wall can be made. Insulating paints at the contact pointmust be removed.The electronic grounding points of the modules are interconnected via the de-vice and drive bus and at the same time conducted to the X131 terminal of theI/RF module.
The ground and module ground M should be connected at the power supplyterminal of the IM 361. Further, for the EFP, “SHIELD” and “M24” must be con-nected in connector X1.
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-545 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Operator panelfront
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
PA/SL PA/SL
Powerelectronics
Machine bed
Grounding bar
Ground terminal
PA/SLM (GND)
G
PA
Gatingelectronics
NCU
SL in the motor cable
Machine
control panel
S7-300 I/Os/EFP
PA
MB
MB: Shielded signal cable with reference ground
PA: Equipotential bonding conductorS: Mains connection
M: MotorG: Encoder
– Ground (frame) –
PCU
PA/SL
Terminalblock
PA/SL
Distributorbox
Cross sections 10 mm2
S SL, min.
MB
S16S/2SL: Protective conductor
S 1616 S 35S 35
Fig. 34-2 Grounding concept
Reference: /EMC/ EMC Configuring Guidelines
34.1.5 RI suppression measures
In addition to the protective grounding of system components, specialprecautions must be taken to guarantee safe, interference-free operation of thesystem. These measures include shielded signal cables, special equipotentialbonding and grounding conductors.
To ensure safe, interference-free operation of the installation, it is essential touse the cables specified in the individual diagrams.
For digital signal transmission, the shield must have a conductive connection atboth sides of the housing.
Exception:
Standard shielded cables grounded on only one side can be used fordevices from other manufacturers (printers, programming devices, etc.).
These external devices (e.g. not from Siemens) may not be connected tothe control during normal operation. However, if the system cannot beoperated without them, then the cable shields must be connected at bothends. Furthermore, the external device must be connected to the control viaan equipotential bonding cable.
Shieldedsignal cables
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-546 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Definition:
Signal cables (e.g.)
– Data cables (MPI, sensor cables, etc.)
– Binary inputs and outputs
– Emergency Stop cables
Load cables (e.g.)
– Low-voltage supply cables (230 V AC, +24 V DC etc.)
– Supply cables to contactors (primary and secondary circuit)
Reference: /EMC/ EMC Configuring Guidelines
In order to achieve the best possible noise immunity of the complete system(control, power module, machine), the following EMC measures must becarefully observed:
Signal cables and load cables must be routed at the greatest possibledistance from one another.
If necessary, signal and load cables may cross one another (if possible, atan angle of 90°), but must never be laid close or parallel to one another.
Only cables offered by the NC manufacturer should be used as signalcables from and to the NC or PLC.
Signal cables may not be routed close to strong external magnetic fields(e.g. motors and transformers).
Pulse-carrying HC/HV cables must always be laid completely separatelyfrom all other cables.
If signal cables cannot be routed a sufficient distance away from othercables, then they must be installed in grounded cable ducts (metal).
The clearance (surface through which interference can be coupled-in)between the following cables must be kept to a minimum:
– Signal cable and signal cable (twisted)
– Signal cable and associated equipotential bonding conductor
– Equipotential bonding conductor and PE conductor (routed together)
Note
For more information about interference suppression measures and connectionof shielded cables, see Reference: /EMC/ EMC Configuring Guidelines
Cable definitions
Rules for routingcables
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-547 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
34.1.6 Pin assignment for interfaces
The pins of the component interfaces are generally assigned as specified in thetables below. Any deviations are indicated at the relevant point.
Signal type I: InputO: OutputB: Bidirectional (inputs/outputs)V: Supply voltage–: Ground (reference potential) or N.C. (not connected)
Parallel interface on the PCU 50/70 for connecting a printer, for example
Table 34-4 Assignment for the parallel interface LPT1
Maleconnector
Pin Name Type Remarks
1 Strobe (CLK)O
Open Collector
1 142–9 Data bits 0, ..., 7
OTTL level
1 1410
ACK(ACKNOWLEDGE)
11 BUSY I kΩ Pull Up12 PE (PAPER END)
I kΩ Pull Up
13 SELECT
14 AUTO FEED O Open Collector
15 Error I kΩ Pull Up
2516 INIT
O Open Collector13 25 17 SELECT IN
O Open Collector
18–25 GND – Ground (reference potential)
Serial interface on PCU 20/50/70/HT 6
Table 34-5 Assignment for the serial interface COM1 (PLC/RS-232-C/modem)
Maleconnector
Pin Name Type Meaning
1 – – Shield
2 TxD (D1) O Serial transmitted data
1 143 RxD (D2) I Serial received data
144 RTS (S2) O Request To Send
5 CTS (M2)I
Clear To Send
6 DSR (M1)I
Data Set Ready
7 GND (E2) – Ground (reference potential)
8 DCD (M5) I Receive signal level (carrier)
9–19 N.C. – Not assigned
20 DTR (S1) O Data Terminal Ready
13 25 21 N.C. – Not assigned13
22 RI (M3) I Incoming call
23–25 N.C. – Not assigned
Parallel interfaceLPT1
Serial interfaceCOM1
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-548 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Serial interface on PCU 20 / 50 / 70 / HT 6
Table 34-6 Assignment for the serial interface COM2 (RS-232-C/mouse)
Maleconnector
Pin Name Type Meaning
1 DCD (M5)I
Receive signal level (carrier)
2 RxD (D2)I
Serial received data
5 93 TxD (D1)
OSerial transmitted data
5 9 4 DTR (S1)O
Data Terminal Ready
5 GND (E2) – Ground (reference potential)
1 66 DSR (M1) I Data Set Ready
1 67 RTS (S2) O Request To Send
8 CTS (M2)I
Clear To Send
9 RI (M3)I
Incoming call
Table 34-7 Assignment for the PS/2 interfaces (keyboard/mouse interface)
Connector (viewof socket)
Pin Name Type Meaning
1 Keyboard_dataI
Keyboard data cable
2 Mouse_dataI
Mouse data cable
56 3 GNDV
Ground (reference potential)
34 4 P5V_fusedV
+5 V (protected)
12 5 Keyboard_CLKB
Keyboard clock line
6 Mouse_CLKB
Mouse clock line
Table 34-8 Assignment of the USB-A interface
Connector (viewof socket)
Pin Name Type Meaning
4 1USB_P5V_fused
V +5 V (protected)
32 USB_D0M Data–, USB channel 0
2 3 USB_D0P B Data+, USB channel 0
1 4 USB_GND V Ground (reference potential)
Serial interfaceCOM2
PS/2 interfaces
USB-A interface
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-549 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 34-9 Assignment for the MPI/DP interface
Pin Name Type Meaning
1,2 N.C. – Not assigned
3 LTG_B B Signal line B of the MPI module
4 RTS_AS IControl signal for receive data stream. Signal 1 ac-tive if directly connected interface module is send-ing.
5 M5EXT OReturn line (GND) of 5 V supply. Current load from aload of 90 mA max. connected between P5EXT andM5EXT.
6 P5EXT V 5 V supply (current load see M5EXT)
7 N.C. – Not assigned
8 LTG_A B Signal line A of MPI module
9 RTS_PG ORTS signal from MPI module;Signal is “1” if PG is sending
Shield – On connector housing
Table 34-10 Assignment for the Ethernet RJ45 interface
Pin Name Type Meaning
1 TxD+O Transmitted data
2 TxD–O Transmitted data
3 RxD+ I Received data
4,5 GND –– (terminated internally with 75 Ω; not required fordata transmission)
6 RD– I Received data
7,8 GND–
– (terminated internally with 75 Ω; not required fordata transmission)
Shield On connector housing
Table 34-11 Assignments of VGA interface
Pin Name Type Meaning
1 R Red
2 G O Green
3 B Blue
4 N.C.–
Not assigned
5 – 8 GND–
System ground (reference potential)
9 5 V V +5 V (protected)
10 GND–
System ground (reference potential)
11 N.C.–
Not assigned
12 DDC_DAT B DDC data line
13 EXT_HO
Horizontal synchronization
14 EXT_VO
Vertical synchronization
15 DDC_CLK B DDC clock line
MPI/DP interface
Ethernet RJ45interface
VGA interface
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-550 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
D-STN and TFT displays with 5V CMOS interface and VGA resolution (640x480pixels) can be connected to this interface. Max. cable length: 50cm.
Table 34-12 Assignment for the display interface (CMOS)
Pin Name (DSTN) Meaning (DSTN) Name (TFT) Meaning (TFT)
1,2 P5V_D_fused+ 5 V (fused)Display VCC
P5V_D_fused+5 V (protected)VCC display
3 GND – GND –
4 CLK Shift clock CLK Shift clock
5 GND – GND –
6 LP Horiz. sync HSYNC Horiz.sync
7 FP Vert. sync VSYNC Vert.sync
8 – – R0 Red bit 0 (LSB)
9 – – R1 Signal Red bit 1
10 UD6 Upper data bit 6 R2
g
Red bit 2
11 GND – GND –
12 UD7 Upper data bit 7 R3 Red bit 3
13 UD2 Upper data bit 2 R4 Signal Red bit 4
14 UD3 Upper data bit 3 R5
g
Red bit 5 (MSB)
15 GND – GND –
16 UD1 Upper data bit 1 G0
Si l
Green bit 0(LSB)
17 UD0 Upper data bit 0 G1 Signal Green bit 1
18 LD3 Lower data bit 3 G2 Green bit 2
19 GND – GND –
20 LD2 Lower data bit 2 G3 Green bit 3
21 LD1 Lower data bit 1 G4Signal
Green bit 4
22 LD0 Lower data bit 0 G5
SignalGreen bit 5(MSB)
23 GND – GND –
24 UD5 Upper data bit 5 B0 Blue bit 0 (LSB)
25 UD4 Upper data bit 4 B1 Signal Blue bit 1
26 LD7 Lower data bit 7 B2
g
Blue bit 2
27 GND – GND –
28 LD6 Lower data bit 6 B3 Blue bit 3
29 LD5 Lower data bit 5 B4 Signal Blue bit 4
30 LD4 Lower data bit 4 B5
g
Blue bit 5 (MSB)
31 VCON Contrast voltage – –
32 M (GND) Data enable ENAB Data enable
33 DispOn Display ON DispOn Display ON
34 Res. Reserved Res. Reserved
CMOS displayinterface
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-551 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
All signals required for connecting operator panel fronts, with the exception ofthe display interface, are assigned to this interface.
Associated interface cable: K1
Connector type: 2 x 13-pin plug connector
Table 34-13 Assignment for the IO/USB interface
Pin Name Type Meaning
1 GNDV
Ground
2 P12VV
+power supply for backlight inverter
3 BL_ON O Backlight ON
4 P5V_fused V +5 V VCC (fused in A&D PC)
5 GND – Ground
6 P3V3_fused V + 3.3 V VCC (fused in A&D PC)
7 – 10 N.C. – Not assigned
11 P5V_fused V +5V VCC (fused in A&D PC)
12 USB_D1MB
USB data– Channel 1
13 USB_D1PB
USB data+ Channel 1
14 GND V Ground
15 LCD_SEL0 0
16 LCD_SEL1Display type select signal
1
17 LCD_SEL2 IDisplay type select signal
2
18 LCD_SEL3 3
19 RESET_N Reset signal (low active)
20–23 N.C. – Not assigned
24 TEMP_ERR OLED temperature sensor; anode with 1 kΩin series on the board
25, 26 N.C. – Not assigned
Used to connect operator panel fronts with TFT displays with 640 x 480 pixels(VGA), 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) or 1024x768 pixels (XGA).
Associated interface cable: K2, max. length: 0.5 m
Connector type: 2 x 10-pin plug connector
Table 34-14 Assignment of LVDS display interface
Pin Name Type Meaning
1, 2 P5V_D_fused V+ 5 V display supply voltage (fused in A&D PC)
3 RXIN0–I LVDS input signal
Bit 0 (–)
4 RXIN0+I LVDS input signal
Bit 0 (+)
5, 6 P3V3_D_fused V+ 3.3 V display supply voltage (fused in A&D PC)
7 RXIN1–I LVDS input signal
Bit 1 (–)
8 RXIN1–I LVDS input signal
Bit 1 (+)
9, 10 GND –System ground (reference poten-tial)
IO/USB interface
LVDS displayinterfaceChannel 1
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-552 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 34-14 Assignment of LVDS display interface
MeaningTypeNamePin
11 RXIN2–I LVDS input signal
Bit 2 (–)
12 RXIN2+I LVDS input signal
Bit 2 (+)
13, 14 GND –System ground (reference poten-tial)
15 RXCLKIN–O LVDS clock signal
(–)
16 RXCLKIN+O LVDS clock signal
(+)
17, 18 GND–
System ground (reference poten-tial)
19, 20 N.C. Not assigned
Used for expanding the LVDS display interface channel 1 to control TFT dis-plays with 1280 x 1024 pixels (SXGA).
Associated interface cable: K3Connector type: 2 x 10-pin plug connector
Table 34-15 Assignment of LVDS display interface
Pin Name Type Meaning
1, 2 GND V Ground
3 RXIN10–I LVDS input signal
Bit 0 (–)
4 RXIN10+I LVDS input signal
Bit 0 (+)
5, 6 GND V Ground
7 RXIN1–I LVDS input signal
Bit 1 (–)
8 RXIN1–I LVDS input signal
Bit 1 (+)
9, 10 GND –System ground (reference poten-tial)
11 RXIN2–I LVDS input signal
Bit 2 (–)
12 RXIN2+I LVDS input signal
Bit 2 (+)
13, 14 GND – System ground (reference potential)
15 RXCLKIN–O
LVDS cycle clock signal (–)
16 RXCLKIN+O
LVDS cycle clock signal (+)
17, 18 GND System ground (reference potential)
19, 20 N.C.–
Not assigned
Table 34-16 Assignment of the Compact Flash interface
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1 GND – 30 IDE_D14I/O
2 IDE_D3 31 IDE_D15I/O
3 IDE_D4 32 IDE_XCS1 O
4 IDE_D5 I/O 33 N.C. –
5 IDE_D6 34 IDE_XIORO
6 IDE_D7 35 IDE_XIOWO
LVDS displayinterfaceChannel 2
Compact Flashinterface
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-553 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Table 34-16 Assignment of the Compact Flash interface
TypeNamePinTypeNamePin
7 IDE_XCS0 O 36 P3V3 V
8 – 12 GND – 37 IDE_XIRQ O
13 P3V3 V 38 P3V3 V
14 – 17 GND – 39 XCSEL O
18 IDE_A2 40 N.C. –
19 IDE_A1 O 41 IDE_XRST O
20 IDE_A0 42 IDE_XIORDY I
21 IDE_D0 43 N.C. –
22 IDE_D1 I/O 44 P3V3 V
23 IDE_D2 45 IDE_XLED
24 IDE_XIOCS16 46 IDE_PDIAG
25 IDE_XCD2 I 47 IDE_D8 I/O
26 IDE_XCD1 48 IDE_D9
27 IDE_D11 49 IDE_D10
28 IDE_D12 I/O 50 GND –
29 IDE_D13
Table 34-17 Assignments of the power supply interface
Pin Name Type Meaning
1 SHIELD – Shield potential
2 M24V
Ground 24 V
3 P24V
24 V DC potential
Power supplyinterface
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions
34-554 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
34.1.7 Handling membrane connectors
When replacing parts it can sometimes be necessary to disconnect membraneconnectors from the boards and reconnect them again.
This should be done as follows:
Clamping frameof socket
Fig. 34-3 Releasing (left) and attaching (right) a membrane connector
1. Loosen the dark clamping frame of the socket by pushing it up with the fin-gernails until it engages in its upper, unlocked position (Fig. 34-3 left).
2. Carefully pull off the membrane connector upward.
1. With the clamping frame in the upper position, carefully plug the membraneconnector into the socket.
2. Lock it in place by pushing down the clamping frame (see Figure 34-3,right).
Releasing amembraneconnector
Connecting amembraneconnector
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions
34-555 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
34.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions
Vibration stressing: EN 60068–2–6Shock stressing: EN 60068–2–27Climate: EN 60068–2–1/EN 60068–2–2/EN 60068–2–14
EN 60068–2–30/EN 60068–2–31/EN 60068–2–32/EN 60068–2–33/EN 60068–2–34
Long-term storage: EN 60721–3–1Transport: EN 60721–3–2Stationary operation: EN 60721–3–3
Table 34-18 Mechanical ambient conditions
Requirement criteria Values
Vibration stressing Frequency range
Constant deflection
Acceleration amplitude See technical data of theShock stressing Acceleration
See technical data of therelevant component
Duration of nominal shock
Number of nominal shocks
34.2.1 Transport and storage conditions
The following specifications apply to components in transport packaging:
Table 34-19 Climatic conditions for storage and transport
Temperature range See technical data of the relevant component
Relative atmospherichumidity
Annual average 10 ... 75%
Up to 30 days annually 95%
Temperature rate ofchange
Within one hour < 18 K
Atmospheric pressure The specified values apply toa transportation altitude of upto 3000 m above sea level
70 to 106 kPa
Test standards
Requirementstandards
Components inoriginal packaging
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions
34-556 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Backup batteries must only be transported in the original packaging. No specialapproval is needed for transporting backup batteries. The lithium content isapproximately 300 mg.
Note: The backup battery is classified as a hazardous substance, Class 9 inaccordance with the relevant air-freight transportation regulations.
Relevant standards: DIN EN 60086
Warning
Incorrect handling of backup batteries can lead to a risk of ignition, explosionand combustion.
The following regulations according to DIN EN 60086 must be adhered to:
Backup batteries
may not be charged
may not be heated or thrown into fires
may not be pierced or crushed
must not be tampered with mechanically or electrically in any way!
The PCU hard disk unit is provided with shock absorbers. However, thefollowing rules must be observed when handling this unit.
Caution
The hard disk unit
should always be transported in its original packaging
should not be thrown or dropped
should not be dismantled from the mechanical components with which itwas supplied
should not be handled by its springs
Transportingbackup batteries
Rules for handlingbackup batteries
Rules for handlinghard disks
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions
34-557 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
34.2.2 Operating conditions
If the specified values cannot be maintained, a heat exchanger or an airconditioning unit must be provided.
Table 34-20 Climatic ambient conditions
Temperature range See technical data of the relevant component
Permissible change inrelative air humidity EN 60721–3–3, class 3K5
Within 1 minute max. 0.1 %
Moisture condensation,water spray and theformation of ice
Not permissible
Temperature rate ofchange
Within one hour max. 10 K
Atmospheric pressure When operated at analtitude of 2,000 m abovesea level. For higheraltitudes, the upper limittemperature must bereduced by 3.5 °C/500 m.
820 kPa to 1060 kPa
Table 34-21 Function-impairing gases
Sulfur dioxide (SO2) Concentration 10 cm3/m3
Temperature 25 °C 2 °C
Relative humidity 60 %
Hydrogen sulfide (H2S) Severity 1 cm3/m3
Temperature 25 °C 2 °C
Relative humidity 60 %
When working in areas where there is an unacceptably high dust hazard, thecontrol must be operated in a cabinet with a heat exchanger or in a cabinet witha suitable air intake.
Maximum permissible dust contents in the air circulating in the cabinet:
– Suspended solids 0.2 mg/m3
– Deposits 1.5 mg/m2/h
Climatic ambientconditions
Function-impairinggases
Function-impairing dust
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.3 MPI/OPI network rules
34-558 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
34.3 MPI/OPI network rules
The following devices can be interconnected across the MPI bus:
NCU/CCU
PCU
HT 6
HHU
MSTT/MCP
The MPI interconnecting cables are available in different lengths.
When installing a network, observe the following basic rules:
1. The MPI connection can be routed from one user to the next by plugging theMPI connector of the outgoing cable onto the MPI connector of the incomingcable.
2. The bus line must be terminated at both ends. To do this, enable the termi-nating resistor in the MPI connector of the first and last node and disable theremaining terminating resistors (see Fig. 34-4).
Note
Only two inserted terminating resistors are permitted.
In the case of the HHU/HT 6, bus terminating resistors are permanentlyintegrated in the device.
3. At least one terminator must be supplied with 5 V voltage.For this, the MPI connector with inserted terminating resistor must be con-nected to a powered device.
Note
The connection at the NC control system can be used for this purpose.
4. Drop cables (feeder cable from bus segment to node) should be as short aspossible.
Note
Drop cables that are not used should be removed.
5. Each MPI node must first be connected and then enabled.When disconnecting the MPI node, first deactivate the connection, thenremove the connector.
6. A maximum of two of the HHU and HT 6 components can be connected foreach bus segment.
Application
Networkinstallations
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.3 MPI/OPI network rules
34-559 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
It is also possible to use two identical components provided they have differ-ent station addresses.Setting the addresses (see also the section on the correspondingcomponents):
– HHU: Via DIP switch or display (see “Handheld unit” section),
– For HT 6, by adapting the address before commissioning (refer to Chap-ter “Handheld Terminal HT 6”).
No bus terminating resistors may be inserted at the distributor boxes of anHHU or HT 6 (refer to the note on item 2.)
If required, more than one HHU/HT 6 can be connected to a bus segmentusing intermediate repeaters.
7. The following cables lengths for MPI or OPI for standard use without re-peater may not be exceeded:
MPI (187.5 kbaud): Max. total cable length is 1000 m
OPI (1.5 Mbaud): Max. total cable length is 200 m.
ON
Terminating resistor
OFF ON
ON
46 46
55
Fig. 34-4 MPI connector
References: /Z/, Accessories and Equipment for Special-PurposeMachines
34 Connection Conditions
04.0434.3 MPI/OPI network rules
34-560 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
34 Connection Conditions
Notes
A-561 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Abbreviations
Motor Drive Side
Application Specific IC
Advanced Technology
Basic Input Output System
Communications Bus
Compact Disk ROM
Communication Module
Central Processing Unit
Cathode Ray Tube
Dual In–Line Package
Direct Key Module
Dynamic RAM
Single I/O Module
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Function Block
Function Unit
Function Module
Global Data
Ground
Handheld Unit
Human Interface Device
Human Machine Interface: Operator function of SINUMERIK for operation, pro-gramming and simulation. The meaning of HMI is identical with MMC.
Height Unit
Input/Output
Integrated Circuit
AS
ASIC
AT
BIOS
C Bus
CDROM
COM
CPU
CRT
DIP
DKM
DRAM
EFP
EMC
FB
FBG
FM
GD
GND
HHU
HID
HMI
HU
I/O
IC
A
04.04
A-562 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Integrated Drive Electronics
Industry Standard Architecture (AT standard)
Liquid Crystal Display
Light Emitting Diode
Line Print Terminal
Machine Control Panel
Motion Control Unit, digital single–axis/positioning control
Multifunction Keyboard II
Modulator–demodulator
Multi–Point Interface
Not Connected
Numeric Control
Numerical Control Unit
Non Maskable Interrupt
Operator Panel Front
Operator Panel Interface
Peripherals Bus
Push Button Panel
Personal Computer
PC Extended Technology
PC Memory Card International Association
PC Unit
Protective Extra Low Voltage
I/Os
Programming device
Programming device interface
Programmable Logic Control (component of the NC)
Push Button Panel
Personal System/2
Random Access Memory
Read Only Memory
Interface standard in accordance with CCITT RS–232–C
IDE
ISA
LCD
LED
LPT
MCP
MCU
MFII
Modem
MPI
N.C.
NC
NCU
NMI
OP
OPI
P bus
PBP
PC
PC/XT
PCMCIA
PCU
PELV
PER
PG
PG interface
PLC
PP
PS/2
RAM
ROM
RS–232–C
A Abbreviations
04.04
A-563 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Small Computer System Interface (parallel interface for up to 7 simultaneousdevices)
Single in Line Module
Serial I/O controller, Siemens PROFIBUS Controller
Super Twisted Nematic (flat screen technology)
Super VGA (screen resolution 800 x 600, 16 million colors)
Thin Film Transistor (flat screen technology)
Unit Operator Panel
Universal Serial Bus
Video Graphics Adapter (screen resolution 640 x 480, 16 colors)
Watch Dog
Extended VGA (screen resolution 1024 x 768)
SCSI
SIM
SPC
STN
SVGA
TFT
UOP
USB
VGA
WD
XGA
A Abbreviations
04.04
A-564 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
A Abbreviations
Notes
B-565 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
References
General Documentation
SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE, Automation Systems for Machine Tools Catalog NC 60Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-B1-7600
Industrial Communication and Field DevicesCatalog IK PIOrder No.: E86060-K6710-A101-B2-7600
SIMATICProducts for Totally Integrated Automation and Micro AutomationCatalog ST 70Order No.: E86060-K4670-A111-A8-7600
MOTION-CONNECTCable, Connectors & System Components for SIMATIC, SINUMERIK, Masterdrives and SIMOTIONCatalog NC ZOrder No.: E86060-K4490-A001-B1-7600
Saftey Integrated Application ManualThe saftey program for industries of the worldOrder No.: 6ZB5000-0AA02-0BA0
Electronic Documentation
The SINUMERIK System (03.04 Edition)DOC ON CD (includes all SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802D/802SC and SIMODRIVEpublications)Order No.: 6FC5298-7CA00-0BG0
/BU/
/IKPI/
/ST7/
/Z/
/CD1/
B
04.04
B-566 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
User Documentation
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.99 Edition)Short Guide AutoTurn OperationOrder No.: 6FC5298-4AA30-0BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.02 Edition)Operator’s Guide AutoTurn Graphic Programming SystemProgramming/SetupOrder No.: 6FC5298-4AA40-0BP3
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (10.00 Edition)Operator’s Guide MMC Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA00-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Operator’s Guide HMI Advanced Order No.: 6FC5298-6AF00-0BP3
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Operator’s Guide HT 6Order No.: 6FC5298-0AD60-0BP3
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (02.01 Edition)Short Guide OperationOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AA10-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.02 Edition)Operation/Programming ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD00-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.03 Edition)Operation/Programming ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD10-0BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (06.03 Edition)Operation/Programming ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition)Operator’s Guide HMI EmbeddedOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AC00-0BP3
/AUK/
/AUP/
/BA/
/BAD/
/BAH/
/BAK/
/BAM/
/BAS/
/BAT/
/BEM/
B References
04.04
B-567 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)User’s Guide Measuring CyclesOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AA70-0BP3
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (04.03 Edition)Motion Control Information System (MCIS)User’s Guide Tool Data InformationOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AE01-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.02 Edition)Operator’s Guide CAD Reader Order No.: (included in online help)
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Diagnostics GuideOrder No.: 6FC5298-7AA20-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.01 Edition)Short Guide ManualTurnOrder No.: 6FC5298-5AD40-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.01 Edition)Short Guide ShopMillOrder No.: 6FC5298-5AD30-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (07.01 Edition)Short Guide ShopTurnOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AF20-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Programming Guide FundamentalsOrder No.: 6FC5298-7AB00-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Programming Guide Advanced Order No.: 6FC5298-7AB10-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)List Manual System VariablesOrder No.: 6FC5298-7AE10-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Short Guide ProgrammingOrder No.: 6FC5298-7AB30-0BP0
/BNM/
/BTDI/
/CAD/
/DA/
/KAM/
/KAS/
/KAT/
/PG/
/PGA/
/PGA1/
/PGK/
B References
04.04
B-568 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)Programming Guide ISO MillingOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AC20-0BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)Programming Guide ISO TurningOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AC10-0BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Programming Guide CyclesOrder No.: 6FC5298-7AB40-0BP0
PCIN 4.4Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC ModuleOrder No.: 6FX2060 4AA00-4XB0 (English, French, German)Order from: WK Fürth
SINUMERIK 840Di (02.01 Edition)System Overview Order No.: 6FC5298-6AE40-0BP0
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)SIMODRIVE 611DLists Order No.: 6FC5297-7AB70-0BP0
SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES VC/MC (10.03 Edition)Planning Guide General Information for Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC62-0BP0
SIMODRIVE 611 (10.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1PH2 Asynchronous MotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC63-0BP0
SIMODRIVE 611 (10.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1PH4 Asynchronous MotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC64-0BP0
/PGM/
/PGT/
/PGZ/
/PI/
/SYI/
a) Lists
/LIS/
b) Hardware
/ASAL/
/APH2/
/APH4/
B References
04.04
B-569 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
MASTERDRIVES MC (04.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1PH7 Asynchronous MotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC66-0BP0
SIMODRIVE 611 (01.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1PH7 Asynchronous MotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC65-0BP0
MASTERDRIVES VC/MC (01.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1PL6 Asynchronous MotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC67-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.03 Edition) Operator Components ManualOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AA50-0BP3
SIMODRIVE Sensor (03.03 Edition)User’s Guide (HW) Absolute Position Sensor with PROFIBUS DPOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB10-0YP2
SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE (06.99 Edition)Planning Guide (HW) EMC Installation GuideOrder No.: 6FC5297-0AD30-0BP1
The current Declaration of Conformity is available under the following Internetaddress:http://www4.ad.siemens.de
Please enter the ID No.: 15257461 in the ’Search’ field (top right) and click on’go’.
SINUMERIK/SIMOTION (02.03 Edition)ADI4 – Analog Drive Interface for 4 AxesManual Order No.: 6FC5297-0BA01-0BP1
SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC (05.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1FK6 Three-Phase AC ServomotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD05-0BP0
SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC (01.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1FK7 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD06-0BP0
MASTERDRIVES MC (04.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1FS6 Three-Phase AC ServomotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD08-0BP1
/APH7M/
/APH7S/
/APL6/
/BH/
/BHA/
/EMV/
/GHA/
/PFK6/
/PFK7/
/PFS6/
B References
04.04
B-570 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1FT5 Three-Phase AC ServomotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD01-0BP0
SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC (01.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1FT6 Three-Phase AC ServomotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD02-0BP0
SINAMICS, MASTERDRIVES (09.03 Edition)MICROMASTER SIEMOSYN-MOTORS 1FU8 Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC80-0BP0
SINUMERIK 810D (11.02 Edition)Configuring Manual CCU (HW)Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD10-0BP1
SINUMERIK 840D (11.03 Edition)Configuring Manual NCU (HW)Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC10-0BP3
SIMODRIVE 611 / SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES MC (01.04 Edition)Planning Guide Three-Phase AC ServomotorsGeneral PartOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD07-0BP1
SIMODRIVE 611 ,MASTERDRIVES VC/MC (06.04 Edition)Planning Guide Asynchronous MotorsContent: General Part, 1PH2, 1PH4, 1PH7, 1PL6Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC61-0BP0
SIMODRIVE (03.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1FE1 Built-In Synchronous Motors Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle DrivesOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC00-0BP5
SIMODRIVE (12.02 Edition)Installation Guide 1FE1 051.–1FE1 147. Built-In Synchronous Motors Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle DrivesOrder No.: 610.43000.02
/PFT5/
/PFT6/
/PFU/
/PHC/
/PHD/
/PJAL/
/PJAS/
/PJFE/
/PJF1/
B References
04.04
B-571 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SIMODRIVE (06.02 Edition)Planning Guide 1FN1, 1FN3 Linear Motors ALL General Information about Linear Motors1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear MotorCON ConnectionsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB70-0BP4
SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC (06.04 Edition)Planning Guide Synchronous ServomotorsContent: General Part, 1FT5, 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7, 1FS6Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC20-0BP0
SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1FW6 Integrated Torque Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD00-0BP1
SIMODRIVE 611 (02.03 Edition)Planning Guide InvertersOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AA00-0BP6
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES (03.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1FW3 Complete Torque MotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC70-0BP0
SIMODRIVE Sensor (07.02 Edition)Configuring/Installation Guide (HW) Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG HOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP1
/PMH2/ SIMODRIVE Sensor (03.04 Edition)Configuring/Installation Guide (HW) Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H2Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB31-0BP0
/PMHS/ SIMODRIVE (12.00 Edition)Installation Guide Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives SIZAG2 Toothed-Wheel EncoderOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB00-0YP3
SIMODRIVE (03.04 Edition)Planning Guide ECO Motor Spindle for Main Spindle DrivesOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD04-0BP1
/PJLM/
/PJM2/
/PJTM/
/PJU/
/PKTM/
/PMH/
/PMS/
B References
04.04
B-572 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SIMODRIVE (12.01 Edition)Planning Guide 1PH2, 1PH4, 1PH7 Motors AC Induction Motors for Main Spindle DrivesOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC60-0BP0
SIMODRIVE (11.01 Edition)Planning Guide Hollow-Shaft Motors for 1PM4 and 1PM6 Main Spindle DrivesOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD03-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1)(the various sections are listed below)Order No.: 6FC5297-7AC20-0BP0
A2 Various Interface SignalsA3 Axis Monitoring, Protection ZonesB1 Continuous-Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look AheadB2 AccelerationD1 Diagnostic ToolsD2 Interactive ProgrammingF1 Travel to Fixed StopG2 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Value Systems, Closed-Loop
ControlH2 Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLCK1 Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation ModeK2 Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Actual Value System for
Workpiece, External Zero OffsetK4 CommunicationN2 EMERGENCY STOPP1 Transverse AxesP3 Basic PLC ProgramR1 Reference Point ApproachS1 SpindlesV1 FeedsW1 Tool Offset
/PPH/
/PPM/
c) Software
/FB1/
B References
04.04
B-573 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2) (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions Extended Functions (Part 2)including FM-NC: Turning, Stepper Motor(the various sections are listed below)Order No.: 6FC5297-7AC30-0BP0A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/OsB3 Several Operator Panels and NCUsB4 Operation via PG/PCF3 Remote DiagnosticsH1 JOG with/without HandwheelK3 CompensationsK5 Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement L1 FM-NC Local BusM1 Kinematic TransformationM5 MeasurementN3 Software Cams, Position Switching SignalsN4 Punching and NibblingP2 Positioning AxesP5 OscillationR2 Rotary AxesS3 Synchronous SpindlesS5 Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3)S6 Stepper Motor ControlS7 Memory ConfigurationT1 Indexing AxesW3 Tool ChangeW4 Grinding
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2) (03.04 Edition) Description of Functions Special Functions (Part 3)(the various sections are listed below)Order No.: 6FC5297-7AC80-0BP0F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis TransformationG1 Gantry AxesG3 Cycle TimesK6 Contour Tunnel MonitoringM3 Coupled Motion and Leading Value CouplingS8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless GrindingS9 Setpoint Exchange (S9)T3 Tangential ControlTE0 Installation and Activation of Compile CyclesTE1 Clearance ControlTE2 Analog AxisTE3 Master-Slave for DrivesTE4 Transformation Package HandlingTE5 Setpoint ExchangeTE6 MCS CouplingTE7 Retrace SupportTE8 Path-Synchronous Switch SignalV2 PreprocessingW5 3D Tool Radius Compensation
/FB2/
/FB3/
B References
04.04
B-574 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions Drive Functions (the various sections are listed below)Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA80-1BP1DB1 Operational Messages/Alarm ReactionsDD1 Diagnostic FunctionsDD2 Speed Control LoopDE1 Extended Drive FunctionsDF1 Enable CommandsDG1 Encoder ParameterizationDL1 Linear Motor MD DM1 Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and
Controller DataDS1 Current Control LoopDÜ1 Monitors/Limitations
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (02.00 Edition)Description of Functions ANA MODULEOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB80-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D (07.99 Edition)Description of Functions DigitizingOrder No.: 6FC5297-4AC50-0BP0DI1 Start-upDI2 Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan)DI3 Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser)DI4 Milling Program Generation (scancad mill)
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (09.03 Edition)Motion Control Information System (MCIS)DNC NC Program Management Order No.: 6FC5297-1AE81-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.03 Edition)Motion Control Information System (MCIS)Description of Functions DNC NC Program ManagementOrder No.: 6FC5297-1AE80-0BP0
DN1 DNC Plant / DNC CellDN2 DNC IFC SINUMERIK, NC Data Transfer via Network
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)Description of Functions ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE10-0BP3
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions Remote Diagnosis Order No.: 6FC5297-0AF00-0BP3FE1 Remote Diagnosis ReachOutFE3 Remote Diagnosis pcAnywhere
/FBA/
/FBAN/
/FBD/
/FBDM/
/FBDN/
/FBFA/
/FBFE/
B References
04.04
B-575 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)HMI Configuring PackageOrder No.: (supplied with the software)
Part 1 User’s GuidePart 2 Description of Functions
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.03 Edition)HMI Configuring PackageProTool/Pro Option SINUMERIKOrder No.: (supplied with the software)
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (10.03 Edition)Description of Functions HLA ModuleOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB60-0BP3
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.03 Edition)Motion Control Information System (MCIS)Description of Functions TDI Ident ConnectionOrder No.: 6FC5297-1AE60-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.02 Edition)Description of Functions ManualTurnOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AD50-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.01 Edition)Description of Functions Configuring OP 030 Operator Interface(the various sections are listed below)Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC40-0BP0BA Operator’s GuideEU Development Environment (Configuring Package)PSE Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface(IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration)
SINUMERIK 840D (03.96 Edition)Description of Functions C-PLC ProgrammingOrder No.: 6FC5297-3AB60-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (01.04 Edition)Description of Functions Computer Link (SinCOM) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD61-0BP0NFL Host Computer InterfaceNPL PLC/NCK Interface
SINUMERIK 840D / SIMODRIVE (11.03 Edition)Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety IntegratedOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AB80-0BP2
/FBH/
/FBH1/
/FBHL/
/FBIC/
/FBMA/
/FBO/
/FBP/
/FBR/
/FBSI/
B References
04.04
B-576 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.03 Edition)Description of Functions ShopMillOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AD80-0BP2
SIMATIC (01.01 Edition)Description of Functions FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEPOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AA70-0YP4
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions Synchronized Actions Order No.: 6FC5297-7AD40-0BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions ShopTurnOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AD70-0BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (01.02 Edition)IT SolutionsDescription of Functions Tool Data Communication SinTDCOrder No.: 6FC5297-5AF30-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.01 Edition)IT SolutionsDescription of Functions Tool Information System (SinTDI) with Online Help Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE00-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (01.03 Edition)Motion Control Information System (MCIS)Description of Functions TPM Total Productive MaintenanceOrder No.: Document is supplied with the software
SIMODRIVE 611 universal/universal E (07.03 Edition)Description of Functions Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control and PositioningOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB20-0BP8
SIMODRIVE 611 universal (04.02 Edition)Installation Guide (enclosed with SIMODRIVE 611 universal)
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (11.02 Edition)Description of Functions Tool Management Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC60-0BP1
/FBSP/
/FBST/
/FBSY/
/FBT/
/FBTC/
/FBTD/
/FBTP/
/FBU/
/FBU2/
/FBW/
B References
04.04
B-577 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.02 Edition)Manual @EventOrder No.: 6AU1900-0CL20-0BA0
SINUMERIK 840Di (09.03 Edition)Manual SINUMERIK 840DIOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AE60-0BP2
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.03 Edition)System Description Commissioning Tool SINUMERIK SinuCOM NC Order No.: (an integral part of the online help for the start-up tool)
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)List Manual System VariablesOrder No.: 6FC5297-7AE10-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.01 Edition)Description of Functions Configuring Package HMI Embedded Software Update, Configuration InstallationOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AE10-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.03 Edition)Planning Guide Configuring SyntaxThis publication is included with the software and available as a pdf file
SIMODRIVE POSMO A (08.03 Edition)User’s Guide Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DPOrder No.: 6SN2197-0AA00-0BP6
SIMODRIVE POSMO A (05.03 Edition)Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO A)
SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA (07.03 Edition)User’s Guide Distributed Servo Drive SystemsOrder No.: 6SN2197-0AA20-0BP5
SIMODRIVE POSMO SI (04.02 Edition)Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO SI)
SIMODRIVE POSMO CD/CA (04.02 Edition)Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO CD/CA)
/HBA/
/HBI/
/INC/
/PGA1/
/PJE/
/PS/
/POS1/
/POS2/
/POS3/
/POS4/
/POS5/
B References
04.04
B-578 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SIMATIC S7–300 (2002 Edition)Manual: Technological FunctionsOrder No.: 6ES7398-8AA03-8BA0– Reference manual: CPU Data (Hardware)– Reference manual: Module data
SIMATIC S7–300 (03.97 Edition)Manual STEP 7, Fundamentals, V. 3.1Order No.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BA0
SIMATIC S7–300 (03.97 Edition)Manual STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1Order No.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BR0
SIMATIC S7–300 (04.02 Edition)FM 353 Positioning Module for Stepper DriveOrder together with configuring package
SIMATIC S7–300 (04.02 Edition)FM 354 Positioning Module for Servo DriveOrder together with configuring package
SIMATIC S7–300 (01.03 Edition)FM 357-2 Multimodule for Servo and Stepper DrivesOrder together with configuring package
SIMODRIVE 611–A/611–DSimoPro 3.1Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives Order No.: 6SC6111-6PC00-0BA Order from: WK Fürth
/S7H/
/S7HT/
/S7HR/
/S7S/
/S7L/
/S7M/
/SP/
B References
04.04
B-579 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
SIMODRIVE 611 analog (10.00 Edition)Description Start-Up Software for Main Spindle and Asynchronous Motor Modules Version 3.20Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA30-0BP1
SIMODRIVE 611A (10.00 Edition)Installation and Start-Up Guide Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA60-0BP6
SINUMERIK 810D (11.02 Edition)Installation and Start-Up Guide (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software)Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD20-0BP1
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 (03.04 Edition)Installation and Start-Up Guide (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611 digital start-up software)Order No.: 6FC5297-7AB10-0BP0
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Installation and Start-Up Guide HMIOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AE20-0BP3AE1 Updates/SupplementsBE1 Expanding the Operator InterfaceHE1 Online HelpIM2 Starting up HMI EmbeddedIM4 Starting up HMI Advanced TX1 Creating Foreign Language Texts
d) Installation andStart-Up
/BS/
/IAA/
/IAC/
/IAD/
/IAM/
B References
04.04
B-580 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
B References
Notes
Index-581 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Index
Symbols“Milling” MCP, 10-164
Numbers15” TFT, System features, 9-11515” TFT
Communication, 9-115, 10-155Description, 10-156Description of Functions, 9-116Function blocks, 9-116Heat dissipation, 9-152, 10-178Interface, 9-120, 10-158Mechanical design, 9-134, 10-162Mounting, 9-140, 10-169Operator panel front, 9-113, 9-115, 9-117,
10-153, 10-155, 10-156Overview, 9-114, 10-154Spare parts, 9-148, 10-174System features, 10-155Technical data, 9-147, 10-172
19” machine control panel, 26-48324 V power supply, 13-204, 14-231, 15-245,
20-345, 26-491
AAC power supply, 34-541Actuation field, 4-55, 6-79, 8-104Alpha key group, 1-22, 3-44, 3-45, 4-54, 4-55,
6-79, 8-104Alt key, 1-23Ambient conditions, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234Anti-rotation element, 13-224Area switchover, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 6-79, 7-94,
8-104Key, 1-22
AT module, 13-226AT/PCI specification, 13-225Atmospheric pressure, 34-557
BBacklight inverter, 1-28, 2-40, 4-64, 5-74, 6-87,
7-100, 8-111
Backlighting, 1-28, 1-30, 2-40, 4-64, 5-74, 6-87,7-100, 8-111
Backspace key, 1-23Backup battery, 13-217, 13-221, 13-222, 14-238
Rules, 34-556Transportation, 34-556
BatteryChange, 13-221Clip, 13-221Connector, 13-228Plug, 13-221Voltage, 13-221
BIOSParameters, 13-209Settings, 13-209, 13-221Setup, 13-211, 13-212
Blank film, 1-29Blank labels, 1-25Board retainer, 13-222, 13-228Boot manager, 13-208, 13-209Boot Sequence, 13-211Boot sequence, 13-212Booting, 14-236
CCable, clamp, 1-30Cable connector, 2-37, 4-58Cable set, 23-415Cap for the USB port, 1-28, 2-40, 3-52, 4-64,
5-74, 6-87, 7-100, 8-111Cardbus, 13-215Casing cover screws, 13-220Casing screws, 1-29, 1-30Central operator panel front, 15-254Changing the
Battery, 13-221BIOS settings, 13-211Device fan, 13-220
Changing the power supply, 13-218Chip extractor, 23-406Clamping elements, 1-21Clearance, 1-26, 3-50, 4-59, 5-72, 6-83, 8-108,
12-197, 13-207, 14-234Climatic ambient conditions, 34-555, 34-557Climatic conditions, 34-555Closure cap, 6-87, 8-111
C
04.04
Index-582 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
CMOS interface, 12-191CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C/310, 28-501,
29-509Color display, 1-21, 6-77COM1, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231
Interface, 34-547COM1/RS-232, 13-204, 14-231COM2, 13-204, 14-231
Interface, 34-548Components, 5-74Connecting, 26-491
Lead, 12-198, 13-208, 14-235Plate, 13-228
Connecting theHandheld unit, 18-310Power supply, 13-208
Connecting the handheld programming unit, 17-293
Connection, 20-345Conditions, 34-539Mini HHU connection kit, 19-335Mini HHU handwheel signals, 19-335
Connection for handheld units, 24-438Contact change, 24-469Contact problems, 13-226Control, panel, 13-224Control cabinet, 6-87Control cabinet., 15-256Control elements, 24-444Control key group, 1-22, 3-44, 3-45, 4-54, 4-55,
6-79, 8-104Control parameters, 1-29, 4-65, 5-75, 6-89Convection surface area, 9-152, 10-178Cover plate, 11-183, 11-186, 11-188, 13-204,
14-231, 15-256Ctrl key, 1-23Cursor down key, 1-23Cursor key group, 1-22, 3-44, 3-45, 4-54, 4-55,
6-79, 8-104Cursor keys, 13-212Cursor left key, 1-23Cursor right key, 1-23Cursor up key, 1-23Customer keys, 21-352Customer operator panel
Bus address, 25-481Digital I/Os, 25-477Interfaces, 25-475Jumpering, 25-480LEDs, 25-479MPI interface, 25-475, 25-476Power supply interface, 25-476Receipt cycle time, 25-481Transmission cycle time, 25-481
Customized keys, 20-340
DData memory, 26-483DC supply, 34-541DC/DC converter, 26-484Decimal point, 1-22, 3-45, 4-55, 6-79, 8-104Degree of, protection, 1-21, 1-25, 2-33, 2-36,
3-43, 4-53, 4-60, 5-67, 5-70, 6-82, 7-93, 7-96,8-103, 8-106
Delete key, 1-23Description, of interfaces, 16-269Description of control elements
Axis selection switch, 19-332Enabling button, 19-332Function keys, 19-332Handwheel, 19-332Rapid traverse button, 19-332Traversing keys, 19-332
Design for, industrial use, 12-198, 13-208, 14-235Device fan, 13-205, 13-219, 13-220, 15-253,
15-257Cable, 13-220Connection, 13-222
Dial, 23-415Dimension drawing, for mounting TP 015A, 6-83DIMM, 14-239DIN-A4 film, 1-26, 4-62DIP switch S2, 15-252, 15-253Direct control key, module, 4-64, 6-87, 8-111Direct control key connection, 1-30Direct control key submodule, 6-82, 6-83, 6-87,
11-180Direct control keys, 4-53, 8-103, 11-180
Vertical, 11-180Direction keys, 20-340, 21-352, 26-485Disconnecting the, handheld unit, 18-310Disconnecting the handheld programming
unit, 17-293Disk A, 13-209Dismantling, 15-255Display
Cable K2, 1-24, 1-30, 2-35, 2-37, 3-47, 3-48,4-56, 4-57, 4-58, 5-69, 5-70, 6-81, 6-82,7-95, 7-96, 8-105, 8-106, 11-183
Holder, 1-28Interface, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81,
7-95, 8-105Interface (LVDS), 34-550, 34-551, 34-552Setting, 14-234, 15-251Support, 1-30Support plate, 1-30, 4-57, 6-82, 8-106, 11-183Switch S1, 15-257Type, 15-251, 15-257
Distributed Installation, 5-67, 6-77, 15-245Distribution box, interface, 18-313Distributor box, 34-544Drive holder, 13-218
C Index
04.04
Index-583 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Drive connection, 14-238Dust, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234
Function-impairing, 34-557
EEFP, 34-544Electrical isolation, 26-483Electromagnetic compatibility, 34-540Electrostatic discharge, 1-29, 2-40, 4-65, 5-75,
6-89, 7-100, 8-112Embedded operating system, 12-191EMC, 34-540EMC noise immunity, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69,
6-81, 7-95, 8-105EMERGENCY STOP, 9-115, 9-117, 10-155,
18-310, 19-332, 20-340, 21-352, 23-405,23-406, 23-407, 23-415, 24-423, 26-485,26-486
End key, 1-23Enter key, 1-23Esc-key, 1-23Escape key, 13-212Etc. key, 1-22, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 6-79, 7-94, 8-104Ethernet, 12-191, 12-193, 13-202, 13-204,
14-229, 14-231Interface, 34-549
Exit menu, 13-212Expanding, the memory, 14-239Expansion board, 13-204, 13-223, 13-225,
13-228, 14-231, 14-238Extender, 13-227External floppy disk drive, 13-205, 14-232, 14-238External keyboard, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69,
6-81, 7-95, 8-105External monitor, 13-204, 14-231
FF10 key, 1-23F11 key, 1-23F12 key, 1-23F2 key, 13-212F9 key, 1-23Fan, 13-228, 14-232
Connection, 13-222Feed
Control, 20-340, 21-352, 26-485Override switch, 23-405
Film, 1-28, 4-62Film for softkey labels, 1-26Film labels, 1-31Fire protection, 12-191, 12-197Firmware, 11-180Flat mounting, 15-253, 15-256Floppy check, 13-209
Floppy disk drive, 1-21, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 7-93,12-191, 13-205, 14-232, 31-521Dimension drawing, 31-521Dimension drawing of blanking plate, 31-523Front view, 31-521Function, 31-521Mounting, 31-523Mounting dimension drawing, 31-523Power supply interface, 31-522Rear view, 31-522Side view, 31-521Technical data, 31-524Top view, 31-522USB INT, 13-223, 32-525
Floppy disk drive with USB interface, Front view, 32-528
FrontPanel, 4-64, 5-74, 7-100, 8-111, 9-136, 10-165Panel cutout, 30-518Plate, 13-204, 14-231
Front panel, 6-87Function-impairing dust, 34-557Function-impairing gases, 34-557
GGases, Function-impairing, 34-557Ground terminal, 13-205, 14-232Grounding concept, 34-544Guide rail, 13-227, 13-228
HHandheld programming unit
Cable interface, 17-279Connecting and disconnecting during opera-
tion, 17-290Distribution box, 17-283Distribution box for 3-core enabling, 17-283Distribution box for 4-core enabling, 17-286Function blocks, 17-276Input signals, 17-294Interface signals, 17-294Output signals, 17-295Parameterizing basic PLC program, 17-296RS232 (V.24) interface, 17-280Technical data, 17-297
Handheld terminal, 17-275Handheld unit, 18-305
ASCII code, 18-323Block diagram, 18-307Changing labeling strip, 18-306Connecting and disconnecting during opera-
tion, 18-308Control elements, 18-312Digital display, 18-321
C Index
04.04
Index-584 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
DIP switch, 18-316Distribution box, 18-325Distributor box, connection, 18-307Enabling buttons, 18-313GD parameters, 18-317Handwheel, 18-313Input image, 18-319Interface signals, 18-318Keyswitch, 18-313, 18-319LED, 18-313Magnetic clamp, 18-306Operating and display elements, 18-305Operating more than one, 18-311Output image, 18-320Override switch, 18-313PLC module, 18-318Rotary selector settings, 18-319Signal chart, 18-322Spare parts, 18-329, 19-337Technical data, 18-314User interface, 18-318
Hard disk, 1-26, 13-208, 14-235, 15-256Connection, 13-217Drive, 13-203, 13-217, 13-218Holder, 13-217Use, 14-230
Hardware clock, 13-221Hardware reset, 12-195, 13-205, 14-232Heat, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234Heat dissipation, 6-83, 15-253, 33-535Hinge bolts, 15-254HMI Advanced, 13-224Hollow rivet, 13-220Home key, 1-23Hotkey group, 1-22Hotkeys, 1-21, 3-44Housing cover, 13-203, 14-230HT 6
Connecting cable, 17-280PC card interface, 17-281PS/2 keyboard interface, 17-282Threaded bushes, 17-279User interface, 17-277
Humidity, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234
II/O / USB cable K1, 1-30, 2-37, 3-48, 4-57, 4-58,
5-70, 6-82, 7-96, 8-106, 11-183I/O devices, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81,
7-95, 8-105, 12-198, 13-208, 14-235I/O USB cable K1, 1-24, 1-30, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56,
5-69, 6-81, 7-95, 8-105I/RF module, 34-544IAM, 13-224Inclined position, 12-197, 13-207, 14-235Individual wiring, 24-443
Industrial, use, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81,7-95, 8-105
Initialization, 24-462Input key, 13-209, 13-212Insert key, 1-23Interconnecting cables, 13-208, 14-235Interface, 9-118, 9-120, 10-156, 10-158
Assignments, 15-250Interface, 24-457Interfaces, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81, 7-95,
8-105, 11-180, 13-202, 14-229, 15-249,16-269, 24-426
IO USB cable, 13-205, 14-233IO/USB interface, 34-551ISA, module, 13-227
KK1, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81, 7-95, 8-105K2, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81, 7-95, 8-105Key cap, 23-405Key functions, 1-23Key symbols, 18-306Keyboard, 13-204, 13-208, 14-231, 14-235,
15-252, 26-484Controller, 1-28, 1-29, 2-40, 4-64, 4-65, 5-74,
5-75, 6-87, 7-100, 8-111Keyboard connection, 12-193Keyboard controller, 1-30, 6-87, 6-89Keyswitch, 20-340, 21-352, 23-406, 23-415,
26-485, 26-486Knurled screws, 4-58
LLAN, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Laser printer, 1-26, 4-62LCD, unit, 6-87LCD unit, 1-28, 2-40, 4-64, 6-87, 7-100, 8-111LED, 12-191LEDs, 9-131, 20-340, 26-484, 26-486Line
Cable, 13-221Switch, 12-198, 13-208
Lithium battery, 13-221Local area network, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Locking, 13-224Low current USB, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81, 7-95, 8-105LPT mode, 13-212LPT1, 13-204, 14-231
Interface, 13-202, 14-229, 34-547Lugs, 1-31Lumotast, 23-415LVDS, 14-229LVDS interface, 12-191, 13-205, 14-233
C Index
04.04
Index-585 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
MM-version, 26-485Machine area key, 1-22, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 6-79,
7-94, 8-104Machine control panel, 9-117
24 V power supply, 20-345, 26-491Block diagram, 26-484Bus address, 20-347, 20-349, 21-362, 22-389,
26-493Configuring, 26-494Control elements, 20-340, 26-485, 26-486Dimension drawing, 26-489Function blocks, 26-483Interface parameters, 26-494Interfaces, 20-342, 21-354, 26-487Jumpering, 26-492Mounting, 26-489MPI connection, 20-345, 26-491Operator panel interface, 20-343, 26-488Power supply interface, 20-343, 21-356,
26-488Receipt cycle time, 26-493Receive cycle time, 20-347Technical data, 26-495Transmission cycle time, 20-346, 26-492
Machine control panel MCP 310, 22-381Machine control panel MCP 483C, 20-339,
21-351Machine key, 1-23Main board, 13-221Mains, switch, 14-236Malfunction, 13-226MCP, 9-135, 34-544Membrane connector, 1-30, 1-31Membrane keyboard, 1-21, 4-53, 6-77, 7-93,
8-103Memory
Configuration, 13-224, 13-225Expansion, 13-223, 14-238Module, 13-223, 14-239
Memory Cache, 13-209Menu, 13-209MF2 keyboard, 9-117Microcontroller, 26-483Milling machine, 26-485Mini DIN connector, 30-517Mini handheld unit
Axis selection switch, 19-334Circuit diagram, 19-333Coding of axis selection switch, 19-334Configuration, 19-334Connection, 19-335Control elements, 19-331Description of control elements, 19-332Dimensions, 19-331Dimensions of flange socket, 19-335sample connection, 19-333Technical data, 19-336
Monitor, 13-202, 14-229Motherboard, 13-218, 13-221Mounting, 1-21, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 5-67, 5-71,
6-82, 7-93, 7-97, 8-103, 8-108, 12-195,13-201, 13-205, 14-233, 14-234Bracket, 3-50, 4-57, 4-59, 5-72, 6-87, 8-108,
8-111, 9-145, 12-195, 15-254Bracket flat, 6-87Cut-out, 24-442Depth, 1-21, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 5-67, 7-93,
8-103Direction, 15-253Format, 1-21, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 5-67, 7-93,
8-103Panel, 1-25, 3-49, 4-61, 12-197PCU, 15-253Position, 12-197Screw, 15-255Slot, 15-257TCU, 16-270Videolink receiver, 15-260
Mounting hole, 6-82Mounting slot, 1-30, 4-57Mouse, 1-30, 4-54, 4-55, 4-64, 5-69, 6-79, 6-81,
6-87, 6-89, 8-104, 8-111, 13-204, 13-208,14-231, 14-235, 15-252Connection, 1-30
Mouse connector, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231MPI
Connection, 24-443Module, 34-549
MPI interface, 25-475MPI/DP, 13-204, 14-231
Interface, 13-202, 14-229, 34-549MPI/L2-DP, 12-193
Interface, 12-191MPI/OPI networking rules, 34-558Multi-Point-Interface, 12-193
NNatural convection, 9-152, 10-178NCU box, 34-544NCU terminal block, 34-544Noise immunity, 34-540Noise immunity of the complete system, 34-546Numerical key group, 1-22, 3-44, 3-45, 4-54,
4-55, 6-79, 8-104
OOEM agreement, 13-212, 13-225OP 010
Assembly with PCU 50, 1-26Dimensions, 1-27Front panel, 2-40Installation, 1-25
C Index
04.04
Index-586 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Interfaces, 1-24Mounting, 1-26Mounting hole, 1-25Power consumption, 1-27Preparation for mounting, 1-25Spare part replacement, 1-29Spare parts, 1-28Technical data, 1-27
OP 010CAssembly with PCU 50, 3-48Installation, 3-48Interfaces, 3-47Keyboard, 3-45Mounting, 3-49Preparation for mounting, 3-48Spare parts, 3-52Technical data, 3-51View, 3-44
OP 010S, 15-260, 16-270Installation, 2-36Interfaces, 2-35Mounting, 2-36Panel cutout, 2-33Spare part replacement, 2-40Spare parts list, 2-40Spare parts, 2-40Technical data, 2-39User interface, 2-34
OP 012, 6-82, 12-197Assembly with PCU 50, 4-57Installation, 4-57Interfaces, 4-56Keyboard, 4-55Mounting, 4-61Preparing for mounting, 4-60Softkey labeling, 4-62Spare part replacement, 4-65Spare parts list, 4-64Spare parts, 4-64Technical data, 4-63View, 4-54
OP 015Assembly with PCU 50, 7-96Assignments, 7-95Interfaces, 7-95Mounting, 7-96Preparation for mounting, 7-96Spare part replacement, 7-100Spare parts list, 7-100Spare parts, 7-100Technical data, 7-99User interface, 7-94
OP 015AAssembly with PCU 50, 8-106Interfaces, 8-105Keyboard, 8-104Mounting, 8-106Preparing for mounting, 8-106Softkey labeling, 8-109
Spare parts list, 8-111Spare parts, 8-111Technical data, 8-110View, 8-104
OP 032SCNC keyboard dimension drawing, 30-518CNC keyboard panel cutout, 30-518Control elements, 23-406Dimension drawing of machine control panel,
23-413Panel cutout of machine control panel, 23-413Power supply interface, 23-408
OperatingConditions, 34-557Modes, 20-340, 21-352System, 13-202
Operator panel, 9-115, 10-155, 15-245, 34-544Interface, 26-483
Operator panel front, 8-111, 12-197, 15-252Optional user keys, 23-405Order number, 1-28, 2-40, 3-52, 4-64, 5-74, 6-87,
7-100, 8-111, 13-217, 14-238Overall length, 13-226Override switch, 23-407, 23-415Overtemperature, 1-21
PPage down key, 1-23Page up key, 1-23Panel, cut-out, 1-26, 2-36, 3-49, 4-61, 5-71, 6-83,
7-97, 8-108Parallel interface, 13-204, 14-231PC card, 13-202, 13-204, 13-215, 14-229,
14-231, 14-236PC card connector, 12-193PC keyboard, standard, 13-202, 14-229PCI module, 13-226, 13-227PCI slot, 13-202, 13-204, 14-229, 14-231PCI/ISA slot, 13-204, 14-231PCU, 1-21, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 4-62, 6-85, 8-109,
9-116, 15-254Assembly, 6-82Assembly with OP 010, 1-26Assembly with OP 012, 4-57Connection, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69,
6-81, 7-95, 8-105Mounting, 2-37
PCU 20Accessories, 12-199Connections, 12-193Interfaces, 12-193Mounting, 12-197Technical data, 12-199View, 12-192
PCU 50, 1-21, 5-67, 6-77, 7-93, 8-103, 13-203Accessories, 13-223Assembly with OP 010C, 3-48
C Index
04.04
Index-587 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Assembly with OP 015, 7-96Connections, 13-204Interfaces, 13-204Mounting bracket, 13-223Mounting preparation, 13-206Notes on installation, 13-207Overview, 13-201Spare parts, 13-217Technical data, 13-216
PCU 70, 5-67, 6-77, 14-229Accessories, 14-238Expansion boards, 14-239Interfaces and connections, 14-231Mounting, 14-234Spare parts, 14-238Startup, 14-234System information, 14-239Technical data, 14-237
PELV, 34-543Plastic support, 13-228PLC interface, 24-460Plug connector, 13-205, 14-232POST Errors, 13-209Power
Consumption, 13-221Supply, 9-115, 10-155, 12-191, 12-198,
13-202, 13-204, 13-208, 13-217, 13-219,14-229, 14-231, 14-235, 14-238, 24-431,34-541
POWER LED, 1-22, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 5-68, 6-79,7-94, 8-104
Power supply, 1-21, 12-191Power supply cover, 13-203, 14-230PP 012
Circuits, 24-451COM interface, 24-418Communication parameters, 24-464Configuration, 24-470Connecting the 24V supply, 24-443Connections, 24-451Control elements, 24-423Design, 24-443Dimension drawing, 24-442Emergency button, 24-427Euchner male connector, 24-432Expansion, 24-446Function blocks, 24-420Global data table, 24-464Inputs/outputs, 24-418Interface operator panel, 24-419Interfaces, 24-418Labeling, 24-444Monitoring, 24-419Mounting, 24-443MPI/OPI interface, 24-418Operator Panel Interface, 24-431Panel cutout, 24-447PCB I/O, 24-448PG interface, 24-418
PLC input signals, 24-460PLC output signals, 24-461Power, 24-423Programming device interface, 24-432Project-specific components, 24-472Rating plates, 24-473Service information, 24-468System description, 24-417Technical data, 24-456Voltage supply, 24-418Wiring, 24-451
PP 031-MC, Direct control key connection,11-180
Press-fit nut, 30-518Primary Master, 13-209Primary Slave, 13-209Printer, 13-204, 14-231Processor, 13-201PROFIBUS, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Program, memory, 26-483Program key, 1-23Program Manager key, 1-23Protective
Cap, 1-25Earth, 23-408
Protective cap, USB interface, 6-82Protective cover, 1-30, 2-37, 3-48, 4-56, 4-57,
6-82, 6-90, 7-96, 8-105, 8-106, 13-204Protective extra low voltage, 34-543Protective separation, 34-542, 34-543PS/2, 12-193
Interface, 34-548Keyboard, 13-204, 14-231Keyboard interface, 12-191, 13-202, 14-229Mouse, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Mouse interface, 13-202, 14-229
Pushbutton panel, 11-180Pushbutton panel PP 012, 24-417
QQuick Boot Mode, 13-209QWERTY
Control elements, 28-503, 29-511Interfaces, 28-503, 29-511
QWERTY keyboard, 9-117
RRAFI, 23-415RAM, 13-202, 14-229RAM bank, 13-222, 13-223, 14-239Rating plate, 13-203Ready for
Modes, 26-485Operation, 12-198, 14-235
Recall, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 6-79, 7-94, 8-104
C Index
04.04
Index-588 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Key, 1-22Receive time frame, cyclic, 9-137Relative humidity, 18-314, 34-555, 34-557Repeater, 17-290, 18-311Replacing the, hard disk, 13-217Reset, 12-195, 13-205, 14-232, 20-340, 21-352,
26-485RESET button, 17-282Resolution, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 5-67, 6-77, 7-93,
8-103, 15-251Retaining screws, 1-31, 4-62, 6-85, 8-109RI suppression, 34-540RI suppression measures, 34-545Ribbon cable, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81,
7-95, 8-105, 13-217, 13-218RJ45 socket, 12-193Rotary, selector switch, 20-340, 26-486RS 485, 13-204, 14-231RTS signal, 34-549
SS7, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231S7-300, 34-544Safety, 12-199, 13-216, 14-237Screen resolution, 12-191, 13-202SDRAM, 13-223, 14-238, 14-239
Module, 13-223, 14-239Seal, 1-25, 2-36, 4-60, 5-70, 6-82, 7-96, 8-106Sealing area, 1-25, 3-49, 4-61Secondary conditions,, electrical, 34-539Secondary electrical conditions, 34-539Secondary Master, 13-209Secondary Slave, 13-209Select key, 1-23Selector switch, 24-424Serial interface, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Serial mouse, 13-204, 14-231Service menu, 13-209Settings, Machine control panel, 20-346, 26-492Setup menu, 13-212SETUP prompt, 13-209Shared PCI/ISA slot, 13-202, 14-229Shielded signal cables, 34-545Shift key, 1-21, 1-23, 3-43, 4-53, 8-103, 13-212Shipping lock, 1-26, 13-203, 13-218Shock stressing, 34-555Signal type, 7-95, 17-280, 17-282, 24-427,
34-547SIMATIC Manager STEP 7, 21-369, 22-394Single I/O module, 34-544Slide-in labels, 1-28, 1-29, 6-87Slot, 13-226, 13-228SO-DIMM module, 13-224Socket, 13-218Soft key, labeling strips, 11-183Softkey
Bar, 1-25
Labeling, 1-25, 1-28Labeling strips, 1-30, 4-57, 6-82, 8-106
Softkeys, 1-21, 3-43, 4-53, 8-103Vertical, 4-56, 6-81, 8-105
Spacebar, 1-23Spacer ring, 9-136, 10-165Spare parts, 1-28, 2-40, 3-52, 4-64, 7-100, 8-111Spindle control, 20-340, 21-352, 26-485Split rivet, 13-219, 13-220Startup, Guide, 13-224Status LED, 1-21, 1-22, 2-33, 2-34, 3-43, 3-44,
4-53, 4-54, 5-67, 5-68, 6-79, 7-93, 7-94,8-103, 8-104
STN slimline screen, 1-21Storage conditions, 34-555Sub D connector, 13-204, 14-231Sub-D socket, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Summary screen, 13-209Sunlight, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234Switch S2, 15-253, 15-257Switching states, 11-180System
Booting, 13-208, 13-224Parameters, 13-208
TT version, 26-485Tab key, 1-23Technical data
Videolink receiver, 15-263Videolink transmitter, 15-262
TEMP LED, 1-22, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 5-68, 6-79,7-94, 8-104
TemperatureChange, 34-555LED, 15-252Limiting values, 2-39Monitor, 15-252Monitoring, 26-483Threshold, 15-252
Tension, jacks, 1-25Tension jacks, 1-21, 1-25, 1-26, 1-28, 2-33, 2-36,
2-37, 2-40, 3-43, 3-48, 3-49, 3-52, 4-53, 4-60,4-61, 4-64, 5-67, 5-70, 5-71, 5-74, 6-78, 6-82,6-83, 6-87, 6-90, 7-93, 7-96, 7-97, 7-100,8-103, 8-106, 8-108, 8-111, 12-197, 26-491
Terminal block, 26-484Terminator, 24-438TFT
Display, 13-205, 14-233Slimline screen, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 7-93, 8-103
Thermal power loss, 6-91, 33-537Threaded
Bolt, 9-136, 10-165Hole, 30-518Screws, 1-25, 1-26, 2-37, 3-49, 4-61, 5-71,
6-83, 7-97, 8-108
C Index
04.04
Index-589 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
Tightening torque, 15-253Torque, 1-31, 1-26, 2-37, 3-49, 4-61, 5-71, 6-83,
7-97, 8-108Switch S1, 15-251, 15-253
Touch controller, 6-89Touch screen, 6-77TP 012
Assembly with PCU 50, 5-70Interfaces, 5-69Mounting, 5-70Operation, 5-67Preparing for mounting, 5-70Spare part replacement, 5-75Spare parts, 5-74Spare parts list, 5-74View, 5-68
TP 015ADegree of protection, 6-77Direct control keys, 6-77Interfaces, 6-81, 11-180Keyboard, 6-79Mounting, 6-77, 6-82Operation, 6-78Replacing spare parts, 6-89Scope of delivery, 6-78Shift key, 6-77Softkey labeling, 6-85Softkeys, 6-77Spare parts list, 6-87Status LED, 6-77Technical data, 6-86Tension jacks, 6-77View, 6-79
Trackball, 14-231Tracker ball, 4-55, 6-79, 8-104Transmit time frame, cyclic, 9-137Transport conditions, 34-555Turning, machine, 26-485
UUniversal Serial Bus, 12-193Uppercase characters, 1-21Upright mounting, 15-253, 15-257, 15-258USB, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231
Connection, 1-28, 2-40, 3-52, 5-74, 6-87,7-100, 8-111
Connector, 15-252Floppy disk drive, 14-238Front interface, 1-22, 1-24, 2-34, 2-35, 3-44,
3-47, 4-54, 4-56, 5-68, 5-69, 6-79, 6-81,7-94, 7-95, 8-104, 8-105
Interface, 1-21, 1-30, 1-31, 6-82, 6-87, 6-89,7-100, 12-191, 13-202, 14-229, 15-251,15-252, 34-548
Interface X 102, 15-253Interface X 106, 15-253Mouse, 4-64, 6-87, 8-111Sealing cap, 6-90Signal, 15-252
USB interface, 12-191Floppy disk drive, 32-525
USB module, 6-89USB socket, 12-193User keys, 26-485User main menu, 13-209User-specific functions, 1-25, 4-62, 6-85, 8-109
VVent slots, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234Ventilation, 12-197VGA, 13-204, 14-231
Interface, 13-202, 14-229, 34-549Resolution, 1-21
Vibration stressing, 34-555Videolink
Cable, 15-242, 15-245Receiver, 6-87, 8-111, 15-242, 15-245Transmitter, 6-87, 8-111, 9-139, 9-143,
15-242, 15-245, 15-251, 15-256Videolink receiver, 1-21, 1-26Virtual memory, 13-225Voltage monitoring, 26-483
WWatch dog, 26-483Windows NT, 13-202Windows XP, 13-202Working memory, 13-223, 14-239
XX1, 24-428X10 / X11, 24-430X11, 3-47, 4-56, 6-81, 8-105, 11-180X2, 24-428X3, 24-428X4, 24-429XGA, 12-191XT module, 13-226
C Index
04.04
Index-590 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition
C Index
Notes
From
Name
Company/Dept.
Address
Phone: /
Suggestions
Corrections
For Publication/Manual:
Manufacturer Documentation
Manual
Order No.: 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0Edition: 04.04
Should you come across any printingerrors when reading this publication,please notify us on this sheet.Suggestions for improvement are alsowelcome.
To SIEMENS AGA&D MC BMSP.O. Box 3180
D-91050 Erlangen, Germany(Phone: ++49-(0)180-5050-222 [Hotline] Fax: ++49-(0)9131-98-2176 [Documentation] Email: [email protected])
Fax: /
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810DOperator Components
Suggestions and/or corrections
User Documentation
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
SINUMERIK
Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Documentation (04.2004)
Brochure CatalogOrdering Info.NC 60 *)
Description ofFunctionsDrive Functions *)
Description ofFunctions-- Basic Machine *)-- Extended Functions-- Special Functions
611D840D/810D
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D
ApplicationManual
SafetyIntegratedApplicationManual
SafetyIntegrated
840D/840Di810D
-- Lists *)-- List Syst. Var.
Installation &Start-Up Guide *)-- 810D-- 840D/611D-- HMI
SINUMERIK
840D
Description ofFunctionsDigitizing
611D
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
Configuring KitHMI Embedded
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D
Description ofFunctionsSINUMERIKSafety Integrated
SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D611, Motors
SIMODRIVE
DOC ON CD *)The SINUMERIK System
General Documentation
Electronic Documentation
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/FM-NC
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D
User Documentation
DiagnosticsGuide *)
Operator’s Guide-- HT 6
AutoTurn-- Short Guide-- Programming/
Setup
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D
Program. Guide-- Short Guide-- Fundamentals *)-- Advanced *)-- Cycles-- Measuring Cycles-- ISO Turning/Milling
OperatorComponents(HW) *)
Description ofFunctionsSynchronizedActions
840D/810D
SINUMERIK
Operator’s Guide-- ManualTurn-- Short Guide ManualTurn-- ShopMill-- Short Guide ShopMill-- ShopTurn-- Short Guide ShopTurn
840D/810D
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
*) These documents are a minimum requirement
Operator’s Guide *)-- Short Guide-- HMI Embedded-- HMI Advanced
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D
Configuring(HW) *)-- 810D-- 840D
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
Description ofFunctionsOperator InterfaceOP 030
Description ofFunctionsTool Manage-ment
SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE
SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE
SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE
SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE
SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE
840D611D
840D611D
Description ofFunctionsLinear Motor
Description of Functions-- Hydraulics Module-- Analog Module
MOTIONCONTROLSYSTEMS
EMCGuidelines
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
Description ofFunctionsISO Dialects forSINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D
SINUMERIK
Manual(HW + Installationand Start-Up)
840Di
SINUMERIK
System Overview
840Di
840D/840Di/810D/
SINUMERIK
Description ofFunctionsRemote Diagnosis
840D/810D
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
MCIS-- Computer Link-- Tool Data Information System-- NC Data Management-- NC Data Transfer-- Tool Data Communication
SINUMERIK
Description ofFunctions-- ManualTurn-- ShopMill-- ShopTurn
840D/840Di/810D
SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/810D
Manual@ Event
© Siemens AG, 2004Subject to change without prior notice
Order No.: 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0
Printed in Germany
Siemens AG Automation & Drives Motion Control Systems P. O. Box 3180, D – 91050 Erlangen Germany www.siemens.com/motioncontrol